SECTION 11000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT …msdgc.org/cip/2005/downloads/detailedprov_vol3_5496.pdf · 2011. 9. 12. · S. S. No. 5496 11000-4 General Requirements for Equipment

S. S. No. 5496 11000-1 General Requirements for Equipment

SECTION 11000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies general requirements which are applicable to all mechanical equipment. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for ensuring that all mechanical equipment meets the requirements of this section in addition to the specific requirements of each individual equipment specification section. B. EQUIPMENT LISTS: Equipment lists, presented in these specifications and as specified on the drawings, are included for the convenience of the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR and are not complete listings of all equipment, devices and material required to be provided under this contract. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare his own material and equipment takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of this project manual. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARRANGEMENT: The arrangement of equipment shown on the drawings is based upon information available to the OWNER at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions conforming to a specific manufacturer. The drawings are, in part, diagrammatic, and some features of the illustrated equipment installation may require revision to meet actual submitted equipment installation requirements; these may vary significantly from manufacturer to manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall, in determining the cost of installation, include these differences as part of his bid proposal. Structural supports, foundations, connected piping, valves, and electrical conduit specified may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment actually provided. No additional payment shall be made for such revisions and alterations. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document cites other standards, such standards are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, has been discontinued or has been replaced.

Reference Title

ABMA Std 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ABMA Std 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

ANSI B1.1 Unified Screw Threads

ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 125

ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Log Screws

ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts

C. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY – NOT USED D. BALANCE: Unless specified otherwise, for all machines 10 HP and greater, all rotating elements in motors, pumps, blowers and centrifugal compressors shall be fully assembled, including coupling hubs, before being statically and dynamically balanced. All rotating elements shall be balanced to the following criteria:

NW16=e

Where:

e = imbalance, ounce-inches, maximum. W = Weight of the balanced assembly, pounds mass N = Maximum operational speed, rpm

Where specified, balancing reports, demonstrating compliance with this requirement, shall be submitted as product data.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS Flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this section shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Pipe threads shall conform in dimension and limits of size to ANSI B1.1, coarse thread series, Class 2 fit. Threaded flanges shall have a standard taper pipe thread conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. Unless otherwise specified, flanges shall be flat faced. Flange assembly bolts shall be heavy pattern, hexagonal head, machine bolts with heavy pattern, hot pressed, hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Threads shall be Unified Screw Threads, Standard Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A and 2B, ANSI B1.1. Materials shall comply with Section 15050. 2.02 BEARINGS Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. Each bearing shall be rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA Methods of Evaluating Load Ratings of Ball and Roller Bearings. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours. The rating life shall be determined using the maximum equipment operating speed. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, shall be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic alemite type. Oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient size to safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees C and shall be equipped with a filler pipe and an external level indicator gage. All bearings accessible to touch, and located within 7 feet measured vertically from floor or working level or within 15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, fixed ladders or other access structures, shall either incorporate bearing housings with sufficient cooling to maintain surface temperature at 65 degrees C or less for continuous operation at bearing rated load and a 50 degrees C ambient temperature or shall be provided with appropriate shielding shall be provided that will prevent inadvertent human contact. 2.03 V-BELT ASSEMBLIES Unless otherwise specified, V-belt assemblies shall be Dodge Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Dodge Taper-lock bushings, Wood's Ultra V-belts with matching Ultra-V sheaves and Wood's Sure-Grip bushings, or equal.


Sheaves and bushings shall be statically balanced. Additionally, sheaves and bushings which operate at a peripheral speed of more than 5500 feet per minute shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves shall be separately mounted on their bushings by means of three pull-up grub or cap tightening screws. Bushings shall be key seated to the drive shaft. Belts shall be selected for not less than 150 percent of rated driver horsepower and, where two sheaves sizes are specified, shall be capable of operating with either set of sheaves. Belts shall be of the antistatic type where explosion proof equipment is specified. 2.04 PUMP SHAFT SEALS A. GENERAL: Seals for water and wastewater pump shafts shall be either stuffing box or mechanical seals. For fluids other than water or municipal wastewater, the recommendations of the seal manufacturer shall be followed for selection of appropriate seals. Unless specified otherwise, stuffing boxes and mechanical seals shall conform to the requirements set forth in this paragraph. B. MECHANICAL SEALS: Where mechanical seals are specified, the seal shall be of a nondestructive (nonfretting) type requiring no wearing sleeve for the shaft. Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished with no reduction in size through the seal area. Mechanical seals shall be the split mechanical type, requiring no field assembly, other than assembly around the shaft and insertion into the pump. Metal parts shall be Type 316 or 316L stainless steel. Springs shall be Hastalloy C. Rotary faces shall be ceramic or silicon carbide. Stationary faces shall be ceramic carbon or silicon carbide. Elastomers shall be ethylene propylene or fluorocarbon. Mechanical seals shall be suitable for operation under full vacuum to 200 percent of the maximum specified operating pressure, but in any event not less than 200 psig. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals for pumping equipment shall be self-aligning, self-centering, single, Chesterton 442, or equal. Mechanical seals for all pumps (except lineshaft pumps where the seal barrier fluid is used for lineshaft bearing lubrication) shall be fitted with SpiralTrac Version F, N or D, as recommended by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada. Boxes for mechanical seals on pumps for contaminated water service (sludge, grit, wastewater, scum, reclaimed water, etc.) shall be drilled and tapped for connection of a clean water purge supply. C. SHAFT PACKING: Where shaft packing is specified, stuffing boxes shall be tapped to permit introduction of seal liquid and shall hold a minimum of five rows of packing. Stuffing boxes shall be face attached. Stuffing box and shaft shall be suitable for field installation, without machining or other


modifications, of the mechanical seal specified in paragraph 11000-2.04.B for the applicable pump and operating conditions. Unless otherwise specified, lantern rings shall be bronze or Teflon, packing shall be die-molded packing rings of non-asbestos material suitable for the intended service and as recommended by the manufacturer, and glands shall be bronze, two piece split construction. Lantern rings shall be of two-piece construction and shall be provided with tapped holes to facilitate removal. Lantern rings shall be drilled and tapped 1/4 NC-20. The impeller end of the packing on all but line shaft pumps with external source water lubricated bearings shall be fitted with a SpiralTrac, Version P packing protection system as manufactured by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada.

The section of each shaft or impeller hub that extends through or into the stuffing box shall be fitted with a replaceable stainless steel sleeve with a Brinell hardness of not less than 500. The sleeve shall be held to the shaft to prevent rotation and shall be gasketed to prevent leakage between the shaft and the sleeve. Minimum shaft sleeve thickness shall be 3/8 inch. 2.05 COUPLINGS Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment sections, equipment with a driver greater than 1/2 HP, and where the input shaft of a driven unit is directly connected to the output shaft of the driver, shall have its two shafts connected by a flexible coupling which can accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment and end float, and which cushions shock loads and dampens torsional vibrations. The flexible member shall consist of a tire with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber. The flexible member shall be attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws, and the flanges shall be attached to the stub shaft by means of taper lock bushings which shall give the equivalent of a shrunk-on fit. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the driver and the driven unit. Each coupling shall be sized and provided as recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service. Where torque or horsepower capacities of couplings of the foregoing type is exceeded, Thomas-Rex, Falk Steel Flex, or equal, couplings will be acceptable provided they are sized in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and sizing data are submitted. They shall be installed in conformance to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. 2.06 GUARDS Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards which meet all applicable OSHA requirements. Guards shall be fabricated of 14-gage steel, 1/2-13-15 expanded metal screen, unless otherwise specified, to provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard. Guards shall be galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise specified, and shall be designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. Reinforced holes shall be provided. Lube fittings shall be extended through guards.


2.07 CAUTION SIGNS Equipment with guarded moving parts which operates automatically or by remote control shall be identified by signs reading "CAUTION - AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT MAY START AT ANY TIME". Signs shall be constructed of fiberglass material, minimum 1/8 inch thick, rigid, suitable for post mounting. Letters shall be white on a red background. The sign size and pattern shall be as shown on the drawings. Signs shall be installed near guarded moving parts. 2.08 GAGE TAPS, TEST PLUGS AND GAGES Gage taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge sides of pumps, blowers and compressors. Pressure gages shall be provided where specified. Gage taps, test plugs, and gages shall be as specified in Divisions 13 and 15. 2.09 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be provided on each item of equipment and shall contain the specified equipment name or abbreviation and equipment number. Equipment nameplates shall be engraved or stamped stainless steel and fastened to the equipment in an accessible and visible location with stainless steel screws or drive pins. 2.10 LUBRICANTS The CONTRACTOR shall provide for each item of mechanical equipment a supply of the required lubricant adequate to last through the specified commissioning period. Lubricants shall be of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer and shall be products of the OWNER’s current lubricant supplier. The CONTRACTOR shall limit the various types of lubricants by consolidating them, with the equipment manufacturer's approval, into the least number of different types. Not less than 90 days before the date shown in his construction schedule for starting, testing and adjusting equipment (Section 01660), the CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with three copies of a list showing the required lubricants, after consolidation, for each item of mechanical equipment. The list shall show estimated quantity of lubricant needed for a full year's operation, assuming the equipment will be operating continuously. 2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts shall be designed for lateral forces for both pullout and shear in accordance with the provisions of Section 05501. Unless otherwise stated in the individual equipment specifications, anchor bolt materials shall conform to the provisions of Section 05501. 2.12 SPARE PARTS Spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections, shall be stored in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parts shall be tagged by project equipment number and identified by part number, equipment manufacturer, and subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts subject to deterioration, such as ferrous metal items and electrical


components, shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches high, or 3 feet in length shall be stored in a wooden box with a hinged wooden cover and locking hasp. Hinges shall be strap type. The box shall be painted and identified with stenciled lettering stating the name of the equipment, equipment numbers, and the words "spare parts." A neatly typed inventory of spare parts shall be taped to the underside of the cover. PART 3--EXECUTION Installation of equipment accessories included in this section shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification section.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 11002-1 Equipment Support, Grouting, and Installation

SECTION 11002 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, GROUTING AND INSTALLATION PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies minimum requirements for equipment supports, including concrete housekeeping pads, equipment bases, supports, anchorage, and accessories with weights greater than 200 pounds. If conflict exists between this section and requirements of individual equipment manufacturers, the more restrictive requirements shall prevail. Vibration isolation systems are specified in Section 11021. B. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all supports, anchorage, and mounting of all equipment, unless otherwise specified in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and industry standards requirements. Each piece of equipment shall be anchored to resist the greater of the maximum lateral and vertical forces required by the local governing code or by the manufacturer of the equipment, whichever is greater. This force shall be considered acting at the center of gravity of the piece under consideration. No equipment shall be anchored to vertical structural elements without written approval of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all elements required to resist the calculated forces described herein or required by the equipment manufacturer. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ANSI/HI 1.3.4 Centrifugal Pumps, Horizontal Baseplate Design

ANSI/HI 1.4 Centrifugal Pumps – Installation, Operation and Maintenance

ANSI/HI 2.4 Vertical Pumps – Installation, Operation and Maintenance

API RECOMMENDED PRACTICE 686

Recommended Practices for Machinery Installation and Installation Design

ASTM C531 Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.

ASTM C579 Compressive Strength of (Method/B) Chemical Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings.

ASTM C638 Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM C882 Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete

ASTM C884 Thermal Compatibility Between Concrete and an Epoxy-Resin Overlay

ASTM C1181 Creep of Concrete in Compression

ASTM D2471 Gel Time and Peak Exothermic Temperature of Reacting Thermosetting Resins

SSPC Society for Protective Coatings Specifications, Vol. 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the


specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Shop drawings for all equipment bases and anchorage details.

3. Machine and equipment base installation schedule with manufacturers’

anchor bolt torque requirements, as specified in paragraph 11002-2.01.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL All equipment shall be mounted on concrete housekeeping pads. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and drivers shall be rigidly mounted on a common cast iron or fabricated steel baseplate, unless otherwise specified, grouted into place on the housekeeping pads. Under no circumstances shall equipment supports be grouted directly to concrete slabs or floors. Bases for equipment shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise specified. Prior to initiating any installation efforts, the CONTRACTOR shall produce a machine base schedule containing the expected dates for setting anchor bolts, casting housekeeping pads, preparation of housekeeping pads for grouting, grouting, and final anchor bolt clamping for each item of equipment. The schedule shall list the equipment, by equipment number, and shall be accompanied by written verification of anchor bolt clamping torque from the equipment manufacturer. Installation practices shall follow the guidance presented in Chapters 4 and 5 of API Recommended Practice 686, unless superseded by more restrictive requirements of these specifications or manufacturer requirements. 2.02 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS Concrete housekeeping pads for equipment and floor penetrations shall be at least 2 inches larger in plan on all sides than the base and not less than 6 inches above the finished floor elevation, and shall be shaped to drain liquids away from the base. Housekeeping pad details shall follow the requirements set forth in Figure A-4 of API 686 unless superseded by more restrictive requirements of these specifications or the requirements of the equipment manufacturer. All conduits, piping connections, drains, etc. serving the equipment, shall be enclosed by the concrete housekeeping pad. Unless otherwise specified, no conduits, piping connections, drains, etc., will be accepted which rise directly from the floor.


2.03 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, mounting bases for equipment 20 horsepower and larger shall be a minimum of 1 inch thick. All bases shall have edges bearing on the grout surface rounded to a radius of not less than 2-inches to avoid producing stress risers on the grouted foundation. Grout pouring holes (minimum 4 inches in diameter) shall be provided in all bases and all bases shall have grout release holes. Except where vibration isolation systems are specified, all bases shall be grouted as specified in this section. Internal stiffeners shall be provided and shall be designed to allow free flow of grout from one section of the base to another. The minimum acceptable opening in cross-bracing and stiffeners shall be 2-inches high by 6-inches in length. All welds shall be continuous and free from skips, blow holes, laps and pockets.

Equipment bases for horizontal pumps shall conform to the requirements of this section, ANSI/HI 1.3.4, API 610 (paragraph 3.3), and shall provide common support for the pump and motor (and flywheel, if one is specified). In the event of conflict, the requirements of this section shall govern. Eight positioning jackscrews shall be provided for all drivers and flywheels (if specified) for all horizontal pump baseplates. All bases for horizontal pumps shall be equipped with jackscrews for positioning and leveling the base prior to grouting.

Mounting holes for anchor bolts in the bases, mounting blocks, or sole plates shall be drilled and not burned out and they shall not be open slots. All mounting studs shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. Anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. A nonseize or nongalling compound shall be used on all threads. Mounting pads for equipment shall be machined after all welding and stress relieving and shall be coplanar to 0.002 in. in all directions. Mounting pads shall extend not less than 1-inch on all sides beyond the position for the equipment. B. TYPE I BASES: Type I bases shall be structural steel bases with thickened steel pads for doweling, unless otherwise specified. The bases shall be rectangular in shape for equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases, which may be "T" or "L" shaped to accommodate the equipment drive and accessories. Perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Terminations requiring connections to the base shall be nuts welded to the bottom side of the base and plugged with cork, plastic plugs or grease, or acorn nuts. Grout holes shall be provided for the bases of all equipment where vibration isolation is not specified. C. TYPE II/III BASES: Type II and Type III bases, which are applicable for vibration isolation mounting, are specified in Section 11021.


D. TYPE IV BASES – NOT USED

E. SOLEPLATES – NOT USED

F. MOUNTING BLOCKS – NOT USED 2.04 GROUT FOR EQUIPMENT BASES A. EPOXY GROUT: Unless otherwise specified, grout for equipment bases shall be non-shrinking epoxy grout conform to the following requirements:

Test Result

ASTM C531 Shrinkage shall be less than 0.080% and thermal expansion less than 17 x 10-6 in/in/oF

ASTM C579 Strength shall be a minimum of 12,000 psi in 7 days when tested by method B, modified.

ASTM C882 Bond strength to Portland concrete shall be greater than 2000 PSI

ASTM C884 Epoxy grout shall pass the thermal compatibility test when overlayed on Portland cement concrete

ASTM D638 Tensile strength shall not be less than 1700 PSI. Modulus of elasticity shall not be less than 1.8 x 106 psi

ASTM C1181 Creep of the epoxy grout shall be less than 0.005 in/in with the test at 70oF and 140oF with a load of 400 psi

ASTM D2471 Peak exothermic temperature shall not exceed 110oF when a specimen 6" diameter x 12" high is used. Gel time shall be a least 150 minutes

The vehicle shall be a two-component (liquid and hardener) system designed to yield the

above characteristics when combined with the manufacturer’s recommended aggregate system. The grout shall be suitable for supporting precision machinery subject to high impact and shock loading in industrial environments while exposed to elevated temperature as high as 150oF, with a load of 1200 PSI. Aggregate for equipment base grout shall be as furnished by the manufacturer of the epoxy grout mix. B. CEMENTIOUS GROUT: Cementious grout for use with equipment supports for equipment rated 5 horsepower and smaller or weighing less than 1000 pounds, whichever is less, may be as specified in Section 03600. Procedures for leveling and clamping equipment shall be as specified in this section.


2.05 EPOXY PRIMER

The epoxy primer shall be a lead free, chrome free, rust inhibitive, two-component epoxy primer specifically designed for use on metal substrates and in conjunction with epoxy grout. The epoxy primer shall be a product of the epoxy grout manufacturer. 2.06 ANCHOR BOLTS

Anchor bolts shall be stainless steel, set in PVC sleeves, unless otherwise specified. Sleeves shall allow a free length projection of not less than fifteen bolt diameters above the concrete required to develop the strength of the bolt. Projection above the nut on the baseplate shall be no more than 3/4 –inch. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

A. Results of grout strength tests, as specified in paragraph 11002-3.02 E. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

Pumps shall be installed in accordance with this section and ANSI/HI 1.4 and ANSI/HI 2.4. Grouting of equipment bases shall take place prior to connecting any field piping or electrical and instrumentation systems. Unless the ENGINEER accepts an alternate installation procedure in writing, baseplates shall be grouted with the equipment removed. Equipment that is not mounted on vibration isolators shall be anchored directly to the supporting floor system. In addition to the anchorage, all such equipment shall be internally designed so that all static and moving parts are anchored to the supporting framework to resist the all imposed forces. All forces shall be transmitted to the base in order to be anchored as required. Connecting piping with flexible connections and/or expansion joints shall be anchored such that the intended uses of these joints are maintained in the piping system without imposing strain on the equipment connections. Where the equipment manufacturer requires a rigid connection between the machine and connecting piping systems (generally, this will be higher discharge head pumps), the flexible coupling shown may be deleted and the CONTRACTOR shall install the equipment in the following manner:

1. The equipment housekeeping pad shall be prepared as specified under paragraph 11002-3.02 B.


2. The baseplate or leveling blocks supporting the equipment shall be installed, leveled, and grouted in place as specified.

3. The equipment shall be installed, aligned and dowelled in place as

specified.

4. The piping shall be installed and aligned to the equipment connections and the field piping connections without welding one of the joints for one section of pipe between the equipment connection and the field piping and all valving. All flanged joints shall be bolted up and pressure tested.

5. All piping shall be fully supported by supports designed to accept their full

weight.

6. The final sections of piping shall be aligned with the equipment and field connections without the use of jacks, chain falls or other devices to force it into alignment.

7. The final piping joints shall be welded only after the previous steps have

been completed and accepted by the ENGINEER. Conduit and piping for future equipment shall be capped flush with the floor or concrete pad in such a manner to allow future connection. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate location of electrical conduit and piping penetrations within the concrete pad and equipment base. All penetrations shall stub-up on the same side of the equipment as required for connection to the equipment. Equipment drains shall be located as required for drainage from equipment. Prior to commencing equipment installation work, the CONTRACTOR shall cause the manufacturer of the epoxy grout to be used for equipment installation to conduct a training school for the workmen to be using the product. The school shall be not less than 4 hours in length and shall cover all aspects of using the products, from mixing to application. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for this portion of the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. ANCHOR BOLTS:

Prior to concrete placement, anchor bolts shall be accurately set according to the manufacturer’s foundation drawings and firmly secured to prevent shifting during concrete placement. The bolts shall be embedded in the structural concrete to develop the full strength of the bolt. Concrete in housekeeping pads cannot be used for this purpose. All anchor bolts shall be dimensionally checked against the foundation drawings for proper length, diameter, thread length, thread projection, etc., by a representative of the equipment manufacturer prior


to placing concrete. Prior to placing concrete for the housekeeping pad, plastic sleeves shall be placed around each bolt to provide for minor adjustment of bolt position prior to grouting. Sleeves shall be filled with a pliable, non-bonding material such as silicon rubber or wax to prevent contact between the concrete or grout and the anchor bolt. Bolt threads and projections in the sleeves (refer to paragraph 11002-2.06) above the structural slab shall be protected in the sleeve by heavily greasing or waxing the threads and shank with paste wax and wrapping with plastic sheeting. The protective wrapping shall be firmly secured with tie wires. The protective wrapping shall be removed prior to placing the grout. The equipment manufacturer shall recommend the size of the anchor bolts for the equipment and shall also furnish the recommended tightening torque for the nuts; however, the minimum size bolt shall be 3/4 inch for equipment rated 20 to 100 horsepower, 1 inch for equipment rated over 100 to 300 horsepower and 1-1/4 inches for 300 to 500 horsepower. Anchor bolts for equipment rated over 500 horsepower shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and as approved by the ENGINEER.

B. CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD PREPARATION: After the concrete is fully cured (sample cylinders, as specified in Section 03300, shall be taken and tested for all housekeeping pads supporting equipment weighing more than 1000 pounds), the housekeeping pad shall be chipped approximately 3/4" - 1", to remove all laitance and defective or weak concrete. A light duty, hand held pneumatic chipper with a chisel type tool shall be used for chipping the foundation. Abrasive blast, bush-hammer, jack hammers with sharp chisels or needle gun preparation of concrete surfaces to be grouted are not acceptable. The amount of concrete removed shall be such that the final baseplate elevation results in not less than 3" of grout between the surface of the housekeeping pad and lower baseplate flange.

All edges shall be chamfered 2" to 4" at a 45-degree angle. All dust, dirt, chips, oil, water, and any other contaminants shall be removed and the surface protected with plastic sheeting until grouting. The grout contact surface on the housekeeping pad shall be coated with one coat (not more than 5 mils) of catalyzed epoxy resin.

C. EQUIPMENT BASES: All surfaces of equipment bases to be in contact with epoxy grout shall be cleaned to

SSPC SP-6 and shall be primed with epoxy primer within 8 hours of cleaning. D. LEVELING AND SHIMMING: All machinery shall be mounted and leveled by millwrights. All equipment bases and equipment shall be leveled against steel surfaces. Use of other materials for leveling purposes is strictly and specifically prohibited. Unless otherwise specified, baseplates weighing less than 1000 pounds shall be leveled on stainless steel blocks 4 inches square and 1-1/2 inches thick with a hole drilled in the center for the anchor bolt, placed under the base at every anchor bolt. Jackscrews acting on flat steel plates shall be used for heavier components. Leveling shall be by


use of leveling blocks machined flat on all horizontal surfaces and measuring not less than 4 inches wide horizontally and shims that shall extend not less than three inches beyond the base of the equipment. Leveling blocks shall be coated with a light oil just prior to beginning the leveling and grouting work. Using precut stainless steel shims coated with a light oil between the base and the steel blocks at the anchor bolts, the CONTRACTOR shall level the equipment baseplates against the anchor bolt nuts to a maximum tolerance of 0.005 in./ft or as otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer, if more stringent. Mounting surfaces for equipment shall be coplanar within 0.002 in. in any direction. The shims shall be placed so the tabs on the shims are easily accessible. A minimum of four shims per anchor bolt shall be used. The total shim thickness at each anchor bolt shall be at least 0.015 inch. Leveling shall be against anchor bolts prior to final grouting.

Leveling equipment shall be precision surveying equipment. Machinists’ spirit levels will not be permitted for leveling purposes for any base plate or equipment foundation with a plan dimension greater than 4 feet. Leveling nuts may be used for mounting equipment less than 500 pounds. The CONTRACTOR shall level the equipment against the anchor bolt nuts to a maximum tolerance of 0.005 in./ft or as otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer, if more stringent. Wedges will not be allowed.

E. GROUTING: Grout forms shall be built of minimum of 3/4" thick waterproof plywood and shall be securely braced (minimum brace size shall be 2" x 4"). Forms shall provide a minimum of 2" hydrostatic head above the final elevation of the grout, to assist in flow during installation. Forms must be coated with three coats of paste wax on all areas that will come in contact with the grout to prevent the grout from bonding to the forms. Forms shall be waxed before assembly to prevent accidental application of wax to surfaces where the grout is to bond. Before any forms are installed, all concrete surfaces that will contact epoxy grout shall be free from any foreign material, such as oil, sand, water, grease, etc. Forms shall be liquid-tight. Any open spaces or cracks in forms, or at the joint between forms and the foundation, shall be sealed off, using sealant. All outside vertical and horizontal edges of the grout shall have 45-degree chamfers. Blockouts shall be provided at all shimming and leveling nut positions to allow removal of shimming equipment after the grout has cured. Jackscrews shall be coated with a light oil or other acceptable bondbreaking compound. The 45-degree chamfer strip shall be located at the final elevation of the grout. The final elevation of the grout on baseplates with exposed I-beam or C-channel supports shall be at the top of the lower support flange. The top of the grout, on baseplates with solid sides, shall be 1.0 inch above the bottom of the baseplate. The grout's final elevation shall not be so high as to bond the anchor bolt nut and washer. The epoxy resin and hardener shall be mixed in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. Aggregate shall be slowly added to the mixer one bag at a


time. The grout should be mixed only long enough to wet out all the aggregate. Grout shall be placed at the center of one end of the baseplate and worked toward the ends in such a manner as to force the air out from beneath the baseplate and out the vent holes, to eliminate voids. The grout shall be placed in a manner that avoids air entrapment using a head box to pour grout into the grout holes. When the head box is moved to the next grout hole, a 6-inch high standpipe shall be placed over the grout hole and filled with grout. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to never allow the grout to fall below the baseplate level once the grout has made contact with the baseplate. Grout placement shall be continuous until the all portions of the space beneath the baseplate have been filled. Subsequent batches of grout shall be prepared so as to be ready when the preceding batch has been placed. Under no circumstances shall the grouting operation be halted because of lack of grout mix. After the entire baseplate is full, 6-inch high standpipes shall be maintained over each grout hole, to continue purging of air. When the grout has started to take an initial set (determined by a noticeable increase in temperature and no flow of grout at the vent holes) the standpipes shall be removed and excess grout cleaned from all surfaces. A grout sample shall be taken for each piece of equipment to be grouted. The sample shall be placed in a cylinder of sufficient size to yield three 2"x2"x2" test samples. The samples shall be tagged with the equipment number, ambient temperature at the time of placement. The samples shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Once the epoxy grout cylinder has been completely filled, it shall be placed next to the foundation of the equipment being grouted and allowed to cure for 48 hours. After 48 hours, the test cylinder shall be tested in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s recommendations by an independent testing laboratory. The results shall be reported directly to the ENGINEER. Forms shall be removed only after the grout has cured sufficiently and upon specific permission from the ENGINEER. F. COMPLETION: Upon acceptance by the ENGINEER and the equipment manufacturer’s representative after the grout has reached sufficient strength, the shims shall be removed, or leveling nuts or jack screws backed off to allow the grout to fully support the equipment base. Removal of extended shimming material (direct mounted baseplates weighing 1000 pounds or less) shall be by sledge hammer, taking care not to damage the grout. The anchor bolts shall be torqued, using calibrated indicating torque wrenches, to develop the full clamping force required by the equipment manufacturer. Anchor bolts shall be torqued in increments of not more than 25 percent of final value in an alternating pattern to avoid stress concentration on the grout surface. Pockets for access to shims, mounting blocks, or leveling nuts shall be filled with grout mix and pointed after the anchor bolts have been torqued to final values. **END OF SECTION**

SECTION 11021

VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies vibration isolation system requirements for mechanical equipment. Additional vibration isolation system requirements are provided in individual mechanical equipment specification sections. Mountings which are rigidly anchored to the supporting floor system are specified in Section 11002. B. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS: Unless the equipment incorporates unit construction using an integral rigid frame or is specified otherwise, each item of mechanical equipment, along with its drive unit, shall be mounted on a rigid steel or steel and concrete base. Cast iron bases are not permitted when equipment is furnished with a vibration isolation system. Where specified, the equipment, including the base, shall be mounted on or suspended from vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the supporting structure. Vibration isolation available internally in the equipment will not be considered equivalent and shall not be provided when vibration isolation as specified herein is required. Normally provided internal vibration isolators shall be replaced with rigid supports in such cases. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with unit weight distribution to produce reasonably uniform deflections at each support. Unless otherwise specified, bases, isolators, and deflections shall be as specified in Table 27, ASHRAE CH-52. C. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall cause all vibration isolation systems, including the isolators, seismic restraints and flexible connectors between the isolated equipment and associated piping, ducting and/or electrical work, to be designed by a professional ENGINEER qualified in this type of work. This provision, however, shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of his overall responsibility for the work. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the ENGINEER’s calculations for design of the vibration isolation systems, stamped with the ENGINEER’s seal. Flexible connectors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the mechanical equipment item in accordance with the recommendations of the vibration isolation systems.

D. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS – NOT USED

S. S. No. 5496 11021-1 Vibration Isolation Systems

1.02 REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

ASHRAE CH 52 Handbook, HVAC Systems and Applications, Sound and Vibration Control

OBC Ohio Building Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


2 Scale drawing of Type D mounting hanger showing the 30-degree arc capability.

3. Manufacturer and manufacturer’s type designation. 4. Manufacturer’s catalog data. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Vibration isolation mountings and seismic restraints shall be as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., Korfund Dynamics Corporation, Consolidated Kinetics Corporation, or equal. Flexible connectors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the mechanical equipment item in accordance with the recommendations of the vibration isolation system engineer. 2.02 BASES A. CURB MOUNTED BASES: Curb mounted equipment where vibration isolation is required, principally roof top heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top and bottom members shall contain cadmium-plated springs having a 1-inch minimum deflection with 50 percent additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch so as not to interfere with spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible neoprene connection duct joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. B. TYPE I BASES: Type I bases shall be structural steel bases. The bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases, which may be "T" or "L" shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 1 inch. C. TYPE II BASES: Type II bases shall be steel members used to cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. All members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent


strains in the equipment. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a clearance of 1 inch below the base. D. TYPE III BASES: Type III bases shall be rectangular foundations consisting of concrete filled structural steel beam or channel forms. Bases for split case pumps shall be of sufficient size to provide support for suction and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12 inches unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer or required for mass or rigidity. In general, base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 inches. Forms shall include, as a minimum, concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2-inch bars or angles welded in place on 6-inch centers each way in a layer 1 1/2 inches above the bottom or additional steel as required by structural conditions. Forms shall be provided with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1-inch clearance below the base. E. TYPE IV BASES: Type IV bases are specified in Section 11002. They are cast iron bases and, as specified in paragraph 11021-1.01 B, are not permitted when equipment is furnished with vibration isolators. 2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS A. TYPE A MOUNTINGS: Type A mountings shall be double deflection neoprene mountings having a minimum static deflection of 0.35 inches. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and shall have friction pads both top and bottom so that they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes and anchor bolts shall be provided where required to resist lateral migration. Resilient washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent contact between the bolts and the equipment support bases. On equipment such as small vent sets, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the overhang. B. TYPE B MOUNTINGS: Type B mountings shall be free-standing spring type isolators laterally stable without any housing and complete with 1/4-inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base and the support. Mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel.


C. TYPE C MOUNTINGS: Type C mountings shall be Type B mountings with a housing having vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Type C mountings shall be provided for equipment with operating weight different from the installed weight, such as chillers, boilers, etc., and equipment exposed to the wind, such as cooling towers. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection and shall be located between the supporting steel and roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring to prevent interference with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations. Mountings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel. D. TYPE D MOUNTINGS: Type D mountings shall be steel hangers which contain a steel spring and a 0.3-inch deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing which passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be of sufficient size to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30-degree arc before contacting the hole. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. E. TYPE E MOUNTINGS: Type E mountings shall be double deflection, cork and rubber sandwich pads consisting of a high-density cork layer permanently bonded to top and bottom layers of corrugated oil-resistant synthetic rubber. The corrugated design shall allow deflection to increase with load and shall form a nonskid surface to resist lateral migration of the equipment. Bolt holes and anchor bolts shall be provided where required to resist migration. Resilient washers ad bushings shall be provided to prevent contact between the bolts and the equipment support bases. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided as product data in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Installation report specified in paragraph 11021-3.01. 2. Static and dynamic deflections, weights, isolator locations, and flexible

connector designs. 3. Spring deflections and diameters, compressed spring heights and solid spring

heights. 4. Curb mounted base seal and wind resistance details.



PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD INSPECTION The vibration isolation manufacturer, or his qualified representative, shall provide such supervision as is necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators and seismic restraints. Upon completion of the installation and after the system is put into operation, the manufacturer, or his representative, shall make a final inspection and submit his report in writing certifying the correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 11060-1 Electric Motors

SECTION 11060 ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies single and three phase, horizontal and vertical, single-speed and two-speed, low-voltage (600 volts and less), energy efficient (900 rpm) and premium efficiency (1200, 1800, and 3600 rpm) alternating current, induction motors, 250 horsepower or less. Standard NEMA MG 1 motors are specified, as modified herein.

This section also specifies IEEE 841 severe-duty, totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC Type-2, specified herein) squirrel cage induction motors from 1 to 500 horsepower with voltage ratings of 600V, 2300V, and 4000V. See Custom Motor criteria within the driven equipment specification for voltages above 600V and for high horsepower.

Motors shall be provided in compliance with these specifications. Ambient conditions for the Project are specified in Section 01800. Provide motors suitable for continuous operation under the ambient conditions:

1. Temperature: -25-degree C to +40-degree C. 2. Altitude: 0 to 3300 feet above sea level. 3. Derate motors for higher ambient temperature and for higher altitude with

motor size based on brake-horsepower. Motors shall have copper rotor material and copper stator windings with F-insulation

without exceeding the B-temperature rise of 80-degree C and with Design-B torque / current characteristics rated for continuous operation duty.

Two-speed motors shall be two-winding motors. Two-speed, one-winding consequential-

pole motors that require special motor starters are prohibited. Refer to Motor Types-1, 2, and 3 Classification and Inverter Duty variable torque and

constant torque specification requirements herein. Motor Types-1, 2, and 3 have the additional requirements of Inverter Duty Motors as specified or scheduled.

Custom Motors and Special Purpose Motors, with features or ratings that are not specified herein, are specified in the particular equipment specifications. The submittal, installation, and testing requirements for all motors are specified herein.

Custom motors are motors over 250 horsepower, medium voltage (2300 volt, 4000 volt, or

higher) for high elevations, high ambient conditions, high thrust, special enclosures, intermittent


duty, varying duty, and inverter duty motors that require special cooling for slow speed operation with constant torque loads and motor limited to below base speed operation.

Special purpose motors are submersible motors, integral gear motors, close-coupled pump

motors, crane and hoist motors, fire pump motors, brake motors, gate and valve operator motors, and high torque rated motors and other unique application motors that specified with the driven equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Motors shall be built in accordance with UL 674, UL 1004, NEMA Standard MG 1, NEMA MG 1, Table 12-10 motors that meet the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPAct) requirements with full-load efficiency measurements per IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B, and to the requirements specified. IEC Metric Motors and imported EPAct Motors that do not meet the NEMA standards are prohibited. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ABMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

IEEE 112 Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

IEEE 841 Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 500 HP

NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)

NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators

NEMA MG1-30 Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable- Frequency Controls or Both.

Note: Specifications for Standard TENV Submersible Motors rated 1/2 – 200 HP, 140TY-L360TY Frames, and rated at 200, 230, 460, 575, 600 Volt are available from motor manufactures.

NEMA MG1-31 Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors: Rated 5000 horsepower or less at 7200 volt or less, intended for use with adjustable-voltage and adjustable frequency controls, commonly referred to as inverters.

UL 674 Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 1004 Electric Motors C. FACTORY TESTS: The manufacturer’s factory motor Prototype Tests per IEEE Standard 112 Appendix-A on motors through 250 horsepower shall be submitted as Product Data for the motor, actual factory tests for motors is not required:

1. Winding resistance in ohms and converted to 25 degree C. 2. Resistive Unbalance and Quarter Voltage Impedance, as applicable. 3. Locked-Rotor current (Single phase). 4. High Potential. 5. No-Load Excitation (volts, amperes, RPM). 6. Bearing vibration check. 7. Efficiency, Power Factor, Current at 115%, 100%, 75%, 50%, and no load.


The motors larger than 250 horsepower shall be subject to the manufacture’s complete factory dynamometer tests per IEEE Standard 112 Appendix-B:

1. Standard routine factory tests. 2. Full Load Heat Run. 3. Temperature Rise at full load. 4. Breakdown Torque. 5. Rated Full Load Slip. 6. Speed-Torque Curves.

D. WARRANTY:

In addition to the guarantee requirements specified in Section 00700, all motors ½ horsepower and greater shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years under the specified uses and with normal operation and service. This warranty shall be delivered, in writing, to the OWNER and shall include, as a minimum, 100 percent full payment coverage for parts and labor during the first 60 months of operation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include the following:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all

referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications.

Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Manufacture completed IEEE Standard 841 Date Sheet for AC Squirrel Cage

Induction Motors or Supplier completed “Form 11060-A” in specification Section 01999 with required factory data of motors supplied.


3. Speed-Torque curve per 1.02 C Factory Tests.

4. Factory Test Data: Including Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency for 115% load, 100% load, 75% load, 50% load, and no load.

5. Guaranteed vibration level when measured per MG 1, Figure 7-6:

a. Displacement: 0.0025 inch peak-to-peak b. Velocity: 0.10 inches per second peak c. Acceleration: 1g (gravity) peak.

6. Motor heating curve for motors per 1.02 C Factory Tests.

7. Motor outline, dimensions, and weight. 8. Manufacturer’s descriptive information relative to motor features. 9. Response curve where a winding over-temperature device is required. 10. For all inverter duty motors: Manufacturer’s certification that the motor is

compatible with the adjustable frequency drive to be used. 11. Disassembly and repair documentation.

1.04 POWER SUPPLY VARIATIONS

Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with +/- 10-percent

of rated voltage with rated frequency or +/- 5-percent of rated frequency with rated voltage. 1.05 NEMA WINDING TEMPERATURES

NEMA MG 1 Table 12-7 motors insulation system maximum winding temperatures in

degrees-Centigrade (C), with the degrees-Fahrenheit (F) insulation system class specified herein. 1. Forty degree-C ambient (104 degree-F) is the basis for temperature rise. 2. For 50 degree C ambient (122F) and above, refer to the driven equipment

specifications for additional requirements.

Insulation System Class Degrees C / F Temperature Rise by Resistance

A 140 / 284 NA

B 165 / 329 B-rise: 40 + 80 = 120 Degrees C / 248 F

F 190 / 374 F-rise: 40 + 105 = 145 Degrees C / 293 F

H 215 / 419 H-rise: 40 + 125 = 165 Degrees C / 329 F


1.06 NEMA MOTOR TEMPERATURE PROTECTION TYPES Refer to Thermal Protection in Part-2 for thermal device requirements. The NEMA design

shall limit the temperatures of the windings without using a thermal device: 1. Type-1: Winding Running and Locked Rotor Over-temperature Protection. 2. Type-2: Winding Running Over-temperature Protection.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS The following manufacturer’s motors generally meet the class and performance requirements of this specification when furnished with appropriate modifications and additional features as specified: A. HORIZONTAL MOTORS:

1. Type 1 - Premium efficiency guarded, open-drip-proof motors manufactured by:

a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS b. Reliance Electric Co.: Type XEX c. Emerson US Motor: Type DE or RE.

2. Type 2 - Premium efficiency totally enclosed-fan cooled, Chemical Industry severe duty motors manufactured by:

a. General Electric Inc.: TEFC IEEE 841 Severe duty: X$D b. Reliance Electric Co.: Type IEEE 841 XL Severe Duty. c. Siemens: TEFC-RGZESDX, IEEE 841 Severe Duty. d. Emerson US Motor: Type CE.

3. Type 3 - Premium efficiency explosion-proof motors manufactured by:

a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS - Explosion Proof. b. Emerson US Motor: Type LCE. c. Siemens: RGZZESD with Temperature Code: T3C d. Reliance: XEX-XP, IP 54 with Temperature Code: T3C

B. VERTICAL MOTORS:

1. Types 1 and Type 2 - Premium efficiency ODP and TEFC motors manufactured by:


a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS. b. Emerson US Motors: Type TUCE Corroduty.


a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS, Class I, Group D. b. Emerson US Motors: Type LUCE. c. Siemens: RGZZVILESD: Solid shaft with Temperature Code: T2A.

C. MOTOR TYPES 1, 2 OR 3 RATED FOR INVERTER DUTY SERVICE:

1. General Electric Inc.:

a. KAF design for ODP, TEFC, or TEFC Severe Duty enclosures. b. KAF design in horizontal TEFC Severe Duty and EP enclosures with

A$D construction for constant torque speed range. c. XSD Ultra for Severe Duty IEEE 841.

2. Emerson US Electrical Motors:

a. VFM: Horizontal (TEFC) 841 Plus: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor.

3. Reliance Electric Inc.:

a. V*S Master XT: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor.

4. Siemens:

a. TEFC RGZESDI: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor. b. EP RGZZESDI: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor.

2.02 GENERAL A. NAMEPLATES: Motor nameplates shall be engraved or stamped stainless steel. Information shall include those items enumerated in NEMA Standard MG 1, as applicable. Nameplates shall be permanently fastened to the motor frame and shall be visibly positioned for inspection. Additionally, provide the following information on nameplates or additional nameplates for:

1. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger: Indicate the ABMA L-10 rated life for the motor bearings.


2. Motors 2 to 50 horsepower: Indicate the NEMA nominal efficiency. 3. Motors 50 horsepower and larger: Indicate NEMA guaranteed minimum

efficiency. 4. Explosion-Proof motors: Indicate UL frame temperature limit code. 5. Space heater information. 6. NEMA MG 1 Over Temperature Protection Type Number. 7. Temperature device rating and alarm and shutdown setpoint information.

B. CONSTRUCTION: All motors provided under this specification shall have the following features of construction:

1. Frames:

a. Cast iron frames for motors 1/2 horsepower and larger, unless otherwise specified.

b. Steel frames for motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower, unless otherwise specified.

c. Aluminum frame motors will not be permitted.

2. Cast metal shrouds and covers for non-sparking fan blades, unless otherwise specified.

3. Non-hygroscopic motor leads. 4. NEMA Design-B as standard design. NEMA Design-A, C, or D shall be

identified as custom design features in the driven equipment specifications.

5. Motor Service Factor (percent of additional horsepower): a. SF: 1.15 for Types-1, 2, and 3 Sine-wave motors b. SF: 1.0 for Inverter Duty motors. c. SF dual rating: 1.15 Sine-wave and 1.0 Inverter Duty.

6. Grounding terminal in conduit box. 7. Stainless Steel nameplate.

2.03 MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HORSEPOWER A. GENERAL:


Motors less than 1/2 horsepower shall be squirrel cage, single phase, capacitor start, and induction run type with Class B or F insulation. Fan motors rated 1/8 horsepower or less may be split-phase or shaded-pole type. Windings shall be copper. B. RATING: Motors shall be rated 115 volts, single phase, 60 hertz, and shall be continuous-time rated in conformance with NEMA Standard MG 1. Motors shall be non-overloading at all points of the equipment operation. C. ENCLOSURES: Motor enclosures shall be as defined in NEMA MG 1. Motors shall have totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) enclosures, unless specified otherwise in the driven equipment specification. Explosion-proof (EP or XP) motors shall bear the UL Label for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous locations. The nameplate shall indicate the UL frame temperature limit code T2A. The enclosure surface temperature shall not exceed 280 degrees C. Provide self-protected over-temperature device in the motor to detect and automatically de-energize the motor if the frame temperature limit is exceeded and automatically reset. 2.04 MOTORS 1/2 HORSEPOWER THROUGH 250 HORSEPOWER A. GENERAL: Motors 1/2 horsepower through 250 horsepower shall have copper windings and shall be three phase, squirrel cage, induction type rated for full-voltage start and continuous duty and rated for 460-Vac.

Motors shall have a NEMA MG 1 design for the duty service imposed by the driven equipment such as frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment. B. RATING: Motors shall be rated 460 volts, three-phase, 60-Hertz, and shall be continuous time rated in accordance with NEMA Standard MG 1. Refer to the driven equipment specification for custom motors or special purpose motors with voltage rating above 460 volts.

Unless specified otherwise, motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 with additional 15-percent horsepower. Motors shall not be required to exceed the nameplate rating at service factor 1.00.


C. MOTOR TYPE CLASSIFICATIONS: 1. GENERAL:

a. Definition of terms shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2. TYPE 1 MOTORS:

a. Enclosure: Open drip-proof, guarded ventilation openings (ODP).

b. Class F insulation and Class B temperature rise at the motor's nominal rating.

3. TYPE 2 MOTORS:

a. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC). b. Class F insulation and Class B temperature rise at the motor's

nominal rating. c. Conform to IEEE 841 Chemical Industry-Severe Duty rating through

500 Horsepower. d. Surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion-resistant treatment such as

an epoxy paint that passes ASTM B117 for 96-hours.

e. No load airborne sound power level below 90-dBA per MG 1 Part-9. f. Breather/drain fitting instead of solid drain plug.

g. International Protection Standard IP55 bearing enclosure.

4. TYPE 3 MOTORS:

a. Enclosure: Explosion-proof motors (EP or XP). b. UL listed in accordance with UL 674 for Class I, Group D for

Hazardous Atmospheres. c. Bear UL Label for Class I, Division 1, Group D Hazardous locations. d. UL-approved breather/drain device in the motor drain hole. e. Class F insulation.


f. Nameplate: Indicate the UL frame temperature limit code T2A without thermostat and T2D with thermostat.

g. Rated for the UL surface temperature limit codes for Class I Group D

for gasoline, petroleum, alcohols, natural gas etc:

1) Motor designed below the UL frame temperature limit code T2A of 280 degrees C or

2) Provide an internal frame temperature thermostat that meets

the UL frame temperature limit code T2D of 215 degree C with normally closed contact rated 5-amperes at 115-Vac.

D. THERMAL PROTECTION: Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 motors that require motor over-temperature protection, as defined in NEMA MG 1-12, with the motor controller interface wiring and devices as indicated on the drawings for the following:

1. Inverter duty motors and totally-enclosed-air-over (TEAO) motors:

a. NEMA Type-2 motor over-temperature self-protection: Thermal-overload, self-reset bimetallic Klixon switch for motors 5 horsepower and smaller.

b. Motors larger than 5 horsepower require controller alarm / trip:

1) Self-powered, motor mounted auxiliary device with Form-C output contacts wired to variable speed or adjustable frequency drive to shut down the motor controller. Both the normally open contact and the normally closed contact shall be available at the motor terminal box. 2) Non-self-powered power thermal devices are prohibited.

3) Factory set thermal protection device with alarm and trip

setpoints indicated on the motor device nameplate.

4) Factory wired to separate motor termination box.

2. Motors 300 horsepower and larger and higher voltage:

a. NEMA Type-1 thermal protection: Two-100-ohm platinum RTDs in each winding.


b. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD) wired to separate motor termination box with wiring diagram provide.

c. Provide RTD monitor and transmitter at the motor, as indicated or d. Provide RTD monitor at the motor controller, as indicated. e. Indicated alarm and trip setpoints on the motor device nameplate.

3. Auxiliary equipment shall have normally closed NEMA ICS 2 B300

contacts and shall be housed in NEMA 250 enclosures as follows:

a. Type 1 motors NEMA 12 b. Type 2 motors NEMA 4 c. Type 3 motors NEMA 7D

E. INVERTER DUTY MOTORS

Motors for use with adjustable frequency controllers shall be inverter duty motors specifically designed for inverter service for the speed range and load torque characteristic required by the associated driven equipment. Inverter duty motors shall be specifically certified compatible with the adjustable frequency controller and driven equipment, as specified in Section 11000-1.01C Unit Responsibility.

Motors for use with adjustable frequency controllers shall not exceed NEMA MG 1, Class B

temperature rise when operating over the specified speed range on the adjustable frequency controllers specified in Section 11069 with the specified load speed/torque characteristic.

Inverter duty rated motors shall have 4:1 turndown with variable torque motor controllers or constant torque motor controllers rating designed to operate from 25% of base speed to base speed continuously with full load current and torque without exceeding the Class F insulation with B temperature rise.

Torque requirement for greater turndown and slower speed applications is a custom design;

refer to the driven equipment specification for additional requirements. Inverter duty rated motors shall be designed to operate over the speed or frequency range specified.

Motor insulation shall be designed to meet 2000-volt peak at a minimum of 0.1 microsecond

rise time which exceeds the NEMA MG 1, Part 31: 1600-volt peak requirement for the 460 volt motors.

Provide inverter duty motors with NEMA Type 2 over-temperature protection as specified

in NEMA MG 1-12. Provide motor mounted and motor powered winding temperature device with a 5-ampere normally open and normally closed output contacts at the motor terminal box for monitoring by the adjustable frequency controller and shutdown where the temperature exceed 165 degree-Centigrade.


Inverter duty motors shall have electrically insulated bearings or shall be equipped with a shaft-grounding unit mounted on the fan housing with stub shaft extended from the motor shaft. Larger motors, using the shaft-grounding unit, shall be equipped with two brushes, totally enclosed, and sealed against environmental contamination. F. VERTICAL MOTORS: Vertical motors shall be solid-shaft P-base type specifically designed for vertical installation. Thrust bearing rating shall be compatible with the loads imposed by the driven equipment. Universal position motors are not acceptable.

Vertical motors shall conform to Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3 in accordance with the location and use. Vertical motors specified or indicated as rated for Inverter Duty Motor shall be as specified herein. G. MOTOR EFFICIENCY: Type-1 and Type-2 motors in accordance with 2002 NEMA MG 1 Table 12-11 and Table 12-12 and Type-2 in accordance with IEEE 841 Table 2 motor minimum nameplate efficiency for energy efficient 900 rpm motors and premium efficiency motor for 1200 rpm, 1800 rpm, and 3600 rpm determined in accordance with IEEE 112B testing procedures, when operating on a sinusoidal power source shall conform to the following:

Guaranteed Motor Minimum Efficiency (percent) MG1 Motor Horsepower 900 rpm 1200 rpm 1800 rpm 3600 rpm

1 70.0 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 72.0 87.5 86.5 84.0

2 80.0 88.5 86.5 85.5

3 81.5 89.5 89.5 86.5

5 82.5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 82.5 91.0 91.7 89.5

10 86.5 91.0 91.7 90.2

15 86.5 91.7 92.4 91.0

20 87.5 91.7 93.0 91.0

25 87.5 93.0 93.6 91.7

30 89.5 93.0 93.6 91.7

40 89.5 94.1 94.1 92.4

50 90.2 94.1 94.5 93.0

60 90.2 94.5 95.0 93.6

75 91.7 94.5 95.4 93.6



100 91.7 95.0 95.4 94.1

125 92.4 95.0 95.4 95.0

150 92.4 95.8 95.8 95.0

200 92.4 95.8 96.2 95.5

250 93.6 95.8 96.2 95.8

IEEE STD 841-2001

900 rpm 8-pole

1200 rpm 4-pole

1800 rpm 6-pole

3600 rpm 2-pole

250HP

600V

2300/4000V

93.6

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.5

94.1

300HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

350HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

400HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

-

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

450HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

-

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

500HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

-

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1


H. CONDUIT BOXES: Conduit boxes shall be sized based on the conduit number and conduit size indicated on the drawings. Provide over-sized boxes with the number of openings as required to accommodate the conduits required. Replace undersized conduit boxes.

Conduit boxes shall be split construction with threaded hubs and shall conform to IEEE 841 for Type 2 and Type 3 motors. Motors shall be furnished with petroleum-resistant gaskets at the base of the conduit box and between the halves of the conduit box

Conduit boxes shall be designed to rotate in order to permit installation in any of four positions 90 degrees apart. Motors shall have grounding lug located within the conduit box for the ground connection.

Provide separate conduit boxes for temperature devices and space heaters.

I. BEARINGS: Bearings may be oil or grease lubricated ball or angle contact roller bearings rated for a minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or 11 at the ambient temperature specified. Motor designs employing cartridge type bearings will not be accepted. Bearings shall be fitted with lubricant fill and drain or relief fittings. Belt loads shall not exceed forces calculated from NEMA MG 1 Table 14-1. J. LIFTING EYES: Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be fitted with at least one lifting eye and motors over 150 pounds shall be fitted with two lifting eyes. K. CURRENT IMBALANCE: Current imbalance between phases shall not exceed the values tabulated below when the motor is operating at any load within its service factor rating and is supplied by a balanced voltage system: 1. Under 5 horsepower: 15 percent 2. 5 horsepower and above: 10 percent L. SPACE HEATERS

Where shown on the Drawings or Schedules, furnish motors with space heaters to prevent condensation inside the motor enclosure after motor shutdown and maintain the temperature of the winding at not less than 5-degree C above outside ambient temperature.

Heaters shall be flexible wraparound type rated 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz. The space heater rating in watts and volts shall be noted on the motor nameplate or on a second nameplate.


Space heater leads H1 and H2 shall be brought to a separate terminal block or pigtails in the motor conduit box or separate conduit box with a threaded conduit opening. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided for each motor in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. 2. Written warranty specified in paragraph 11060-1.02 D.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING

Verify the circuit ground cable (green) is identified and connected to the grounding lug

terminal in the conduit box.

Provide supplementary grounding by installing a bond from the motor frame to the grounding electrode system as indicated on the drawings.

3.02 FIELD TESTING

Verify breather/drain fittings have been installed as specified herein. Winding insulation resistance for motors shall be not less than 10-megohm measured with a

1000-Vac megohmmeter at 1-minute at or corrected to 40-degree C. **END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 11350-1 Chemical Induction Mixers

SECTION 11350

CHEMICAL INDUCTION MIXERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SCOPE: This section includes furnishing and all material and quality requirements for the Chemical Induction Mixers (CIM) in compliance with the Contract Documents. The CIM shall be furnished complete within a self supporting structure “Cage Style” to be mounted in a live channel. The supporting structure shall include all guide rails, winch, grating, handrail, and all necessary accessories. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

Induction Mixer E-1 MLC-C2-21-0009


Induction Mixer W-1 MLC-C2-21-0007

Induction Mixer W-2 MLC-C2-21-0008 C. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The CIM shall be selected and designed for continuous duty delivering sodium hypochlorite having the following properties:

Chemical

Maximum solution Concentration, percent

Specific gravity, Maximum

pH

Temperature Range, degrees F

Sodium Hypochlorite

15

1.2

12

32-120

1. The Chemical Induction Mixer (CIM) shall be of a submersible design and

shall be able to transport the chemical to be induced from the source (NaOCl metering pumps) to the point of application.

2. The CIM shall be designed for a feed rate of 0 to 5 gallons per minute of

sodium hypochlorite.


3. The CIM shall be sized using a minimum mixing ratio of 0.5 (HP/MGD) unless a lower mixing ratio can be substantiated by results from performance testing by a recognized independent agency. Secondary effluent flow in each channel will vary from 50 to 120 MGD.

4. The CIM shall be capable of inducing NaOCl into the wastewater stream at a

velocity of approximately 60 feet per second (radically and axially) without prediluting by means of a century injector prior to contact with the eye of the propeller.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. GENERAL: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall verify field conditions and dimensions to provide

the required length of the power cable, hoist cables, supporting structure, mounting system, vacuum tubing, and all other pertinent items.

2. All CIM components, supporting structure, accessories, and spare parts shall

be provided by the same manufacturer.

B. STANDARDS: This section contains references to the following document. It is part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

CSA Canadian Standards Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute

NEMAN National Electrical Manufacturers Association

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AWS American Welding Society

C. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 05100 – Structural Metals 2. Section 05501 – Anchor Bolts 3. Section 05520 – Aluminum Handrailing 4. Section 05530 – Aluminum Grating, Floor Plates, and Cover-Plates 5. Section 11381 – Peristaltic Metering Pumps for Corrosive Service 6. Section 15050 – Piping Systems


7. Division 16 Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Performance data 2. Certified dimension prints showing all necessary details of construction.

3. CIM construction details, including materials of construction for all

components. Include data documenting suitability of the materials of construction of the wetted parts are 100 percent compatible with up to a 15 percent solution of sodium hypochlorite.

4. Motor data in accordance with paragraph 11060-1.03.

5. Anchorage details including anchor bolt torque requirements.

6. Shop drawings of support structure, guide rails, guide rail supports, handrail, connection, connection to existing structure and grating depicting sizes and number for installation at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings, including complete structural support calculations. The support calculations and shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by an Ohio licensed Professional Engineer.


referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

8. A copy of the contract document control diagrams and process and

instrumentation diagrams, with addenda updates, that apply to the equipment in this section marked to show specific changes necessary for the supplied


equipment. If no changes are required, the drawing shall be marked “No Changes Required.”

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Material and equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and requirements. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS The CIM shall be SIEMENS model SWC20F; or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Piping connection on the CIM shall be made of Grade 2 (unalloyed) titanium or Hastaloy C to eliminate the danger of pipe stress or over-tightening of vacuum tubing by service personnel.

B. The propeller shall be an exposed four bladed airfoil design made of Grade 2

(unalloyed) titanium or Hastaloy C.

C. The motor and CIM shall have an integral designed shaft constructed of Hastalloy C.

D. The vacuum chamber shall be made of solid Grade 2 (unalloyed) titanium or Hastaloy C. Titanium or Hastaloy C “sheathed” plastic will not be allowed.

E. All wetted parts of the inductor system or material coming in contact with sodium hypochlorite shall be made of Grade 2 (unalloyed) titanium, or Hastoloy C, or an approved equal. 2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Motor:

1 The motor shall be all 316 stainless steel construction, constant speed, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 20 horsepower, Class F insulation, with air filled windings, permanently lubricated bearings, and a hermetically sealed externally water cooled enclosure.

2. The motor shall have an integral designed Hastaloy C shaft with a

mechanical seal using silicon carbide seal faces.


3. The motor windings shall be hermetically sealed and resin-filled in an all welded 316 stainless steel shell for moisture resistance.

4. Electrical cable connection shall be through a removable water-block lead

connector that is field replaceable. 5. The motor thrust bearing shall be designed for a minimum of 3500 pounds.

B. Power Cables:

1. The CIM shall be furnished complete with power cable. 2. Cable shall have UL and CSA approved insulation.

3. The cable shall be four conductors. 4. The power and control cable shall be attached to the lifting cable at 5-ft

intervals, to keep cables from swinging freely. This attachment shall be removable when lifting the unit.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Systems:

1. A custom stainless steel CIM supporting structure “cage style” shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Drawings.

a. The supporting structure shall be all 316 stainless steel construction

and designed to resist the hydraulic forces in the channel under all flow conditions with a factor of safety of 2.0.

b. All structural design shall be per AISC code. c. The supporting structure shall be installed in a live channel as the

channel cannot be taken out of service. The minimum water level in the channel is shown on the Drawings.

d. The supporting structure shall be fitted with guide rails, winch,

grating platform, and handrail. e. Grating shall conform to Section 05530 Aluminum Grating, Floor

Plates, and Cover-plates. Handrail shall conform to Section 05520, Aluminum Handrailing.


2. Type 316 stainless steel vertical guide rail system shall be furnished and installed for each CIM in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. The guide rail system shall be furnished by the CIM manufacturer and shall be of sufficient length to raise the entire CIM above the mounting elevation.

3. The vertical guide rail shall be anchored to the support structure with

brackets designed (factor of safety of 10) to absorb all static and operating loads derived from placing or operating the mixers with the channel.

4. The vertical guide rail shall be fitted with a bracket which travels along the

guide rail and fully supports the mixer independent of the lifting cable, and a locking device. The locking device and the mounting arrangement for the mixer on the guide rail shall hold the mixer in place without vibration or distortion under operating loads.

5. The vertical guide rail system shall be designed to permit placement and

removal of the mixer into and from the channel without draining the channel. The design of the bracket shall allow the CIM to slide along the guide rail when removing and replacing the unit

6. The lifting device shall be a hand operated winch mounted to the support

structure. The winch shall include a manual stop device and free-fall brake. The winch shall be rated for at least two times the weight of the CIM.

7. Lifting cable shall be 316 stainless steel rated at least two times the weight of the CIM.

B. Mounting Bolts:

1. Type 316 stainless steel anchor and mounting bolts of the size as recommended by the manufacturer and in conformance with specification 05501.

2. Washers and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Vacuum Hose Kit:

1. Vacuum tubing shall be a minimum 1-½” diameter flexible PVC hose suitable for the sodium hypochlorite and shall have OPW Kamlok or approved equal fittings on each end.

2. Hose shall have smooth inside bore with helically wound reinforcement.


3. Hose shall be attached to lifting cable at 5-ft intervals and shall be of a suitable length for each CIM such that there is not excessive hose length. The hose length shall be determined based on the location of each CIM as shown on the contract drawings.

4. Manufacturer shall provide both the hose shank couplers on all hose and

the male adapters which will be connected to the sodium hypochlorite feed line piping including a backpressure valve designed for the application.

2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts shall be provided for each CIM furnished in accordance with this Section:

1. One (1) vacuum hose less fittings per CIM. 2. One (1) set quick disconnect seals per CIM.

2.06 POWER AND CONTROLS A. Mixer Power and Controls: 1. Mixer power will be provided from the existing Secondary Effluent Motor

Control Center (MCC-W). The Electrical CONTRACTOR will provide new starters in the existing MCC to start/stop the mixers. The new starters will contain a DeviceNet communications interface to control the Mixers from the Plant SCADA system. The mixers will also be able to be started/stopped locally from the On/Off/PC control station located near the mixer. Refer to specification 16920 for additional information on the motor starters and to specifications 13320 and 13320 for the SCADA and PLC systems.

2. The mixers shall be configured to operate as described in the Control

Strategies as indicated on the drawings. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Welding: Except as otherwise indicated, welding shall comply with ANSI/AWWA D100 and AWWA C206 and the following:

B. Composite fabricated stainless steel assemblies including any fixed or movable

structural components of mechanical equipment shall have continuous seal welds and shall prevent entrance of air or moisture.

C. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method described in

the American Welding Society’s “Welding Handbook” as supplemental by other AWS standards.


D. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be clamped, supported,

and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall comply with the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall produce a workmanlike appearance with uniform weld contours and dimensions. Sharp corners of material shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32” on the flat. 2.08 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 1300: 1. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section

01730. 2. Motor product data as specified in Section 11060. 3. Installation Certification Form 11000-A as specified in paragraph 11350-3.01. 4. Training Certification Form 11000-B as specified in paragraph 11350-3.03. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The CIM and all necessary appurtenances shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. B. A manufacturer’s representative shall supervise, check or assist in the installation of the CIM. C. Tests: Shop operate, test, and adjust each CIM to ensure proper assembly and operation.

D. Verification of Performance: The CIM manufacturer shall submit results of factory tests of equipment. Testing shall include motor amp draw and maximum vacuum produced. 3.02 TESTING A. After completion of installation, each CIM shall be field tested in accordance with Section 01660 to demonstrate compliance with the requirements as specified.


3.03 TRAINING A. During the commissioning period specified in Section 01662, the CIM manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained person experienced in CIM operation and maintenance for a period of at least 4 hours to train the plant operators. Training shall conform to Section 01664 and shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 11351-1 Wet Pit Chemical Sump Pumps

SECTION 11351

WET PIT CHEMICAL SUMP PUMPS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies nonmetallic vertical wet pit chemical sump pumps for pumping up to 15% sodium hypochlorite. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building

Sump Pump

MLC-C3-51-0006

C. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The pumps shall be selected and designed for intermittent duty pumping of wash down water and sodium hypochlorite having the following properties:

Chemical Maximum solution

concentration, percent Specific gravity,

maximum pH Temperature

range, degrees F

Sodium Hypochlorite

15 1.2 12 32-120

Pumps shall be heavy-duty, vertical, centrifugal wet pit type. The motor and thrust bearings shall be mounted on a bracket above the sump and with the pump’s volute suspended in the sump. D. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: The pump provided under this section shall meet the following operating requirements:

Pump

Rated capacity, gpm 30 Design head, ft 14

Maximum pump speed, rpm 1750 Pump length, ft 5


Motor Horsepower, maximum 0.5 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STANDARDS: This section contains references to the following document. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

Hydraulic Institute Standards ANSI/HI Pump Standards, 2002 B. FACTORY TESTS: Pumps shall be factory tested for performance and hydrostatic pressure as specified in the Hydraulic Institute Test Code. Performance and hydrostatic pressure of pumps identical to those tested may be certified to be in compliance with the factory test by an authorized representative of the pump manufacturer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Head-capacity curves with efficiencies and horsepower requirements for each pump.

2. Certified dimension prints showing all necessary details of construction

including weight of equipment.

3. Pump construction details, including materials of construction for all components. Include data documenting suitability of the materials of construction of the wetted parts for proposed chemical service.


5. Equipment mounting submittal information as specified in paragraph 11002-

1.03.

6. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If


deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


instrumentation diagrams, with addenda updates, that apply to the equipment in this section marked to show specific changes necessary for the supplied equipment. If no changes are required, the drawing shall be marked “No Changes Required.”

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS The pumps shall be a Fybroc 5500, Vanton SG, or equal, modified as necessary to meet requirements of this specification. 2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Casing and impeller PVC

Shaft sleeve/column PVC

Cover plate PVC or Phoenolic

Motor support Epoxy coated cast iron or coated aluminum

2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES A. PUMPS: Pumps shall be capable of handling chemical sump wastes including up to 15% sodium hypochlorite. Each pump shall be mounted on a cover plate and a vapor seal shall be present to minimize emissions of corrosive fumes and protect thrust bearings and motor.


If the shaft is non-wetted, the shaft shall be stainless steel. If wetted, the shaft is to be Hastelloy C. A PVC shaft sleeve or column shall be provided around the shaft. A strainer shall be present on at the pump inlet. The thrust ball bearings shall be located above the cover plate and allow for accurate and easy adjustment of the rotating equipment. Submerged column bearings shall be corrosion resistant, easily accessible, and flushed by external clean water. Submerged column bearings shall be Teflon impregnated carbon, Vanite, or ceramic. Pump shall be mounted on a PVC solid mounting plate provided by the manufacturer. The plate shall be mounted with Hastelloy C bolts (nominal ½” minimum, provided by the CONTRACTOR) as recommended by pump manufacturer and in accordance with Section 11002. B. MOTOR: The pump shall be direct driven by a continuous duty, vertical, solid shaft, electric motor mounted on an epoxy coated cast iron or coated aluminum support stand. The motor shall be non-overloading over the entire pump curve and shall be 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1750 rpm, Type 2 TEFC in accordance with Section 11060.

C. CONTROLS: The sump pump controls shall be provided under Division 16. The sump pump shall be provided with a level switch for pump shutoff and 2 level

switches for high level alarms. Refer to Division 13 for additional information. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730.

2. Certified copies of test logs and performance curves as specified in paragraph

11351-1.02 B. 3. Motor product data as specified in Section 11060.

4. Installation Certification Form 11000-A as specified in paragraph 11351-3.01.

5. Training Certification Form 11000-B as specified in paragraph 11351-3.03.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Each pump shall be aligned, connected and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, each pumping unit shall be field tested in accordance with Section 01660 to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements as specified. 3.03 TRAINING During the commissioning period specified in Section 01662, the pump manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained person experienced in pump operation and maintenance for a period of at least 4 hours to train the plant operators. Training shall conform to Section 01664 and shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 11381-1 Peristaltic Metering Pumps for Corrosive Service

SECTION 11381

PERISTALTIC METERING PUMPS FOR CORROSIVE SERVICE

PART 1–GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies pumps and accessories for feeding sodium hypochlorite for the purpose of effluent disinfection. B. TYPE: The metering pumps shall be of positive displacement, peristaltic type utilizing a flexible tube and spring loaded roller or track. The pump shall be suitable for metering service with adjustable speed drives to control the dosage with accuracy of one percent variation from the pump setting. Each pumping unit shall be complete with pump, drive unit, base, and all appurtenances to provide a complete pumping system for the specific process fluids and design characteristics as specified herein. C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Equipment Description Location No. Secondary Effluent NaOCl Pump 1 MLC-C3-51-0001 Secondary Effluent NaOCl Pump 2 MLC-C3-51-0002 Secondary Effluent NaOCl Pump 3 MLC-C3-51-0003 Final Effluent NaOCl Pump 1 MLC-C5-51-0001 Final Effluent NaOCl Pump 2 MLC-C5-51-0002 NPW NaOCl Pump MLC-C3-51-0007 NaOCl Loop Transfer Pump MLC-C5-51-0003

D. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: 1. GENERAL: a. The metering pumps and equipment shall be designed and selected for pumping the following chemical solution:


Chemical Solution Density1 Concentration (wt/wt) Sodium Hypochlorite 10.21 12.5% 1 Solution density, lb per gal @ 68 degrees F

b. Pump operation shall be automatic. Adjustable speed drives shall be controlled by a 4-20 mA signal. 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The metering pumps shall be designed for continuous duty under the following operating conditions:

Location No. MLC-C3-51-0001, MLC-C3-51-0002, MLC-C3-51-0003 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model CT-16 N/A Watson Marlow Model 720 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 0.2 gpm Average chemical feed rate 0.45 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 1.15 gpm Operating pressure 15 psi Maximum discharge pressure 30 psi Tube Bore 1/2 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase


Location No. MLC-C5-51-0001, MLC-C5-51-0002 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model ChemTUFF FMP-40 N/A Watson Marlow Model 720 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 0.05 gpm Average chemical feed rate 1.0 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 14 gpm Operating pressure 15 psi Maximum discharge pressure 30 psi Pump heads 2 number per pump Tube Bore 1 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase

Location No. MLC-C3-51-0007 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model CT-10 N/A Watson Marlow Model 520 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 0.02 gpm Average chemical feed rate 0.06 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 0.09 gpm Operating pressure 15 psi Maximum discharge pressure 30 psi Tube Bore 3/8 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase


Location No. MLC-C5-51-0003 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model ChemTUFF FMP-30 N/A Watson Marlow Model 620 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 2.0 gpm Average chemical feed rate 4.0 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 4.8 gpm Operating pressure 35 psi Maximum discharge pressure 60 psi Tube Bore 11/16 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title ASTM A743/A743M-88 Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and

Nickel-Base Corrosion-Resistant for General Application

NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements


1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: The equipment shall be located indoors in heated and ventilated areas. Environmental conditions are as described in Division 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The following submittals shall be provided as specified in Section 01300:

1. Shop drawings with complete dimensions and mounting details for the pumps.

2. Catalog data and information including:

a. Maximum and minimum capacity using adjustable speed drive, gpm; maximum and minimum operating speed, rpm; and discharge pressure.

b. Motor and adjustable speed drive type. 3. Materials of construction. 4. Net positive suction head required. 5. Manufacturer’s wiring diagram. 6. Manufacturer’s catalog data on all accessories including pressure regulating

valves, pressure relief valves, flow calibration chambers, and suction assemblies.

7. A copy of the contract document control diagrams and process and instrumentation diagrams relating to the submitted equipment, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required". Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.

8. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and

all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The


remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

9. A copy of all related contract schematic, structural, and mechanical

drawings with all piping, foundations, supports, and layout sizes and dimensions requiring CONTRACTOR confirmation marked.

PART 2–PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS The OWNER believes the following candidate manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s product, nor shall it be construed that a named manufacturer’s standard product will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include Periflo, Watson Marlow, or equal. 2.02 GENERAL The manufacturer shall furnish all metering pump system equipment to complete a properly functioning, integrated package as intended by these specifications. The system shall be factory-assembled to the maximum extent practical. Factory assembly shall include all pumps, motors, bases, drives, and appurtenant valves and fittings. Any component parts not pre-assembled due to packaging and shipping concerns shall be identified and clearly labeled. No field welding will be allowed. All materials used for the metering pumps and accessories shall be designed by the manufacturer to have the necessary strength, stability and stiffness for the intended service. All connections, foundation bolts, plates, nuts, washers and clamps shall be corrosion resistant to the conditions of use. 2.03 MATERIALS The peristaltic metering pumps shall be manufactured of the following materials:

Item Material


Case Die-cast aluminum Track Epoxy coated aluminum Rollers MOS2 filled Nylatron Bearings PTFE coated aluminum Drive shaft 440C stainless steel

Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. PUMP AND DRIVE MECHANISM: Pump shall be of the positive displacement peristaltic type utilizing a flexible tube. The tubing shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) and be held in place on the suction and discharge by a hand adjustable clamp mechanism. Tube clamps requiring tools are not acceptable. Suction and discharge shall be on the same side of the pump head. The tubing shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pump head and without the use of tools. Each pump shall consist of track/pump head cover with safety lock-out switch, screw down retainer mechanism, roller rotor assembly with integral adjustable speed drive. The lock-out switch shall render the drive inoperable when opened. The pump head shall be easily secured to the drive and be self locating. Each pump shall be capable of self priming when completely dry with a suction lift capability of up to 30 feet of water. The pump shall be capable of running dry without damaging effects to the pump or tubing. The pump shall require no check valves or diaphragms and shall not require any dynamic seals in contact with the process fluid. The process fluid shall only be in contact with the inside of the pump tubing. Pumps shall be configured to conform with space constraints as shown in the Contract Drawings. B. TUBING: The manufacturer shall furnish the appropriate hose material for the conditions of use (e.g., extruded Marprene, Neoprene, Silicone, PVC, or Viton). The tubing shall be of 64 shore A durometer. Pump tubing diameter shall be as specified in Part 1.01, Paragraph D, Item 2. C. ROTOR ASSEMBLY AND TRACK:


The rotor assembly shall be equipped with two or four self lubricating geared compression rollers mounted on spring loaded arms. Rotor material of construction shall be as specified in paragraph 11381-2.03.A. Compression rollers shall be symmetrical about the rotor for compression of the hose against the track. The track material shall be as specified in paragraph 11381-2.03.A, and if cast aluminum; shall be factory coated with trimite polyurethane. One roller shall at all times be fully engaged with the tubing providing complete compression to prevent back flow or siphoning. The pumping action shall be created by the occlusion of the pump hose and its subsequent restitution causing a vacuum effect to draw the fluid into the suction side of the hose. Hose occlusion shall be adjustable with a lead screw, which limits the travel of the spring, loaded roller. D. PIPING CONNECTION: Adapters and connective fittings between the flexible tubing and the fixed piping shown on the Contract Drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer for each size tubing that is compatible with each pump. Pumps shall be supplied with a Load Sure tubing element with molded fittings, which shall be self-locating when fitted into the pumphead. Tube element shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) through an angle of 90 degrees and be held in place on the suction and discharge by element fittings. The tubing elements shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pumphead and without the use of tools. 2.05 DRIVE UNITS AND CONTROLS A. ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE: Pumps shall be provided with an integrally mounted adjustable speed drive. The speed setting of the drive shall be continuously adjustable over a minimum 3600:1 operating range. The adjustable speed drive shall be located in the pump casing. Drive motor shall be servo permanent magnet DC with integral gear box. B. MOTORS: Drive shall be rated for continuous 24-hour operation. Pumps shall have non-maintained maximum speed switches for purpose of priming. Pump drives shall be close coupled and self aligning, requiring no flexible couplings. Each pump shall be capable of operating with a range of hose/tubing diameters and thicknesses which may vary depending on the drive size of the pump. The drive enclosure shall be NEMA 4X rated and be factory coated with a corrosion resistant non-reactive (e.g. polyester and/or polyurethane) coating. Drive motors shall be integrally mounted in drive enclosure. C. CONTROL PANEL:


Local controls shall consist of a speed adjusting pushbuttons, a START pushbutton, a STOP pushbutton, and an AUTO/MANUAL switch. Control shall be such that when the drive is running in the MANUAL mode, speed shall be adjusted with the local pushbuttons. In the AUTO mode, the drive shall operate in response to a external run command and 4-20 mA external speed reference signal as shown on drawings. NEMA 4X rated controls shall be provided on the pumps. The controls shall provide as a minimum the following features: 1. Accept a 4-20 mA speed reference input signal 2. Accept dry REMOTE-RUN contact 3. Provide a 4-20 mA drive speed output signal

4. Provide dry contacts rated for 1 amp at 120 V AC for the following status: a. Running b. In AUTO mode c. Alarm e. Leak detector Run/Stop control

D. LEAK DETECTOR Pumps shall be provided with float-type leak sensors for leak detection and pump shut

down in the event of a tubing failure

2.06 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING Pumps shall be suitable for installation on a wall-mounted structural support. 2.07 COATINGS Except as otherwise specified in this Section 11381, equipment shall be shop primed in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900. 2.08 SPARE PARTS The following spare parts components shall be provided: 1. Two lengths of tubing in each size (diameter) as necessary to satisfy the

requirements of paragraph 11381-1.01 D-2. Spare parts shall be tagged and stored as specified in Section 11000. 2.09 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:


1. Operation and maintenance data, as specified in Section 01730, on the

pumps, adjustable speed drives and accessories. 2. Manufacturer’s certification (Form 11000-A per Section 01999) that the

equipment has been properly installed, aligned and tested and meets all requirements for satisfactory performance under the conditions specified.

3. Manufacturer’s instruction certification (Form 11000-B per Section 01999)

that instructions to operators have been completed. 4. Motor data as specified in Section 11060. 5. Pump Test Log as specified in paragraph 11381-3.03. PART 3–EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Pumps shall be aligned, connected, and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION The equipment shall be installed and tested under the direction of factory trained personnel as specified in Section 11000. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. The pumps shall be flow calibrated according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.03 TESTING After installation, the equipment specified in this section shall be completely tested to ensure compliance with operating requirements, varying pumps speeds with speeds and flows recorded in a test log. Field testing shall be in accordance with the testing procedures in Section 01660. Testing shall verify the control strategies specified in Division 17. Following successful testing and commissioning of associated control loops, and prior to pumping chemical solution, the pump and chemical piping shall be emptied and dried. See Section 15050 for additional requirements. 3.04 TRAINING


A minimum of 6 hours of training, as specified in Section 01664, shall be provided. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 11384

SEAL-LESS MAGNETIC DRIVE PUMPS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies seal-less magnetic drive pumps for chemical transfer. Each pumping unit shall be completed with pump, magnetic coupling and motor. B. TYPE: Each pump shall be magnetically coupled with a motor and shall not require a shaft seal between the pump and the motor. Pumps shall be centrifugal type. Torque shall be transmitted by a magnetic field from the magnet attached to the motor through the solid body to the magnet attached to the impeller. The pump housing, impeller spindle, and impeller magnet housing for each pump shall be compatible with the chemical pumped. C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

NaOCl Loop Pump #1 MLC-C3-51-0004

NaOCl Loop Pump #2 MLC-C3-51-0005 D. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: Equipment provided under this section shall conform to the following:

Location No.

Rated design capacity gpm

at BEPa Max.

head, feet Max.

speed, rpm Voltage & phase Horsepower

Discharge pipe size, inches

MLC-C3-51-0004 25 95 1750 460/3 5 1

MLC-C3-51-0005 25 95 1750 460/3 5 1

a Because the pumps are to operate at a constant speed, the pump shall be selected so that the rated condition lies within five percent (based upon capacity) of the best efficiency point (BEP) on the pump’s head-capacity curve.

S. S. No. 5496 11384-1 Seal-Less Magnetic Drive Pumps

E. CHEMICAL DATA: Pumps shall be suitable for the following chemical: 1. Sodium Hypochlorite pumps: a. Chemical: Sodium Hypochlorite b. Concentration: 12.5 percent c. Unit weight: 10.2 lbs. per gallon d. Maximum liquid temperature: 125 degrees F 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

Hydraulic Institute Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, 14th Edition 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be suitable for indoor installation in a wastewater treatment plant. The environmental conditions are specified in Section 01800. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer’s data including materials of construction and equipment weight. 2. Predicted performance curves developed for the specific application. 3. Motor data as specified under paragraph 11060-1.03. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Pumps shall be Fybroc Pumps, Model 2530, Vanton Pumps, Model CGM, or equal.


2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Casing Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or Vinyl Ester

Impeller Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or Vinyl Ester

Shaft Silicon Carbide

Bearings Silicon Carbide

O-ring Viton 2.03 CONSTRUCTION Each pump shall be constructed of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or vinyl ester. Shaft and thrust washers shall be silicon carbide. External fasteners shall be Type 316 silicon carbide. Pump assembly shall provide high chemical resistance with non-metallic solution contact. Impellers shall be fully enclosed for high efficiency. Pump connections shall be an integral 150 pound flange with PVDF or vinyl ester face. 2.04 MOTOR Pumps shall be driven by Type 2 motors as specified in Section 11060. Speed and maximum horsepower shall be as specified in paragraph 11384-1.01 D. 2.05 SPARE PARTS For each type of chemical transfer pumps, the following spare parts shall be provided:

a. One set of pump bearings and O-rings. b. One set of impeller and magnet assembly. Spare parts shall be tagged and stored as specified in paragraph 11000-2.12. 2.06 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Motor data as specified in paragraph 11060-2.05.

2. Applicable operation and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. PART 3--EXECUTION



3.01 INSTALLATION Each pumping unit shall be aligned, connected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, each pumping unit shall be field tested to ensure compliance with the performance requirements as specified. 3.03 FIELD SERVICE A minimum of 4 hours of training shall be provided by the pump manufacturer's service representative. Training shall conform to Section 01666 and shall be certified on Form 11000-B in Section 01999. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the on-site field instruction training with the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR times and dates the OWNER’s operators can attend training.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 11921-1 Automatic Samplers

SECTION 11921

AUTOMATIC SAMPLERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish the installation of an automatic sampling unit complete and operational with motors, control equipment and accessories as shown and specified. B. COORDINATION: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the automatic sampling unit.

2. Notify other contractors in advance of the installation of the automatic sampling unit to provide them with sufficient time for the installation of items included in their contracts that must be installed with, or before, the positive displacement progressing cavity pumps Work.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:

American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). Standards of American Water Works Association, (AWWA). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, (IEEE). National Electrical Code, (NEC). Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association, (NEMA). National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).


A. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS:

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience producing substantially similar equipment and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years.


B. COMPONENT SUPPLY: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component

manufacturer from a single automatic sampling unit manufacturer.

2. The automatic sampling unit equipment manufacturer shall provide and approve all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section.

3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the automatic sampling unit manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit the following:

1. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including:

dimensions, materials, size, weight, and performance data.

2. Shop Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, installation details and wiring diagrams.

B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

1. Submit complete Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Information.

C. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATION: Furnish a lubricant specification for the type and grade necessary to meet the requirements of the equipment. Lubricant shall be available from a local source. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:

1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work.


B. STORAGE AND PROTECTION:

1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

C. ACCEPTANCE AT SITE:

1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. DESIGN CRITERIA:

1. The sampler shall be designed for continuous operation and will be operated continuously under normal service.

2. The secondary effluent sampler equipment shall be provided to meet the following performance and design requirements:

Refrigerated Sampler Size (HxWxD): Maximum 51 x 28 x 33 in. Weight: < 170 lb. Bottle 6 Gallon Polyethene Power requirements: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1 Ph Refrigerator Body Vinyl-Coated Steel or Linear Low Density Polyethylene Operational Temperature: -14 to 120 F (-29 to 49C)

Pump Intake Suction Tubing: Flexible 3/8” Vinyl Pump Tubing Life: 1,000,000 Pump Counts Maximum Suction Lift: 27’ Sample Volume Repeatability:

+/- 5%

Line Velocity @ Head Min 3.0 ft/sec @ 3 ft


Controller

Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Internal Clock Accuracy: 0.007% Number Composite Samples: 1 to 400 Flow Meter Signal Inputs: 4-20 mA input Digital Alarms: 4 programmable outputs; 5V, 100 mA Sample Frequency: 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes, in 1-minute

increments. 1 to 9,999 flow pulses. Sampling Modes: Uniform time, flow proportioned, flow paced. Programmable Sample Vol: 10 to 9,990 ml in 1 ml increments. Sample Retries: If no sample is detected, up to 3 attempts; user

selectable. Rinse Cycles: Automatic rinsing of suction line up to 3 rinses for each

sample collection. Controller Diagnostics: Tests for RAM, ROM, and pump

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. MANUFACTURERS: 1. Hach 2. Teledyne ISCO 3. Or equal

2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. REFRIGERATED LIQUID SAMPLER

1. Provide a sampling unit integrally connected to a refrigerator. Unit shall incorporate a full container shut-off (Hach #8847 or equal), composite tube support (Hach #8986 or equal), Teflon/stainless steel strainer (Hach #926 or equal), and multi-purpose half cable (Hach #541 or equal). 2.04 SPARE PARTS

B. Manufacturer shall furnish a list of additional recommended spare parts for an operating period of one year. The list shall describe each part, the quantity recommended, and the unit price of the part. OWNER shall purchase all, some, or none of the recommended spare parts at his option.


C. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the Project. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR shall verify that structures, pipes and equipment are compatible.

B. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s representative shall check and approve the installation prior to operation. Manufacturer's representative shall field test and calibrate the equipment to assure that the system operates to the OWNER’S satisfaction.

B. Installation shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of grease and oil, recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Support piping independent of unit. 3.03 START UP AND TEST


B. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. All equipment will be given running tests by CONTRACTOR at the job Site following installation of the equipment and controls. Should the tests indicate any malfunction, CONTRACTOR shall make any necessary repairs and adjustments. Such tests and adjustments shall be repeated until, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the installation is complete and the equipment is functioning properly and accurately, and is ready for permanent operation.

B. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test services and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of two site visits, minimum 8 hours on-Site for each visit. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. Subsequent visits shall be for checking the completed installation, start-up and training of the system. Manufacturer’s representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the Engineer and verify that the equipment conforms to the


requirements. Representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

C. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in CONTRACTOR’S bid price.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies general requirements which are applicable to all mechanical equipment. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for ensuring that all mechanical equipment meets the requirements of this section in addition to the specific requirements of each individual equipment specification section. B. EQUIPMENT LISTS: Equipment lists, presented in these specifications and as specified on the drawings, are included for the convenience of the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR and are not complete listings of all equipment, devices and material required to be provided under this contract. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare his own material and equipment takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of this project manual. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARRANGEMENT: The arrangement of equipment shown on the drawings is based upon information available to the OWNER at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions conforming to a specific manufacturer. The drawings are, in part, diagrammatic, and some features of the illustrated equipment installation may require revision to meet actual submitted equipment installation requirements; these may vary significantly from manufacturer to manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall, in determining the cost of installation, include these differences as part of his bid proposal. Structural supports, foundations, connected piping, valves, and electrical conduit specified may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment actually provided. No additional payment shall be made for such revisions and alterations. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document cites other standards, such standards are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, has been discontinued or has been replaced.

Reference Title

ABMA Std 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ABMA Std 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

ANSI B1.1 Unified Screw Threads


ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 125

ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Log Screws

ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts

C. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY – NOT USED D. BALANCE: Unless specified otherwise, for all machines 10 HP and greater, all rotating elements in motors, pumps, blowers and centrifugal compressors shall be fully assembled, including coupling hubs, before being statically and dynamically balanced. All rotating elements shall be balanced to the following criteria:

NW16=e

Where:

e = imbalance, ounce-inches, maximum. W = Weight of the balanced assembly, pounds mass N = Maximum operational speed, rpm

Where specified, balancing reports, demonstrating compliance with this requirement, shall be submitted as product data.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS Flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this section shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Pipe threads shall conform in dimension and limits of size to ANSI B1.1, coarse thread series, Class 2 fit. Threaded flanges shall have a standard taper pipe thread conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. Unless otherwise specified, flanges shall be flat faced. Flange assembly bolts shall be heavy pattern, hexagonal head, machine bolts with heavy pattern, hot pressed, hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Threads shall be Unified Screw Threads, Standard Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A and 2B, ANSI B1.1. Materials shall comply with Section 15050. 2.02 BEARINGS Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. Each bearing shall be rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA Methods of Evaluating Load Ratings of Ball and Roller Bearings. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours. The rating life shall be determined using the maximum equipment operating speed. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, shall be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic alemite type. Oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient size to safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees C and shall be equipped with a filler pipe and an external level indicator gage. All bearings accessible to touch, and located within 7 feet measured vertically from floor or working level or within 15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, fixed ladders or other access structures, shall either incorporate bearing housings with sufficient cooling to maintain surface temperature at 65 degrees C or less for continuous operation at bearing rated load and a 50 degrees C ambient temperature or shall be provided with appropriate shielding shall be provided that will prevent inadvertent human contact. 2.03 V-BELT ASSEMBLIES Unless otherwise specified, V-belt assemblies shall be Dodge Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Dodge Taper-lock bushings, Wood's Ultra V-belts with matching Ultra-V sheaves and Wood's Sure-Grip bushings, or equal.


Sheaves and bushings shall be statically balanced. Additionally, sheaves and bushings which operate at a peripheral speed of more than 5500 feet per minute shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves shall be separately mounted on their bushings by means of three pull-up grub or cap tightening screws. Bushings shall be key seated to the drive shaft. Belts shall be selected for not less than 150 percent of rated driver horsepower and, where two sheaves sizes are specified, shall be capable of operating with either set of sheaves. Belts shall be of the antistatic type where explosion proof equipment is specified. 2.04 PUMP SHAFT SEALS A. GENERAL: Seals for water and wastewater pump shafts shall be either stuffing box or mechanical seals. For fluids other than water or municipal wastewater, the recommendations of the seal manufacturer shall be followed for selection of appropriate seals. Unless specified otherwise, stuffing boxes and mechanical seals shall conform to the requirements set forth in this paragraph. B. MECHANICAL SEALS: Where mechanical seals are specified, the seal shall be of a nondestructive (nonfretting) type requiring no wearing sleeve for the shaft. Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished with no reduction in size through the seal area. Mechanical seals shall be the split mechanical type, requiring no field assembly, other than assembly around the shaft and insertion into the pump. Metal parts shall be Type 316 or 316L stainless steel. Springs shall be Hastalloy C. Rotary faces shall be ceramic or silicon carbide. Stationary faces shall be ceramic carbon or silicon carbide. Elastomers shall be ethylene propylene or fluorocarbon. Mechanical seals shall be suitable for operation under full vacuum to 200 percent of the maximum specified operating pressure, but in any event not less than 200 psig. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals for pumping equipment shall be self-aligning, self-centering, single, Chesterton 442, or equal. Mechanical seals for all pumps (except lineshaft pumps where the seal barrier fluid is used for lineshaft bearing lubrication) shall be fitted with SpiralTrac Version F, N or D, as recommended by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada. Boxes for mechanical seals on pumps for contaminated water service (sludge, grit, wastewater, scum, reclaimed water, etc.) shall be drilled and tapped for connection of a clean water purge supply. C. SHAFT PACKING: Where shaft packing is specified, stuffing boxes shall be tapped to permit introduction of seal liquid and shall hold a minimum of five rows of packing. Stuffing boxes shall be face attached. Stuffing box and shaft shall be suitable for field installation, without machining or other


modifications, of the mechanical seal specified in paragraph 11000-2.04.B for the applicable pump and operating conditions. Unless otherwise specified, lantern rings shall be bronze or Teflon, packing shall be die-molded packing rings of non-asbestos material suitable for the intended service and as recommended by the manufacturer, and glands shall be bronze, two piece split construction. Lantern rings shall be of two-piece construction and shall be provided with tapped holes to facilitate removal. Lantern rings shall be drilled and tapped 1/4 NC-20. The impeller end of the packing on all but line shaft pumps with external source water lubricated bearings shall be fitted with a SpiralTrac, Version P packing protection system as manufactured by EnviroSeal Engineering Products, Ltd, Nova Scotia, Canada.

The section of each shaft or impeller hub that extends through or into the stuffing box shall be fitted with a replaceable stainless steel sleeve with a Brinell hardness of not less than 500. The sleeve shall be held to the shaft to prevent rotation and shall be gasketed to prevent leakage between the shaft and the sleeve. Minimum shaft sleeve thickness shall be 3/8 inch. 2.05 COUPLINGS Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment sections, equipment with a driver greater than 1/2 HP, and where the input shaft of a driven unit is directly connected to the output shaft of the driver, shall have its two shafts connected by a flexible coupling which can accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment and end float, and which cushions shock loads and dampens torsional vibrations. The flexible member shall consist of a tire with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber. The flexible member shall be attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws, and the flanges shall be attached to the stub shaft by means of taper lock bushings which shall give the equivalent of a shrunk-on fit. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the driver and the driven unit. Each coupling shall be sized and provided as recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service. Where torque or horsepower capacities of couplings of the foregoing type is exceeded, Thomas-Rex, Falk Steel Flex, or equal, couplings will be acceptable provided they are sized in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and sizing data are submitted. They shall be installed in conformance to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. 2.06 GUARDS Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards which meet all applicable OSHA requirements. Guards shall be fabricated of 14-gage steel, 1/2-13-15 expanded metal screen, unless otherwise specified, to provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard. Guards shall be galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise specified, and shall be designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. Reinforced holes shall be provided. Lube fittings shall be extended through guards.


2.07 CAUTION SIGNS Equipment with guarded moving parts which operates automatically or by remote control shall be identified by signs reading "CAUTION - AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT MAY START AT ANY TIME". Signs shall be constructed of fiberglass material, minimum 1/8 inch thick, rigid, suitable for post mounting. Letters shall be white on a red background. The sign size and pattern shall be as shown on the drawings. Signs shall be installed near guarded moving parts. 2.08 GAGE TAPS, TEST PLUGS AND GAGES Gage taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge sides of pumps, blowers and compressors. Pressure gages shall be provided where specified. Gage taps, test plugs, and gages shall be as specified in Divisions 13 and 15. 2.09 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be provided on each item of equipment and shall contain the specified equipment name or abbreviation and equipment number. Equipment nameplates shall be engraved or stamped stainless steel and fastened to the equipment in an accessible and visible location with stainless steel screws or drive pins. 2.10 LUBRICANTS The CONTRACTOR shall provide for each item of mechanical equipment a supply of the required lubricant adequate to last through the specified commissioning period. Lubricants shall be of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer and shall be products of the OWNER’s current lubricant supplier. The CONTRACTOR shall limit the various types of lubricants by consolidating them, with the equipment manufacturer's approval, into the least number of different types. Not less than 90 days before the date shown in his construction schedule for starting, testing and adjusting equipment (Section 01660), the CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with three copies of a list showing the required lubricants, after consolidation, for each item of mechanical equipment. The list shall show estimated quantity of lubricant needed for a full year's operation, assuming the equipment will be operating continuously. 2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts shall be designed for lateral forces for both pullout and shear in accordance with the provisions of Section 05501. Unless otherwise stated in the individual equipment specifications, anchor bolt materials shall conform to the provisions of Section 05501. 2.12 SPARE PARTS Spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections, shall be stored in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parts shall be tagged by project equipment number and identified by part number, equipment manufacturer, and subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts subject to deterioration, such as ferrous metal items and electrical


components, shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches high, or 3 feet in length shall be stored in a wooden box with a hinged wooden cover and locking hasp. Hinges shall be strap type. The box shall be painted and identified with stenciled lettering stating the name of the equipment, equipment numbers, and the words "spare parts." A neatly typed inventory of spare parts shall be taped to the underside of the cover. PART 3--EXECUTION Installation of equipment accessories included in this section shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification section.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11002 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, GROUTING AND INSTALLATION PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies minimum requirements for equipment supports, including concrete housekeeping pads, equipment bases, supports, anchorage, and accessories with weights greater than 200 pounds. If conflict exists between this section and requirements of individual equipment manufacturers, the more restrictive requirements shall prevail. Vibration isolation systems are specified in Section 11021. B. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all supports, anchorage, and mounting of all equipment, unless otherwise specified in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and industry standards requirements. Each piece of equipment shall be anchored to resist the greater of the maximum lateral and vertical forces required by the local governing code or by the manufacturer of the equipment, whichever is greater. This force shall be considered acting at the center of gravity of the piece under consideration. No equipment shall be anchored to vertical structural elements without written approval of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all elements required to resist the calculated forces described herein or required by the equipment manufacturer. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ANSI/HI 1.3.4 Centrifugal Pumps, Horizontal Baseplate Design

ANSI/HI 1.4 Centrifugal Pumps – Installation, Operation and Maintenance

ANSI/HI 2.4 Vertical Pumps – Installation, Operation and Maintenance

API RECOMMENDED PRACTICE 686

Recommended Practices for Machinery Installation and Installation Design

ASTM C531 Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.

ASTM C579 Compressive Strength of (Method/B) Chemical Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings.

ASTM C638 Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM C882 Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete

ASTM C884 Thermal Compatibility Between Concrete and an Epoxy-Resin Overlay

ASTM C1181 Creep of Concrete in Compression

ASTM D2471 Gel Time and Peak Exothermic Temperature of Reacting Thermosetting Resins

SSPC Society for Protective Coatings Specifications, Vol. 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the


specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Shop drawings for all equipment bases and anchorage details.

3. Machine and equipment base installation schedule with manufacturers’

anchor bolt torque requirements, as specified in paragraph 11002-2.01.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL All equipment shall be mounted on concrete housekeeping pads. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and drivers shall be rigidly mounted on a common cast iron or fabricated steel baseplate, unless otherwise specified, grouted into place on the housekeeping pads. Under no circumstances shall equipment supports be grouted directly to concrete slabs or floors. Bases for equipment shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise specified. Prior to initiating any installation efforts, the CONTRACTOR shall produce a machine base schedule containing the expected dates for setting anchor bolts, casting housekeeping pads, preparation of housekeeping pads for grouting, grouting, and final anchor bolt clamping for each item of equipment. The schedule shall list the equipment, by equipment number, and shall be accompanied by written verification of anchor bolt clamping torque from the equipment manufacturer. Installation practices shall follow the guidance presented in Chapters 4 and 5 of API Recommended Practice 686, unless superseded by more restrictive requirements of these specifications or manufacturer requirements. 2.02 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS Concrete housekeeping pads for equipment and floor penetrations shall be at least 2 inches larger in plan on all sides than the base and not less than 6 inches above the finished floor elevation, and shall be shaped to drain liquids away from the base. Housekeeping pad details shall follow the requirements set forth in Figure A-4 of API 686 unless superseded by more restrictive requirements of these specifications or the requirements of the equipment manufacturer. All conduits, piping connections, drains, etc. serving the equipment, shall be enclosed by the concrete housekeeping pad. Unless otherwise specified, no conduits, piping connections, drains, etc., will be accepted which rise directly from the floor.


2.03 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, mounting bases for equipment 20 horsepower and larger shall be a minimum of 1 inch thick. All bases shall have edges bearing on the grout surface rounded to a radius of not less than 2-inches to avoid producing stress risers on the grouted foundation. Grout pouring holes (minimum 4 inches in diameter) shall be provided in all bases and all bases shall have grout release holes. Except where vibration isolation systems are specified, all bases shall be grouted as specified in this section. Internal stiffeners shall be provided and shall be designed to allow free flow of grout from one section of the base to another. The minimum acceptable opening in cross-bracing and stiffeners shall be 2-inches high by 6-inches in length. All welds shall be continuous and free from skips, blow holes, laps and pockets.

Equipment bases for horizontal pumps shall conform to the requirements of this section, ANSI/HI 1.3.4, API 610 (paragraph 3.3), and shall provide common support for the pump and motor (and flywheel, if one is specified). In the event of conflict, the requirements of this section shall govern. Eight positioning jackscrews shall be provided for all drivers and flywheels (if specified) for all horizontal pump baseplates. All bases for horizontal pumps shall be equipped with jackscrews for positioning and leveling the base prior to grouting.

Mounting holes for anchor bolts in the bases, mounting blocks, or sole plates shall be drilled and not burned out and they shall not be open slots. All mounting studs shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. Anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. A nonseize or nongalling compound shall be used on all threads. Mounting pads for equipment shall be machined after all welding and stress relieving and shall be coplanar to 0.002 in. in all directions. Mounting pads shall extend not less than 1-inch on all sides beyond the position for the equipment. B. TYPE I BASES: Type I bases shall be structural steel bases with thickened steel pads for doweling, unless otherwise specified. The bases shall be rectangular in shape for equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases, which may be "T" or "L" shaped to accommodate the equipment drive and accessories. Perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Terminations requiring connections to the base shall be nuts welded to the bottom side of the base and plugged with cork, plastic plugs or grease, or acorn nuts. Grout holes shall be provided for the bases of all equipment where vibration isolation is not specified. C. TYPE II/III BASES: Type II and Type III bases, which are applicable for vibration isolation mounting, are specified in Section 11021.


D. TYPE IV BASES – NOT USED

E. SOLEPLATES – NOT USED

F. MOUNTING BLOCKS – NOT USED 2.04 GROUT FOR EQUIPMENT BASES A. EPOXY GROUT: Unless otherwise specified, grout for equipment bases shall be non-shrinking epoxy grout conform to the following requirements:

Test Result

ASTM C531 Shrinkage shall be less than 0.080% and thermal expansion less than 17 x 10-6 in/in/oF

ASTM C579 Strength shall be a minimum of 12,000 psi in 7 days when tested by method B, modified.

ASTM C882 Bond strength to Portland concrete shall be greater than 2000 PSI

ASTM C884 Epoxy grout shall pass the thermal compatibility test when overlayed on Portland cement concrete

ASTM D638 Tensile strength shall not be less than 1700 PSI. Modulus of elasticity shall not be less than 1.8 x 106 psi

ASTM C1181 Creep of the epoxy grout shall be less than 0.005 in/in with the test at 70oF and 140oF with a load of 400 psi

ASTM D2471 Peak exothermic temperature shall not exceed 110oF when a specimen 6" diameter x 12" high is used. Gel time shall be a least 150 minutes

The vehicle shall be a two-component (liquid and hardener) system designed to yield the

above characteristics when combined with the manufacturer’s recommended aggregate system. The grout shall be suitable for supporting precision machinery subject to high impact and shock loading in industrial environments while exposed to elevated temperature as high as 150oF, with a load of 1200 PSI. Aggregate for equipment base grout shall be as furnished by the manufacturer of the epoxy grout mix. B. CEMENTIOUS GROUT: Cementious grout for use with equipment supports for equipment rated 5 horsepower and smaller or weighing less than 1000 pounds, whichever is less, may be as specified in Section 03600. Procedures for leveling and clamping equipment shall be as specified in this section.


2.05 EPOXY PRIMER

The epoxy primer shall be a lead free, chrome free, rust inhibitive, two-component epoxy primer specifically designed for use on metal substrates and in conjunction with epoxy grout. The epoxy primer shall be a product of the epoxy grout manufacturer. 2.06 ANCHOR BOLTS

Anchor bolts shall be stainless steel, set in PVC sleeves, unless otherwise specified. Sleeves shall allow a free length projection of not less than fifteen bolt diameters above the concrete required to develop the strength of the bolt. Projection above the nut on the baseplate shall be no more than 3/4 –inch. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

A. Results of grout strength tests, as specified in paragraph 11002-3.02 E. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

Pumps shall be installed in accordance with this section and ANSI/HI 1.4 and ANSI/HI 2.4. Grouting of equipment bases shall take place prior to connecting any field piping or electrical and instrumentation systems. Unless the ENGINEER accepts an alternate installation procedure in writing, baseplates shall be grouted with the equipment removed. Equipment that is not mounted on vibration isolators shall be anchored directly to the supporting floor system. In addition to the anchorage, all such equipment shall be internally designed so that all static and moving parts are anchored to the supporting framework to resist the all imposed forces. All forces shall be transmitted to the base in order to be anchored as required. Connecting piping with flexible connections and/or expansion joints shall be anchored such that the intended uses of these joints are maintained in the piping system without imposing strain on the equipment connections. Where the equipment manufacturer requires a rigid connection between the machine and connecting piping systems (generally, this will be higher discharge head pumps), the flexible coupling shown may be deleted and the CONTRACTOR shall install the equipment in the following manner:

1. The equipment housekeeping pad shall be prepared as specified under paragraph 11002-3.02 B.


2. The baseplate or leveling blocks supporting the equipment shall be installed, leveled, and grouted in place as specified.

3. The equipment shall be installed, aligned and dowelled in place as

specified.

4. The piping shall be installed and aligned to the equipment connections and the field piping connections without welding one of the joints for one section of pipe between the equipment connection and the field piping and all valving. All flanged joints shall be bolted up and pressure tested.

5. All piping shall be fully supported by supports designed to accept their full

weight.

6. The final sections of piping shall be aligned with the equipment and field connections without the use of jacks, chain falls or other devices to force it into alignment.

7. The final piping joints shall be welded only after the previous steps have

been completed and accepted by the ENGINEER. Conduit and piping for future equipment shall be capped flush with the floor or concrete pad in such a manner to allow future connection. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate location of electrical conduit and piping penetrations within the concrete pad and equipment base. All penetrations shall stub-up on the same side of the equipment as required for connection to the equipment. Equipment drains shall be located as required for drainage from equipment. Prior to commencing equipment installation work, the CONTRACTOR shall cause the manufacturer of the epoxy grout to be used for equipment installation to conduct a training school for the workmen to be using the product. The school shall be not less than 4 hours in length and shall cover all aspects of using the products, from mixing to application. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for this portion of the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. ANCHOR BOLTS:

Prior to concrete placement, anchor bolts shall be accurately set according to the manufacturer’s foundation drawings and firmly secured to prevent shifting during concrete placement. The bolts shall be embedded in the structural concrete to develop the full strength of the bolt. Concrete in housekeeping pads cannot be used for this purpose. All anchor bolts shall be dimensionally checked against the foundation drawings for proper length, diameter, thread length, thread projection, etc., by a representative of the equipment manufacturer prior


to placing concrete. Prior to placing concrete for the housekeeping pad, plastic sleeves shall be placed around each bolt to provide for minor adjustment of bolt position prior to grouting. Sleeves shall be filled with a pliable, non-bonding material such as silicon rubber or wax to prevent contact between the concrete or grout and the anchor bolt. Bolt threads and projections in the sleeves (refer to paragraph 11002-2.06) above the structural slab shall be protected in the sleeve by heavily greasing or waxing the threads and shank with paste wax and wrapping with plastic sheeting. The protective wrapping shall be firmly secured with tie wires. The protective wrapping shall be removed prior to placing the grout. The equipment manufacturer shall recommend the size of the anchor bolts for the equipment and shall also furnish the recommended tightening torque for the nuts; however, the minimum size bolt shall be 3/4 inch for equipment rated 20 to 100 horsepower, 1 inch for equipment rated over 100 to 300 horsepower and 1-1/4 inches for 300 to 500 horsepower. Anchor bolts for equipment rated over 500 horsepower shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and as approved by the ENGINEER.

B. CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD PREPARATION: After the concrete is fully cured (sample cylinders, as specified in Section 03300, shall be taken and tested for all housekeeping pads supporting equipment weighing more than 1000 pounds), the housekeeping pad shall be chipped approximately 3/4" - 1", to remove all laitance and defective or weak concrete. A light duty, hand held pneumatic chipper with a chisel type tool shall be used for chipping the foundation. Abrasive blast, bush-hammer, jack hammers with sharp chisels or needle gun preparation of concrete surfaces to be grouted are not acceptable. The amount of concrete removed shall be such that the final baseplate elevation results in not less than 3" of grout between the surface of the housekeeping pad and lower baseplate flange.

All edges shall be chamfered 2" to 4" at a 45-degree angle. All dust, dirt, chips, oil, water, and any other contaminants shall be removed and the surface protected with plastic sheeting until grouting. The grout contact surface on the housekeeping pad shall be coated with one coat (not more than 5 mils) of catalyzed epoxy resin.

C. EQUIPMENT BASES: All surfaces of equipment bases to be in contact with epoxy grout shall be cleaned to

SSPC SP-6 and shall be primed with epoxy primer within 8 hours of cleaning. D. LEVELING AND SHIMMING: All machinery shall be mounted and leveled by millwrights. All equipment bases and equipment shall be leveled against steel surfaces. Use of other materials for leveling purposes is strictly and specifically prohibited. Unless otherwise specified, baseplates weighing less than 1000 pounds shall be leveled on stainless steel blocks 4 inches square and 1-1/2 inches thick with a hole drilled in the center for the anchor bolt, placed under the base at every anchor bolt. Jackscrews acting on flat steel plates shall be used for heavier components. Leveling shall be by


use of leveling blocks machined flat on all horizontal surfaces and measuring not less than 4 inches wide horizontally and shims that shall extend not less than three inches beyond the base of the equipment. Leveling blocks shall be coated with a light oil just prior to beginning the leveling and grouting work. Using precut stainless steel shims coated with a light oil between the base and the steel blocks at the anchor bolts, the CONTRACTOR shall level the equipment baseplates against the anchor bolt nuts to a maximum tolerance of 0.005 in./ft or as otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer, if more stringent. Mounting surfaces for equipment shall be coplanar within 0.002 in. in any direction. The shims shall be placed so the tabs on the shims are easily accessible. A minimum of four shims per anchor bolt shall be used. The total shim thickness at each anchor bolt shall be at least 0.015 inch. Leveling shall be against anchor bolts prior to final grouting.

Leveling equipment shall be precision surveying equipment. Machinists’ spirit levels will not be permitted for leveling purposes for any base plate or equipment foundation with a plan dimension greater than 4 feet. Leveling nuts may be used for mounting equipment less than 500 pounds. The CONTRACTOR shall level the equipment against the anchor bolt nuts to a maximum tolerance of 0.005 in./ft or as otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer, if more stringent. Wedges will not be allowed.

E. GROUTING: Grout forms shall be built of minimum of 3/4" thick waterproof plywood and shall be securely braced (minimum brace size shall be 2" x 4"). Forms shall provide a minimum of 2" hydrostatic head above the final elevation of the grout, to assist in flow during installation. Forms must be coated with three coats of paste wax on all areas that will come in contact with the grout to prevent the grout from bonding to the forms. Forms shall be waxed before assembly to prevent accidental application of wax to surfaces where the grout is to bond. Before any forms are installed, all concrete surfaces that will contact epoxy grout shall be free from any foreign material, such as oil, sand, water, grease, etc. Forms shall be liquid-tight. Any open spaces or cracks in forms, or at the joint between forms and the foundation, shall be sealed off, using sealant. All outside vertical and horizontal edges of the grout shall have 45-degree chamfers. Blockouts shall be provided at all shimming and leveling nut positions to allow removal of shimming equipment after the grout has cured. Jackscrews shall be coated with a light oil or other acceptable bondbreaking compound. The 45-degree chamfer strip shall be located at the final elevation of the grout. The final elevation of the grout on baseplates with exposed I-beam or C-channel supports shall be at the top of the lower support flange. The top of the grout, on baseplates with solid sides, shall be 1.0 inch above the bottom of the baseplate. The grout's final elevation shall not be so high as to bond the anchor bolt nut and washer. The epoxy resin and hardener shall be mixed in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. Aggregate shall be slowly added to the mixer one bag at a


time. The grout should be mixed only long enough to wet out all the aggregate. Grout shall be placed at the center of one end of the baseplate and worked toward the ends in such a manner as to force the air out from beneath the baseplate and out the vent holes, to eliminate voids. The grout shall be placed in a manner that avoids air entrapment using a head box to pour grout into the grout holes. When the head box is moved to the next grout hole, a 6-inch high standpipe shall be placed over the grout hole and filled with grout. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to never allow the grout to fall below the baseplate level once the grout has made contact with the baseplate. Grout placement shall be continuous until the all portions of the space beneath the baseplate have been filled. Subsequent batches of grout shall be prepared so as to be ready when the preceding batch has been placed. Under no circumstances shall the grouting operation be halted because of lack of grout mix. After the entire baseplate is full, 6-inch high standpipes shall be maintained over each grout hole, to continue purging of air. When the grout has started to take an initial set (determined by a noticeable increase in temperature and no flow of grout at the vent holes) the standpipes shall be removed and excess grout cleaned from all surfaces. A grout sample shall be taken for each piece of equipment to be grouted. The sample shall be placed in a cylinder of sufficient size to yield three 2"x2"x2" test samples. The samples shall be tagged with the equipment number, ambient temperature at the time of placement. The samples shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Once the epoxy grout cylinder has been completely filled, it shall be placed next to the foundation of the equipment being grouted and allowed to cure for 48 hours. After 48 hours, the test cylinder shall be tested in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s recommendations by an independent testing laboratory. The results shall be reported directly to the ENGINEER. Forms shall be removed only after the grout has cured sufficiently and upon specific permission from the ENGINEER. F. COMPLETION: Upon acceptance by the ENGINEER and the equipment manufacturer’s representative after the grout has reached sufficient strength, the shims shall be removed, or leveling nuts or jack screws backed off to allow the grout to fully support the equipment base. Removal of extended shimming material (direct mounted baseplates weighing 1000 pounds or less) shall be by sledge hammer, taking care not to damage the grout. The anchor bolts shall be torqued, using calibrated indicating torque wrenches, to develop the full clamping force required by the equipment manufacturer. Anchor bolts shall be torqued in increments of not more than 25 percent of final value in an alternating pattern to avoid stress concentration on the grout surface. Pockets for access to shims, mounting blocks, or leveling nuts shall be filled with grout mix and pointed after the anchor bolts have been torqued to final values. **END OF SECTION**

SECTION 11021

VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies vibration isolation system requirements for mechanical equipment. Additional vibration isolation system requirements are provided in individual mechanical equipment specification sections. Mountings which are rigidly anchored to the supporting floor system are specified in Section 11002. B. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS: Unless the equipment incorporates unit construction using an integral rigid frame or is specified otherwise, each item of mechanical equipment, along with its drive unit, shall be mounted on a rigid steel or steel and concrete base. Cast iron bases are not permitted when equipment is furnished with a vibration isolation system. Where specified, the equipment, including the base, shall be mounted on or suspended from vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the supporting structure. Vibration isolation available internally in the equipment will not be considered equivalent and shall not be provided when vibration isolation as specified herein is required. Normally provided internal vibration isolators shall be replaced with rigid supports in such cases. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with unit weight distribution to produce reasonably uniform deflections at each support. Unless otherwise specified, bases, isolators, and deflections shall be as specified in Table 27, ASHRAE CH-52. C. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall cause all vibration isolation systems, including the isolators, seismic restraints and flexible connectors between the isolated equipment and associated piping, ducting and/or electrical work, to be designed by a professional ENGINEER qualified in this type of work. This provision, however, shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of his overall responsibility for the work. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the ENGINEER’s calculations for design of the vibration isolation systems, stamped with the ENGINEER’s seal. Flexible connectors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the mechanical equipment item in accordance with the recommendations of the vibration isolation systems.

D. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS – NOT USED


1.02 REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

ASHRAE CH 52 Handbook, HVAC Systems and Applications, Sound and Vibration Control

OBC Ohio Building Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:



2 Scale drawing of Type D mounting hanger showing the 30-degree arc capability.

3. Manufacturer and manufacturer’s type designation. 4. Manufacturer’s catalog data. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Vibration isolation mountings and seismic restraints shall be as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., Korfund Dynamics Corporation, Consolidated Kinetics Corporation, or equal. Flexible connectors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the mechanical equipment item in accordance with the recommendations of the vibration isolation system engineer. 2.02 BASES A. CURB MOUNTED BASES: Curb mounted equipment where vibration isolation is required, principally roof top heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top and bottom members shall contain cadmium-plated springs having a 1-inch minimum deflection with 50 percent additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch so as not to interfere with spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible neoprene connection duct joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. B. TYPE I BASES: Type I bases shall be structural steel bases. The bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases, which may be "T" or "L" shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 1 inch. C. TYPE II BASES: Type II bases shall be steel members used to cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. All members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent


strains in the equipment. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a clearance of 1 inch below the base. D. TYPE III BASES: Type III bases shall be rectangular foundations consisting of concrete filled structural steel beam or channel forms. Bases for split case pumps shall be of sufficient size to provide support for suction and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12 inches unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer or required for mass or rigidity. In general, base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 inches. Forms shall include, as a minimum, concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2-inch bars or angles welded in place on 6-inch centers each way in a layer 1 1/2 inches above the bottom or additional steel as required by structural conditions. Forms shall be provided with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1-inch clearance below the base. E. TYPE IV BASES: Type IV bases are specified in Section 11002. They are cast iron bases and, as specified in paragraph 11021-1.01 B, are not permitted when equipment is furnished with vibration isolators. 2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS A. TYPE A MOUNTINGS: Type A mountings shall be double deflection neoprene mountings having a minimum static deflection of 0.35 inches. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and shall have friction pads both top and bottom so that they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes and anchor bolts shall be provided where required to resist lateral migration. Resilient washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent contact between the bolts and the equipment support bases. On equipment such as small vent sets, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the overhang. B. TYPE B MOUNTINGS: Type B mountings shall be free-standing spring type isolators laterally stable without any housing and complete with 1/4-inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base and the support. Mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel.


C. TYPE C MOUNTINGS: Type C mountings shall be Type B mountings with a housing having vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Type C mountings shall be provided for equipment with operating weight different from the installed weight, such as chillers, boilers, etc., and equipment exposed to the wind, such as cooling towers. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection and shall be located between the supporting steel and roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring to prevent interference with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations. Mountings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel. D. TYPE D MOUNTINGS: Type D mountings shall be steel hangers which contain a steel spring and a 0.3-inch deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing which passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be of sufficient size to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30-degree arc before contacting the hole. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. E. TYPE E MOUNTINGS: Type E mountings shall be double deflection, cork and rubber sandwich pads consisting of a high-density cork layer permanently bonded to top and bottom layers of corrugated oil-resistant synthetic rubber. The corrugated design shall allow deflection to increase with load and shall form a nonskid surface to resist lateral migration of the equipment. Bolt holes and anchor bolts shall be provided where required to resist migration. Resilient washers ad bushings shall be provided to prevent contact between the bolts and the equipment support bases. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided as product data in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Installation report specified in paragraph 11021-3.01. 2. Static and dynamic deflections, weights, isolator locations, and flexible

connector designs. 3. Spring deflections and diameters, compressed spring heights and solid spring

heights. 4. Curb mounted base seal and wind resistance details.



PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD INSPECTION The vibration isolation manufacturer, or his qualified representative, shall provide such supervision as is necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators and seismic restraints. Upon completion of the installation and after the system is put into operation, the manufacturer, or his representative, shall make a final inspection and submit his report in writing certifying the correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11060 ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies single and three phase, horizontal and vertical, single-speed and two-speed, low-voltage (600 volts and less), energy efficient (900 rpm) and premium efficiency (1200, 1800, and 3600 rpm) alternating current, induction motors, 250 horsepower or less. Standard NEMA MG 1 motors are specified, as modified herein.

This section also specifies IEEE 841 severe-duty, totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC Type-2, specified herein) squirrel cage induction motors from 1 to 500 horsepower with voltage ratings of 600V, 2300V, and 4000V. See Custom Motor criteria within the driven equipment specification for voltages above 600V and for high horsepower.

Motors shall be provided in compliance with these specifications. Ambient conditions for the Project are specified in Section 01800. Provide motors suitable for continuous operation under the ambient conditions:

1. Temperature: -25-degree C to +40-degree C. 2. Altitude: 0 to 3300 feet above sea level. 3. Derate motors for higher ambient temperature and for higher altitude with

motor size based on brake-horsepower. Motors shall have copper rotor material and copper stator windings with F-insulation

without exceeding the B-temperature rise of 80-degree C and with Design-B torque / current characteristics rated for continuous operation duty.

Two-speed motors shall be two-winding motors. Two-speed, one-winding consequential-

pole motors that require special motor starters are prohibited. Refer to Motor Types-1, 2, and 3 Classification and Inverter Duty variable torque and

constant torque specification requirements herein. Motor Types-1, 2, and 3 have the additional requirements of Inverter Duty Motors as specified or scheduled.

Custom Motors and Special Purpose Motors, with features or ratings that are not specified herein, are specified in the particular equipment specifications. The submittal, installation, and testing requirements for all motors are specified herein.

Custom motors are motors over 250 horsepower, medium voltage (2300 volt, 4000 volt, or

higher) for high elevations, high ambient conditions, high thrust, special enclosures, intermittent


duty, varying duty, and inverter duty motors that require special cooling for slow speed operation with constant torque loads and motor limited to below base speed operation.

Special purpose motors are submersible motors, integral gear motors, close-coupled pump

motors, crane and hoist motors, fire pump motors, brake motors, gate and valve operator motors, and high torque rated motors and other unique application motors that specified with the driven equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Motors shall be built in accordance with UL 674, UL 1004, NEMA Standard MG 1, NEMA MG 1, Table 12-10 motors that meet the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPAct) requirements with full-load efficiency measurements per IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B, and to the requirements specified. IEC Metric Motors and imported EPAct Motors that do not meet the NEMA standards are prohibited. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ABMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

IEEE 112 Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

IEEE 841 Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 500 HP

NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)

NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators

NEMA MG1-30 Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable- Frequency Controls or Both.

Note: Specifications for Standard TENV Submersible Motors rated 1/2 – 200 HP, 140TY-L360TY Frames, and rated at 200, 230, 460, 575, 600 Volt are available from motor manufactures.

NEMA MG1-31 Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors: Rated 5000 horsepower or less at 7200 volt or less, intended for use with adjustable-voltage and adjustable frequency controls, commonly referred to as inverters.

UL 674 Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 1004 Electric Motors C. FACTORY TESTS: The manufacturer’s factory motor Prototype Tests per IEEE Standard 112 Appendix-A on motors through 250 horsepower shall be submitted as Product Data for the motor, actual factory tests for motors is not required:

1. Winding resistance in ohms and converted to 25 degree C. 2. Resistive Unbalance and Quarter Voltage Impedance, as applicable. 3. Locked-Rotor current (Single phase). 4. High Potential. 5. No-Load Excitation (volts, amperes, RPM). 6. Bearing vibration check. 7. Efficiency, Power Factor, Current at 115%, 100%, 75%, 50%, and no load.


The motors larger than 250 horsepower shall be subject to the manufacture’s complete factory dynamometer tests per IEEE Standard 112 Appendix-B:

1. Standard routine factory tests. 2. Full Load Heat Run. 3. Temperature Rise at full load. 4. Breakdown Torque. 5. Rated Full Load Slip. 6. Speed-Torque Curves.

D. WARRANTY:

In addition to the guarantee requirements specified in Section 00700, all motors ½ horsepower and greater shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years under the specified uses and with normal operation and service. This warranty shall be delivered, in writing, to the OWNER and shall include, as a minimum, 100 percent full payment coverage for parts and labor during the first 60 months of operation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include the following:


referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications.

Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Manufacture completed IEEE Standard 841 Date Sheet for AC Squirrel Cage

Induction Motors or Supplier completed “Form 11060-A” in specification Section 01999 with required factory data of motors supplied.


3. Speed-Torque curve per 1.02 C Factory Tests.

4. Factory Test Data: Including Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency for 115% load, 100% load, 75% load, 50% load, and no load.

5. Guaranteed vibration level when measured per MG 1, Figure 7-6:

a. Displacement: 0.0025 inch peak-to-peak b. Velocity: 0.10 inches per second peak c. Acceleration: 1g (gravity) peak.

6. Motor heating curve for motors per 1.02 C Factory Tests.

7. Motor outline, dimensions, and weight. 8. Manufacturer’s descriptive information relative to motor features. 9. Response curve where a winding over-temperature device is required. 10. For all inverter duty motors: Manufacturer’s certification that the motor is

compatible with the adjustable frequency drive to be used. 11. Disassembly and repair documentation.

1.04 POWER SUPPLY VARIATIONS

Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with +/- 10-percent

of rated voltage with rated frequency or +/- 5-percent of rated frequency with rated voltage. 1.05 NEMA WINDING TEMPERATURES

NEMA MG 1 Table 12-7 motors insulation system maximum winding temperatures in

degrees-Centigrade (C), with the degrees-Fahrenheit (F) insulation system class specified herein. 1. Forty degree-C ambient (104 degree-F) is the basis for temperature rise. 2. For 50 degree C ambient (122F) and above, refer to the driven equipment

specifications for additional requirements.

Insulation System Class Degrees C / F Temperature Rise by Resistance

A 140 / 284 NA

B 165 / 329 B-rise: 40 + 80 = 120 Degrees C / 248 F

F 190 / 374 F-rise: 40 + 105 = 145 Degrees C / 293 F

H 215 / 419 H-rise: 40 + 125 = 165 Degrees C / 329 F


1.06 NEMA MOTOR TEMPERATURE PROTECTION TYPES Refer to Thermal Protection in Part-2 for thermal device requirements. The NEMA design

shall limit the temperatures of the windings without using a thermal device: 1. Type-1: Winding Running and Locked Rotor Over-temperature Protection. 2. Type-2: Winding Running Over-temperature Protection.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS The following manufacturer’s motors generally meet the class and performance requirements of this specification when furnished with appropriate modifications and additional features as specified: A. HORIZONTAL MOTORS:

1. Type 1 - Premium efficiency guarded, open-drip-proof motors manufactured by:

a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS b. Reliance Electric Co.: Type XEX c. Emerson US Motor: Type DE or RE.

2. Type 2 - Premium efficiency totally enclosed-fan cooled, Chemical Industry severe duty motors manufactured by:

a. General Electric Inc.: TEFC IEEE 841 Severe duty: X$D b. Reliance Electric Co.: Type IEEE 841 XL Severe Duty. c. Siemens: TEFC-RGZESDX, IEEE 841 Severe Duty. d. Emerson US Motor: Type CE.


a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS - Explosion Proof. b. Emerson US Motor: Type LCE. c. Siemens: RGZZESD with Temperature Code: T3C d. Reliance: XEX-XP, IP 54 with Temperature Code: T3C

B. VERTICAL MOTORS:

1. Types 1 and Type 2 - Premium efficiency ODP and TEFC motors manufactured by:


a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS. b. Emerson US Motors: Type TUCE Corroduty.


a. General Electric Inc.: Type KS, Class I, Group D. b. Emerson US Motors: Type LUCE. c. Siemens: RGZZVILESD: Solid shaft with Temperature Code: T2A.

C. MOTOR TYPES 1, 2 OR 3 RATED FOR INVERTER DUTY SERVICE:

1. General Electric Inc.:

a. KAF design for ODP, TEFC, or TEFC Severe Duty enclosures. b. KAF design in horizontal TEFC Severe Duty and EP enclosures with

A$D construction for constant torque speed range. c. XSD Ultra for Severe Duty IEEE 841.

2. Emerson US Electrical Motors:

a. VFM: Horizontal (TEFC) 841 Plus: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor.

3. Reliance Electric Inc.:

a. V*S Master XT: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor.

4. Siemens:

a. TEFC RGZESDI: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor. b. EP RGZZESDI: Variable and Constant Torque rated motor.

2.02 GENERAL A. NAMEPLATES: Motor nameplates shall be engraved or stamped stainless steel. Information shall include those items enumerated in NEMA Standard MG 1, as applicable. Nameplates shall be permanently fastened to the motor frame and shall be visibly positioned for inspection. Additionally, provide the following information on nameplates or additional nameplates for:

1. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger: Indicate the ABMA L-10 rated life for the motor bearings.


2. Motors 2 to 50 horsepower: Indicate the NEMA nominal efficiency. 3. Motors 50 horsepower and larger: Indicate NEMA guaranteed minimum

efficiency. 4. Explosion-Proof motors: Indicate UL frame temperature limit code. 5. Space heater information. 6. NEMA MG 1 Over Temperature Protection Type Number. 7. Temperature device rating and alarm and shutdown setpoint information.

B. CONSTRUCTION: All motors provided under this specification shall have the following features of construction:

1. Frames:

a. Cast iron frames for motors 1/2 horsepower and larger, unless otherwise specified.

b. Steel frames for motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower, unless otherwise specified.

c. Aluminum frame motors will not be permitted.

2. Cast metal shrouds and covers for non-sparking fan blades, unless otherwise specified.

3. Non-hygroscopic motor leads. 4. NEMA Design-B as standard design. NEMA Design-A, C, or D shall be

identified as custom design features in the driven equipment specifications.

5. Motor Service Factor (percent of additional horsepower): a. SF: 1.15 for Types-1, 2, and 3 Sine-wave motors b. SF: 1.0 for Inverter Duty motors. c. SF dual rating: 1.15 Sine-wave and 1.0 Inverter Duty.

6. Grounding terminal in conduit box. 7. Stainless Steel nameplate.

2.03 MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HORSEPOWER A. GENERAL:


Motors less than 1/2 horsepower shall be squirrel cage, single phase, capacitor start, and induction run type with Class B or F insulation. Fan motors rated 1/8 horsepower or less may be split-phase or shaded-pole type. Windings shall be copper. B. RATING: Motors shall be rated 115 volts, single phase, 60 hertz, and shall be continuous-time rated in conformance with NEMA Standard MG 1. Motors shall be non-overloading at all points of the equipment operation. C. ENCLOSURES: Motor enclosures shall be as defined in NEMA MG 1. Motors shall have totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) enclosures, unless specified otherwise in the driven equipment specification. Explosion-proof (EP or XP) motors shall bear the UL Label for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous locations. The nameplate shall indicate the UL frame temperature limit code T2A. The enclosure surface temperature shall not exceed 280 degrees C. Provide self-protected over-temperature device in the motor to detect and automatically de-energize the motor if the frame temperature limit is exceeded and automatically reset. 2.04 MOTORS 1/2 HORSEPOWER THROUGH 250 HORSEPOWER A. GENERAL: Motors 1/2 horsepower through 250 horsepower shall have copper windings and shall be three phase, squirrel cage, induction type rated for full-voltage start and continuous duty and rated for 460-Vac.

Motors shall have a NEMA MG 1 design for the duty service imposed by the driven equipment such as frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment. B. RATING: Motors shall be rated 460 volts, three-phase, 60-Hertz, and shall be continuous time rated in accordance with NEMA Standard MG 1. Refer to the driven equipment specification for custom motors or special purpose motors with voltage rating above 460 volts.

Unless specified otherwise, motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 with additional 15-percent horsepower. Motors shall not be required to exceed the nameplate rating at service factor 1.00.


C. MOTOR TYPE CLASSIFICATIONS: 1. GENERAL:

a. Definition of terms shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2. TYPE 1 MOTORS:

a. Enclosure: Open drip-proof, guarded ventilation openings (ODP).

b. Class F insulation and Class B temperature rise at the motor's nominal rating.

3. TYPE 2 MOTORS:

a. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC). b. Class F insulation and Class B temperature rise at the motor's

nominal rating. c. Conform to IEEE 841 Chemical Industry-Severe Duty rating through

500 Horsepower. d. Surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion-resistant treatment such as

an epoxy paint that passes ASTM B117 for 96-hours.

e. No load airborne sound power level below 90-dBA per MG 1 Part-9. f. Breather/drain fitting instead of solid drain plug.

g. International Protection Standard IP55 bearing enclosure.

4. TYPE 3 MOTORS:

a. Enclosure: Explosion-proof motors (EP or XP). b. UL listed in accordance with UL 674 for Class I, Group D for

Hazardous Atmospheres. c. Bear UL Label for Class I, Division 1, Group D Hazardous locations. d. UL-approved breather/drain device in the motor drain hole. e. Class F insulation.


f. Nameplate: Indicate the UL frame temperature limit code T2A without thermostat and T2D with thermostat.

g. Rated for the UL surface temperature limit codes for Class I Group D

for gasoline, petroleum, alcohols, natural gas etc:

1) Motor designed below the UL frame temperature limit code T2A of 280 degrees C or

2) Provide an internal frame temperature thermostat that meets

the UL frame temperature limit code T2D of 215 degree C with normally closed contact rated 5-amperes at 115-Vac.

D. THERMAL PROTECTION: Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 motors that require motor over-temperature protection, as defined in NEMA MG 1-12, with the motor controller interface wiring and devices as indicated on the drawings for the following:

1. Inverter duty motors and totally-enclosed-air-over (TEAO) motors:

a. NEMA Type-2 motor over-temperature self-protection: Thermal-overload, self-reset bimetallic Klixon switch for motors 5 horsepower and smaller.

b. Motors larger than 5 horsepower require controller alarm / trip:

1) Self-powered, motor mounted auxiliary device with Form-C output contacts wired to variable speed or adjustable frequency drive to shut down the motor controller. Both the normally open contact and the normally closed contact shall be available at the motor terminal box. 2) Non-self-powered power thermal devices are prohibited.

3) Factory set thermal protection device with alarm and trip

setpoints indicated on the motor device nameplate.

4) Factory wired to separate motor termination box.

2. Motors 300 horsepower and larger and higher voltage:

a. NEMA Type-1 thermal protection: Two-100-ohm platinum RTDs in each winding.


b. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD) wired to separate motor termination box with wiring diagram provide.

c. Provide RTD monitor and transmitter at the motor, as indicated or d. Provide RTD monitor at the motor controller, as indicated. e. Indicated alarm and trip setpoints on the motor device nameplate.

3. Auxiliary equipment shall have normally closed NEMA ICS 2 B300

contacts and shall be housed in NEMA 250 enclosures as follows:

a. Type 1 motors NEMA 12 b. Type 2 motors NEMA 4 c. Type 3 motors NEMA 7D

E. INVERTER DUTY MOTORS

Motors for use with adjustable frequency controllers shall be inverter duty motors specifically designed for inverter service for the speed range and load torque characteristic required by the associated driven equipment. Inverter duty motors shall be specifically certified compatible with the adjustable frequency controller and driven equipment, as specified in Section 11000-1.01C Unit Responsibility.

Motors for use with adjustable frequency controllers shall not exceed NEMA MG 1, Class B

temperature rise when operating over the specified speed range on the adjustable frequency controllers specified in Section 11069 with the specified load speed/torque characteristic.

Inverter duty rated motors shall have 4:1 turndown with variable torque motor controllers or constant torque motor controllers rating designed to operate from 25% of base speed to base speed continuously with full load current and torque without exceeding the Class F insulation with B temperature rise.

Torque requirement for greater turndown and slower speed applications is a custom design;

refer to the driven equipment specification for additional requirements. Inverter duty rated motors shall be designed to operate over the speed or frequency range specified.

Motor insulation shall be designed to meet 2000-volt peak at a minimum of 0.1 microsecond

rise time which exceeds the NEMA MG 1, Part 31: 1600-volt peak requirement for the 460 volt motors.

Provide inverter duty motors with NEMA Type 2 over-temperature protection as specified

in NEMA MG 1-12. Provide motor mounted and motor powered winding temperature device with a 5-ampere normally open and normally closed output contacts at the motor terminal box for monitoring by the adjustable frequency controller and shutdown where the temperature exceed 165 degree-Centigrade.


Inverter duty motors shall have electrically insulated bearings or shall be equipped with a shaft-grounding unit mounted on the fan housing with stub shaft extended from the motor shaft. Larger motors, using the shaft-grounding unit, shall be equipped with two brushes, totally enclosed, and sealed against environmental contamination. F. VERTICAL MOTORS: Vertical motors shall be solid-shaft P-base type specifically designed for vertical installation. Thrust bearing rating shall be compatible with the loads imposed by the driven equipment. Universal position motors are not acceptable.

Vertical motors shall conform to Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3 in accordance with the location and use. Vertical motors specified or indicated as rated for Inverter Duty Motor shall be as specified herein. G. MOTOR EFFICIENCY: Type-1 and Type-2 motors in accordance with 2002 NEMA MG 1 Table 12-11 and Table 12-12 and Type-2 in accordance with IEEE 841 Table 2 motor minimum nameplate efficiency for energy efficient 900 rpm motors and premium efficiency motor for 1200 rpm, 1800 rpm, and 3600 rpm determined in accordance with IEEE 112B testing procedures, when operating on a sinusoidal power source shall conform to the following:


1 70.0 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 72.0 87.5 86.5 84.0

2 80.0 88.5 86.5 85.5

3 81.5 89.5 89.5 86.5

5 82.5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 82.5 91.0 91.7 89.5

10 86.5 91.0 91.7 90.2

15 86.5 91.7 92.4 91.0

20 87.5 91.7 93.0 91.0

25 87.5 93.0 93.6 91.7

30 89.5 93.0 93.6 91.7

40 89.5 94.1 94.1 92.4

50 90.2 94.1 94.5 93.0

60 90.2 94.5 95.0 93.6

75 91.7 94.5 95.4 93.6



100 91.7 95.0 95.4 94.1

125 92.4 95.0 95.4 95.0

150 92.4 95.8 95.8 95.0

200 92.4 95.8 96.2 95.5

250 93.6 95.8 96.2 95.8

IEEE STD 841-2001

900 rpm 8-pole

1200 rpm 4-pole

1800 rpm 6-pole

3600 rpm 2-pole

250HP

600V

2300/4000V

93.6

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.5

94.1

300HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

350HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

94.1

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

400HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

-

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

450HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

-

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1

500HP

600V

2300/4000V

-

94.1

-

94.1

94.5

94.1

94.5

94.1


H. CONDUIT BOXES: Conduit boxes shall be sized based on the conduit number and conduit size indicated on the drawings. Provide over-sized boxes with the number of openings as required to accommodate the conduits required. Replace undersized conduit boxes.

Conduit boxes shall be split construction with threaded hubs and shall conform to IEEE 841 for Type 2 and Type 3 motors. Motors shall be furnished with petroleum-resistant gaskets at the base of the conduit box and between the halves of the conduit box

Conduit boxes shall be designed to rotate in order to permit installation in any of four positions 90 degrees apart. Motors shall have grounding lug located within the conduit box for the ground connection.

Provide separate conduit boxes for temperature devices and space heaters.

I. BEARINGS: Bearings may be oil or grease lubricated ball or angle contact roller bearings rated for a minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or 11 at the ambient temperature specified. Motor designs employing cartridge type bearings will not be accepted. Bearings shall be fitted with lubricant fill and drain or relief fittings. Belt loads shall not exceed forces calculated from NEMA MG 1 Table 14-1. J. LIFTING EYES: Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be fitted with at least one lifting eye and motors over 150 pounds shall be fitted with two lifting eyes. K. CURRENT IMBALANCE: Current imbalance between phases shall not exceed the values tabulated below when the motor is operating at any load within its service factor rating and is supplied by a balanced voltage system: 1. Under 5 horsepower: 15 percent 2. 5 horsepower and above: 10 percent L. SPACE HEATERS

Where shown on the Drawings or Schedules, furnish motors with space heaters to prevent condensation inside the motor enclosure after motor shutdown and maintain the temperature of the winding at not less than 5-degree C above outside ambient temperature.

Heaters shall be flexible wraparound type rated 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz. The space heater rating in watts and volts shall be noted on the motor nameplate or on a second nameplate.


Space heater leads H1 and H2 shall be brought to a separate terminal block or pigtails in the motor conduit box or separate conduit box with a threaded conduit opening. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided for each motor in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. 2. Written warranty specified in paragraph 11060-1.02 D.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING

Verify the circuit ground cable (green) is identified and connected to the grounding lug

terminal in the conduit box.

Provide supplementary grounding by installing a bond from the motor frame to the grounding electrode system as indicated on the drawings.

3.02 FIELD TESTING

Verify breather/drain fittings have been installed as specified herein. Winding insulation resistance for motors shall be not less than 10-megohm measured with a

1000-Vac megohmmeter at 1-minute at or corrected to 40-degree C. **END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11350

CHEMICAL INDUCTION MIXERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SCOPE: This section includes furnishing and all material and quality requirements for the Chemical Induction Mixers (CIM) in compliance with the Contract Documents. The CIM shall be furnished complete within a self supporting structure “Cage Style” to be mounted in a live channel. The supporting structure shall include all guide rails, winch, grating, handrail, and all necessary accessories. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.



Induction Mixer W-1 MLC-C2-21-0007

Induction Mixer W-2 MLC-C2-21-0008 C. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The CIM shall be selected and designed for continuous duty delivering sodium hypochlorite having the following properties:

Chemical

Maximum solution Concentration, percent

Specific gravity, Maximum

pH

Temperature Range, degrees F

Sodium Hypochlorite

15

1.2

12

32-120

1. The Chemical Induction Mixer (CIM) shall be of a submersible design and

shall be able to transport the chemical to be induced from the source (NaOCl metering pumps) to the point of application.

2. The CIM shall be designed for a feed rate of 0 to 5 gallons per minute of

sodium hypochlorite.


3. The CIM shall be sized using a minimum mixing ratio of 0.5 (HP/MGD) unless a lower mixing ratio can be substantiated by results from performance testing by a recognized independent agency. Secondary effluent flow in each channel will vary from 50 to 120 MGD.

4. The CIM shall be capable of inducing NaOCl into the wastewater stream at a

velocity of approximately 60 feet per second (radically and axially) without prediluting by means of a century injector prior to contact with the eye of the propeller.


A. GENERAL: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall verify field conditions and dimensions to provide

the required length of the power cable, hoist cables, supporting structure, mounting system, vacuum tubing, and all other pertinent items.

2. All CIM components, supporting structure, accessories, and spare parts shall

be provided by the same manufacturer.

B. STANDARDS: This section contains references to the following document. It is part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

CSA Canadian Standards Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute

NEMAN National Electrical Manufacturers Association

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AWS American Welding Society

C. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 05100 – Structural Metals 2. Section 05501 – Anchor Bolts 3. Section 05520 – Aluminum Handrailing 4. Section 05530 – Aluminum Grating, Floor Plates, and Cover-Plates 5. Section 11381 – Peristaltic Metering Pumps for Corrosive Service 6. Section 15050 – Piping Systems


7. Division 16 Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Performance data 2. Certified dimension prints showing all necessary details of construction.

3. CIM construction details, including materials of construction for all

components. Include data documenting suitability of the materials of construction of the wetted parts are 100 percent compatible with up to a 15 percent solution of sodium hypochlorite.


5. Anchorage details including anchor bolt torque requirements.

6. Shop drawings of support structure, guide rails, guide rail supports, handrail, connection, connection to existing structure and grating depicting sizes and number for installation at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings, including complete structural support calculations. The support calculations and shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by an Ohio licensed Professional Engineer.




instrumentation diagrams, with addenda updates, that apply to the equipment in this section marked to show specific changes necessary for the supplied


equipment. If no changes are required, the drawing shall be marked “No Changes Required.”

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Material and equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and requirements. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS The CIM shall be SIEMENS model SWC20F; or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Piping connection on the CIM shall be made of Grade 2 (unalloyed) titanium or Hastaloy C to eliminate the danger of pipe stress or over-tightening of vacuum tubing by service personnel.

B. The propeller shall be an exposed four bladed airfoil design made of Grade 2

(unalloyed) titanium or Hastaloy C.

C. The motor and CIM shall have an integral designed shaft constructed of Hastalloy C.

D. The vacuum chamber shall be made of solid Grade 2 (unalloyed) titanium or Hastaloy C. Titanium or Hastaloy C “sheathed” plastic will not be allowed.

E. All wetted parts of the inductor system or material coming in contact with sodium hypochlorite shall be made of Grade 2 (unalloyed) titanium, or Hastoloy C, or an approved equal. 2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Motor:

1 The motor shall be all 316 stainless steel construction, constant speed, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 20 horsepower, Class F insulation, with air filled windings, permanently lubricated bearings, and a hermetically sealed externally water cooled enclosure.

2. The motor shall have an integral designed Hastaloy C shaft with a

mechanical seal using silicon carbide seal faces.


3. The motor windings shall be hermetically sealed and resin-filled in an all welded 316 stainless steel shell for moisture resistance.

4. Electrical cable connection shall be through a removable water-block lead

connector that is field replaceable. 5. The motor thrust bearing shall be designed for a minimum of 3500 pounds.

B. Power Cables:

1. The CIM shall be furnished complete with power cable. 2. Cable shall have UL and CSA approved insulation.

3. The cable shall be four conductors. 4. The power and control cable shall be attached to the lifting cable at 5-ft

intervals, to keep cables from swinging freely. This attachment shall be removable when lifting the unit.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Systems:

1. A custom stainless steel CIM supporting structure “cage style” shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Drawings.

a. The supporting structure shall be all 316 stainless steel construction

and designed to resist the hydraulic forces in the channel under all flow conditions with a factor of safety of 2.0.

b. All structural design shall be per AISC code. c. The supporting structure shall be installed in a live channel as the

channel cannot be taken out of service. The minimum water level in the channel is shown on the Drawings.

d. The supporting structure shall be fitted with guide rails, winch,

grating platform, and handrail. e. Grating shall conform to Section 05530 Aluminum Grating, Floor

Plates, and Cover-plates. Handrail shall conform to Section 05520, Aluminum Handrailing.


2. Type 316 stainless steel vertical guide rail system shall be furnished and installed for each CIM in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. The guide rail system shall be furnished by the CIM manufacturer and shall be of sufficient length to raise the entire CIM above the mounting elevation.

3. The vertical guide rail shall be anchored to the support structure with

brackets designed (factor of safety of 10) to absorb all static and operating loads derived from placing or operating the mixers with the channel.

4. The vertical guide rail shall be fitted with a bracket which travels along the

guide rail and fully supports the mixer independent of the lifting cable, and a locking device. The locking device and the mounting arrangement for the mixer on the guide rail shall hold the mixer in place without vibration or distortion under operating loads.

5. The vertical guide rail system shall be designed to permit placement and

removal of the mixer into and from the channel without draining the channel. The design of the bracket shall allow the CIM to slide along the guide rail when removing and replacing the unit

6. The lifting device shall be a hand operated winch mounted to the support

structure. The winch shall include a manual stop device and free-fall brake. The winch shall be rated for at least two times the weight of the CIM.

7. Lifting cable shall be 316 stainless steel rated at least two times the weight of the CIM.

B. Mounting Bolts:

1. Type 316 stainless steel anchor and mounting bolts of the size as recommended by the manufacturer and in conformance with specification 05501.

2. Washers and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Vacuum Hose Kit:

1. Vacuum tubing shall be a minimum 1-½” diameter flexible PVC hose suitable for the sodium hypochlorite and shall have OPW Kamlok or approved equal fittings on each end.

2. Hose shall have smooth inside bore with helically wound reinforcement.


3. Hose shall be attached to lifting cable at 5-ft intervals and shall be of a suitable length for each CIM such that there is not excessive hose length. The hose length shall be determined based on the location of each CIM as shown on the contract drawings.

4. Manufacturer shall provide both the hose shank couplers on all hose and

the male adapters which will be connected to the sodium hypochlorite feed line piping including a backpressure valve designed for the application.

2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts shall be provided for each CIM furnished in accordance with this Section:

1. One (1) vacuum hose less fittings per CIM. 2. One (1) set quick disconnect seals per CIM.

2.06 POWER AND CONTROLS A. Mixer Power and Controls: 1. Mixer power will be provided from the existing Secondary Effluent Motor

Control Center (MCC-W). The Electrical CONTRACTOR will provide new starters in the existing MCC to start/stop the mixers. The new starters will contain a DeviceNet communications interface to control the Mixers from the Plant SCADA system. The mixers will also be able to be started/stopped locally from the On/Off/PC control station located near the mixer. Refer to specification 16920 for additional information on the motor starters and to specifications 13320 and 13320 for the SCADA and PLC systems.

2. The mixers shall be configured to operate as described in the Control

Strategies as indicated on the drawings. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Welding: Except as otherwise indicated, welding shall comply with ANSI/AWWA D100 and AWWA C206 and the following:

B. Composite fabricated stainless steel assemblies including any fixed or movable

structural components of mechanical equipment shall have continuous seal welds and shall prevent entrance of air or moisture.

C. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method described in

the American Welding Society’s “Welding Handbook” as supplemental by other AWS standards.


D. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be clamped, supported,

and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall comply with the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall produce a workmanlike appearance with uniform weld contours and dimensions. Sharp corners of material shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32” on the flat. 2.08 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 1300: 1. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section

01730. 2. Motor product data as specified in Section 11060. 3. Installation Certification Form 11000-A as specified in paragraph 11350-3.01. 4. Training Certification Form 11000-B as specified in paragraph 11350-3.03. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The CIM and all necessary appurtenances shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. B. A manufacturer’s representative shall supervise, check or assist in the installation of the CIM. C. Tests: Shop operate, test, and adjust each CIM to ensure proper assembly and operation.

D. Verification of Performance: The CIM manufacturer shall submit results of factory tests of equipment. Testing shall include motor amp draw and maximum vacuum produced. 3.02 TESTING A. After completion of installation, each CIM shall be field tested in accordance with Section 01660 to demonstrate compliance with the requirements as specified.


3.03 TRAINING A. During the commissioning period specified in Section 01662, the CIM manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained person experienced in CIM operation and maintenance for a period of at least 4 hours to train the plant operators. Training shall conform to Section 01664 and shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11351

WET PIT CHEMICAL SUMP PUMPS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies nonmetallic vertical wet pit chemical sump pumps for pumping up to 15% sodium hypochlorite. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building

Sump Pump

MLC-C3-51-0006

C. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The pumps shall be selected and designed for intermittent duty pumping of wash down water and sodium hypochlorite having the following properties:

Chemical Maximum solution

concentration, percent Specific gravity,

maximum pH Temperature

range, degrees F

Sodium Hypochlorite

15 1.2 12 32-120

Pumps shall be heavy-duty, vertical, centrifugal wet pit type. The motor and thrust bearings shall be mounted on a bracket above the sump and with the pump’s volute suspended in the sump. D. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: The pump provided under this section shall meet the following operating requirements:

Pump

Rated capacity, gpm 30 Design head, ft 14

Maximum pump speed, rpm 1750 Pump length, ft 5


Motor Horsepower, maximum 0.5 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STANDARDS: This section contains references to the following document. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

Hydraulic Institute Standards ANSI/HI Pump Standards, 2002 B. FACTORY TESTS: Pumps shall be factory tested for performance and hydrostatic pressure as specified in the Hydraulic Institute Test Code. Performance and hydrostatic pressure of pumps identical to those tested may be certified to be in compliance with the factory test by an authorized representative of the pump manufacturer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Head-capacity curves with efficiencies and horsepower requirements for each pump.

2. Certified dimension prints showing all necessary details of construction

including weight of equipment.

3. Pump construction details, including materials of construction for all components. Include data documenting suitability of the materials of construction of the wetted parts for proposed chemical service.


5. Equipment mounting submittal information as specified in paragraph 11002-

1.03.

6. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If


deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


instrumentation diagrams, with addenda updates, that apply to the equipment in this section marked to show specific changes necessary for the supplied equipment. If no changes are required, the drawing shall be marked “No Changes Required.”

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS The pumps shall be a Fybroc 5500, Vanton SG, or equal, modified as necessary to meet requirements of this specification. 2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Casing and impeller PVC

Shaft sleeve/column PVC

Cover plate PVC or Phoenolic

Motor support Epoxy coated cast iron or coated aluminum

2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES A. PUMPS: Pumps shall be capable of handling chemical sump wastes including up to 15% sodium hypochlorite. Each pump shall be mounted on a cover plate and a vapor seal shall be present to minimize emissions of corrosive fumes and protect thrust bearings and motor.


If the shaft is non-wetted, the shaft shall be stainless steel. If wetted, the shaft is to be Hastelloy C. A PVC shaft sleeve or column shall be provided around the shaft. A strainer shall be present on at the pump inlet. The thrust ball bearings shall be located above the cover plate and allow for accurate and easy adjustment of the rotating equipment. Submerged column bearings shall be corrosion resistant, easily accessible, and flushed by external clean water. Submerged column bearings shall be Teflon impregnated carbon, Vanite, or ceramic. Pump shall be mounted on a PVC solid mounting plate provided by the manufacturer. The plate shall be mounted with Hastelloy C bolts (nominal ½” minimum, provided by the CONTRACTOR) as recommended by pump manufacturer and in accordance with Section 11002. B. MOTOR: The pump shall be direct driven by a continuous duty, vertical, solid shaft, electric motor mounted on an epoxy coated cast iron or coated aluminum support stand. The motor shall be non-overloading over the entire pump curve and shall be 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1750 rpm, Type 2 TEFC in accordance with Section 11060.

C. CONTROLS: The sump pump controls shall be provided under Division 16. The sump pump shall be provided with a level switch for pump shutoff and 2 level

switches for high level alarms. Refer to Division 13 for additional information. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730.

2. Certified copies of test logs and performance curves as specified in paragraph

11351-1.02 B. 3. Motor product data as specified in Section 11060.

4. Installation Certification Form 11000-A as specified in paragraph 11351-3.01.

5. Training Certification Form 11000-B as specified in paragraph 11351-3.03.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Each pump shall be aligned, connected and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, each pumping unit shall be field tested in accordance with Section 01660 to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements as specified. 3.03 TRAINING During the commissioning period specified in Section 01662, the pump manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained person experienced in pump operation and maintenance for a period of at least 4 hours to train the plant operators. Training shall conform to Section 01664 and shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11381

PERISTALTIC METERING PUMPS FOR CORROSIVE SERVICE

PART 1–GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies pumps and accessories for feeding sodium hypochlorite for the purpose of effluent disinfection. B. TYPE: The metering pumps shall be of positive displacement, peristaltic type utilizing a flexible tube and spring loaded roller or track. The pump shall be suitable for metering service with adjustable speed drives to control the dosage with accuracy of one percent variation from the pump setting. Each pumping unit shall be complete with pump, drive unit, base, and all appurtenances to provide a complete pumping system for the specific process fluids and design characteristics as specified herein. C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Equipment Description Location No. Secondary Effluent NaOCl Pump 1 MLC-C3-51-0001 Secondary Effluent NaOCl Pump 2 MLC-C3-51-0002 Secondary Effluent NaOCl Pump 3 MLC-C3-51-0003 Final Effluent NaOCl Pump 1 MLC-C5-51-0001 Final Effluent NaOCl Pump 2 MLC-C5-51-0002 NPW NaOCl Pump MLC-C3-51-0007 NaOCl Loop Transfer Pump MLC-C5-51-0003

D. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: 1. GENERAL: a. The metering pumps and equipment shall be designed and selected for pumping the following chemical solution:


Chemical Solution Density1 Concentration (wt/wt) Sodium Hypochlorite 10.21 12.5% 1 Solution density, lb per gal @ 68 degrees F

b. Pump operation shall be automatic. Adjustable speed drives shall be controlled by a 4-20 mA signal. 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: The metering pumps shall be designed for continuous duty under the following operating conditions:

Location No. MLC-C3-51-0001, MLC-C3-51-0002, MLC-C3-51-0003 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model CT-16 N/A Watson Marlow Model 720 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 0.2 gpm Average chemical feed rate 0.45 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 1.15 gpm Operating pressure 15 psi Maximum discharge pressure 30 psi Tube Bore 1/2 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase


Location No. MLC-C5-51-0001, MLC-C5-51-0002 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model ChemTUFF FMP-40 N/A Watson Marlow Model 720 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 0.05 gpm Average chemical feed rate 1.0 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 14 gpm Operating pressure 15 psi Maximum discharge pressure 30 psi Pump heads 2 number per pump Tube Bore 1 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase

Location No. MLC-C3-51-0007 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model CT-10 N/A Watson Marlow Model 520 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 0.02 gpm Average chemical feed rate 0.06 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 0.09 gpm Operating pressure 15 psi Maximum discharge pressure 30 psi Tube Bore 3/8 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase


Location No. MLC-C5-51-0003 Parameter Design Value Units Periflo Model ChemTUFF FMP-30 N/A Watson Marlow Model 620 N/A Minimum chemical feed rate 2.0 gpm Average chemical feed rate 4.0 gpm Maximum chemical feed rate 4.8 gpm Operating pressure 35 psi Maximum discharge pressure 60 psi Tube Bore 11/16 inch Maximum power consumption 350 VA Maximum rotor speed 360 rpm Power supply 120/60/1 V/Hz/phase


Reference Title ASTM A743/A743M-88 Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and

Nickel-Base Corrosion-Resistant for General Application

NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements


1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: The equipment shall be located indoors in heated and ventilated areas. Environmental conditions are as described in Division 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The following submittals shall be provided as specified in Section 01300:

1. Shop drawings with complete dimensions and mounting details for the pumps.

2. Catalog data and information including:

a. Maximum and minimum capacity using adjustable speed drive, gpm; maximum and minimum operating speed, rpm; and discharge pressure.

b. Motor and adjustable speed drive type. 3. Materials of construction. 4. Net positive suction head required. 5. Manufacturer’s wiring diagram. 6. Manufacturer’s catalog data on all accessories including pressure regulating

valves, pressure relief valves, flow calibration chambers, and suction assemblies.

7. A copy of the contract document control diagrams and process and instrumentation diagrams relating to the submitted equipment, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required". Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.


all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The


remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

9. A copy of all related contract schematic, structural, and mechanical

drawings with all piping, foundations, supports, and layout sizes and dimensions requiring CONTRACTOR confirmation marked.

PART 2–PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS The OWNER believes the following candidate manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s product, nor shall it be construed that a named manufacturer’s standard product will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include Periflo, Watson Marlow, or equal. 2.02 GENERAL The manufacturer shall furnish all metering pump system equipment to complete a properly functioning, integrated package as intended by these specifications. The system shall be factory-assembled to the maximum extent practical. Factory assembly shall include all pumps, motors, bases, drives, and appurtenant valves and fittings. Any component parts not pre-assembled due to packaging and shipping concerns shall be identified and clearly labeled. No field welding will be allowed. All materials used for the metering pumps and accessories shall be designed by the manufacturer to have the necessary strength, stability and stiffness for the intended service. All connections, foundation bolts, plates, nuts, washers and clamps shall be corrosion resistant to the conditions of use. 2.03 MATERIALS The peristaltic metering pumps shall be manufactured of the following materials:

Item Material


Case Die-cast aluminum Track Epoxy coated aluminum Rollers MOS2 filled Nylatron Bearings PTFE coated aluminum Drive shaft 440C stainless steel

Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. PUMP AND DRIVE MECHANISM: Pump shall be of the positive displacement peristaltic type utilizing a flexible tube. The tubing shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) and be held in place on the suction and discharge by a hand adjustable clamp mechanism. Tube clamps requiring tools are not acceptable. Suction and discharge shall be on the same side of the pump head. The tubing shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pump head and without the use of tools. Each pump shall consist of track/pump head cover with safety lock-out switch, screw down retainer mechanism, roller rotor assembly with integral adjustable speed drive. The lock-out switch shall render the drive inoperable when opened. The pump head shall be easily secured to the drive and be self locating. Each pump shall be capable of self priming when completely dry with a suction lift capability of up to 30 feet of water. The pump shall be capable of running dry without damaging effects to the pump or tubing. The pump shall require no check valves or diaphragms and shall not require any dynamic seals in contact with the process fluid. The process fluid shall only be in contact with the inside of the pump tubing. Pumps shall be configured to conform with space constraints as shown in the Contract Drawings. B. TUBING: The manufacturer shall furnish the appropriate hose material for the conditions of use (e.g., extruded Marprene, Neoprene, Silicone, PVC, or Viton). The tubing shall be of 64 shore A durometer. Pump tubing diameter shall be as specified in Part 1.01, Paragraph D, Item 2. C. ROTOR ASSEMBLY AND TRACK:


The rotor assembly shall be equipped with two or four self lubricating geared compression rollers mounted on spring loaded arms. Rotor material of construction shall be as specified in paragraph 11381-2.03.A. Compression rollers shall be symmetrical about the rotor for compression of the hose against the track. The track material shall be as specified in paragraph 11381-2.03.A, and if cast aluminum; shall be factory coated with trimite polyurethane. One roller shall at all times be fully engaged with the tubing providing complete compression to prevent back flow or siphoning. The pumping action shall be created by the occlusion of the pump hose and its subsequent restitution causing a vacuum effect to draw the fluid into the suction side of the hose. Hose occlusion shall be adjustable with a lead screw, which limits the travel of the spring, loaded roller. D. PIPING CONNECTION: Adapters and connective fittings between the flexible tubing and the fixed piping shown on the Contract Drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer for each size tubing that is compatible with each pump. Pumps shall be supplied with a Load Sure tubing element with molded fittings, which shall be self-locating when fitted into the pumphead. Tube element shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) through an angle of 90 degrees and be held in place on the suction and discharge by element fittings. The tubing elements shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pumphead and without the use of tools. 2.05 DRIVE UNITS AND CONTROLS A. ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE: Pumps shall be provided with an integrally mounted adjustable speed drive. The speed setting of the drive shall be continuously adjustable over a minimum 3600:1 operating range. The adjustable speed drive shall be located in the pump casing. Drive motor shall be servo permanent magnet DC with integral gear box. B. MOTORS: Drive shall be rated for continuous 24-hour operation. Pumps shall have non-maintained maximum speed switches for purpose of priming. Pump drives shall be close coupled and self aligning, requiring no flexible couplings. Each pump shall be capable of operating with a range of hose/tubing diameters and thicknesses which may vary depending on the drive size of the pump. The drive enclosure shall be NEMA 4X rated and be factory coated with a corrosion resistant non-reactive (e.g. polyester and/or polyurethane) coating. Drive motors shall be integrally mounted in drive enclosure. C. CONTROL PANEL:


Local controls shall consist of a speed adjusting pushbuttons, a START pushbutton, a STOP pushbutton, and an AUTO/MANUAL switch. Control shall be such that when the drive is running in the MANUAL mode, speed shall be adjusted with the local pushbuttons. In the AUTO mode, the drive shall operate in response to a external run command and 4-20 mA external speed reference signal as shown on drawings. NEMA 4X rated controls shall be provided on the pumps. The controls shall provide as a minimum the following features: 1. Accept a 4-20 mA speed reference input signal 2. Accept dry REMOTE-RUN contact 3. Provide a 4-20 mA drive speed output signal

4. Provide dry contacts rated for 1 amp at 120 V AC for the following status: a. Running b. In AUTO mode c. Alarm e. Leak detector Run/Stop control

D. LEAK DETECTOR Pumps shall be provided with float-type leak sensors for leak detection and pump shut

down in the event of a tubing failure

2.06 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING Pumps shall be suitable for installation on a wall-mounted structural support. 2.07 COATINGS Except as otherwise specified in this Section 11381, equipment shall be shop primed in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900. 2.08 SPARE PARTS The following spare parts components shall be provided: 1. Two lengths of tubing in each size (diameter) as necessary to satisfy the

requirements of paragraph 11381-1.01 D-2. Spare parts shall be tagged and stored as specified in Section 11000. 2.09 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:


1. Operation and maintenance data, as specified in Section 01730, on the

pumps, adjustable speed drives and accessories. 2. Manufacturer’s certification (Form 11000-A per Section 01999) that the

equipment has been properly installed, aligned and tested and meets all requirements for satisfactory performance under the conditions specified.

3. Manufacturer’s instruction certification (Form 11000-B per Section 01999)

that instructions to operators have been completed. 4. Motor data as specified in Section 11060. 5. Pump Test Log as specified in paragraph 11381-3.03. PART 3–EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Pumps shall be aligned, connected, and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION The equipment shall be installed and tested under the direction of factory trained personnel as specified in Section 11000. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. The pumps shall be flow calibrated according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.03 TESTING After installation, the equipment specified in this section shall be completely tested to ensure compliance with operating requirements, varying pumps speeds with speeds and flows recorded in a test log. Field testing shall be in accordance with the testing procedures in Section 01660. Testing shall verify the control strategies specified in Division 17. Following successful testing and commissioning of associated control loops, and prior to pumping chemical solution, the pump and chemical piping shall be emptied and dried. See Section 15050 for additional requirements. 3.04 TRAINING


A minimum of 6 hours of training, as specified in Section 01664, shall be provided. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 11384

SEAL-LESS MAGNETIC DRIVE PUMPS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies seal-less magnetic drive pumps for chemical transfer. Each pumping unit shall be completed with pump, magnetic coupling and motor. B. TYPE: Each pump shall be magnetically coupled with a motor and shall not require a shaft seal between the pump and the motor. Pumps shall be centrifugal type. Torque shall be transmitted by a magnetic field from the magnet attached to the motor through the solid body to the magnet attached to the impeller. The pump housing, impeller spindle, and impeller magnet housing for each pump shall be compatible with the chemical pumped. C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

NaOCl Loop Pump #1 MLC-C3-51-0004

NaOCl Loop Pump #2 MLC-C3-51-0005 D. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: Equipment provided under this section shall conform to the following:

Location No.

Rated design capacity gpm

at BEPa Max.

head, feet Max.

speed, rpm Voltage & phase Horsepower

Discharge pipe size, inches

MLC-C3-51-0004 25 95 1750 460/3 5 1

MLC-C3-51-0005 25 95 1750 460/3 5 1

a Because the pumps are to operate at a constant speed, the pump shall be selected so that the rated condition lies within five percent (based upon capacity) of the best efficiency point (BEP) on the pump’s head-capacity curve.


E. CHEMICAL DATA: Pumps shall be suitable for the following chemical: 1. Sodium Hypochlorite pumps: a. Chemical: Sodium Hypochlorite b. Concentration: 12.5 percent c. Unit weight: 10.2 lbs. per gallon d. Maximum liquid temperature: 125 degrees F 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

Hydraulic Institute Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, 14th Edition 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be suitable for indoor installation in a wastewater treatment plant. The environmental conditions are specified in Section 01800. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer’s data including materials of construction and equipment weight. 2. Predicted performance curves developed for the specific application. 3. Motor data as specified under paragraph 11060-1.03. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Pumps shall be Fybroc Pumps, Model 2530, Vanton Pumps, Model CGM, or equal.


2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Casing Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or Vinyl Ester

Impeller Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or Vinyl Ester

Shaft Silicon Carbide

Bearings Silicon Carbide

O-ring Viton 2.03 CONSTRUCTION Each pump shall be constructed of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or vinyl ester. Shaft and thrust washers shall be silicon carbide. External fasteners shall be Type 316 silicon carbide. Pump assembly shall provide high chemical resistance with non-metallic solution contact. Impellers shall be fully enclosed for high efficiency. Pump connections shall be an integral 150 pound flange with PVDF or vinyl ester face. 2.04 MOTOR Pumps shall be driven by Type 2 motors as specified in Section 11060. Speed and maximum horsepower shall be as specified in paragraph 11384-1.01 D. 2.05 SPARE PARTS For each type of chemical transfer pumps, the following spare parts shall be provided:

a. One set of pump bearings and O-rings. b. One set of impeller and magnet assembly. Spare parts shall be tagged and stored as specified in paragraph 11000-2.12. 2.06 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Motor data as specified in paragraph 11060-2.05.

2. Applicable operation and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. PART 3--EXECUTION



3.01 INSTALLATION Each pumping unit shall be aligned, connected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, each pumping unit shall be field tested to ensure compliance with the performance requirements as specified. 3.03 FIELD SERVICE A minimum of 4 hours of training shall be provided by the pump manufacturer's service representative. Training shall conform to Section 01666 and shall be certified on Form 11000-B in Section 01999. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the on-site field instruction training with the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR times and dates the OWNER’s operators can attend training.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11921

AUTOMATIC SAMPLERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish the installation of an automatic sampling unit complete and operational with motors, control equipment and accessories as shown and specified. B. COORDINATION: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the automatic sampling unit.

2. Notify other contractors in advance of the installation of the automatic sampling unit to provide them with sufficient time for the installation of items included in their contracts that must be installed with, or before, the positive displacement progressing cavity pumps Work.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:

American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). Standards of American Water Works Association, (AWWA). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, (IEEE). National Electrical Code, (NEC). Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association, (NEMA). National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).


A. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS:

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience producing substantially similar equipment and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years.


B. COMPONENT SUPPLY: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component

manufacturer from a single automatic sampling unit manufacturer.

2. The automatic sampling unit equipment manufacturer shall provide and approve all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section.

3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the automatic sampling unit manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit the following:

1. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including:

dimensions, materials, size, weight, and performance data.

2. Shop Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, installation details and wiring diagrams.

B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

1. Submit complete Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Information.

C. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATION: Furnish a lubricant specification for the type and grade necessary to meet the requirements of the equipment. Lubricant shall be available from a local source. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:

1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work.


B. STORAGE AND PROTECTION:

1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

C. ACCEPTANCE AT SITE:

1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. DESIGN CRITERIA:

1. The sampler shall be designed for continuous operation and will be operated continuously under normal service.

2. The secondary effluent sampler equipment shall be provided to meet the following performance and design requirements:

Refrigerated Sampler Size (HxWxD): Maximum 51 x 28 x 33 in. Weight: < 170 lb. Bottle 6 Gallon Polyethene Power requirements: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1 Ph Refrigerator Body Vinyl-Coated Steel or Linear Low Density Polyethylene Operational Temperature: -14 to 120 F (-29 to 49C)

Pump Intake Suction Tubing: Flexible 3/8” Vinyl Pump Tubing Life: 1,000,000 Pump Counts Maximum Suction Lift: 27’ Sample Volume Repeatability:

+/- 5%

Line Velocity @ Head Min 3.0 ft/sec @ 3 ft


Controller

Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Internal Clock Accuracy: 0.007% Number Composite Samples: 1 to 400 Flow Meter Signal Inputs: 4-20 mA input Digital Alarms: 4 programmable outputs; 5V, 100 mA Sample Frequency: 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes, in 1-minute

increments. 1 to 9,999 flow pulses. Sampling Modes: Uniform time, flow proportioned, flow paced. Programmable Sample Vol: 10 to 9,990 ml in 1 ml increments. Sample Retries: If no sample is detected, up to 3 attempts; user

selectable. Rinse Cycles: Automatic rinsing of suction line up to 3 rinses for each

sample collection. Controller Diagnostics: Tests for RAM, ROM, and pump

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. MANUFACTURERS: 1. Hach 2. Teledyne ISCO 3. Or equal

2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. REFRIGERATED LIQUID SAMPLER

1. Provide a sampling unit integrally connected to a refrigerator. Unit shall incorporate a full container shut-off (Hach #8847 or equal), composite tube support (Hach #8986 or equal), Teflon/stainless steel strainer (Hach #926 or equal), and multi-purpose half cable (Hach #541 or equal). 2.04 SPARE PARTS

B. Manufacturer shall furnish a list of additional recommended spare parts for an operating period of one year. The list shall describe each part, the quantity recommended, and the unit price of the part. OWNER shall purchase all, some, or none of the recommended spare parts at his option.


C. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the Project. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION


B. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s representative shall check and approve the installation prior to operation. Manufacturer's representative shall field test and calibrate the equipment to assure that the system operates to the OWNER’S satisfaction.

B. Installation shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of grease and oil, recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Support piping independent of unit. 3.03 START UP AND TEST


B. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. All equipment will be given running tests by CONTRACTOR at the job Site following installation of the equipment and controls. Should the tests indicate any malfunction, CONTRACTOR shall make any necessary repairs and adjustments. Such tests and adjustments shall be repeated until, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the installation is complete and the equipment is functioning properly and accurately, and is ready for permanent operation.

B. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test services and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of two site visits, minimum 8 hours on-Site for each visit. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. Subsequent visits shall be for checking the completed installation, start-up and training of the system. Manufacturer’s representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the Engineer and verify that the equipment conforms to the


requirements. Representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

C. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in CONTRACTOR’S bid price.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 13000-1 General Requirements for Instrumentation and Industrial Electronic Systems

SECTION 13000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE: This section specifies general requirements, which are applicable to all process

control, instrumentation, communication, and signal systems. Raceways and requirements for signal cables are specified in Division 16. B. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM:

The plant process control system is comprised of a distributed PLC/SCADA system, new and existing motor control centers, new and existing control panels, control stations, and related devices, new instrumentation and all miscellaneous appurtenances required for a complete and operating system.

Work of this specification shall include engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, and testing of all new hardware systems required for the construction, integration and commissioning of a complete process instrumentation and control system. Total integration of field-mounted instrumentation, control devices, and process equipment furnished and installed as work of this section of the specifications, and of similar equipment furnished and installed as work of other sections shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR under this section of the specifications. All programmable logic controller and human machine interface subsystems within the complete process instrumentation and control system shall be configured, programmed and tested by the OWNER. Coordination between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR is specified herein and within other sections of Division 13.

CONTRACTOR’s validation and testing is defined in section 13030.

Comprehensive training and system documentation shall be provided as specified within all division 13 sections. C. DEFINITIONS:

1. GENERAL: The definitions of terminology used in these specifications shall be defined in ISA Standard S51.1 unless otherwise specified.


2. SOLID STATE: Circuitry or components of the type which convey electrons by means of solid material such as crystals or which work on magnetic principles such as ferrite cores. Vacuum tubes, gas tubes, slide wires, stepping motors, or other devices are not acceptable substitutes for solid state components or circuitry.

3. INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: A number of circuit elements inseparably

associated on or within a continuous body to perform the function of a circuit.

4. TWO-WIRE TRANSMITTER: A transducer that derives operating power

supply from the signal transmission circuit and therefore requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter which produces a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulated signal in a series circuit with a 24 volt direct current driving potential and a maximum circuit resistance of 600 ohms.

5. FOUR WIRE TRANSMITTER: A transducer that is powered by a separate

power supply (usually 120 VAC) and produces a separate output signal proportional to the measured process variable (usually 4 – 20 milliamps).

6. GALVANIC ISOLATION: An electrical node having no direct current path

to another electrical node. As used in this specification, galvanic isolation refers to a device with electrical inputs and/or outputs which are galvanically isolated from ground, the device case, the process fluid, and any separate power supply terminals, but such inputs and/or outputs are capable of being externally grounded without affecting the characteristics of the devices or providing path for circulation of ground currents.

7. PANEL: An instrument support system, which may be either a flat surface, a

partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices, used in process control systems. Panels may provide mechanical protection, electrical isolation, and protection from dust, dirt, and chemical contaminants which may be present in the atmosphere. Panel shall include consoles, cabinets and racks.

8. DATA SHEETS: Data sheets as used in this specification shall refer to

ISA S20.

9. SIGNAL TYPES: The following types of signals are used in systems specified in this division.

a. LOW LEVEL ANALOG: A signal that has a full output level of 100

millivolts or less. This group includes thermocouples and resistance temperature detectors.


b. DIGITAL CODE: Coded information such as that derived from the output of an analog to digital converter or the coded output from a digital computer or other digital transmission terminal. This type includes those cases where direct line driving is utilized and not those cases where the signal is modulated.

c. PULSE FREQUENCY: Counting pulses such as those emitted from

speed transmitters.

d. HIGH LEVEL ANALOG: Signals with full output level greater than 100 millivolts but less than 30 volts, including 4-20 mA transmission.

e. MODULATED SIGNALS: Signals emanating from modems or

low-level audio signals. Normal signal level is plus 4 dBm to minus 22 dBm. Frequency range is 300 to 10,000 hertz.

f. DISCRETE EVENTS: Dry contact closures monitored by solid-state

equipment. If the conductors connecting to dry contacts enter enclosures containing power or control circuits and cannot be isolated from such circuits in accordance with NEC Article 725, this signal shall be treated as low voltage control.

g. LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL: Contact closures monitored by

relays, or control circuits operating at less than 30 volts and 250 milliamperes.

h. HIGH LEVEL AUDIO SIGNALS: Audio signals exceeding plus 4

dBm, including loudspeaker circuits.

i. RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS: Continuous wave alternating current signals with fundamental frequency greater than 10 kilohertz.

10. SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR: An organization engaged in the business of

detail engineering, component purchase, assembly, programming and implementing process control and industrial electronic systems.

11. PCIS: Stands for Process instrumentation and control materials, equipment

and systems 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES:

This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in

effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

All work performed and all materials used shall be in accordance with the

National Electrical Code, and with applicable local regulations and ordinances. Where mandated by codes, panels, assemblies, materials, and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories or other testing organizations acceptable to the governing authority as required. CONTRACTOR shall, as part of their work, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and approvals by the authorities having local jurisdiction of such work. This shall include any third-party inspections and testing of panels and equipment.

Reference Title ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ANSI MC96.1 Temperature Measurement Thermocouples API RP551 Process Measurement Instrumentation ASME 1971 "Fluid Meters." Report of ASME Research Committee

on Fluid Meters ASTM A105/A105M

Forgings, Carbon Steel for Piping Components

ASTM A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service

ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A312/A312M

Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

ASTM B68 Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed ISA RP-60.11 Crating, Shipping and Handling for Control Centers ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams ISA S7.3 Quality Standard for Instrument Air ISA S20 Specification Forms For Process Measurement and

Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves

ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology


Reference Title MILSPEC MIL-I-46058C

Insulating Compound, Electrical (For Coating Printed Circuit Assemblies)

NEMA 250 (1988)

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) SAMA PMC5-10-63 Resistance Thermometers SAMA PMC6-10-63 Filled System Thermometers SAMA PMC8-10-63 Thermocouple Thermometers SAMA PMC17-10-63

Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing Elements

SAMA PMC21-4-66 Temperature-Resistance Values for Resistance Thermometer Elements of Platinum, Nickel, and Copper

OBC Ohio Building Code B. SYSTEMS RESPONSIBILITY:

All instrumentation and industrial electronic systems shall be provided under the supervision of a single systems integrator, chosen by the CONTRACTOR, which is regularly engaged in the design and installation of such systems of similar scope and complexity. CONTRACTOR is responsible to the OWNER for performance of all systems as specified.

The CONTRACTOR shall also assign unit responsibility for configuration and documentation of the following related systems to the systems integrator:

1. 600 Volt Adjustable Frequency Drives, Section 16920, 16925, whether installed in MCCs or separately mounted.

The systems integrator shall bear the responsibility for configuration and

documentation of the specified related systems.

A certificate of unit responsibility, signed by an officer of the systems integrator organization and notarized, shall be provided with the submittals for the related systems. No other submittal material shall be processed or reviewed until the certificate attesting to the unit responsibility assignment has been received and found to be satisfactory by the ENGINEER. A typical certification form, Form 11000-C, is provided in specification Section 01999.

C. SYSTEM INTEGRATOR QUALIFICATIONS:

The CONTRACTOR proposing to perform the work of Division 13 shall meet or exceed the following qualifications. Upon request by the ENGINEER and prior to award of the


contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be required to demonstrate compliance with the stated qualification requirements.

1. Organization that has been established for a minimum of 5 years and actively involved in the business of process control and instrumentation systems integration and has adequate plant facilities, organization structure, manpower, and technical and managerial expertise to properly perform the work under and in conformance with these specifications.

2. Involvement in 5 (minimum) projects of similar scope and size involving the

design, integration, installation, testing and commissioning of wastewater treatment facility process instrumentation and control systems.

3. Shall have at the time of project advertisement an experienced engineering

and technical staff capable of process control system design, integration, testing, and commissioning, as well as a thorough understanding of wastewater treatment processes. Engineering staff shall include engineer(s) registered in the State of Ohio who will provide direct supervision of the project work and will seal all related project documents as required by the State of Ohio.

4. Shall have the in-house resource of permanent personnel for the preparation

of system documentation and system operation and maintenance training.

All instrumentation and industrial electronic systems shall be provided under the supervision of a single systems integrator, chosen by the CONTRACTOR, which is regularly engaged in the design and installation of such systems of similar scope and complexity. CONTRACTOR is responsible to the OWNER for performance of all systems as specified.

D. COORDINATION MEETINGS:

The CONTRACTOR shall include as work of this section of the specifications the requirement for two (2) coordination meetings to be held at the project site. The primary function of the meetings shall be to insure compliance with the requirements of the construction documents and facilitate timely performance of the contract. The CONTRACTOR shall have in attendance at each meeting a representative of the Division 13 subcontractor who is responsible for the execution of the work of this contract. The preliminary schedule and agenda for each of the meetings shall be as described below. The specific dates for each of the meetings shall be scheduled by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall be provided with two (2) weeks minimum advanced written notice of proposed scheduled meeting dates.

1. MEETING 1: Meeting 1 shall be held within ninety (90) days of receipt of

Notice to Proceed. The purpose of this meeting shall be to review the Division 13 specification requirements in regards to submittal and testing


procedures and to discuss the specific details of the proposed process instrumentation and control system configuration.

2. MEETING 2: Meeting 2 shall be held within thirty (30) days of completion

of the ENGINEER’s review of the elementary and loop diagram submittal package and the testing and commissioning plan and procedures submittal package. The purpose of this meeting shall be to discuss the submittal review comments and resolve any related issues.

1.03 ALLOWANCE:

In order to allow the OWNER to obtain the latest technology, the CONTRACTOR shall include an allowance of $20,000.00 for the purchase of the following equipment.

One personal workstation with Microsoft XP Professional operating

system and Microsoft Office software.

One large Plasma Monitor,

One color printer/scanner/copier,

Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS),

Ethernet switches,

Fiber optic transceivers for Ethernet switches,

Control Room Operator Desk

Other items as determined by OWNER. The ENGINEER will provide a detailed bill of materials to the SYSTEM

CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall assemble actual costs based on the detailed bill of materials and submit this information for review and approval. Compensation of the allowance shall be actual cost and not include any overhead or profit. Actual costs shall be substantiated by submitting order invoices from suppliers of equipment. ENGINEER will then provide CONTRACTOR written permission to proceed with procurement. The CONTRACTOR shall procure and deliver the items to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the set-up and configuration of all the items provided under the allowance unless otherwise requested by the OWNER. Submittals will not be required for items purchased under the allowance. Warranty for items purchased under the allowance shall be transferred to the OWNER.

OWNER will furnish the Intellution iClient Software and Software Key.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS


A. GENERAL:

Specified communication and process control equipment shall be modified, if necessary, to make it suitable for operation in the following ambient conditions. Indoor and outdoor field location temperatures and relative humidities are specified in Section 01800. B. ALL AREAS: Atmospheric contaminants: Hydrogen sulfide 0.1 mg/l

Ammonia: 0.5 mg/l Chlorine: 0.01 mg/l Dust: 50.0 µg/l

The bulk Sodium Hypochlorite storage area is used to hold and distribute up to 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite solution and higher levels of chlorine contaminants may occur (i.e. due to a leak).

Electromagnetic radiation: 27-500 MHz: 10 v/m C. CONTROL ROOMS: Temperature: 45 to 80 degrees F Humidity: 20 to 90 %

D. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:

Hazardous locations shall be as specified in Section 16000. E. CORROSIVE LOCATIONS:

Corrosive locations shall be as specified in Section 16000. 1.05 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. GENERAL:

The instrumentation and signal system functions required are specified on the Drawings and in subsequent sections of this division.

B. DRAWINGS:


1. GENERAL: The drawings included in this project manual are functional in nature and do not show exact locations of equipment or interconnections between equipment. The CONTRACTOR, as part of his work, shall prepare detailed construction drawings as specified below. Drawings shall be prepared on a computer-aided drafting system as specified in paragraph 13000-2.02 C.

Drawings shall be prepared on 11-inch by 17-inch drafting media. Drawings shall be prepared in full compliance with OWNER’s design and drafting standards. Media shall be bond paper. Drawings shall have borders and title blocks identifying the project, system, revisions to the drawing, and type of drawing. Each revision of a drawing shall carry a date and brief description of the revisions. Diagrams shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire numbers and terminal block numbers in compliance with panelwork wiring, Section 13110, to permit cross-referencing between contract documents and the drawings prepared by the CONTRACTOR. All drawings shall comply with OWNER’s drafting and design standards in all respects.

2. ELEMENTARY AND LOOP DIAGRAMS:

The CONTRACTOR shall provide elementary diagrams for all motorized valves. Loop diagrams shall be prepared in compliance with ISA S5.4, and shall be provided for all analog loops and discrete field devices wired to the PLC. Elementary diagrams and loop diagrams shall show circuits and devices of a system. These diagrams shall be arranged to emphasize device elements and their functions as an aid to understanding the operation of a system and maintaining or troubleshooting that system. Elementary and loop diagrams shall show wire numbers, wire color codes, signal polarities, terminal block numbers, instrument manufacturer and model numbers, calibration ranges, switch settings, and the MSD assigned location number for each device. Loop diagrams shall be B size, 11 x 17. One tag number shall be represented on one loop diagram.

Elementary and loop diagrams shall be completely and accurately documented and cross-referenced to similar drawings for other related system such as motor control centers, equipment control panels, local control panels, field-mounted instruments, etc. All interfaces to remote systems shall include panel and /or equipment designations, wire numbers, and terminal designations.

See attached Instrument and Device Index for a list of devices that will require elementary and loop diagrams. In some cases, multiple related devices may be documented on a single drawing.

1.06 SUBMITTALS


The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all

referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (√) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Manufacturer’s product data for all specified equipment. Product data shall include

catalog cuts, technical specifications and application information. Product data shall be edited to indicate on those items, model, or series of equipment which are being proposed. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated.

3. Sizing calculations or power budgets for all power supply and conditioning

equipment. Calculations shall address both watt and volt-ampere components of the demand load. All assumptions made regarding load size or demand factor shall be clearly stated.

4. Certificate of Unit Responsibility specified in paragraph 13000-1.02 B.

5. Complete dimensional, assembly, and installation drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams; and details, specifications, and data covering the materials used and the parts, devices and accessories forming a part of the system furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. Submittal data shall be grouped and submitted in three separate stages. The submittal for each stage shall be substantially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. Equipment tag numbers or identifications used on the drawings shall be referenced where applicable.

A. FIRST STAGE SUBMITTAL:

The first stage submittal shall include the following items.


1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or discrepancies between the system proposed by the CONTRACTOR and this specification.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall produce data sheets for each component or device provided which shall include as a minimum – the complete model number, optional features, size, and power requirement. In addition, Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware items, clearly marked to show the model number, optional features, and intended service of each device shall be provided.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a brief, concise description of the proposed system, including major hardware and software components, field services, and personnel training.

4. A block diagram or schematic drawing showing the principal items of equipment furnished, including model numbers, and their interrelationships.

5. Drawings showing floor space or desktop area requirements for all equipment items, including allowances for door swings and maintenance access.

6. Environmental and power requirements, including heat release information for each equipment item.

7. Standard field termination drawings for all process input/output equipment, showing typical terminations for each type of point available in the system.

8. A copy of the proposed software licenses for all software associated with the system.

C. SECOND STAGE SUBMITTAL:

Before any equipment is released for shipment to the site and before factory

testing is scheduled, the following data shall be submitted. At The CONTRACTOR’S option, the first and second stage submittals may be

combined.

1. Complete panel fabrication drawings and details of panel wiring, piping, and painting. Panel and subpanel drawings shall include overall dimensions, metal thickness, door swing, mounting details, weight, and front of panel arrangement to show general appearance, with spacing and mounting height of instruments and control devices.


2. The submittal shall have wiring and installation drawings for all interconnecting wiring between components of the system and between related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams shall show complete circuits and indicate all connections. If panel terminal designations, interdevice connections, device features and options, or other features are modified during the fabrication or factory testing, revised drawings shall be submitted before shipment of the equipment to the site. Loop diagrams specified in paragraph 13000-1.05. In addition, all drawings shall be submitted to the OWNER for proof check for standards compliance prior to final submittal.

3. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment.

4. Input/output listings showing point names, numbers, Input/output identification numbers from the contract documents shall be cross-referenced in this submittal.

5. Proposed lesson plans or outlines for all training courses specified herein, including schedule, instructors' qualifications and experience, and recommended prerequisites. Certificate of Unit Responsibility specified in paragraph 13000-1.02 B.

C. THIRD STAGE SUBMITTAL:

Complete system documentation, in the form of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, shall be submitted before the commencement of field acceptance testing. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include complete instruction books for each item of equipment furnished. Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range of device, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the device model number and other special features. A complete set of "as-built" wiring, fabrication, and interconnection drawings shall be included with the manuals. If field-wiring modifications are made after these drawings are submitted, the affected drawings shall be revised and resubmitted.

D. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT:

All electronic equipment and instruments shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements, shall be kept dry at all times, and shall not be exposed to adverse


ambient conditions.

Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of ENGINEER.

Each shipment shall include an appropriate shipping list that indicates the contents of the package, including the specific instrument tags. The shipping list shall be accessible without exposing the instruments to the atmosphere. The shipping list shall also contain any cautionary notes regarding storage of the instruments, including requirements to protect the instrument from static discharge, desensitizing chemicals (solvents, paints, etc.), or ambient atmospheric conditions.

Individual instruments shall be appropriately tagged or labeled to allow positive identification of the device. All identification shall be visible without the need to unpack the instrument from its protective packaging.

Instrument shipment and storage requirements shall be coordinated with ENGINEER or OWNER prior to shipment. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate storage and be ready to accept the shipment before shipping any equipment to the site. Additional shipping and storage requirements shall be as detailed in the individual instrument specifications.

Components that are shipped loose due to transportation limitations shall be assembled and disassembled by the manufacturer prior to shipment to assure that all components fit together and are adequately supported.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND QUALITY

Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. Each type of instrument, instrument accessory, and device shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the work.

Electronic equipment shall be designed for use in industrial applications and shall be suitable for operation in the specified environmental conditions, including corrosive and hazardous atmospheres. Components of standard electronic assemblies shall not be replaced with components of different characteristics in order to meet the performance requirements of this specification. Parts shall be as shown in the instruction manuals and shall be replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading the performance of the completed assembly.

2.02 GENERAL SCADA EQUIPMENT


1. POWER SUPPLY. Unless otherwise specified, power supply to all equipment

will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for distribution of power among enclosures, consoles, peripherals, and other components of the system from the power supply receptacles and junction boxes indicated on the drawings. Power distribution hardware shall include cables and branch circuit over current protection installed in accordance with NEC.

2. FACILITY DISTRUBUTION STYSTEM: Equipment not indicated to be

powered from an uninterruptible power source shall be suitable for being supplied from the facility distribution system and shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations of ±10 percent and harmonics up to the limits of IEEE 519 without affecting operation. CONTRACTOR shall provide voltage conditioning or filtering equipment if necessary to meet the requirements specified.

3. POWER SUPPLIES: Power supplies for voltages other than those listed above

shall be an integral part of the equipment furnished. Internal power supplies shall be regulated, current limiting, and self-protected.

4. SURGE WITHSTAND: All equipment shall meet all surge withstand capability

tests as defined in ANSI C37.90 without damage to the equipment.

5. SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. The equipment provided for the instrumentation and control system shall be suitable for the service conditions specified in the attached equipment sections.

All equipment shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in performance throughout the environmental extremes specified. Equipment shall be designed to prevent the generation of electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices.

6. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: All system equipment located in air-conditioned rooms shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures from 10°C to 35°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 80 percent, non-condensing. All equipment located in non-air conditioned indoor areas shall be suitable for an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 50°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 95 percent, non-condensing. All equipment located outdoors shall be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range 0°C to 60°C and a relative humidity of 5 to 100 percent. Heaters and air conditioning/cooling equipment shall be provided where essential to maintain equipment within its manufacturer-recommended operating ranges.

7. DELETERIOUS EFFECTS: All system equipment will be installed in areas

without anti-static floor construction and without any provisions for control of particulates or corrosive gases other than ordinary office-type HVAC filtering.


The CONTRACTOR shall furnish any additional air cleaning equipment, anti-static chair pads, or other protective measures necessary for proper operation of the system.

All input/output hardware shall meet or exceed, without false operation, all requirements of NEMA ICS-1-109.60, Electrical Noise Tests.

8. NOISE LEVELl: The equivalent "A" weighted sound level for any system

equipment located in the control room, except printers, shall not exceed 35 dBA. The sound level for printers shall not exceed 65 dBA. Sound reduction enclosures shall be provided where necessary to comply with these limits.

9. LIGHTING PROTECTION: In addition to other environmental protection

specified herein, the entire system shall be provided with lightning protection. Lightning protection measures shall include the following.

10. GROUNDING: All major components of the system shall have a low resistance

ground connection. Grounding system provisions indicated on the drawings shall be modified as recommended by The CONTRACTOR.

11. SURGE SPUPPRESSORS: Surge and lightning suppressors shall be non-

faulting, non-interrupting, and shall protect against line-to-line and line-to-ground surges. Devices shall be solid-state metal oxide varistor (MOV) or silicon junction type, with a response time of less than 50 nanoseconds. Surge protective devices shall be applied for the following:

a. All power connections to RTUs, PLCs, DCUs, instruments and control room equipment. Surge arresters shall be Transtector "ACP-100 Series", Power Integrity Corporation “ZTA Series”, Phoenix Contact “Mains PlugTrab”, or MCG Surge Protection “400 Series”.

b. All connections to coaxial-based networked equipment (including CCTV, CATV, Ethernet, Arcnet, and satellite) where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Surge arresters shall be Telematic “VP08”, Transtector “TCP Series”, Phoenix Contact “CoaxTrab Series”, or Northern Technologies “TCS-CP3 Series”.

c. All analog signal circuits where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Circuits shall be protected at both the transmitter and the control system end of the circuit. Surge protection devices shall not impede or interfere with the use of smart transmitter calibration/communication. Protection devices located near the transmitter shall be Telematic “TP48.” Protection devices in control panels shall be Transtector “TSP Series”, Telematic “SD Series”, Phoenix Contact “PipeTrab Series”, or Citel “BP1-24.”


d. All metallic pair (twisted and untwisted) conductor local area networkand data highway termination points, where any part of the data highway cable is routed outside of the building envelope. Single-port protective devices shall be Phoenix Contact “PlugTrab Series” or Telematic “NP Series.”

e. All serial, PLC data highway, and remote I/O network termination points where any part of the circuit is routed outside of the building envelope. Surge protection devices shall be Transtector “DLP Series” (RS-232); Transtector “FSP4000MC Series” (RS-422); Phoenix Contact “PlugTrab Series”; or Citel “E280 Series”.

f. All telephone lines at points of connection to the system. Protection devices for dial-up circuits shall be Transtector “TSJ Series”, Telebyte “Model 22PX”, Citel “BP1-T”, or equal. Protection devices for full period circuits shall be Transtector “LMP Series”, Northern Technologies “DLP-S Series”, Phoenix Contact “TeleTrab Series”, or Circuit Components, Inc. “SPR-TM Series.”

2.02 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: A. COMPONENT FABRICATION DRAWINGS:

Detailed circuit schematics, printed circuit board drawings, and chassis layouts shall be provided for electrical and electronic components. B. CERTIFICATION:

1. TEMPERATURE: Type test data certified by the manufacturer shall be provided to demonstrate that field electronic devices are suitable for the specified ambient temperatures.

2. CORROSION: Data shall be provided showing design features of the

electronic equipment provided to protect against damage by the specified atmospheric contaminants and specific evidence that similarly protected electronic equipment has operated in similar environments for a period of not less than 5 years without failure due to corrosion.

3. HAZARDOUS AREAS: Data shall be provided showing devices are

certified for Class 1, Division 1 installation based on the area designations as shown on the drawings and as defined in the specifications.

C. RECORD DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULES:


Drawings specified under paragraph 13000-1.05 and all schedules included in

Division 13 shall be provided as record drawings in accordance with Section 01720.

Computer-aided drafting (CAD) drawing files shall be converted to AutoCAD, Release 2006 file format and submitted on CD-ROM media. All CAD drawing files shall be updated to reflect final as-constructed state of the process instrumentation and control system.

Following start-up but prior to acceptance of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide 11-inch x 17-inch and full-size prints of elementary, loop, connection and interconnection diagrams. Prints shall reflect the final constructed state of the instrumentation and control systems. D. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION:

Operation and maintenance information shall be provided in accordance with this section, Section 01730 and as required by other sections of this specification division.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:

Installation and testing procedures shall be as specified in specification Section 13030.

Equipment shall be located so that it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.

Where so designated in the related specification sections, sensitive electronic equipment shall not be installed until all construction activities, which result in the production of any air borne matter such as dust, dirt, paint, etc., are completed. Where equipment must be installed due to construction sequencing, care shall be taken to protect equipment while maintaining required cooling air flow, and equipment shall be cleaned as required during construction and prior to completion.


B. FIELD EQUIPMENT:

Equipment shall be provided as specified on the Drawings such that built in displays are readily visible and ports and adjustments are accessible for in-place testing and calibration. Where possible, equipment shall be located between 48 inches and 60 inches above the floor or a permanent work platform. Instrumentation equipment shall be mounted for unobstructed access, but mounting shall not obstruct walkways. Equipment shall not be mounted where shock or vibration will impair its operation. Support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping or mechanical equipment except for measuring elements and valve positioners. Instruments and cabinets supported directly by concrete or concrete block walls shall be spaced out not less than 5/8 inch by framing channel between instrument and wall.

Support systems shall be constructed of materials complying with Section 16000. Support systems, including panels, shall be designed in accordance with Ohio Building Code for the applicable seismic zone and to prevent deformation greater than 1/8 inch under the attached equipment load and an external load of 200 pounds in any direction. C. ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS:

Electric power wiring and equipment shall be in compliance with Division 16. Process instrumentation requiring a 120 volt AC power source shall be provided with a disconnect switch in accordance with Section 16140.

D. SIGNAL CONNECTIONS:

Electric signal connections to equipment shall be made on terminal blocks or by locking plug and receptacle assemblies. Jacketed flexible conduit shall be used between equipment and rigid raceway systems except that flexible cable assemblies may be used where plug and receptacle assemblies are provided and the installation is not subject to mechanical damage in normal use. The length of flexible conduit or cord assemblies shall be of sufficient length to allow withdrawal of instruments from the process for maintenance or calibration without disconnection of the raceway or conductors. Flexible cable, receptacle and plug assemblies shall be used only where specified.

E. SALVAGE OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT:

Existing equipment and materials removed or replaced under this contract shall be delivered to OWNER at a location designated by OWNER, or shall be properly disposed of at OWNER'S discretion. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to equipment delivered to OWNER.

Any mounting brackets, enclosures, stilling wells, piping, conduits, wiring, or openings that remain after removal of equipment and support hardware shall be removed or repaired in a manner acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. Transmitters or switches containing mercury shall be removed and disposed of by personnel trained in the handling of hazardous materials and using approved procedures.


3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 13030.

B. DELIVERY INSPECTION:

The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER upon arrival of any material or equipment to be incorporated into the work and shall remove protective covers or otherwise provide access in order that the ENGINEER may inspect such items. 3.03 TRAINING:

The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of a factory-trained instructor for the purpose of training the OWNER'S personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the instrumentation, control and network systems. Training shall consist of four 8-hour sessions addressing the theory of operation, testing, troubleshooting and maintenance of the instrumentation and control systems in accordance with Section 01664. Each session shall cover the same material. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 13030 TESTING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the acceptance testing of process instrumentation and control materials, equipment and systems (PCIS). CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, tools, material, power and other services necessary to provide the specified tests. 1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. Additional references are listed in Section 13000. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title API RP551 Process Measurement Instrumentation ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves

ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-1 Testing

1.03 APPLICATION

Requirements for testing in accordance with this section are specified in this and other sections of Division 13. Where testing in accordance with this section is required, the required tests, including correction of defects where found, and subsequent retesting, shall be completed prior to commissioning any equipment or systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

CONTRACTOR shall submit the following information in accordance with Specification Section 13000: 1. Qualifications of independent industrial network testing firm in

accordance with Section 3 of ATS-2003. 2. Test procedure documentation report. 3. Examples of test report forms for all specified tests. 4. Sample inspection deficiency report.

5. Listing of instruments to be factory calibrated.

6. Manufacturers catalog and technical data describing software and systems to be used for configuration and documentation. Examples of final documentation reports shall be included.

7. Final test report. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT DATA

The following information shall be provided in accordance with specification Section 01300: 1. Inspection deficiency reports.

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-2 Testing

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

All PCIS testing shall be conducted by the installing contractor and shall be performed in strict conformance with the PCIS test procedures. The PCIS test procedures shall be developed by the installing contractor in accordance with the requirements of this specification and approved by the ENGINEER. The methods and sequence of testing and inspection shall be as specified in paragraph 13030-3.03. The types of equipment and/or systems to be inspected and tested shall be as specified in paragraph 13030-3.04. 3.02 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT) of control panels, cabinets, and other pertinent control systems and devices is required. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for complete equipment setup for the FAT. Following the hardware and interconnectivity testing of the devices and systems listed herein, The CONTRACTOR shall allow staging and setup to remain assembled and powered for one week of software testing by the OWNER. All logic functions, alarms, indications, etc. shall be tested in their entirety by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall have qualified personnel on staff during the FAT to assist the OWNER in testing the staged system. A minimum of one qualified technician shall be available to the OWNER while the OWNER’s Application Engineers are at the staged systems. Following the FAT, CONTRACTOR shall complete as-built documents of the equipment tested during the FAT. As-built documents shall be made available for use by the ENGINEER. A minimum of 15 working days notification shall be provided to the ENGINEER prior to the testing. 3.03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as specified herein. B. TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS:

Each instrument shall be calibrated on site by an instrument technician who, by virtue of attendance at an acceptable training course or by documentable experience, is qualified to calibrate that instrument. Acceptable training shall include successful completion of the instrument manufacturer's training course or successful completion of applicable training courses in a recognized trade school. C. FIELD TEST PROCEDURES DOCUMENTATION:

Test procedures shall be fully developed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the ENGINEER for approval no later than 90 days from the date of Notice to Proceed. A written report shall be prepared which details the test procedures for each analog and discrete loop in the process control system. The test procedure documentation report shall be organized and

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-3 Testing

assembled in separate volumes for each process area. Final test records shall be submitted in electronic form. In order to preserve actual signatures and signoffs, final forms may be electronically scanned and converted to Adobe pdf file format to meet this requirement.

Test procedure documentation shall include a detailed, step-by-step description of

the required test procedure, panel and terminal block numbers for point(s) of measurement, input test values, expected resultant values, test equipment required, process setup requirements, and safety precautions. Test report forms for each loop, including forms for wiring, piping, and individual component tests, shall be included with the test procedure documentation. The actual test results shall be recorded on these forms and a final test report assembled as specified in paragraph 3.04 under this section.

Test report forms which appropriately and completely address field test procedures shall include, but not by way of limitation, the following information: 1. Project Name 2. Process area associated with the equipment under test. 3. Instrument/loop description. 4. Instrument/loop identification number. 5. Instrument nameplate data. 6. Instrument setup and configuration parameters. 7. Time and date of test. 8. Inspection checklist and results. 9. Reference to applicable test procedure. 10. Expected and actual test results for each test point in the loop. 11. Test equipment used. 12. Space for remarks regarding test procedure or results, unusual or

noteworthy observations, etc. 13. Name and signature of testing personnel. 14. Name and signature of test witness.

Test report forms shall be preprinted and completed to the extent possible prior to

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-4 Testing

commencing testing.

D. PERFORMANCE DEVIATION TOLERANCES:

Tolerances shall be determined from applicable contract requirements. Where tolerances are not specified, they shall be determined from manufacturer's published performance specifications. Overall accuracy requirements for loops consisting of two or more components shall be the root-summation-square (RSS) of the individual component accuracy specifications. Tolerances for each required calibration point shall be calculated and recorded on the associated test report form. E. FACTORY CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS:

Where field calibration is not feasible, certified instrumentation calibration reports may be submitted for field calibration reports subject to the prior written approval of the ENGINEER. A request to submit certified calibration reports in lieu of field calibration reports shall include the name and address of the laboratory selected to conduct the calibration testing and a detailed description of the field test and inspection activities which will be performed to supplement off-site calibration activities in order to insure proper installation and freedom from damage subsequent to the off-site calibration. Field test and inspection activities shall include verification of instrument parameter setup, verification of instrument zero, and verification of operation at three operating points within the instrument range.

Certified test reports may be submitted for the following instrument types in lieu of field calibration:

Instrument Identification Description

FIT (Specification 13212) Magnetic flow metering system

No further range adjustments (zero and span) or parameter adjustment other than display parameters, shall be permitted on instruments accepted as off-site calibrated. Any instrument which fails to demonstrate proper performance or is adjusted in the field shall be returned for re-calibration. F. FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTS: 1. TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: CONTRACTOR shall provide

all test equipment required to conduct the specified tests. Test equipment used to simulate inputs and read outputs shall have a rated accuracy at the point of measurement at least three times greater than the component under test. Each test instrument shall have a current calibration sticker showing date of calibration, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date recalibration is required. Certified

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-5 Testing

calibration reports traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology shall be included with the final test report.

The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a documenting calibration system to conduct all process instrumentation calibration activities where applicable. The calibration system shall consist of a documenting process calibrator and an instrumentation data management software system. The calibration system shall automatically capture calibration results and electronically document instrument data, date of calibration, calibration procedures, and as-found/as-left instrument calibration data. The instrument calibration system shall be Fluke 743B with Fluke DPC/Track Instrumentation Management software or similar system. All calibration files shall be submitted with the final test report in hard copy and electronic formats. Electronic files shall be delivered in a file format that does not require specialized equipment or software to read and print the files.

Buffer solutions and reference fluids shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for all tests of analytical equipment.

2. INSPECTION AND TEST SEQUENCE: a. GENERAL: Inspection and test procedures shall be conducted in

the following sequence. Successful completion of each activity shall be required prior to proceeding to the subsequent activity. Each instrument loop shall be tested in the following sequence:

1) Wiring and piping testing 2) Network/Bus Cable System Testing 3) Inspection 4) Individual component calibration and testing 5) Loop testing b. WIRING TESTING: Wiring tests shall be conducted in

accordance with specification 16030. Wiring tests shall not be conducted until cables have been properly terminated, tagged and inspected.

c. PIPING TESTING: Pneumatic piping systems shall be tested for

leaks in compliance with ISA RP7.1, except that the test shall be performed at ten times the normal system operating pressure.

d. NETWORK/BUS CABLE SYSTEM TESTING: All control and

instrumentation bus cabling shall be inspected and tested by one or more independent industrial network testing firms. Proprietary bus systems may be tested by the manufacturer's qualified field

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-6 Testing

services technician. Manufacturer’s sales personnel are not considered to be qualified technicians unless qualifications are documented and certified by the manufacturer. Standardized buses may be tested by a qualified independent network testing service. The following types of cabling and/or networks shall be tested and certified by the independent industrial network testing firm:

1) PLC Remote I/O cabling shall be tested by the manufacturer’s qualified field service technician, except where remote I/O is connected using Ethernet cabling.

2) Control and instrumentation bus cabling shall be tested and

verified using the standards that apply to the specific cable and bus type as follows:

a) Ethernet Category 5E and Category 6 – The

standards of TIA/EIA-568B shall apply. b) DeviceNet – ODVA cabling specification .

c) Foundation Fieldbus – ISA/SP-50 cable specification.

e. PRE-ACTIVE TESTING: Prior to energization, all cabling shall

be inspected and tested to verify, at a minimum, the following:

1) Verify media type and specifications. 2) Verify physical routing and project specific cable

identification tagging. 3) Verify correct type of termination, proper installation of

terminations, and proper connection of conductors to pins at terminations.

4) Verify and record cable run length. Length of each trunk and branch or drop shall be verified and compared to the manufacturer or industry standards organization standards and specification to verify that maximum and minimum segment and total lengths are within specifications.

5) Verify correct locations and values of termination resistance or networks.

6) Verify integrity and correct grounding and/or insulation of cable shields.

7) Verify correct locations and values of transient protection (surge) elements.

8) Verify firmware revision level of all network devices if available prior to energization.

9) Verify correct settings of dip switches and configuration parameters.

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-7 Testing

f. ACTIVE SYSTEM TESTING: Active system testing will be

performed by the CONTRACTOR, under the supervision of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall have qualified personnel available to troubleshoot and correct any problems identified during testing.

g. INSTRUMENT AND COMPONENT INSPECTION: Each component of the PCIS shall be inspected for conformance with this specification and applicable industry standards. All instruments and system components shall be inspected including instruments approved for off-site calibration. Inspection activities shall include the following:

1) Compare and validate instrument type and nameplate data with the Drawings, specifications, and data sheet.

2) Validate instrument identification tag. 3) Confirm instrument installation conforms to the Drawings

and specifications and manufacturers instructions. 4) Verify proper conductor termination and tagging. 5) Visual check for signs of physical damage, dirt

accumulation and corrosion. 6) Verify that all applicable ancillary devices including

isolation amplifiers, surge protection, and safety barriers have been provided and properly installed.

All deficiencies identified as a result of the inspection procedures shall be reported to the ENGINEER in writing within 24 hours of discovery. No instrument or system component shall be tested until all deficiencies are addressed.

h. INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT CALIBRATION AND TESTING: 1) Individual Component Calibration and Testing shall not

commence until all Instrument and Component Inspection, as described above, has been successfully completed and documented to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

2) Each instrument and final element shall be field calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. Instruments shall then be tested in compliance with ISA S51.1 and the data entered on the applicable test form. Alarm trips, control trips, and switches shall be set to initial values specified in paragraph 13200-3.03. Final elements shall be checked for range and deadband.

3) Each analog instrument shall be calibrated at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of its specified full scale range. Each

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-8 Testing

signal sensing trip and process sensing switch shall be adjusted to the required setting. All test data shall be recorded on test forms in compliance with this specification. Factory certified instruments shall not be field recalibrated. Analytical instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with manufacture’s requirements where five point calibration is not applicable.

4) Final element alignment shall be tested and adjusted to verify that each final element operates smoothly over its range in response to the specified process control signals.

5) Any component which fails to meet the specified tolerances shall be repaired by the manufacturer or replaced, and the above tests repeated until the component is within tolerance.

6) A calibration sticker shall be placed on each instrument following successful calibration. The calibration sticker shall indicate the date of calibration and the name of the testing company and personnel who calibrated the instrument.

i. FUNCTIONAL CHECKOUT: Functional testing shall be conducted to verify the operation of all discrete and hardwired control devices. Checkout shall consist of exercising all operable devices and energizing each control circuit and operating each control, alarm or malfunction device and each interlock in turn to verify that the specified action occurs.

j. LOOP TESTING: 1) Loop Testing shall not commence until all Individual

Component Calibration and Testing, as described above, has been successfully completed and documented to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER

2) Each instrument loop shall be tested as an integrated system. This test shall check operation from transmitter or switch to all receiving components within the loop. Signals shall be injected at the signal connection to primary measuring elements.

3) Testing of loops which include an interface to a programmable logic controller shall include verification of the programmable logic controller input/output assignment and verification of operation of the input/output system and processor. The appropriate data table or register in the controller memory shall be inspected to verify proper operation of these systems.

4) If any output device fails to indicate properly, corrections to the loop circuitry shall be made as necessary and the test

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-9 Testing

repeated until all instruments operate properly and update documentation as-built.

k. CONTROL STRATEGY TESTING: 1) Control Strategy Testing shall not commence until all Loop

Testing, as described above, has been successfully completed and documented to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

2) Control Strategy Testing is performed by the OWNER. It will consist of installing and debugging the PLC control logic program, verifying each interface point between the PLC and all field devices and equipment, and exercising the control strategies. The CONTRACTOR shall a lot a minimum of 30 days for all Control Strategy Testing to be completed by the OWNER’s Application Engineers.

3) CONTRACTOR shall have qualified personnel available onsite to immediately correct any deficiencies in the assembled system that may be encountered during Control Strategy Testing. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to provide such personnel in a timely manner may prolong the time allotted to complete Control Strategy Testing. The OWNER shall not be responsible for time lost during Control Strategy Testing caused by the failure of the CONTRACTOR to respond in a reasonable and timely manner.

l. CLOSED LOOP COMMISSIONING:

1) Closed-Loop Commissioning shall not commence until all Control Strategy Testing, as described above, has been successfully completed and documented to the satisfaction of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall allow two weeks for the OWNER’s Application Engineers to perform this testing.

m. POWER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT TESTS: Power conditioning systems shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to demonstrate proper operation. In addition, power conditioning system tests shall include a functional checkout of the equipment to verify the operational integrity of all system controls, indicators, and input/output signals. The input and output voltages shall be measured both unloaded and under system load. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) shall be tested in both the line and battery mode. UPS system output voltage and current shall be recorded in the battery mode of operation at 10 minute intervals for the duration that the

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-10 Testing

UPS system supports the connected load or one hour (maximum). All test results shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications. The test results shall be recorded and submitted with the final test report.

3. WITNESSING: The ENGINEER reserves the right to observe all CONTRACTOR testing. The ENGINEER shall be notified ten (10) business days prior to testing. 3.04 FINAL TEST REPORT

A final test report shall be assembled in a 3-ring binder and submitted to the ENGINEER, along with an electronic version in PDF format, at the completion of the inspection and testing activities for a process area. Binder cover and spine shall be labeled to identify the project name and process area. Test report shall include all applicable test procedures for the process area and the completed inspection and test report forms associated with the equipment and systems of that area. Test results shall be organized by equipment item or system with individual, labeled tab dividers to identify each. All system deficiencies and non-compliant test results identified in the final test report shall be acknowledged by the responsible testing entity as corrected.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-11 Testing

S. S. N0. 5496 13030-12 Testing

CALIBRATION SHEET Equipment Loop Number: Loop / Unit: ____________ Location: ______ Description: ______ Tag I.D.: Manufacturer: ____________ Model Number: ______ Serial Number: Adjustable Range: Calibration Range: Comments: ____________________________________ 1.Calibration Check:

Before Calibration After Calibration Input Output Output Output Output

(Units) (Upscale) (Downscale) (Upscale) (Downscale) 0 % 25 % 50% 75% 100% PC reading = Instrument reading = Switch or relay Test:

Switch / Relay Point Setting Deadband

Setting Upscale Downscale

2.Trip point 1 Trip point 2 Trip point 3

I hereby certify that the above information is true, and that the above instrument /

Loop has been tested and calibrated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Calibrator Signature Date Supervisor Review: ________ Calibration Witnessed: Yes No Witness Reviewer Date

SECTION 13110

PANELS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE:

This section specifies requirements for panels, cabinets, consoles, and racks for instrumentation and communication equipment. Additional requirements are specified in sections specifying the various instrumentation and communication systems. B. TYPES: The following types of panels are specified:

Type Fabrication

1 Open panel with instruments, interconnections, and accessories surface mounted. Open equipment mounting rack for fiber optic patch systems and electronic equipment.

2 Panel with face-mounted instruments flush or semi-flush mounted. Panel rear is not enclosed.

3

Fully enclosed unit with face-mounted instruments flush or semi-flush mounted on the front surface. Freestanding panel configuration may include rear access door(s) for interior mounted instruments and equipment.

4 Fully enclosed unit with front access only and face-mounted instruments, door mounted or as required, mounted on an interior hinged subpanel.

4X Same as Type 4 except provided with corrosion resistant and water tight construction.

5 Fully enclosed, freestanding unit with front access only with interior mounted equipment and instruments, and 19-inch electronic-type cabinet rack.

6 Fully enclosed, freestanding unit with front and/or rear access with interior mounted equipment and instruments.

7 NEMA 7, construction certified for Class I, Division 1 hazardous locations per Articles 500 and 501 of the National Electrical Code.

S. S. No. 5496 13110-1 Panels

C. PANEL DESIGN: 1. GENERAL: Instrumentation and control panels shall be complete

prewired integrated instrument and control stations with the required operator interface functions as detailed on the Drawings and ancillary equipment as specified herein. Panel size and equipment layout requirements shall be as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.

2. POWER DISTRIBUTION: Each process control cabinet shall be

provided with DIN rail mounted circuit breakers on each incoming branch circuit serving the cabinet. DIN rail mounted circuit breakers shall also be provided for each 120 volts AC power branch circuit derived from the cabinet power distribution system and serving equipment either within the cabinet or external to the cabinet. Circuit breakers shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code and shall be 15 ampere minimum. Typically, individual branch breakers shall be provided for the following types of equipment:

a. PLC processor and/or I/O chassis b. Instrument, Foundation Fieldbus, and DeviceNet network DC

power supplies c. Network Communication Hardware d. External computer workstations e. Internal and external receptacle circuits f. 120 volts AC field instruments (individual circuit breaker for each

instrument) g. Cabinet lighting and ventilation systems

Each cabinet shall be provided with two spare 15 ampere, single pole breakers (minimum).

Electronic equipment cabinets shall be provided with receptacles for distribution of 120 volts AC power. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide one receptacle (minimum) for UPS system power distribution and one receptacle (minimum) for utility power distribution. Each receptacle shall be protected by a 15 ampere, 120 volts AC single pole, DIN rail mounted circuit breaker. Receptacles for UPS service shall be orange colored and receptacles for 120 volts AC utility service shall be ivory colored.

Control system panels shall be supplied power from the UPS as specified

on the drawings, to match OWNER’S current standard. A relay shall be provided on the incoming side of the UPS power, with contacts wired to the PLC to alarm in the SCADA system when incoming UPS power drops out. The relay shall be wired to the normally open contacts (failsafe), so that the contacts are closed when power is present and will open when power is lost.

S. S. No. 5496 13110-2 Panels

3. POWER SUPPLIES: Each panel containing direct current powered instruments, Fieldbus network components, or serving as the termination point for transmission loop powered field instruments shall contain direct current power supply system. DC power supplies shall be Phoenix Contact “Quint-PS” Series, or as shown on the drawings. Power supply rating shall be calculated and verified by the systems integrator, and shall be sized for the maximum load plus 50% extra capacity.

1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


Reference Title

ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate EIA RS-310C Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment Fed. Std-595A Federal Standard Colors

ISA RP60.11 Guide to the available methods for control center crating, shipping and handling

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

UL 94 Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING

Panels shall be shipped, protected, and stored in accordance with the requirements of this specification, specification 01605, and the applicable requirements of ISA RP60.11.

S. S. No. 5496 13110-3 Panels

Panels shall be shipped in Type 2S general purpose, humidity protected crates as defined by ISA RP60.11. Panels shall be prepped for shipment in accordance with ISA RP60.11, paragraphs 5.2 and 5.3. All programmable logic controller components, with the exception of input/output chassis shall be removed from panels and shipped separately in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted in accordance with section 01300: 1. Dimensioned front view drawings. 2. Panel layout and assembly drawings including front and backpanel

equipment layouts and sections showing clearances between face and rear mounted equipment.

3. Nameplate engraving schedule showing engraving by line, character size,

and nameplate size. 4. Manufacturer's product data for all enclosure systems edited to indicate

only those items, model or series of equipment which are being provided. 5. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and

all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (√ ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

6. Interconnection and connection diagrams specified in specification

Section 13000. PART 2--PRODUCTS

S. S. No. 5496 13110-4 Panels

2.01 FABRICATION A. GENERAL:

Panelwork shall be designed for the seismic requirements of seismic zone of the region for which it is being installed, as defined by Ohio Building Code. Structures and equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces. Equipment shall not be required to function properly during periods of seismic disturbance but shall be capable of manual restart following a disturbance.

Cutouts for future equipment shall be blanked off with suitable covers. Instruments shall be mounted in a manner that allows ease of access to components and ease of removal.

Face-mounted instruments that are more than 6 inches deep, weigh more than 10 pounds, or exert more than a 4 ft-lb moment force on the face of the panel shall be supported underneath at the rear by a 1-inch x 1/8-inch thick steel angle. Face-mounted equipment shall be flush or semi-flush with flat-black escutcheons.

Cabinets less than 60 inches high shall be provided with floor stands to raise the top of the panel to 60 inches above the floor or work platform or, if panel weighs less than 100 pounds and wall space is available, wall mounting may be used in lieu of a floor stand.

All equipment mounted within or on panels shall be identified by function and loop number where applicable. Identification labels shall be installed on the panel interior adjacent to the equipment and an identical label installed on the equipment itself. Nameplates shall be provided for all face-mounted instruments on the panel exterior. Instruments shall be mounted in a manner that allows the complete access to all components for inspection, calibration, troubleshooting, and removal.

Blanking panels shall be provided to close all unused space on rack mounting systems. All rack-mounted equipment shall be provided with telescoping slide rails to facilitate access to rear of equipment. B. TYPE 1 FABRICATION:

Open panels for surface mounting of instruments shall be aluminum plate, ASTM B209 6063 alloy, 3/8-inch thickness. Plates over 2 feet in any dimension shall be braced with 1-1/2-inch aluminum angles for rigidity. Mounting hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. Wiring shall be carried in rigid aluminum conduit with cast aluminum fittings. Equipment shall be surface mounted on the panel's front face.

Rack Mount Cabinets shall be a 19-inch electronic-type cabinet rack in

S. S. No. 5496 13110-5 Panels

compliance with EIA RS-310C and NEMA 250, Type 12. Cabinet shall have removable side and back panels, and aluminum 19-inch angles as required to accommodate the rack-mounted equipment indicated on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be of formed and welded construction utilizing a pre-punched, roll-formed or multi-fold frame profile system to form a rigid assembly. Cabinet enclosure shall be of sheet steel construction. Rear wall and top shall be of 14 gauge construction. Side walls shall be removable and shall be of 14 gauge construction. Levelers shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Rack mount cabinets shall be provided with the following features:

1. Power distribution plug strips. 2. Forced air ventilation system consisting of 120 volts AC fan, replaceable filters, and thermostat.

Rack mount cabinets shall be assembled from the Hoffman Proline System for

floor mounted unit or for wall mounted unit shall be Hoffman Double-Hinged wall-mounted model number EWM482225 or to match OWNER’S current standard.

All components for a fully functional cabinet shall be provided including items

such as casters, and internals components such as rack angles, rails, shelves, cable managers, covers, fasteners, and a light which are not shown in the table below:

Hoffman Proline System Type Hoffman Model

No. Description

Frame PF1868 Base Frame – 1800H(38U)x600Wx800D

Front Door

PDW186D Front Window Door

Rear Door

PDL186 Rear Louvered Door

Sides PSS188D Solid Side Top PVT3F681 Vented Top with Fan Tray and three

fans Base PB168 Solid Base

C. TYPE 2 FABRICATION:

Panels shall be fabricated from 3/16-inch minimum thickness stretcher leveled sheet steel. Leading and adjoining edges shall be constructed with 2-inch turnbacks with formed radii not less than twice the material thickness. Panels shall be provided with structural steel frame to provide a rigid structure.

S. S. No. 5496 13110-6 Panels

D. TYPE 3 FABRICATION:

Cabinet shall be a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. Cabinet shall be fabricated from stretcher leveled sheet steel. Sheet steel for cabinet doors and body shall be 16 gauge minimum for cabinets with no dimension greater than or equal to 20 inches and 14 gauge for cabinets with any dimension greater than 20 inches. Cabinet shall be provided with an interior frame or otherwise formed so as to provide a rigid structure. Cabinets shall be provided with equipment mounting backpanels and a 12-inch by 12-inch by 1-inch data pocket. Door(s) shall be hung on removable pin hinges and equipped with vault-type latch capable of accepting a 3/8-inch-shackle padlock. Three-point latch hardware shall be provided for doors exceeding 30 inches height. Where cabinet width exceeds 36 inches, multiple doors no wider than 24 inches shall be provided. E. TYPE 4 FABRICATION:

Cabinet shall be a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure fabricated from stretcher leveled sheet steel. Sheet steel for cabinet doors and body shall be 16 gauge minimum for cabinets with no dimension greater than or equal to 20 inches and 14 gauge for cabinets with any dimension greater than 20 inches. Cabinets shall be provided with an interior frame or otherwise formed so as to provide a rigid structure. Face-mounted instruments shall be mounted in the door. Arrangement of face-mounted instruments shall be as detailed on the Drawings. Cabinet shall be provided with an interior frame or otherwise formed so as to provide a rigid structure. Cabinets shall be provided with equipment mounting backpanels and a 12-inch by 12-inch by 1-inch data pocket. Doors shall be hung on full-length piano-type hinges and equipped with vault-type latch capable of accepting a 3/8-inch-shackle padlock. Three-point latch hardware shall be provided for doors exceeding 30 inches height. Door width shall not exceed 30 inches. F. TYPE 4X FABRICATION:

Type 4X cabinet shall comply with NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure fabricated from type 316 or 304 stainless steel. Cabinet doors and body shall be 16 gauge minimum for cabinets with no dimension greater than or equal to 20 inches and shall be 14 gauge for cabinets with any dimension greater than 20 inches. Cabinets shall be provided with an interior frame or otherwise formed so as to provide a rigid structure. Where face-mounted instruments are specified, they shall be mounted in the door or on an interior hinged subpanel arranged to swing completely out of the enclosure. Arrangement of face-mounted instruments shall be as detailed on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be provided with equipment mounting backpanels and a 12-inch by 12-inch by 1-inch data pocket. Hinges shall be full-length piano-type. Subpanel shall be provided with quarter-turn screw type latches. Cabinet door shall be provided with stainless steel door clamps with quick-release mechanisms and a key-locking vault type latch. Door width shall not exceed 36 inches, unless otherwise noted. G. TYPE 5 FABRICATION:

S. S. No. 5496 13110-7 Panels

Type 5 cabinet shall comply with NEMA 250, Type 12 requirements. Cabinet

shall be totally enclosed with front door(s), removable side panels, and include a 19-inch electronic type equipment rack and equipment mounting panels as indicated on the Drawings. Type 5 cabinets shall be provided with rear doors where indicated on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be of formed and welded construction utilizing a pre-punched, roll-formed or multi-fold frame profile system to form a rigid assembly. Cabinet enclosure shall be of sheet steel construction. Rear wall and top shall be of 14 gauge construction. Side walls shall be removable and shall be of 16 gauge construction. Front door(s) shall be of 14 gauge construction and shall be provided with reversible, concealed 140 degree pinned hinges and lever-type handle and key-locking insert. Door shall have a foamed-in perimeter gasket to form a NEMA 12 sealing rating. All door front penetrations shall be gasketed. Rear equipment mounting panel shall be of 12 gauge construction. Mounting panels shall be set forward from the rear of the panel and provided with panel joining pieces to provide a continuous equipment mounting panel between adjacent cabinet sections. Each cabinet shall be provided with 3-part bottom panels with gasketed cable entry system and a 4-inch high plinth with removable front and side panels. Cabinets shall be provided with a 12-inch by 12-inch by 1-inch data pocket.

Electronic equipment mounting racks shall be provided with telescoping slide rails for equipment installation and blanking panels and trim to cover unused mounting space.

Type 5 cabinets shall be provided with the following accessories and support systems: 1. Interior enclosure fluorescent light fixture above each door with door-

activated switch. 2. Forced air ventilation system consisting of top-mounted 120 volts AC

fans, replaceable filters at the bottom of each door, and thermostat. 3. Power distribution system as specified in paragraph 13110-1.01 including

a 120 volt AC duplex receptacle. 4. Fixed 19-inch equipment mounting rack frames, where shown no the

Drawings. 5. 16-inch deep, fully extendable, telescoping solid shelf to provide support

for portable diagnostic and programming equipment, where shown on the Drawings. Shelf shall be located 30 to 42 inches above the finished floor. Blanking trim shall be provided above and below the shelf.

6. The HMI shall be provided under Section 13000, Allowance.

7. Other devices as shown on the Drawings or equipment schedules. Type 5 cabinet finish shall be dip-bath primed and powder coated. Finish color

S. S. No. 5496 13110-8 Panels

shall be beige.

Type 5 cabinets shall be assembled from the Hoffman Proline System, Rittal PS 4000 System or equal.

H. TYPE 6 FABRICATION:

Type 6 cabinet shall comply with NEMA 250, Type 12 requirements. Cabinet shall be totally enclosed with front door, removable side panels, and rear equipment mounting panels as required to accommodate the equipment indicated on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be of formed and welded construction utilizing a pre-punched, roll-formed or multi-fold frame profile system to form a rigid assembly. Cabinet enclosure shall be of sheet steel construction. Rear wall and top shall be of 14 gauge construction. Side walls shall be removable and shall be of 14 gauge construction. Front door shall have a dark brown anodized, extruded aluminum frame and shall be provided with reversible, concealed 140 degree pinned hinges and lever-type handle and key-locking insert. Doors shall have an integral glued seal to ensure the NEMA 12 sealing rating. Equipment mounting panel shall be of 12 gauge construction. Mounting panels shall be set forward from the rear of the panel and be provided with panel joining pieces to provide a continuous equipment mounting panel between adjacent cabinet sections. Where indicated on the schedules or Drawings, Type 6 cabinets shall be furnished with full height doors front and back, with equipment mounting panels at half depth of cabinet. Each cabinet shall be provided with 3-part bottom panels with gasketed cable entry system and a 4-inch high plinth with removable front and side panels unless otherwise noted. Cabinets shall be provided with a 12-inch by 12-inch by 1-inch data pocket. Levelers shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings.

Type 6 cabinets shall be provided with the following accessories and support systems:

1. Interior enclosure fluorescent light fixture with door-activated switch in

each cabinet section. 2. Forced air ventilation system consisting of 120 volts AC fan, replaceable

filters, and thermostat. 3. Power distribution system as specified in paragraph 13110-1.01. 4. Other devices as shown on the Drawings or equipment schedules.

Type 6 cabinet finish shall be dip-bath primed and powder coated. Finish color shall be beige.

Type 6 cabinets shall be assembled from the Hoffman Proline System, Rittal PS 4000 System or equal.

I. TYPE 7 FABRICATION:

S. S. No. 5496 13110-9 Panels

Type 7 cabinets shall be NEMA Type 7 construction certified for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations per Articles 500 and 501 of the National Electrical Code.

2.02 HEATING AND VENTILATING

Forced air ventilation shall be provided for cabinets types 5 and 6. Ventilation system for Type 6 cabinets shall include filtered pagoda type, roof mounted fans and filtered intake grille. Ventilation system for Type 5 cabinets shall include four venturi fans in a 19-inch rack frame tray and filtered intake and exhaust grilles. Fan tray shall be mounted at the top of the rack frame and shall not occupy any rack mounting space.

Fans shall be equipped with UL-approved washable filters and provide at least 240 cfm. Noise level at 3 feet from exterior wall and 30 degrees off axis shall not exceed 60 NC units. Fans shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts AC. All ventilation systems shall be thermostatically controlled.

Outdoor cabinets shall also be provided with thermostatically controlled space heaters. If space heater surface temperature exceeds 120 degrees F, an expanded metal guard shall be provided. Thermostats shall be Honeywell T631B1013, Penn Controls A28AA-4, or equal. 2.03 COATING

Unless otherwise specified, panels shall be coated as specified in paragraph 09900-3.03 H. Type 1 and type 4X panels shall have a natural finish. 2.04 NAMEPLATES

Machine engraved laminated white phenolic nameplates with black lettering shall be provided for face-mounted equipment. Nameplate engraving shall include the associated equipment description without abbreviation and the equipment tag number, if applicable, in 1/8-inch minimum size lettering. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel with adhesive. The CONTRACTOR agrees that nameplate wording may be changed without additional cost or time if changes are made prior to commencement of engraving.

Machine embossed metallic adhesive labels shall be applied on the interior of panels to identify tag number of instruments mounted inside panels and face-mounted in panel doors. Nameplates shall be attached to panel surfaces, not to instruments. 2.05 INTERCONNECTION WIRING AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A. INTERCONNECTION WIRING:

S. S. No. 5496 13110-10 Panels

Power and control wiring shall be single conductor stranded copper NFPA No. 70 Type MTW No. 16 AWG minimum. Wiring for signal types c, d, e, f, g, and h, as specified in paragraph 13000-1.01 C.8, shall be No. 16 AWG stranded copper NFPA No. 70 Type MTW. Wiring for signal types a and b, as defined in paragraph 13000-1.01 C.9, shall be provided with instruments and run continuously from measuring element to receiving instrument without splices.

Wiring shall be supported independently of terminations by lacing to panel support structure or by slotted flame retardant plastic wiring channels. Wiring channels shall comply with UL 94, Type V. Wiring channel fill shall not exceed 40 percent.

Wiring shall be tagged at both ends of the terminations. Wire identification system shall be as specified in paragraph 16000-2.02. Wire numbers shall conform to OWNER’S current standards. If an instrument loop number is not available, the lowest mechanical equipment number of all final drives in the circuit shall be used. Following the prefix shall be a code letter. Code letters and wire colors are given in the following tables:

Code Description 120V AC Wire Color

L Power Black

LU Power (UPS) Black with red tracer

C Control Red

N Neutral White

PG Ground Green

Code Description 24V DC Wire Color

SP Power supply Blue

C Control Violet

S Signal (pos) Black

SG Signal ground White

PG Equipment ground Green

All conductors carrying a foreign voltage within a cabinet shall be yellow for AC circuits and yellow with blue tracer for DC circuits.

The third part of the wire number shall be a number that identifies wires in a

S. S. No. 5496 13110-11 Panels

circuit that are electrically identical.

Wiring shall comply with the requirements of NFPA No. 70 as a minimum. Power and control wiring located inside panels may be number 16 AWG or number 18 AWG in accordance with circuit overcurrent protection provided. Power and control wiring shall be carried in covered channels separate from low voltage signal circuits. An interior steel barrier shall be provided between AC control devices and the electronic equipment.

All field wiring terminating within a panel shall be terminated with nylon self-insulated, locking spade terminals as specified in paragraph 16000-2.02 unless other approved terminals are provide under these specifications. All interior panel wiring shall be terminated with locking spade-type insulated, crimp-on lugs.

Field connections shall be to separate terminal blocks. Terminal blocks for field terminations shall be in a separate part of the panel close to where the field cables enter the panel.

Circuits shall be electrical protected via a circuit breaker or a fuse. For 120V AC circuits the protection shall be circuit breaker type. The circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type with 5,000 amperes interrupting capacity at 277 VAC . Fuses for 24V DC circuits shall be fast acting flat type rated for 32 volts maximum. 2.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS

Unless otherwise shown or specified, terminal blocks shall be captive screw with pressure plate type rated 600 volts AC and suitable for DIN rail mounting. Terminal block type and application shall be as specified in the following table. Terminal blocks shall be Phoenix Contact or equal. Terminal block assemblies shall be complete including end caps, markers, insertion bridges, mounting hardware, etc. Terminal block marking shall be in accordance with specification 16000-2.05.

120 VOLTS AC POWER AND CONTROL

Description Type Application

Circuit Breaker TMC-1M1-100 or equal.

Power supply for panels

Terminal block UK 5 N Neutral, control wiring, and power to field termination modules.

Grounding terminal block USLKG5 Equipment ground conductor

24 VOLTS DC SIGNAL, POWER AND CONTROL

S. S. No. 5496 13110-12 Panels

Description Type Application

Terminal block UK 5 N Control signal

Fused terminal block UK6-FSI/C LED 24

Power to field termination modules and other devices.

All I/O field terminations shall use field termination modules (FTM). The FTMs shall be DIN rail mounted and shall comply with the OWNER’s current standards.

2.07 SURGE PROTECTION

Surge protectors shall be provided at panel external terminal blocks for types c,d,e,f, and g signal circuits as defined in paragraph 13000-1.01 C.8 which extend outdoors. Surge protectors shall be Joslyn Model 1663-08, Taylor 1020FA, or equal. 2.08 PANEL GROUNDING

Each panel shall be provided with two copper ground bars. One bar shall be bonded to the panel frame or sheet metal and to the station ground system. The second (signal) ground bar shall be mounted on insulated stand-offs and shall be bonded to the frame ground bar at one point only. Signal circuits, signal cable shields, and low-voltage DC power supply commons shall be bonded to the signal ground bar. Surge protectors and separately derived AC power supplies shall be bonded to the frame ground bar. In panel line-ups exceeding 30-inches width, ground bars shall be 1/4 by 1-inch copper bars extending the entire length of the panel. 2.09 INTERFACE RELAYS

Interface relays shall be provided for all discrete input and output points where the field voltage differs from the I/O module voltage, or where the output module is not rated to switch the required load. Interface relays shall be 2-pole, DIN rail mounted, with screw connections, and shall be as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Model PLC-RSC-120UC/21-21, with no exceptions, to match OWNER’S current standards.

2.10 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS)

Uninterruptible Power Supplies shall be provided and installed in the network cabinet. Uninterruptible Power Supplies shall be Tripplite SmartPro SMART1500RM2U to match OWNER’S current standard, with no exceptions. In addition, the UPS shall have the ability of SNMP (Tripplite - model number SNMPWEBCARD), Environment Sensor (Tripplite - model number ENVIROSENSE), and UPS Rails (Tripplite – model 2POSTRMKIT). The UPS batteries shall be sized to accommodate the power requirements for a minimum of 10 minutes or unless otherwise specified. No convenience receptacles shall be powered from the UPS. The UPS(s) shall be used to power the networking equipment, the PLC control panel and associated power supplies and I/O. CONTRACTOR to provide load calculations and determine how many UPS’s will be required. UPS’s shall be sized for 25% spare capacity.

S. S. No. 5496 13110-13 Panels

2.11 PANEL PROCESS DISPLAYS

Control Panel Process Displays shall be Nema 4X, with 4-20mA input, and 6-digit Red LED display. Displays shall be powered with 120VAC, and shall have an isolated 24VDC transmitter power supply. Displays shall be Precision Digital ProVu series or approved equal. 2.12 PLC CONTROL PANEL HIGH TEMPERATURE SWITCH

PLC Control Panels shall be provided with a high temperature switch, with contacts that close on high temperature condition, wired to a discrete input of the PLC. The high panel temperature shall be alarmed in the plant-wide SCADA system. The high temperature switch shall be a Hoffman Cat# ATEMNO to match owners existing equipment. 2.13 PRODUCT DATA

A panel wiring diagram for each panel shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

Control room cabinets shall be mounted on channel iron sills as specified. Sills shall be leveled so panel structures will not be distorted. Panels shall be shimmed to precise alignment so doors operate without binding. Sealant shall be provided under panels not located in control rooms or electrical equipment rooms. All conduits shall be terminated on the bottom panel of the enclosure.

Free-standing panels in areas of new construction shall have all conduits terminated within the confines of the plinth base. All conductors shall be routed from the conduit system to the panel interior through the cable entry system in the panel bottom plate.

Free-standing panels in areas of existing construction where bottom access is not readily available shall have all conduits terminate in the side panel of the enclosure. Conductors shall be routed from the conduit system to the field terminal block in plastic wiring channels.

No conduits shall be terminated in the electronic rack portion of Type 5 cabinets. No conduits shall be terminated in the top of Type 5 or Type 6 cabinets. Conduits not entering Type 5 or Type 6 cabinets from below shall do so through a wireway attached to the field terminal side of the cabinet. Field panels and cabinets shall be mounted in compliance with paragraph 13000-3.0.

Floor-mounted cabinets except in control rooms or electrical equipment rooms shall be

S. S. No. 5496 13110-14 Panels

S. S. No. 5496 13110-15 Panels

mounted on 3-1/2-inch minimum height concrete pads or grouted bases as specified.

Each panel shall have its record connection and interconnection diagrams provided in clear plastic envelope in the panel print pocket.

All spare or otherwise unused programmable logic controller input/output channels shall be provided with interconnecting cabling to field terminal blocks.

All existing loops, instruments and devices that have been relocated, reconnected or modified shall be recalibrated, inspected tested and commissioned per this specification section.

Terminals and terminal blocks shall be sprayed with a silicone resin similar to Dow Corning R-4-3117 conformal coating, after all terminations have been completed.

Type 6 panels and all associated equipment shall not be installed until all debris and dust producing construction activities are completed in the vicinity of the panel. 3.02 COATING

Metal surfaces of panels, cabinets, and consoles shall be prepared, prime and finish coated with the manufacturers standard coating system for the product specified. 3.03 PANEL ASSEMBLY AND CONFIGURATION

Panel assemblies, including local control panels and area control centers, shall be configured as indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 SHIPMENT

Each individual shipment shall be packaged in a manner designed to protect the equipment against damage caused by sudden acceleration or deceleration in accordance with the requirements of Section 01605.

Indicating accelerometers and associated information labels shall be permanently attached to the exterior of each shipping package, crate or pallet. Indicators shall be non-resettable and shall clearly indicate any shock in excess of 5g. Upon arrival of each shipment, the indicators shall be inspected in the presence of representatives of the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR and the equipment manufacturer. Indicators shall be ULine “Drop-N-Tell” 5g or equal.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 13150

FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEMS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies fiber optic cable systems for process control system applications. 1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

ATS-2003 InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA), Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

ANSI/TIA.EIA-526-14A Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant

ANSI/TIA.EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunication Cabling Standard

S. S. No. 5496 13150-1 Fiber Optic Cable Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

A. Catalog cuts showing general information each fiber optic cable system product

specified. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all

referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (√) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (FOCABLESPEC):

General requirements for fiber optic cables specified in this Section are listed on FOCABLESPEC sheets in paragraph 13150-3.05B. 2.02 CABLE TERMINATION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS A. CONNECTORS:

ST compatible connectors shall be provided on all fiber optic cable terminations. Connector shall be ceramic epoxy and polish type and shall have a maximum light loss of less than 0.3 dB. Connector operating temperature range shall be -40 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit. Connectors shall be provided with colored strain relief boot. B. CONNECTOR HOUSING PANELS: Connector housing panels shall be a 6-fiber ST duplex panel consisting of six ST adapters, multimode, composite inserts in a composite housing. Connector housings panels shall be as manufactured by Corning, Model CCH-CP06-15T, to match OWNER’s existing equipment.


C. WALL MOUNTED CABLE PATCH/SPLICE PANEL:

Fiber optic cable patch/splice panel shall be provided for mounting up to four, 6-fiber ST housing panels of the number required for termination of the specified number of fiber optic cables. Panel shall be arranged with connectors on one side only and shall be furnished complete with cable routing guides and strain relief accessories, fiber designation labels, and adapter panels. Blank adapter panels shall be provided for all unused openings. Panel shall be as manufactured by Corning, Model WCH-04P, to match OWNER’s existing equipment.

D. RACK MOUNTED CABLE DISTRIBUTION PANEL:

Fiber optic cable distribution panel shall be provided for mounting up to twelve,

6-fiber ST housing panels of the number required for termination of the specified number of fiber optic cables. Distribution panel shall be 19-inch rack mountable, and height shall not exceed 4U. Panel shall be furnished complete with cable routing guides and strain relief accessories, fiber designation labels, and adapter panels. Blank adapter panels shall be provided for all unused openings. Panel shall be as manufactured by Corning, Model CCH-H04U complete with Strain Relief Accessory, Model CCH-UCC-KIT, to match OWNER’s existing equipment.

. 2.03 PATCH CABLES

Patch cables shall be factory-fabricated multimode, 62.5/125 micron, duplex cables with ST compatible connectors. Connector ferrules shall be composite. Patch cables shall be minimum 1 meter in length. Patch cables shall be as manufactured by Corning Company, to match OWNER’s existing equipment.

2.04 FIBER OPTIC TRANCEIVERS:

Fiber optic transceivers shall be Contractor provided per the Allowance in Section 13000. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION

All fiber optic cables shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise noted and without splices between termination points. Fiber optic cables shall be installed in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 CABLE TERMINATION AND MANAGEMENT A. CONNECTORIZATION:


Fiber optic cables shall be terminated using an epoxy glue and polish process. Cables connected directly to the fiber optic transceiving equipment shall be provided with breakout kits.

All cable connectorization shall be performed by a technician formally trained in the process of terminating fiber optic cable and can demonstrate a minimum of 5 years of fiber optic cable installation experience. B. WALL MOUNTED CABLE PATCH/SPLICE PANELS:

Cable patch/splice panels shall be installed in process control cabinets as indicated on the Drawings. All incoming fiber optic cables shall be terminated at the patch/splice panel. Patch cables shall be used to extend the fiber optic circuit from the patch/splice panel to the fiber optic transceiver.

C. RACK MOUNTED CABLE DISTRIBUTION PANELS:

Cable distribution panels shall be installed in process control cabinets as indicated on the Drawings. All incoming fiber optic cables shall be terminated at the distribution panel. Patch cables shall be used to extend the fiber optic circuit from the distribution panel to the fiber optic transceiver. 3.03 TESTING

Fiber optic cabling systems shall be tested in accordance with Section 13030. The fiber optic cabling shall be certified by CONTRACTOR and provided with certification documents. 3.04 FIBER OPTIC TRANSCEIVERS:

Fiber optic transceivers shall be Owner furnished and installed in process control panels and fiber patch panels as shown on the Drawings. Provide the appropriate interconnecting cables between the transceiver and process control system components. 3.05 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (FOCABLESPEC): A. GENERAL:

Fiber optic cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are specified on individual cable specification sheets (FOCABLESPEC). B. FOCABLESPEC SHEETS: The following FOCABLESPEC sheets are included in this section:

Cable System Identification: 62.5/125



Description: Multimode 62.5/125 micron loose buffered fiber

optic cable

Number of Fibers: As shown on the Drawings and schedules, 6 fibers minimum.

Core/Clad Diameter: 62.5/125 microns

Subunit Construction: 3 +/- mm buffer tube with gel fill

Outer Jacket: UV resistant polyethylene with flame retardant

outer sheath and full coverage waterblocking tape.

Strength Member: Aramid (Kevlar) or equal.

Construction: Loose-buffered, indoor/outdoor rated, non-conductive Type OFNR or OFNP multi-fiber cable

Operating Temperature Range: -40 to 70

degrees C

Maximum Attenuation at 850 nm: 3.5 dB/km

Bandwidth at 850 nm: 220 MHz-km

Minimum Bend Radius: 15 x cable diameter

Manufacturer(s): Corning Cable Systems ALTOS All Dielectric Gel-Free Cable, to match OWNER’s existing equipment.

Execution: Application: Process control network, local area network

communications, video signal transmission, campus data and voice communication systems.

Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16030 and NETA ATS-2003 Section 7.25.

**END OF SECTION*

SECTION 13200 INSTRUMENT AND DEVICE INDEX PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE:

This section specifies Instrument & Device Index and general requirements applicable to all process instrumentation systems consisting of process sensors, monitoring and control instruments, and accessories required to provide a complete and functional monitoring and control system.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide, calibrate, and test the complete process instrumentation system. The CONTRACTOR shall also place the completed system in operation including making final adjustments to instruments as required during plant start-up. CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of instrument technicians for testing and adjustment activities as specified in Section 13030.

The CONTRACTOR shall examine the mechanical drawings and specifications to determine actual locations, sizes, materials and ratings of process connections. Process taps shall be indicated on pipe shop drawings as specified in paragraph 15050-2.04. 1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


S. S. No. 5496 13200-1 Instrument and Device Index

Reference Title

API RP551 Process Measurement Instrumentation ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement

and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves

ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Within 30 days after "Notice to Proceed," the CONTRACTOR shall

submit a list of the manufacturer and model series for each type of equipment proposed.

2. Component connection diagrams showing function and identification of

terminals. 3. Data sheets in accordance with ISA S20, together with a complete list of

instruments provided. 4. Manufacturer's product sheets for all specified equipment indicating

product technical specifications and application information. Product data shall be edited to indicate only those items, model or series of equipment which are proposed as work of this project. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated.


all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (√) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


6. Equipment manufacturer's list of recommended spare parts in accordance with paragraph 13000-2.03.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENT AND DEVICE INDEX

The Instrument & Device Index, paragraph 13200-3.03, lists major instruments required to provide the process instrumentation system. All instrument functions specified on this list shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, unless specified otherwise. Additional instruments may be required to complete the instrument loops because of certain characteristics of the particular equipment selected by the CONTRACTOR. Such additional instruments shall be provided at no additional cost even though not specified in the Instrument and Device Index or on the contract drawings.

In some cases, it is possible to combine the functions of two or more instruments specified in the Instrument and Device Index into a single instrument. Functions which may be ordinarily combined into a single instrument are multiple alarms derived from a common transmission signal, and signal linearization may be combined into transmitters except where the nonlinear signal is used for specific purposes such as standardized flow calculations. Flow computers may be used in lieu of individual function modules for standardized flow calculations providing equivalent performance is provided. Alarm or safety functions derived directly from process measurements shall not be combined with instruments operating from transmission signals. Alarm or safety functions shall not be combined into any instrument used for process control, indication, recording, or any combination thereof.

Standard instruments shall be modified as necessary to meet the specified application requirements.

The instrument and device index does not identify process control and instrumentation equipment considered incidental to the total integrated system such as enclosures, power supply and conditioning equipment, relays, terminal blocks, electrical protective devices, etc. All such equipment shall be provided as specified in these specifications for a complete, full functioning process instrumentation and control system.

The instrument and device index contains only new instruments and devices required for

the new Sodium Hypochlorite Storage and Distribution Systems. It does not contain existing instruments and devices which will need to be rewired to PLCs that will be replaced as part of this project. Detailed drawings of existing PLC panels are available on file at MSDGC (see specification 01001 for details). CONTRACTOR shall review the existing drawings with MSDGC to determine which I/O points shall be rewired to the new PLCs and which I/O points will be eliminated.


2.02 SYSTEM RESOURCE CONFIGURATION

The process instrumentation and control system shall be the total integration of field-mounted instruments and control devices, equipment control panels, local control panels, and programmable logic controller systems. The process instrumentation and control system configuration, architecture and functional requirements are defined by these specifications, the construction drawings, and the Instrument and Device Index. The specifications, construction drawings, and the Instrument and Device Index shall each be considered complementary to the other for complete definition of the system requirements. All work indicated by one but not the other and vice versa, shall be considered work of this specification and shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:

Where installation procedures are not specified herein, API RP551 shall be used as a guide.

B. RACEWAY CONNECTIONS:

Final connections between rigid raceway systems and instruments shall be made with liquidtight flexible steel conduit, or explosionproof flexible steel conduit, as required. Final connection to instruments requiring withdrawal for maintenance or calibration shall allow the removal of the instrument from the process without disconnection of raceway or conductors.

C. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION:

Signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments not located within a common panel shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes and shall operate at 24 volts DC unless otherwise specified. Milliampere signals shall be current regulated and shall not be affected by changes in load resistance within the unit's rating. Measurement loops shall be grounded at external terminals by bonding to the instrument panel signal ground bus. The CONTRACTOR shall provide isolating amplifiers for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output.

High frequency (greater than 1 kHz) pulse rate signals from field transmitters

shall be converted to DC voltage signals at the panel.

Platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) outputs shall be converted to milliampere transmission signals at the RTD; or, where specified, the RTD output may be carried to the panel and converted to a DC voltage signal.


All other transmission systems, such as impulse duration, low frequency pulse rate, and voltage regulated, will not be permitted except where specifically noted in the Instrument and Device Index. When transmitters with nonstandard outputs are specified, their output shall be converted to 4 to 20 milliamperes at the field instrument.

Instrumentation and equipment located in hazardous areas shall be made safe for the specified conditions by use of intrinsic safety barriers approved by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), or Factory Mutual (FM). 3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as specified in specification 13030. 3.03 INSTRUMENT & DEVICE INDEX The Instrument & Device Index is attached at the end of this specification section.

**END OF SECTION**



DEVICE LIST

(Appended to Specification Section 13200)

The following is an index of the instrumentation equipment and devices to the provided as work of this Contract as described in paragraph 13200-1.01, 13200-2.01, and 13200-2.02 of this specification. Clarification of Headings:

1. ITEM: Indicates the instruments row number.

2. TYPE: Indicates the ISA abbreviations for the instrument function.

3. LOOP NUMBER: The equipment unique number identifying the process loop with which the instrument is associated.

4. DEVICE DESCRIPTION: Provides an abbreviated functional description of the

instrument or device. 5. DEVICE TYPE: Provides the instrument function.

6. COMMENTS: Additional data pertinent to the application of the instrument.

7. SIZE: Provides the size of the instrumentation, if applicable.

8. OUTPUT TYPE: Provides the instrument’s control type and/or connection.

9. OUTPUT RANGE: Provides the calibrated instrument range for each

application.

10. SPEC: Provides specification reference 11. FURNISHED: Indicates who is responsible in providing the instrument.

CommentsDevice Description Output TypeItem Type

Instrument and Device Index

Loop No Device Type Output Range Spec FurnishedSize

sorted by: Loop and Device Type

ExtNaOCL STG TANK #1 HI LEVEL LIGHT

120 VAC Alarm9101 NaOCL TRUCK UNLOADING PANEL

16175 ContractorLAH Level Alarm High Pilot Light

1

NaOCL STG TANK #1 REM. LEVEL IND.

4-20mA 0-168 In H209101 ORDER REMOTE INDICATOR W/LIT

13212 ContractorLI Level Indicator2 A

NaOCL STG TANK #1 LEVEL INDICATOR

4-20mA 0-168 In H209101 NaOCL TRUCK UNLOADING PANEL

13110 ContractorLI Level Indicator3 B

NaOCL STG TANK #1 LEVEL 4-20mA 0-168 In H209101 13212 ContractorLT Level Transmitter4

NaOCL STG TANK #1 LEVEL I/I 4-20mA9101 I/I WILL BE LOCATED IN PLC PANEL

13110 ContractorLY I/I Signal Converter5

NaOCL UNLOADING ALARM ACK PB

Dry Contact Normal9102 NaOCL TRUCK UNLOADING PANEL

16175 ContractorHS Local Control Station6

NaOCL STG TANK #1/#2 HI-HI LEVEL HORN


16175 ContractorLAHH Level Alarm Hi-Hi Horn7

NaOCL STG TANK #2 HI LEVEL LIGHT


16175 ContractorLAH Level Alarm High Pilot Light

8

NaOCL STG TANK #2 REM. LEVEL IND.

4-20mA 0-168 In H209103 ORDER REMOTE INDICATOR W/LIT

13212 ContractorLI Level Indicator9 A

NaOCL STG TANK #2 LEVEL INDICATOR

4-20mA 0-168 In H209103 NaOCL TRUCK UNLOADING PANEL

13110 ContractorLI Level Indicator10 B

NaOCL STG TANK #2 LEVEL 4-20mA 0-168 In H209103 13212 ContractorLT Level Transmitter11

NaOCL STG TANK #2 LEVEL I/I 4-20mA9103 I/I WILL BE LOCATED IN PLC PANEL

13110 ContractorLY I/I Signal Converter12

1 of 8

Greater Cincinnati Metropolitan Sewer DistrictMill Creek WWTP Disinfection ImprovementsBrown and Caldwell / Automated Systems Engineering, LLC





ExtNaOCL BULK TANK #1 OUTLET VALVE

DeviceNET Open/Close9105 15127 ContractorFV Flow Valve13

NaOCL BULK TANK #2 OUTLET VALVE


NaOCL BULK TANK #1 RETURN VALVE



DeviceNET In Auto9109 MAN/AUTO SELECTOR SW 15127 ContractorHS Local Control Station16 A


DeviceNET Open/Close9109 OPEN/CLOSE PB'S & PL'S FOR MAN CONTROL

15127 ContractorHS Local Control Station17 B








NaOCL LOOP RETURN FLOW9113 1" 13212 ContractorFE Magnetic Flowmeter21

NaOCL LOOP RETURN FLOW 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-300 GPM9113 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

22

NaOCL SUMP PUMP DeviceNET In Auto9121 MAN/AUTO SELECTOR SW 16920 ContractorHS Local Control Station23 A

NaOCL SUMP PUMP Dry Contact Run9121 START/STOP PB'S FOR MAN CONTROL & RUN PL


2 of 8






ExtNaOCL CONTAINMENT SUMP HI LEVEL

Dry Contact Normal9121 11351 w/EquipmentLSH Weighted Float Type Level Switch

25

NaOCL CONTAINMENT SUMP HI-HI LEVEL

Dry Contact Normal9121 11351 w/EquipmentLSHH Weighted Float Type Level Switch

26

NaOCL CONTAINMENT SUMP LOW LEVEL

Dry Contact Normal9121 WIRED TO DI ON DEVICENET E3-PLUS OL

11351 w/EquipmentLSL Weighted Float Type Level Switch

27

NaOCL SUMP PUMP DeviceNET9121 NEW STARTER W/DEVICENET OL

16920 ContractorM Motor Controller (Starter)

28

CHLORINE ALARM INTERIOR BEACON

120 VAC Alarm9123 16175 ContractorAAH Alarm Becaon29 A

CHLORINE ALARM INTERIOR HORN 120 VAC Alarm9123 16175 ContractorAAH Alarm Horn30 B

CHLORINE ALARM EXTERIOR BEACON

120 VAC Alarm9123 16175 ContractorAAH Alarm Becaon31 C

NaOCL CHLORINE ALARM9123 13212 ContractorAE Analytical Sensor32

NaOCL CHLORINE ALARM Dry Contact Normal9123 13212 ContractorAIT Analytical Transmitter33

CHLORINE ALARM RELAY Dry Contact Alarm9123 MTD IN CHLORINE PANEL 16175 ContractorAY Alarm Relay34

CHLORINE ALARM ACK PB Dry Contact Normal9123 MTD ON CHLORINE PANEL


NPW NaOCL PUMP9125 11381 w/EquipmentM Motor Controller (VFD supplied w/pump)

36

3 of 8






ExtNaOCL FLOW TO NPW9127 1/10" 13212 ContractorFE Magnetic Flowmeter37

NaOCL FLOW TO NPW 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-0.5 GPM9127 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

38

DCSB EYEWASH FLOW ALARM Dry Contact Alarm9129 15431 w/EquipmentFSH Flow Switch39

SEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #19131 11381 w/EquipmentM Motor Controller (VFD supplied w/pump)

40

SEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #29133 11381 w/EquipmentM Motor Controller (VFD supplied w/pump)

41

NaOCL FLOW TO SEC. EFFL. WEST9137 1/4" 13212 ContractorFE Magnetic Flowmeter42

NaOCL FLOW TO SEC. EFFL. WEST 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-10 GPM9137 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

43

NaOCL FLOW TO SEC. EFF. EAST9139 1/4" 13212 ContractorFE Magnetic Flowmeter44

NaOCL FLOW TO SEC. EFFL. EAST 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-10 GPM9139 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

45

INDUCTION MIXER #W-1 VALVE DeviceNET Open/Close9141 15127 ContractorFV Flow Valve46

INDUCTION MIXER #W-1 DeviceNET In PC9142 ON/OFF/PC SELECTOR SW W/RESET PB (OOPR) & RUN PL


INDUCTION MIXER #W-1 DeviceNET9142 NEW STARTER W/DEVICENET OL


48

4 of 8






ExtINDUCTION MIXER #W-2 VALVE DeviceNET Open/Close9143 15127 ContractorFV Flow Valve49

INDUCTION MIXER #W-2 DeviceNET In PC9144 ON/OFF/PC SELECTOR SW W/RESET PB (OOPR) & RUN PL


INDUCTION MIXER #W-2 DeviceNET9144 NEW STARTER W/DEVICENET OL


51

INDUCTION MIXER #E-1 VALVE DeviceNET Open/Close9145 15127 ContractorFV Flow Valve52

INDUCTION MIXER #E-1 DeviceNET In PC9146 ON/OFF/PC SELECTOR SW W/RESET PB (OOPR) & RUN PL


INDUCTION MIXER #E-1 DeviceNET9146 NEW STARTER W/DEVICENET OL


54

INDUCTION MIXER #E-2 VALVE DeviceNET Open/Close9147 15127 ContractorFV Flow Valve55

INDUCTION MIXER #E-2 DeviceNET In PC9148 ON/OFF/PC SELECTOR SW W/RESET PB (OOPR) & RUN PL


INDUCTION MIXER #E-2 DeviceNET9148 NEW STARTER W/DEVICENET OL


57

NaOCL LOOP PUMP #1 DeviceNET In PC9151 ON/OFF/PC SELECTOR SW (OOP) & RUN PL


NaOCL LOOP PUMP #1 DeviceNET9151 NEW STARTER W/DEVICENET OL


59

NaOCL LOOP PUMP #2 DeviceNET In PC9153 ON/OFF/PC SELECTOR SW (OOP) & RUN PL


5 of 8






ExtNaOCL LOOP PUMP #2 DeviceNET9153 NEW STARTER

W/DEVICENET OL16920 ContractorM Motor Controller

(Starter)61

NaOCL LOOP SUPPLY FLOW9155 1" 13212 ContractorFE Magnetic Flowmeter62

NaOCL LOOP SUPPLY FLOW 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-300 GPM9155 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

63

FINAL EFFL. NaOCL DAY TANK #1 I/I

4-20mA9161 ADD I/I TO EXIST. PANEL 13000 ContractorLY I/I Signal Converter64

FINAL EFFL. NaOCL DAY TANK #2 I/I

4-20mA9163 ADD I/I TO EXIST. PANEL 13000 ContractorLY I/I Signal Converter65

FINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 OUTLET VALVE


FINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 OUTLET VALVE


FINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 RETURN VALVE











6 of 8






ExtFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 RETURN VALVE



NaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMP9173 11381 w/EquipmentM Motor Controller (VFD supplied w/pump)

74

FINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #19181 11381 w/EquipmentM Motor Controller (VFD supplied w/pump)

75

FINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #29183 11381 w/EquipmentM Motor Controller (VFD supplied w/pump)

76

NaOCL FLOW TO FINAL EFFL. APPL PT

9185 1/2" 13212 ContractorFE Magnetic Flowmeter77

NaOCL FLOW TO FINAL EFFL. APPL PT

4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-25 GPM9185 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

78

M2_C31 PLC CABINET HIGH TEMP SWITCH

Dry Contact Alarm9187 CONTACTS CLOSE ON HI TEMP

13110 ContractorTSH Temperature Switch79

M2_C31 PLC CABINET UPS POWER FAIL RELAY

Dry Contact Normal9188 CONTACTS OPEN ON POWER FAILURE

13110 ContractorEY Electric Relay80













7 of 8






ExtM2_AC1 PLC CABINET HIGH TEMP SWITCH



M2_AC1 PLC CABINET UPS POWER FAIL RELAY



NaOCL FLOW TO PRI. ODOR CONTROL


NaOCL FLOW TO PRI. ODOR CONTROL

4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-0.5 GPM9301 13212 ContractorFIT Magnetic Flowmeter Signal Converter

88

M2_OC1 PLC CABINET HIGH TEMP SWITCH



M2_OC1 PLC CABINET UPS POWER FAIL RELAY



NaOCl FLOW VALVE TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANK


NaOCL FLOW TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANK


NaOCL FLOW TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANK


93

NaOCl FLOW VALVE TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANK


NaOCL FLOW TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANK


NaOCL FLOW TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANK


96

8 of 8


SECTION 13211

PROCESS TAPS AND PRIMARY ELEMENTS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies requirements for instrumentation elements that quantitatively convert the measured variable energy into a form suitable for measurement and process measurement accessories. Application requirements are specified in Section 13200. 1.02 REFERENCES



Reference Title

API RP551 Process Measurement Instrumentation ASTM A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless

Steel Tubing for General Service ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and

Shapes SAMA PMC-17-10-63 Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing

Elements 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in paragraph 13200-1.03.

S. S. No. 5496 13211-1 Process Taps and Primary Elements

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC)

General requirements for primary elements specified in this section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets in paragraph 13211-3.03. 2.02 VALVES A. ISOLATION VALVES:

Valves shall be full port ball valves with ASTM A276, 316 stainless steel trim and body and with Teflon seats and packing. Valves shall be Parker CPI, Whitey, Hoke, or equal. B. GAGE VALVES:

Gage valves shall be machined from ASTM A276 bar stock and shall be provided with 1/2-inch NPT connections and integral bleed valve. Valves shall be Anderson, Greenwood & Company M9530, Hoke 6801L8Y, or equal. C. ROOT VALVES:

Root valves shall be ASTM A276, type 316 stainless steel bar stock with 1/2-inch NPT male process connection and three 1/2-inch NPT female instrument connections. One instrument connection shall be provided with an ASTM A276, type 316 stainless steel bleed valve. ASTM276, type 316 stainless steel plugs shall be provided for unused ports. Lagging type units shall be provided for insulated vessels and pipes. Root valves shall be Anderson, Greenwood & Company M5 AVS-44, Hoke 6802L8Y, or equal. D. MANIFOLDS:

Manifolds shall be two-valve bar-stock type. Manifold body shall be machined from ASTM, type 316 stainless steel bar stock. Valves shall be globe configuration with 316 stainless steel ball seats and Teflon stem packing. Manifolds shall be designed for block and bleed, test and calibration and zeroing of gauge pressure instruments. Manifold shall be designed for mounting on an instrument pipe stand. Fabricated manifolds or manifolds employing needle or soft seat valves are not acceptable. Manifolds shall be Anderson Greenwood E2PL16VW or equal.


2.03 TUBING AND TUBING FITTINGS

Instrument tubing shall be ASTM A-269 type 316 seamless stainless steel. Tubing shall be 1/4-inch outside diameter by 0.03 inch wall thickness or 1/2-inch outside diameter by 0.035-inch wall thickness as indicated on the drawings.

Tubing fittings shall be type 316 stainless steel. Fittings shall be of the swage ferrule design and shall have components (nut, body and ferrule system) interchangeable with those of at least one other manufacturer. Flare and ball sleeve compression type are not acceptable. Fittings shall be Parker CPI, Crawford Swagelok, Hoke Gyrolok, or equal.

Flexible coupling shall be 1/2-inch type 316 stainless steel braided hose with integral tube end adapters. Minimum coupling length shall be 12 inches. 2.04 CHEMICAL SEALS A. DIAPHRAGM:

Where shown, diaphragm seals for process fluids shall be constructed with flushing connection, type 316 stainless steel body and type 316L diaphragm unless otherwise specified. Seal shall be Ashcroft Type 101 or equal for lines 1-inch and smaller, and Ashcroft Type 103 or equal for 1-1/2 inch and larger lines, or equal.

A 316SS isolation valve shall be provided for each flushing connection with a ¼-inch 316SS hose barb at the inlet port. B. ANNULAR:

Where shown, annular seals for chemical service shall be the in-line, threaded type, full stream captive sensing liquid type. Body for polymer service shall be 316 stainless steel. Diaphragm for polymer service shall be Viton. Seal manufacturer shall confirm compatibilities between materials and chemicals. Seals shall be Ashcroft Type 104, or equal.

Where shown, annular seals for process fluid service shall be the in-line, full-faced, thru-bolted wafer, full stream captive sensing liquid type. Metallic wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel. Flexible seal shall be Buna-N unless otherwise specified. Seals shall be rated 200 PSIG with not more than 5-inch WC hysteresis. Seals up to 8-inch shall be Red Valve Series 40, or equal. Seals above 8-inch shall be Red Valve Series 42, or equal. C. FILL FLUID: Chemical seals and associated instruments shall be factory filled as follows:

Instrument side of seal, capillary tubing, and instrument shall be evacuated to an absolute pressure of 1.0 Torr or less; filled; and sealed. Unless otherwise specified, fill fluid shall be silicone oil, Dow Corning DC200, Syltherm 800, or equal.


2.05 BUSHINGS AND THERMOWELLS

Bushings or thermowells shall comply with SAMA PMC17-10. Temperature taps shall be 1/2-inch or ¾-inch NPT, and lagging extensions shall be provided on insulated vessels or pipes. Thermowells and bushings shall be machined from 316 stainless steel bar stock unless otherwise specified. 2.06 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 13000-2.02. 2. Flow calculation for each differential-type flow element shall be provided in

accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. PROCESS CONNECTIONS:

Unless otherwise specified, process taps shall comply with API RP551. Root valves shall be provided at taps, except temperature taps and pump discharge pressure taps. Process connections shall be arranged, where possible, such that instruments may be readily removed for maintenance without disruption of process units or draining of large tanks or vessels. Unions or flange connections shall be provided as necessary to permit removal without rotating equipment. Where process taps are not readily accessible from instrument locations, an isolation valve shall be provided at the instrument. Isolation valves shall also be provided for each instrument where multiple instruments are connected to one process tap.

B. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:

Final connections between rigid raceway systems and instruments shall be made with jacketed flexible conduit with a maximum length of 2 feet. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in section 13030.


3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this section:

INSTRUSPEC symbol

Instrument Description

Instrument Function

PG Pressure Gauge Pressure measurement 3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: PG Instrument Function: Pressure measurement Instrument Description: Pressure gage Power Supply: N/A Signal Input: N/A Signal Output: N/A Process Connection: 1/2-inch male NPT, except where piping is conveying

sludge or liquid containing solid particles then the pressure switch shall be isolated from the pumped process fluid by means of an in-line, flow through flange type gauge isolator.

Product Requirements: Pressure gages shall be 4-1/2-inch premium grade,

glycerin filled units with bourdon tube element, 270-degree milled stainless steel movement, phenolic case, and shatterproof glass window. Bourdon tube material of construction shall be as specified in paragraph 13200-3.03. Accuracy shall be 1 percent of span or better. All exposed metal parts shall be stainless steel. . The isolator shall be suitable to be installed between flat face ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 cast iron pipe flanges with a flexible Viton liner and be filled with silicone oil.

Approved Manufacturers: Ashcroft Duragauge Figure 1279 without exception to

match OWNER’S existing equipment. One spare shall be provide for each type.

Robbins & Meyers “RKL Series W Pressure



Sensor/Isolator”, Red Valve “Series 40 Flanged Sensro”, or Ronningen-Petter “ Iso-Ring” for the isolators.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

the recommendations of API RP551 to the specified requirements.

Root valves shall be provided at all process pressure taps

except taps made for safety instruments. Gage valves shall be provided at the instrument where the instrument is not within sight of the root valve or where two or more instruments are connected to a single tap. Safety instruments shall not be connected to the same process tap as instruments used for control, indication, or recording. Unless otherwise specified, pressure instruments shall be located as close as practical to the process tap but shall be positioned to permit observation and maintenance. Pressure gages may be supported from the process tap if

this location permits observation from the floor or a permanent work platform. Pressure instruments shall be

installed in such a manner that blowout discs are not obstructed.

Application: Application and ranges shall be in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in paragraph 13200-3.03.

Test and Calibration: In accordance with Section 13030. **END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 13212-1 Transmitters

SECTION 13212

TRANSMITTERS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies requirements for transmitters. Application requirements are specified in Section 13200. 1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains a reference to the following document. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. Additional references are listed in Section 13000. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in paragraph 13200-1.03.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

Unless otherwise specified, measuring elements and transmitters shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Output indicators complying with paragraph 13212-2.02 shall be provided

with any transmitter that does not include an integral indicator. Indicators, whether integral or separate, shall be calibrated in process units, and said units shall be engraved on the indicator scale plate.

2. Two-wire type transmitters shall have the operating power derived from

the signal transmission circuit, unless otherwise specified. 3. Transmitters output shall be Foundation Fieldbus unless not available then

4 to 20 milliamperes two or four wire type. Two or four wire type transmitters shall be current regulated and shall drive any load between 0 and 550 ohms with the power supply at 23 volts DC.

4. Transmitters shall meet specified performance requirements with load

variations within the range of 0 to 600 with the power supply at 24 volts DC, for all two wire type transmitters.

5. Transmitter output shall be galvanically isolated. 6. Time constant of transmitters used for flow or pressure measurement,

including level transmitters used for flow measurement, shall be adjustable from 0.5 to 5.0 seconds.

7. Transmitter output shall increase with increasing measurement, unless

measuring a vacuum. 8. Transmitter enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, Type 4 at a minimum,

unless otherwise specified. 9. Transmitters located outdoors shall be provided with surge protectors:

Rosemount Model 0470N1N0A, Taylor 1020FP, or equal. 10. Where transmitter is located in an area classified as hazardous, it shall be

made safe by means of an intrinsic safety barrier as specified in paragraph 13212-2.03.

11. Where four-wire transmitters are permitted, they shall be provided with a

loop powered signal current isolator as specified in paragraph 13212-2.05


connected in the output signal circuit or as indicated on the drawings to match OWNER’S current standard.

12. Foundation Fieldbus communications protocol shall be derived directly

from the transmitter. Transmitters requiring protocol translators are not acceptable.

2.02 OUTPUT INDICATOR

Output indicator shall be 90 degree movement milliammeter , 2-1/2-inch enclosed in a NEMA 7/9 meter case. A diode shall be provided to maintain loop continuity in case of meter movement failure or removal. Accuracy shall be within 2 percent of span. Indicator scale shall be graduated in process units and said units shall be engraved on the indicator scale plate.

2.03 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS

Intrinsic safety barriers for two-wire transmitters shall be of the active, isolating, loop powered type. Barrier shall be Measurement Technology LTD. type MT3042, Stahl 9001/51-280/110/14, Pepperl-Fuchs KFD0-CS-Ex2.51P, or equal. Fieldbus IS barriers shall be Stahl or Pepperl-Fuchs and shall match OWNER’s existing equipment. 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC)

General requirements for instruments specified in this section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets in paragraph 13212-3.03. Application requirements are specified in the instrument index, paragraph 13200-3.03, and/or on the Drawings. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 13000-2.02. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation requirements are specified in paragraph 13200-3.01. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in Section 13030.


3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this section:

INSTRUSPEC

Symbol Instrument Description Measurement Power*

Requirement Communication*

FIT Flow Indicating Transmitter (Magnetic flow meter)

Flow 120VAC 4-20mA

LIT Level Indicating Transmitter (Radar)

Level Loop 4-20mA

AIT1 Chlorine Gas Detection System

Gas 24VDC Relay Outputs

* Summary Information Only, see detailed INSTRUSPECS for complete requirements.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: FIT Instrument Function: Flow measurement Instrument Description: Flow Indicating Transmitter (Magnetic flow meter) Power Supply: 120 Volts AC Signal Input: Process Signal Output: Analog signal as specified in paragraph 13212-2.01 Process Connection: Flange, ANSI B16.5 Class 150, raised face Product Requirements: General: Magnetic flow meter shall be provided as a system

consisting of a flow tube and integral or remote convert-er/transmitter (as indicated on the Drawings complete with interconnecting cables. Where specified, the converter/transmitter shall be mounted integral to the flow tube. Meter must be a full bore meter with the magnetic field traversing the entire cross-section of the flow tube. Insert magmeters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool piece are not acceptable. Type must be magnetic flowmeter, operating based on Faraday’s law, using a pulsed dc type coil excitation with high impedance electrodes.

Where pipe run size is different from specified flow tube

size, uniformly diverging swages with a total angle between walls not exceeding 15 degrees shall be provid-ed.

Excitation power requirements shall not exceed 15 volt-

amperes.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: FIT (continued) Performance: Range: 1000 to 1 for 6” and smaller, 1500 to 1 for 8” and

larger. Accuracy: ½” to 6” 0.2% of rate, 8” and larger 0.15% of

rate. Repeatability: +/-0.05% or +/-0.0008ft/s, whichever is

greater. Calibration: 3 point Flow range: As Noted Converter/ transmitter shall be suitable for full-scale flow

rates from 1.0 to 33 feet per second. Process Connection: Meter Size: As noted Connection Type: 1/10” to 4” ANSI 150 Wafer design 6” to 24” ANSI 150 flanges 30” and larger, AWWA Class D flanges Flange Material: Carbon Steel Pressure Rating: Meter system must be fully rated to the

same design pressure at the flanges. Flow Tube: Meter Tube Material: 304 stainless steel Liner Material: Tefzel for Sodium Hypochlorite service Polyurethane for wastewater or sludge service Electrode Type: Conical self cleaning Electrode Material: Tantalum for Sodium Hypochlorite service 316 stainless steel for wastewater or sludge service,

or as recommended by the manufacturer. Enclosure Classification: NEMA 4X Housing Material: ½” to 6” Epoxy coated cast aluminum 8” to 24” ABS Plastic 30” and larger Epoxy coated steel Grounding: Hastelloy-C grounding rings for Sodium

Hypochlorite service. Standard grounding rings or electrodes are required

for wastewater or sludge service. Submergence: Continuous to 30ft and direct burial 3 to


16 ft IP68/NEMA6P. 3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: FIT (continued) Transmitter: Power: 120VAC, 60HZ Display: Two line 16 character back-lit display indicating

flow and total. Integral Keypad: Allows for external configuration

without removing covers and compromising the integrity of the electrical and environmental classifications.

Bi-direction flow: Forward and reverse flow indication and totalization.

Totalizers: Three 9 digit totalizers for forward, reverse and net.

Mounting: 2” pipe stand or wall Enclosure: NEMA 4X Polypropylene with polycarbonate

window. Input Impedance: 1015 ohms. Isolation: Galvanic separation to 50Vdc between analog,

pulse/alarm, earth/ground. Current output: One standard 4-20 mA into 0-800 ohms

minimum. Pulse Output: One standard 0-800Hz, <35Vdc for

forward and one for reverse. Contact Outputs: Two programmable as standard Empty Pipe Detector: Required Remote Communications capability: Shall be cablable of

RS232/485, and HART protocol, when required. Low flow cut off: Adjustable. Power consumption: <20VA Standard cable length: 50ft. Maximum cable length: 330 ft w/standard cable, longer

separation possible.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: FIT (continued) Calibration: Test Mode: Provide the ability to verify the accuracy of

the unit and the integrity of the output current loop without any external equipment.

Self diagnostics: Internal checks of all outputs and displays.

In line calibration verification: This system shall be able

to communicate with the owners existing CalMaster Calibration Verification System, to verify in a quantifiable manner the meters current conditions vs. the meter condition when originally manufactured. This calibration verification of the meter shall be performed without need for physical access to the meter flow tube. The calibration verification shall meet or exceed the following requirements:

1. The original FINGERPRINT values shall be stored on

a computer disk given to the owner. 2. The verification process shall consist of at least 52

meter conditions pertaining to the primary coils, electrodes, interconnecting cable and signal converter.

3. The coil verification shall include faults of continuity, impedance, resistance to ground, inductance, and magnetic field strength.

4. The electrode verification shall include faults of continuity, impedance and insulation.

5. The cable verification shall include faults of coil, electrode, driven shield, and ground connections, cable cuts, cable damage, and water in the cable.

6. Signal converter verification shall include faults of current supply to coils, zero offset, span forward and reverse, electrode offset, current output, frequency output forward and reverse, driven shield to ground, overall shield to ground and signal ground connection to ground.

7. The calibration verification shall include the following: water ingress into the primary elements, faulty electrodes, dirty electrodes, electrode leakage, corroded electrodes, high process noise, liner failure, conductive coatings on the liner, insulating coatings


on the liner, and primary element damage. 8. All tests shall be performed by means of comparison

between the absolute values and change in values from the new conditions.

9. Verification standard shall be +/-1% of wet calibration for meters produced using the calibration verification service, or +/-2% for standard meters.

10. The software shall be windows based. This software shall be capable of generating a report based upon the result of the forgoing described tests. The software shall be capable of creating and storing an audit trail of the meters conditions and the meters history.

11. The calibration verification and metering system shall meet or exceed the standards established by the National Testing Laboratories.

Meters to be designed, manufactured, and calibrated in an ISO9001, NAMAS, NIST, NATA certified facility. Flow facility must be certified by volume or weight certified provers. Facility must have the capability to hold the flow rate at the specified calibration points for a minimum of five minutes to allow stabilization for flow and repeatability point checks.

Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB Model 10D1475T w/MFE, with no exceptions, to

match OWNER’s existing equipment. Warranty:: Equipment and service warranty shall be delivered free of

defects in material and workmanship and that services shall be free of defects in workmanship. The warranty period for equipment shall end twenty-four (24) months after date of shipment. Software warranty shall be delivered free of defects and will, when properly installed, execute in accordance with published specification. The warranty period for software shall end twelve (12) months from date of shipment.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

API RP551, and the specified functional requirements, including but not limited to complying with the straight run requirements upstream and downstream of the flow meter. CONTRACTOR shall supply all necessary


mounting hardware. 3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: FIT (continued) Spool pieces or swages shall be bolted to each end of the

flow tube and the entire assembly slid into the pipe run as a unit. Flange bolts shall be tightened to tube manufacturer's specified torque.

Cable: The signal cable between the primary element and

transmitter shall be provided by the system manufacturer. A sufficient length of cable shall be provided for installation of a continuous run between the primary element and the transmitter.

Application: Application and setup shall be in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in paragraph 13200-3.03.

Test and Calibration: In accordance with specification Section 13030.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: LIT Instrument Function: Level Measurement Instrument Description: Level Indicating Transmitter (Radar) Power Supply: As specified in paragraph 13212-2.01 Signal Input Process Signal Output: Analog signal, as specified in paragraph 13212-2.01 Product Requirements

Signal Converter/Transmitter:

Signal type: Pulsed radar, 24 to 26 GHz range, maximum output power of 1.0 mWatt.

Enclosure: NEMA 4X

Display: Remote mount 4-digitLCD scaled in engineering units.

Measuring range: 0-65 ft. Accuracy: ±0.5 in. Analog Output: One isolated 4-20 mA, minimum of 300Ω. Ambient Temperature Range: -20 to +140°F. Process Temperature Range: -40 to +150°F Pressure Range: -14.5 to 232 psig. Frequency range: K-band Sensor: 2 inch minimum cone Process Connection: 2 inch minimum, 150 lb. ANSI 316L flange. Antenna, material: completely PTFE, PFA or PVDF encapsulated


Instrument Identification LIT (continued)

Accessories: Provide necessary mounting hardware and cable glands. Provide handheld infrared programming device, or programming software and cable length.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Ohmart Vega VEGAPULS 63 with

VEGADIS 61 remote display, without exception to match OWNER’s exist

Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Engineer’s installation detail.

Contractor to verify size and type of specified tank

connection with approved tank submittals.


Instrument Identification: AIT1 Instrument Function: Chlorine Gas Detection System Instrument Description: Chlorine Gas Detection System Power Supply: 24VDC Signal Input: Process Area Signal Output: Relay Contacts Process Connection: None Product Requirements: Chlorine Gas detection systems shall be furnished complete with

sensors, power supplies, alarm modules, enclosures, and appurtenant devices suitable for detecting chlorine gas as indicated on the drawings or as listed in this section. Detection systems shall be located as indicated on the drawings.

Chlorine gas detector sensor ranges and nominal alarm setpoints shall be as follows:

Gas Nominal Range Nominal “Warning” and "Alarm" Values

Chlorine Gas 0-5 ppm 0.5 ppm / 1.0 ppm

Accuracy of each gas detector system shall be 5 percent of full scale, and zero drift shall not exceed 5 percent per year. Gas detector systems shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 0 to 122°F.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: AIT1 (continued)

Sensors: Sensors shall be rated for the environment in which they will be located. Sensors shall not require any addition of chemical reagents and shall require no routine maintenance other than calibration checks. As required, gas sensors shall not be adversely affected by exposure to hydrogen sulfide gases. Minimum sensor life shall be 1 year.

Receiver-Alarm Modules: The gas detector system shall be provided with a receiver-alarm module. The receiver-alarm modules shall be housed in weatherproof NEMA 4X enclosures suitable for an operating temperature of -4°F to 122°F, with a relative humidity of 5 to 95 percent. The alarm module shall have a three-digit LED or LCD readout with units of the corresponding sensor included on the LCD readout with status indicators for normal (green) and alert (red) conditions. The module shall have two independently adjustable alarm points, one labeled "warning" and one labeled "alarm". Each alarm point, plus a module fail alarm point shall actuate separate relays with single-pole, double-throw contacts, rated 5 amp [A] at 120 V ac, and shall illuminate alarm lights on the module face. The alarm module shall also be provided with a sensor failure relay. Modules shall be designed with failsafe circuitry, so the alarm contacts fail in the alarm condition upon power or sensor failure. Each alarm module shall actuate a local alarm horn or buzzer at the unit, which can be silenced with a button on the unit.

As required, additional relays shall be provided in the module

enclosure as needed to provide additional contacts indicated on the electrical schematic drawings.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC) Instrument Identification: AIT1 (continued)

Spare Sensors: One spare sensor and membrane (if applicable) shall be provided for each sensor in the gas detector system. Spare sensors shall be provided in addition to any replacement sensors required during the warranty period, even if the warranty period exceeds the normal expected life of the sensor. Delivery schedule for the spare sensors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as coordinated with OWNER.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Scott Instruments Model 4000 MB, with no exceptions, to

match OWNER’S existing equipment.

Execution:

Installation: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as

detailed on the Drawings. Application: Application and setup shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and as specified in paragraph 13200-3.03.

Test and Calibration: In accordance with specification 13030 and a calibration kit shall be provided for use in field calibration of each gas detector. The calibration kit shall contain all necessary fittings, calibration gases, and hoses required for not less than 12 field calibration checks of each gas detector, after final acceptance of the system. One spare gas cylinder shall be provided of each type.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 13216-1 Process Switches

SECTION 13216

PROCESS SWITCHES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies requirements for process activated switches. Application requirements are specified in Section 13200. 1.02 REFERENCES



Reference Title

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in paragraph 13200-1.03.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Unless otherwise specified, switches shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Contact outputs used for alarm actuation shall be ordinarily closed and

shall open to initiate the alarm. 2. Contact outputs used to control equipment shall be ordinarily open and

shall close to start the equipment. 2. Contacts monitored by solid state equipment such as programmable

controllers or annunciators shall be hermetically sealed 4. Contacts monitored by electromagnetic devices such as mechanical relays shall be rated NEMA ICS 2, designation B300. 5. Double barriers shall be provided between switch elements and process fluids such that failure of one barrier will not permit process fluids into electrical enclosures. 6. Switch electrical enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, type 4 minimum. 7. Contacts in Class 1, Division 1 areas and monitored by solid-state circuits

shall be made safe by suitable intrinsic safety barriers. Intrinsic safety barrier shall be dual type to prevent grounding alarm circuit at the barrier. Barriers shall be MTL 787, or equal.

2.02 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS

Application requirements are specified in the instrument index, paragraph 13200-3.03, and/or on the Drawings. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 13000-2.02.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation requirements are specified in paragraph 13200-3.01. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in section 13030.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 13330

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE: This section covers programmable logic controllers (PLC) and as designated and

as required, including associated input/output hardware to control process equipment and serve as the interface to field devices. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all PLCs as shown in the drawings. 1.02 GENERAL

Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by ENGINEER.

A. GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: The General Equipment Requirements shall apply to all equipment provided under this section.

B. DRAWINGS: Supplementing this section, the drawings indicate the number and sizes of PLCs, locations of PLCs, and provide diagrams and schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment. All hardware, including power supplies, special cables, and other appurtenant equipment, shall be provided to meet the functional requirements described herein and indicated on the drawings.

C. I/O LIST: An input/output (I/O) field device signal listing is included as an appendix attached to this section. The I/O list contains only the new I/O required for the new Sodium Hypochlorite Storage and Distribution Systems. It does not contain existing I/O which will need to be rewired to PLCs that will be replaced as part of this project. Detailed drawings of existing PLC panels are available on file at MSDGC (see specification 01001 for details). CONTRACTOR shall review the existing drawings with MSDGC to determine which I/O points shall be rewired to the new PLCs and which I/O points will be eliminated.

D. SUBMITTALS: Submittals shall be as required in Section 13000.

E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING: Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as required in Section 13000 – Instrumentation and Control System.

F. SPARE PARTS: CONTRACTOR shall provide spare components for each type of component used in each programmable logic controller and input/output hardware assembly.

S. S. No. 5496 13330-1 Programmable Logic Controller

The number of spare part components shall be sufficient to assemble and completely replace any single programmable logic controller assembly provided under this contract. This lot of spare parts shall be provided to the OWNER no later than two weeks from the approval of the FIRST STAGE SUBMITTAL specified in 13000.1.06.A.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND QUALITY

Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. Each type of instrument, instrument accessory, and device shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the work.

Electronic equipment shall be designed for use in industrial applications and shall be suitable for operation in the specified environmental conditions, including corrosive and hazardous atmospheres. Components of standard electronic assemblies shall not be replaced with components of different characteristics in order to meet the performance requirements of this specification. Parts shall be as shown in the instruction manuals and shall be replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading the performance of the completed assembly.

2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

A. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)

This section covers programmable logic controllers (PLCs) as designated and as required, including associated input/output hardware to control process equipment and serving as the interface to field devices. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all PLCs as shown in the drawings.

B. INTERCHANGEABLITY: All programmable logic controller systems shall be products of the same manufacturer and of the same series or product line. Processors, local and remote input/output hardware, communications modules, and specialty modules such as coprocessors and ASCII modules shall be interchangeable among all I/O panels and systems. PLC modules and hardware by other manufacturers will be acceptable only if the PLC manufacturer does not offer suitable modules and hardware for the same functions and as approved by ENGINEER.

C. INITIAL, SPARE, AND FUTURE MEMORY: CONTRACTOR shall provide 1756-L62 CPU or higher memory as required by the ControlLogix applications and 1769-L35E CPU or higher memory as required by the CompactLogix applications.

D. SPARE I/O: Each PLC input/output enclosure shall be provided with at least 20 percent spare inputs and outputs of each type. Spare I/O shall be installed, wired, and interfaced properly to the terminal strip. The spare I/O shall be in addition to any I/O installed and reserved for future process signals as may be indicated on the I/O list. In addition, each PLC input/output


enclosure shall be capable of accommodating 25 percent of additional input/output capacity of each type as originally assembled, without the need for additional expansion racks, communication adapters, cables, or PLC power supplies.

E. EXPANDABILITY: Each PLC processor and associated I/O shall have a future expandability of at least 50 percent of the provided system or as required, whichever is greater.

F. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: The PLCs shall be Allen-Bradley

ControlLogix and CompactLogix as indicated on the drawings and as detailed in tables below, no exceptions to match Owner’s existing equipment. If a newer version of a component is available at the time of construction, the newer version shall be offered as an option to OWNER. CONTRACTOR must ensure full compatibility of newer component with the overall system design. OWNER will make final decision on which version is preferred. Each ControlLogix PLC rack shall have redundant power supplies. This table includes major items only; All components for a fully functional system shall be provided including items such as cables, taps, Etc. which are not shown in the table below:

Allen Bradley ControlLogix Type Allen Bradley

Model No. Description

CPU 1756-L62 PLC – ControlLogix Processor Module

BATM 1756-BATM ControlLogix External Battery Module

PS 1756-PA75R ControlLogix Redundant Power Supply Unit

PS 1756-PSCA2 ControlLogix Rack Power Supply Adapter Module

RACK 1756-A* ControlLogix Rack sized for system provided

ENBT 1756-ENBT ControlLogix Ethernet Communication Module

DNB 1756-DNB ControlLogix DeviceNet Communication Module

CNBR 1756-CNBR ControlLogix ControlNet Communication Module

AI 1756-IF6I ControlLogix Analog Input Module AO 1756-OF6CI ControlLogix Analog Output

Module DI 1756-IA16 ControlLogix 120 VAC Discrete

Input Module DO 1756-OA16 ControlLogix 120 VAC Discrete

Output Module


Allen Bradley CompactLogix

Type Allen Bradley Model No.

Description

CPU 1769-L35E PLC – CompactLogix Ethernet Processor Module

PS 1769-PA4 CompactLogix Power Supply Unit ENBT 1769-ENBT CompactLogix Ethernet

Communication Module DNB 1769-SDN CompactLogix DeviceNet

Communication Module CNBR 1768-CNBR CompactLogix ControlNet

Redundant Communication Module AI 1769-IF4I CompactLogix Analog Input ModuleAO 1769-OF4CI CompactLogix Analog Output

Module DI 1769-IA16 CompactLogix 120 VAC Discrete

Input Module DO 1769-OA16 CompactLogix 120 VAC Discrete

Output Module

G. SIGNAL POWER SUPPLIES: A regulated dc power supply for analog output and for analog input loops shall be provided for each I/O rack as required. Power supplies shall be suitable for an input voltage variation of ±10 percent, and the supply output shall be fused or protected against short-circuiting. Output voltage regulation shall be as required by the instrumentation equipment supplied under another section.

The loop power supply shall be separate from the power supply circuit for the processor and racks.

A separately fused 120 volts ac or 24 volts dc power source shall be provided for all digital inputs from field devices as required. Unless otherwise noted, all field devices will be provided with dry contacts that close to provide an input to the PLC.

H. I/O CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY: Motor Control Centers (MCCs) will be controlled via DeviceNet communications. Hardwired Outputs for all other miscellaneous motor driven equipment will typically be powered from the driven equipment. Discrete outputs for miscellaneous equipment shall be powered either from the controlled equipment or the PLC enclosure as indicated on the drawings or as coordinated with the controlled equipment supplier. Outputs that control process equipment specified under other sections or provided under other contracts shall be fully isolated or shall operate either interposing relays or relay-type discrete output modules in the PLC cabinet.

I. INTERPOSING RELAY: Interposing relays shall be incorporated on all I/O circuits as shown on the PLC input/output listing, or as required by the application to isolate


foreign power sources, and where the continuous output rating of the PLC relay discrete, or output module is not sufficient to power the connected device or equipment. Interposing relays shall be provided for any discrete output module output signal that leaves the PLC enclosure. Interposing relays shall be mounted in the PLC enclosure containing the output module that activates the relays.

J. APPURENTANCES: The PLC processor and I/O hardware shall be provided as complete systems, as shown on the system architecture drawings and control panel arrangement drawings. The PLCs shall include all necessary hardware for a complete working system. All special rack or panel mounted power supplies, special interconnecting and programming cables, special grounding hardware, or isolation devices shall be furnished as required for proper operation of the equipment. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, intrinsically safe relays and current repeaters, surge suppression devices, and isolation devices shall be furnished and installed as required for proper operation of the equipment.

K. PANEL TERMINATIONS: All PLC input/output signals for field connections

shall be terminated using field termination modules located in the enclosure, to match OWNER’s current install practices. Direct connection of field wiring to the I/O module terminals is not acceptable.

L. PLC ARRANGEMENT: The PLCs shall be distributed and arranged as indicated on the system architecture diagram.

M. COMMUNICATIONS: Each programmable controller system shall be furnished complete with communication hardware modules for local input/output hardware, remote input/output hardware, other programmable controllers, or for host computers as required.

Communication hardware shall be compatible with the cable, data highway, fiber optic, or radio communication media as required.

1. ADDRESSABLITY: Each programmable logic controller shall be individually addressable so that only the selected controller responds when queried. At least 30, or a larger number as required, distinct network addresses shall be available. Designation of a controller's network address may be either a software or hardware function.

2. COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE: CONTRACTOR shall

provide all necessary communications hardware. Hardware shall be included for, but not be limited to, remote I/O, data highway, host computer, fiber optics, Ethernet and radio.

3. PLC TO PLC COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE: Each PLC

shall communicate to other PLCs over an Ethernet communications network. CONTRACTOR shall include all rack


mounted, enclosure mounted, or desktop mounted communications modules required for a complete working system. Some components of the network will be provided under an allowance as detailed in Section 13000.

4. PLC TO REMOTE COMMINCATIONS HARDWARE: The

master PLC shall communicate with the remote PLC rack over a remote I/O communications network, where required. CONTRACTOR shall include all rack mounted, enclosure mounted, or desktop mounted communications modules required for a complete working system.

5. PLC TO HOST COMMUNICATIONS HARWARE: Each PLC

shall communicate to the host computer over an Ethernet communications network. CONTRACTOR shall include all rack mounted, enclosure mounted, or desktop mounted communications modules required for a complete working system.

6. COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA: CONTRACTOR shall provide

all necessary cabling and connectors for the PLC communications network, device level networks, and PLC remote I/O communications networks. Communications cables shall meet the requirements of the manufacturers of the PLCs and communications modules.

7. CABLE: CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary cabling for

the PLC system. Communications cables shall meet the requirements of the manufacturers of the PLCs and communications modules.

8. SPECIAL DEVICES: CONTRACTOR shall provide two sets of

any special devices (such as null modems, adapter cards, interface converters, etc.) required to establish an operational programming line between the programmable logic controllers and programming device.

N. SYSTEM ENCLOSURES: Programmable logic controllers and input/output

hardware shall be housed in shop-assembled panels as indicated on the drawings and as described in Section 13110.

O. CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE: CONTRACTOR shall provide all required

software to configure and program all PLC systems provided under this contract licensed to and shipped to the OWNER no later than two weeks from the approval of the FIRST STAGE SUBMITTAL specified in 13000.1.06.A.


2.02 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 13000-2.02.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:

Installation and testing procedures shall be as specified in specification Sections 13000 and 13030.

Equipment shall be located so that it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.

Where so designated in the related specification sections, sensitive electronic equipment shall not be installed until all construction activities, which result in the production of any air borne matter such as dust, dirt, paint, etc., are completed. Where equipment must be installed due to construction sequencing, care shall be taken to protect equipment while maintaining required cooling air flow, and equipment shall be cleaned as required during construction and prior to completion.

B. ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS:

Electric power wiring and equipment shall be in compliance with Division 16. Process instrumentation requiring a 120 volt AC power source shall be provided with a disconnect switch in accordance with Section 16140. 3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 13030.

B. DELIVERY SYSTEM:

The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER upon arrival of any material or equipment to be incorporated into the work and shall remove protective covers or otherwise provide access in order that the ENGINEER may inspect such items.



**END OF SECTION**

TypeDevice DescriptionTagNumber Signal Type

Calibrated Range or

Closed State CommentsItemController ID or Remote I/O

Input/Output List sorted by: PLC,Signal Type,Loop, and Device Type

PLC M2_AC1 DIM2_AC1 PLC CABINET HIGH TEMP SWITCHTSH9201 Dry Contact Alarm1

PLC M2_AC1 DIM2_AC1 PLC CABINET UPS POWER FAIL RELAYEY9202 Dry Contact Normal2

PLC M2_C22 DIM2_C22 PLC CABINET HIGH TEMP SWITCHTSH9189 Dry Contact Alarm3

PLC M2_C22 DIM2_C22 PLC CABINET UPS POWER FAIL RELAYEY9190 Dry Contact Normal4

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1 VALVEHS9141 DeviceNET In Auto5

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1 VALVEZCC9141 DeviceNET Close6

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1 VALVEZCO9141 DeviceNET Open7

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1 VALVEZIC9141 DeviceNET Closed8

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1 VALVEZIO9141 DeviceNET Opened9

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1HS9142 DeviceNET In PC10

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1II9142 DeviceNET 0-100 Amps11

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1JS9142 DeviceNET In Service12

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1MC9142 DeviceNET Run13

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1MN9142 DeviceNET Running14

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-1YA9142 DeviceNET Alarm TSH/LEAK ALARM15

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2 VALVEHS9143 DeviceNET In Auto16

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2 VALVEZCC9143 DeviceNET Close17

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2 VALVEZCO9143 DeviceNET Open18

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2 VALVEZIC9143 DeviceNET Closed19

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2 VALVEZIO9143 DeviceNET Opened20

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2HS9144 DeviceNET In PC21

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2II9144 DeviceNET 0-100 Amps22

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2JS9144 DeviceNET In Service23

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2MC9144 DeviceNET Run24

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2MN9144 DeviceNET Running25

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #W-2YA9144 DeviceNET Alarm TSH/LEAK ALARM26

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1 VALVEHS9145 DeviceNET In Auto27

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1 VALVEZCC9145 DeviceNET Close28

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1 VALVEZCO9145 DeviceNET Open29

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1 VALVEZIC9145 DeviceNET Closed30

1 of 7



Calibrated Range or



PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1 VALVEZIO9145 DeviceNET Opened31

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1HS9146 DeviceNET In PC32

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1II9146 DeviceNET 0-100 Amps33

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1JS9146 DeviceNET In Service34

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1MC9146 DeviceNET Run35

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1MN9146 DeviceNET Running36

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-1YA9146 DeviceNET Alarm TSH/LEAK ALARM37

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2 VALVEHS9147 DeviceNET In Auto38

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2 VALVEZCC9147 DeviceNET Close39

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2 VALVEZCO9147 DeviceNET Open40

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2 VALVEZIC9147 DeviceNET Closed41

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2 VALVEZIO9147 DeviceNET Opened42

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2HS9148 DeviceNET In PC43

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2II9148 DeviceNET 0-100 Amps44

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2JS9148 DeviceNET In Service45

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2MC9148 DeviceNET Run46

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2MN9148 DeviceNET Running47

PLC M2_C22 DNINDUCTION MIXER #E-2YA9148 DeviceNET Alarm TSH/LEAK ALARM48

PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL STG TANK #1 LEVELLT9101 4-20mA 0-168 In H2049

PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL STG TANK #2 LEVELLT9103 4-20mA 0-168 In H2050

PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL LOOP RETURN FLOWFIT9113 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-300 GPM51

PLC M2_C31 AINPW NaOCL PUMPSI9125 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED INDICATION52

PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL FLOW TO NPWFIT9127 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-0.5 GPM53

PLC M2_C31 AISEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1SI9131 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED INDICATION54



PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL FLOW TO SEC. EFFL. WESTFIT9137 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-10 GPM57

PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL FLOW TO SEC. EFFL. EASTFIT9139 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-10 GPM58

PLC M2_C31 AINaOCL LOOP SUPPLY FLOWFIT9155 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-300 GPM59

PLC M2_C31 AONPW NaOCL PUMPSC9125 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED REF.60

2 of 7



Calibrated Range or



PLC M2_C31 AOSEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1SC9131 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED REF.61



PLC M2_C31 DINaOCL UNLOADING ALARM ACK PBHS9102 Dry Contact Normal64

PLC M2_C31 DINaOCL CONTAINMENT SUMP HI LEVELLSH9121 Dry Contact Normal65

PLC M2_C31 DINaOCL CONTAINMENT SUMP HI-HI LEVELLSHH9121 Dry Contact Normal66

PLC M2_C31 DINaOCL CHLORINE ALARMAIT9123 Dry Contact Normal67

PLC M2_C31 DINPW NaOCL PUMPHS9125 Dry Contact In Auto68

PLC M2_C31 DINPW NaOCL PUMPMN9125 Dry Contact Running69

PLC M2_C31 DINPW NaOCL PUMPYA9125A Dry Contact Normal FAULT70

PLC M2_C31 DINPW NaOCL PUMPYA9125B Dry Contact Normal LEAK DETECTED71

PLC M2_C31 DIDCSB EYEWASH FLOW ALARMFSH9129 Dry Contact Alarm72

PLC M2_C31 DISEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1HS9131 Dry Contact In Auto73

PLC M2_C31 DISEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1MN9131 Dry Contact Running74

PLC M2_C31 DISEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1YA9131A Dry Contact Normal FAULT75

PLC M2_C31 DISEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1YA9131B Dry Contact Normal LEAK DETECTED76











PLC M2_C31 DICDSB AHU #1 SMOKE DETECTOR ALARMTAH9401 Dry Contact Normal87

PLC M2_C31 DICDSB AHU #1 FAILUREYA9401 Dry Contact Normal88

PLC M2_C31 DONaOCL STG TANK #1 HI LEVEL LIGHTLAH9101 120 VAC Alarm89

PLC M2_C31 DONaOCL STG TANK #1/#2 HI-HI LEVEL HORNLAHH9102 120 VAC Alarm90

3 of 7



Calibrated Range or



PLC M2_C31 DONaOCL STG TANK #2 HI LEVEL LIGHTLAH9103 120 VAC Alarm91

PLC M2_C31 DONPW NaOCL PUMPMC9125 Dry Contact Run92

PLC M2_C31 DOSEC. EFFL. NaOCL PUMP #1MC9131 Dry Contact Run93



PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 OUTLET VALVEHS9105 DeviceNET In Auto96

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 OUTLET VALVEZCC9105 DeviceNET Close97

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 OUTLET VALVEZCO9105 DeviceNET Open98

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 OUTLET VALVEZIC9105 DeviceNET Closed99

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 OUTLET VALVEZIO9105 DeviceNET Opened100

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 OUTLET VALVEHS9107 DeviceNET In Auto101

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 OUTLET VALVEZCC9107 DeviceNET Close102

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 OUTLET VALVEZCO9107 DeviceNET Open103

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 OUTLET VALVEZIC9107 DeviceNET Closed104

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 OUTLET VALVEZIO9107 DeviceNET Opened105

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 RETURN VALVEHS9109A DeviceNET In Auto106

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 RETURN VALVEZCC9109 DeviceNET Close107

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 RETURN VALVEZCO9109 DeviceNET Open108

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 RETURN VALVEZIC9109 DeviceNET Closed109

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #1 RETURN VALVEZIO9109 DeviceNET Opened110

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 RETURN VALVEHS9111A DeviceNET In Auto111

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 RETURN VALVEZCC9111 DeviceNET Close112

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 RETURN VALVEZCO9111 DeviceNET Open113

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 RETURN VALVEZIC9111 DeviceNET Closed114

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL BULK TANK #2 RETURN VALVEZIO9111 DeviceNET Opened115

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL SUMP PUMPHS9121A DeviceNET In Auto116

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL SUMP PUMPJS9121 DeviceNET In Service117

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL CONTAINMENT SUMP LOW LEVELLSL9121 Dry Contact Normal118

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL SUMP PUMPMC9121 DeviceNET Run119

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL SUMP PUMPMN9121 DeviceNET Running120

4 of 7



Calibrated Range or



PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #1HS9151 DeviceNET In PC121

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #1JS9151 DeviceNET In Service122

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #1MC9151 DeviceNET Run123

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #1MN9151 DeviceNET Running124

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #2HS9153 DeviceNET In PC125

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #2JS9153 DeviceNET In Service126

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #2MC9153 DeviceNET Run127

PLC M2_C31 DNNaOCL LOOP PUMP #2MN9153 DeviceNET Running128

PLC M2_C51 AIFINAL EFFL. NaOCL DAY TANK #1LT9161 4-20mA129

PLC M2_C51 AIFINAL EFFL. NaOCL DAY TANK #2LT9163 4-20mA130

PLC M2_C51 AINaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPSI9173 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED INDICATION131

PLC M2_C51 AIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1SI9181 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED INDICATION132

PLC M2_C51 AIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2SI9183 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED INDICATION133

PLC M2_C51 AINaOCL FLOW TO FINAL EFFL. APPL PTFIT9185 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-25 GPM134

PLC M2_C51 AINaOCL FLOW TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANKFIT9313 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-25 GPM135

PLC M2_C51 AINaOCL FLOW TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANKFIT9317 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-25 GPM136

PLC M2_C51 AONaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPSC9173 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED REF.137

PLC M2_C51 AOFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1SC9181 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED REF.138

PLC M2_C51 AOFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2SC9183 4-20mA 0-100% SPEED REF.139

PLC M2_C51 DINaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPHS9173 Dry Contact In Auto140

PLC M2_C51 DINaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPMN9173 Dry Contact Running141

PLC M2_C51 DINaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPYA9173A Dry Contact Normal FAULT142

PLC M2_C51 DINaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPYA9173B Dry Contact Normal LEAK DETECTED143

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1HS9181 Dry Contact In Auto144

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1MN9181 Dry Contact Running145

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1YA9181A Dry Contact Normal FAULT146

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1YA9181B Dry Contact Normal LEAK DETECTED147

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2HS9183 Dry Contact In Auto148

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2MN9183 Dry Contact Running149

PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2YA9183A Dry Contact Normal FAULT150

5 of 7



Calibrated Range or



PLC M2_C51 DIFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2YA9183B Dry Contact Normal LEAK DETECTED151



PLC M2_C51 DONaOCL LOOP TRANSFER PUMPMC9173 Dry Contact Run154

PLC M2_C51 DOFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #1MC9181 Dry Contact Run155

PLC M2_C51 DOFINAL EFFL NaOCL PUMP #2MC9183 Dry Contact Run156

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 OUTLET VALVEYN9165 DeviceNET In PC157

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 OUTLET VALVEZCC9165 DeviceNET Close158

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 OUTLET VALVEZCO9165 DeviceNET Open159

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 OUTLET VALVEZIC9165 DeviceNET Closed160

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 OUTLET VALVEZIO9165 DeviceNET Opened161

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 OUTLET VALVEYN9167 DeviceNET In PC162

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 OUTLET VALVEZCC9167 DeviceNET Close163

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 OUTLET VALVEZCO9167 DeviceNET Open164

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 OUTLET VALVEZIC9167 DeviceNET Closed165

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 OUTLET VALVEZIO9167 DeviceNET Opened166

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 RETURN VALVEHS9169A DeviceNET In Auto167

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 RETURN VALVEZCC9169 DeviceNET Close168

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 RETURN VALVEZCO9169 DeviceNET Open169

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 RETURN VALVEZIC9169 DeviceNET Closed170

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#1 RETURN VALVEZIO9169 DeviceNET Opened171

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 RETURN VALVEHS9171A DeviceNET In Auto172

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 RETURN VALVEZCC9171 DeviceNET Close173

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 RETURN VALVEZCO9171 DeviceNET Open174

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 RETURN VALVEZIC9171 DeviceNET Closed175

PLC M2_C51 DNFINAL EFFL NaOCl DAY TANK#2 RETURN VALVEZIO9171 DeviceNET Opened176

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANKYN9311 DeviceNET In PC177

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANKZCC9311 DeviceNET Close178

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANKZCO9311 DeviceNET Open179

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANKZIC9311 DeviceNET Closed180

6 of 7



Calibrated Range or



PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO HW WEST SBR DAY TANKZIO9311 DeviceNET Opened181

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANKYN9315 DeviceNET In PC182

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANKZCC9315 DeviceNET Close183

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANKZCO9315 DeviceNET Open184

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANKZIC9315 DeviceNET Closed185

PLC M2_C51 DNNaOCl FLOW VALVE TO RAW SWG PS SBR DAY TANKZIO9315 DeviceNET Opened186

PLC M2_OC1 AINaOCL FLOW TO PRI. ODOR CONTROLFIT9301 4-20mA; 4-Wire 0-0.5 GPM187

PLC M2_OC1 DIM2_OC1 PLC CABINET HIGH TEMP SWITCHTSH9303 Dry Contact Alarm188

PLC M2_OC1 DIM2_OC1 PLC CABINET UPS POWER FAIL RELAYEY9304 Dry Contact Normal189

7 of 7


SECTION 14611

MONORAIL HOISTS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies a monorail system complete with hoist, trolley, associated drive unit and controls, and rails. B. TYPE: Monorail hoist shall be single girder with motor driven carrier. Hoist shall be electric chain, single speed, close headroom, cross-mounted type with electric driven trolley. Tracks, track curves and appurtenances shall be in accordance with Section 05100 and as specified in this section. C. EQUIPMENT LIST: Equipment numbers are as follows:

Item Location No.

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building monorail hoist

MLC-C3-05-0001

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: All equipment provided under this section shall be suitable for Class AI service as defined by CMAA standards. The monorail assembly shall be furnished with the hoist suspended from its trolley. Monorail beams, complete with connections to the building structural system, splices and runway stops, shall be furnished by the hoist manufacturer. Monorail beams shall be designed by a registered civil or structural ENGINEER in accordance with the hoist manufacturer's recommendations. Load bearing connections shall be provided at each building beam or girder and where necessary to limit deflection to less than 1/450 of span. The ENGINEER shall be registered in the state of Ohio.

S. S. No.5496 14611-1 Monorail Hoists

Load carrying parts, except structural members and hoisting ropes, shall be designed so that the calculated static stress in the material, based on rated bond, shall not exceed 20 percent of the assumed ultimate strength of the material. Structural members shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the CMAA specifications. The rated capacity load plus the weight of the bottom block divided by the number of parts of hoisting chain shall not exceed 20 percent of the published breaking strength of the chain. The CONTRACTOR shall examine the drawings for interferences and obstructions which might impose additional limitations upon the equipment. B. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: Operating requirements shall be as follows:

1. Capacity, tons 0.25

2. Vertical lift, feet 18

3. Hoist lift speed, fpm 16

4. Trolley speed, fpm 20

5. Maximum hoist motor horsepower 3/4

6. Maximum trolley motor horsepower 1/2 Hook approach distances and high hook position shall be 12 feet above finish floor elevation. The CONTRACTOR is advised to carefully examine the drawings for interferences and obstructions which might impose additional limitations upon the equipment C. STANDARDS: All equipment furnished under this section shall comply in all respects with the requirements of OSHA. Unless otherwise noted, the standards of the Crane Manufacturer's Association of America (CMAA) and the Hoist Manufacturer's Institute (HMI) shall prevail. D. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY:

The CONTRACTOR shall cause the monorail hoist system to be provided as a working unit by the manufacturer. (The CONTRACTOR shall assign unit responsibility to the monorail hoist system manufacturer. Unit responsibility shall cover all components required to provide a complete and operable system, including but not limited to the hoist, trolley, beams, tracks and appurtenances.) The manufacturer shall coordinate materials, coordinate design, provide all system assembly components and provide all attachments to the structure.

The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all of the system assemblies provided for the project

are products for which unit responsibility has been accepted by the manufacturer(s).


1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Environmental conditions are as specified in Section 01800. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall comply with the requirements of Section 01300 and shall include:

1. Manufacturer’s catalog data confirming rated capacity, equipment speeds, horsepower, electrical requirements, component sizes and dimensions, and materials of construction.

2. Motor data in accordance with Section 11060.



4. Submit a letter from a registered civil or structural ENGINEER that certifies

that the ENGINEER has designed or reviewed the design of the monorail beams and connections and that the monorail system is adequate for the designed loads. The ENGINEER shall sign and seal the letter. The ENGINEER shall be registered in the state of Ohio.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Monorail hoist shall be ACCO, Budgit, or equal, modified as necessary to meet the requirements of this section. 2.02 MATERIALS


Component Material

Runway beam Steel, ASTM A36 or A529

Bottom tees Manganese steel, 225 Brinell hardness

Trolleys, wheels, hook Steel, ASTM A36

Chain Stainless Steel 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. MONORAIL BEAM: Runways shall be specially fabricated composite beams comprised of top flange, web and hardened steel bottom tee section, continuously welded to the web. The bottom tee shall be shaped to provide a running surface for the bridge end trucks. B. TROLLEY: Trolley wheels shall be hardened steel, mounted on permanently lubricated antifriction bearings. The trolley shall be motorized and shall be designed for lug connection of the hoist. C. HOIST: Hoist gearing shall be heat-treated hardened steel, running in an oil bath. Gear bearings shall be the oil-lubricated antifriction type, and all bearings shall be designed for a Class M2 (20,000 hour) bearing life. The hoist shall contain an automatic electromechanical type brake designed for long life and position stopping. A standard limit switch and a special overtravel full current limit switch shall be provided to assure safe operation and positive stopping under all conditions. The limit switch shall automatically disconnect the motor and engage the hoist brake when the hook reaches either it’s upper or lower limit of travel. The load hook shall be mounted on ball thrust bearings to swivel without twisting the chain rope. The lifting tackle shall be of the safety type, and the hooks shall be of hardened steel equipped with a safety catch. Sheaves shall be properly guarded and shall be heavy pattern, deep flanged and properly grooved. Sheaves shall be either bronzed bushed or fitted with ball bearings and supported on fixed pins. Provide a chain bucket. D. DRIVE UNITS: Each crane shall be fully electrified. Motors shall be 1750 rpm, 460 volt, 3 phase, Type 2, TEFC motors in accordance with Section 11060. Motors shall be specially designed for Class I crane service. Hoist controls shall be the single-speed type with speed indicated under the operating requirements. Trolley motors shall be through reversible, single-speed electric motors.


Trolley motors shall drive the trolley through enclosed gear reducers with dual output shafts to solid rubber tire driving wheels spring mounted on the underside of the runway girder. Gear reducers shall be enclosed heavy-duty helical type, of a self-lubricating design with antifriction bearings. Brakes shall be solenoid actuated. The hoist motor bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be designed for a Class M3 (50,000 hour) bearing life. E. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS: 1. GENERAL: The crane manufacturer shall furnish and mount all electrical equipment on the crane including motors, control and conduit. Bridge conductors may be removed for shipment. All wire on the crane shall be furnished by the crane manufacturer, cut to length and installed as far as practical for shipment. 2. POWER SUPPLY: Power supply for crane equipment will be 460V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. The Contractor shall provide the power feeder with a local disconnect switch to the crane controller. Control power transformers shall be provided as necessary by the manufacturer. 3. MOTORS: Motors shall comply with Section 11060 and shall be 1800 rpm maximum with open dripproof or TEFC enclosures. 4. ELECTRIFICATION: Electrification of the hoist shall be by flat cable festoon system with terminal box, multi-conductor cord, and accessories. Conductors shall be complete with all necessary insulation, supports and appurtenances as required. 5. CONTROLLERS: Control shall be magnetic type. All control equipment, including relays, pushbuttons, transformers, and interconnecting wiring shall be provided by the crane supplier. All control equipment shall be housed in NEMA 4X enclosures. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided:

1. Operating and maintenance information in accordance with Section 01730. 2. Structural calculations and details for monorail design.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION The monorail, trolley, and hoist shall be installed at the location shown and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.



3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, the monorail, trolley, and hoist shall be completely tested to ensure compliance with the performance requirements as specified. As a minimum, testing shall be by operating the equipment through a complete lift and lowering cycle and through a complete travel of the monorail to determine that the equipment performs smoothly and safely without failure. Such tests shall be carried out with the hoisting equipment loaded as near to the specified capacity as possible. Any defects shall be corrected or replaced immediately by the CONTRACTOR and at no expense to the OWNER. All testing and the costs of all required certification shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. 3.03 USED BY CONTRACTOR The CONTRACTOR shall not use any crane or hoist within the Disinfection Chemical Storage Building to move materials or equipment. Any crane or hoist not previously mentioned used by the CONTRACTOR, shall be repaired, repainted and otherwise refurbished to like-new condition prior to its acceptance. The CONTRACTOR assumes all responsibility for operation and maintenance until the hoist has been accepted.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15050-1 Piping Systems

SECTION 15050

PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies systems of process piping and general requirements for piping systems. Detailed specifications for the components listed on the Piping System Specification Sheets are found in other sections of Division 15. This section shall be used in conjunction with those sections. B. DEFINITIONS: Pressure terms used in Section 15050 and elsewhere in Division 15 are defined as follows: 1. Maximum: The greatest continuous pressure at which the piping system

operates. 2. Test: The hydrostatic pressure used to determine system acceptance. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Deleted:


Reference Title

ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems


ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300

ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ANSI B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded

ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ANSI B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping

ASTM A47 Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless

ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inch Through 48 Inch, for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges

AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids

AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger

AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe

AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services--Sizes 4 In. through 144 In.

Deleted:


Reference Title

AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings

AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches, for Water

AWWA M11 Steel Pipe--A Guide for Design and Installation

FEDSPEC L-C-530B(1)

Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin or Thermosetting Epoxy

MIL-STD-810C Environmental Test Methods

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code B. FITTINGS AND COUPLING COMPATIBILITY: To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components, fittings and couplings for grooved end piping systems shall be furnished by the same manufacturers.

C. PIPING SUPPORTS:

The CONTRACTOR shall provide the final design, inspection, and certification for the piping supports for this project. Pipe supports are specified under Section 15096. The design of these systems shall be the product of a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Ohio retained by the CONTRACTOR. The professional engineer (hereinafter and in all referenced sections the "Design Professional") shall obtain and maintain professional liability insurance in the amount of $1,000,000 aggregate to be in effect for duration of this project plus one year. The Design Professional shall have not less than five years experience in the type of piping work required for this project. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for this portion of the work.

D. PIPE CHANGES IN ALIGNMENT AND DIRECTION:

The CONTRACTOR shall include in the bid price, in addition to that shown or specified elsewhere, two changes in alignment for both horizontal and vertical and two changes in direction in each 100 linear feet for each pipe buried or exposed 14 inches and smaller.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Prior to delivering piping to the job site, the following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. The qualifications of the Design Professional to be charged with design, inspection and certification of pipe supports, including education, proof of registration, proof of insurance, and previous experience in performing this type of work. The documentation shall be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of paragraph 15050-1.02 C. No further

Deleted: Minnesota

Deleted:


submittals under this or any related section will be considered until the qualifications of the Design Professional have been reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER.

2. A copy of this specification section, along with Section 15096, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

3. Piping layout drawings shall be transmitted to the ENGINEER a minimum of three weeks prior to construction. Drawings shall be original layouts by the CONTRACTOR; photocopies of contract drawings are not acceptable. Piping layout drawings shall include the location and detail for all instrumentation instruments. Requirements for each instrument shall be included and coordinated between Division 15 and 17 requirements.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, piping materials, including pipe, gaskets, fittings, connection and joint assemblies, linings and coatings, shall be selected from those listed on the piping system specification sheets. Piping materials shall conform to detailed specifications for each type of pipe and piping appurtenance specified in other sections of Division 15. 2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. PLASTIC CODING MARKERS: Plastic markers for coding pipe shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and shall be as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services Inc., or equal. Markers shall be the mechanically attached type that are easily removable; they shall not be the

Deleted: ¶

Deleted:


adhesive applied type. Markers shall consist of pressure sensitive legends applied to plastic backing which is strapped or otherwise mechanically attached to the pipe. Legend and backing shall be resistant to petroleum based oils and grease and shall meet criteria for humidity, solar radiation, rain, salt, fog and leakage fungus, as specified by MIL-STD-810C. Markers shall withstand a continuous operating temperature range of -40 degrees F to 180 degrees F. Plastic coding markers shall not be the individual letter type but shall be manufactured and applied in one continuous length of plastic. Markers bearing the legends on the background colors specified in the PIPESPEC shall be provided in the following letter heights:

Outside pipe diameter,a inches

Letter height, inches

Less than 1-1/2 1/2

1-1/2 through 3 1-1/8

Greater than 3 2-1/4

a Outside pipe diameter shall include insulation and jacketing.

In addition, pipe markers shall include uni- and bi-directional arrows in the same sizes as the legend. Legends and arrows shall be white on blue or red backgrounds and black on other specified backgrounds. B. PLASTIC TRACER TAPE Tracer tape shall be 6 inches wide, yellow colored, and made of inert plastic material suitable for direct burial. Tape shall be capable of stretching to twice its original length and shall be as manufactured by Allen Systems, W. H. Brady Co., Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services Inc., or equal. A message shall be printed on the tape. The message shall read "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION NaOCl PIPE BURIED BELOW" with bold letters approximately 2 inches high. 2.03 VALVES Valves of the same size and service shall be provided by a single valve manufacturer. Packing shall be nonasbestos material. Actual length of valves shall be within 1/16 inch (plus or minus) of the manufacturer's specified length. Flanges shall meet the requirement of ANSI B16.5. Push-on and mechanical joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111.

Formatted: No underline

Deleted: – NOT USED

Deleted: Valve operators are specified in Section 15185.¶

Deleted:


2.04 PRODUCT DATA

The following product data on piping materials shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Product data on piping materials listed in the PIPESPECS, paragraph 15050-3.06.

2. Design drawings and calculations for pipe supports, specified in Section 15096. The drawings and calculations shall be sealed and submitted by the design professional specified in paragraph 15050-1.02.C through the CONTRACTOR. The design professional shall affirm that loads on structures are within the load limits noted on the contract documents. Piping layout drawings, including pipe supports, shall be transmitted to the ENGINEER a minimum of three weeks prior to construction. Drawings shall be original layouts by the CONTRACTOR; photocopies of contract drawings are not acceptable.

3. Inspection reports, authored, sealed, and signed by the design professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02.C, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER each month, as provided under paragraph 15050-3.03. The design professional’s final report shall be submitted to the ENGINEER before beneficial occupancy by the OWNER, as provided under paragraph 15050-3.03.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. LOCATION: Piping shall be provided as specified except for adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features and shall be coordinated with electrical construction. B. PIPING SIZES: Where the size of piping is not specified, the CONTRACTOR shall provide piping of the sizes required by UPC. Unless specified otherwise, small piping (less than 1 inch in diameter) required for services not described by UPC shall be 1/2 inch.

C. PIPE SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE AND SEISMIC BRACING:

1. GENERAL: Piping shall be supported by anchor brackets, guides, saddles or hangers. Pipe movement due to thermal expansion and internal pressure and dynamic forces shall be accommodated by pipe springing, anchors, expansion joints, and guides selected for the

Deleted: ¶

Deleted:


specific purpose by the design professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02.C. The details for the piping support shall be submitted with the CONTRACTOR’s piping layout drawings as product data under the provisions of paragraph 15050-2.04. Acceptable types of supports, guides, saddles, expansion joints, flexible couplings, hangers and structure attachments for general piping support are referenced in Section 15096 or shown on the drawings. Where a specific type of support or anchorage is indicated on the drawings, then only that type shall be used at that location. Piping shall be vertically supported by anchor brackets, guides, saddles or hangers. Supports shall be provided on each run at each change of direction. Unless otherwise specified, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new piping. Existing tunnel pipe support racks can be used for new pipe if the design professional determines that the existing rack components are adequate to support the additional load.

2. PIPING CONNECTIONS TO MACHINES: Piping at machine connections shall be aligned in all planes to permit insertion of bolts at bolted connections or coupling screwed connections without using jacks, come-a-longs or other mechanical means to align field piping with the connections at the machines. Bolts shall not be forced into mating flange bolt holes and shall be capable being withdrawn using finger pressure alone. The use of “Dutchmen” mitered sections or similar specials to achieve the required alignment with machine connections is strictly prohibited.

D. ANCHORAGE FOR BURIED PIPING: All plugs, caps, tees and bends in buried pressure piping systems shall be anchored by means of reaction backing or restrained joints as specified. E. BEDDING AND BACKFILL: Bedding and backfill for buried piping shall be as specified.

F. EQUIPMENT CONNECTION FITTINGS – NOT USED G. FLEXIBILITY

Unless otherwise specified, piping passing from concrete to earth shall be provided with two

pipe couplings or flexible joints as specified in Section 15085.

3.02 PIPING and VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. PIPE CODING: After application of the specified coating and insulation systems, exposed piping, interior and exterior, and piping in ceiling spaces, pipe trenches, pipe chases and valve boxes shall be identified with plastic markers as specified in paragraph 15050-2.02 A. Legend markers and directional arrows shall be located at each side of walls, floors and ceilings, at one side of each piece of equipment, at piping intersections, and at approximately 50-foot centers.

Deleted: ¶

Deleted:


B. PLASTIC TRACER TAPE A single line of tape as specified in paragraph 15050-2.02 B shall be provided 2.5 feet above the centerline of buried (NaOCl) pipe. For (NaOCl) pipelines buried 8 feet or greater below finished grade, CONTRACTOR shall provide a second line of tape 12 inches below finished grade, above and parallel to each buried pipe. Tape shall be spread flat with message side up before backfilling.

C. VALVE IDENTIFICATION Stainless steel tags bearing the specified valve number stamped in 1/4-inch high letters shall be installed on valve flanges in a position visible from floor level. Flangeless valves 8 inches in diameter and larger shall have tags attached to the valve body by self-tapping corrosion resistant metal screws. Flangeless valves 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall have tags attached to the valve stem by stainless steel wire. Wire shall be 0.063 inch minimum. 3.03 INSPECTION

The CONTRACTOR shall cause the design professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02.C to inspect the installation of the piping support provided under this contract. The design professional shall be at the site of the work during the installation work and shall provide the ENGINEER with monthly reports indicating progress of the work. Upon completion of construction, but prior to beneficial occupancy of the piping systems by the OWNER, the design professional shall conduct a detailed final inspection and furnish the ENGINEER with a final report certifying that all work has been accomplished in accordance with applicable requirements. All reports shall bear the design professional’s registration seal and signature in accordance with the laws, rules and regulations of the state.

3.04 TESTING A. GENERAL: Upon completion of piping, but prior to application of insulation on exposed piping, the CONTRACTOR shall test the piping systems. Pressures, media and test durations shall be as specified in the PIPESPEC. Equipment which may be damaged by the specified test conditions shall be isolated. Testing shall be performed using calibrated test gages and calibrated volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Each test gage shall be selected so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's range. Unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER 24 hours prior to each test. Unless otherwise specified, testing, as specified herein, shall include existing piping systems which connect with new pipe systems. Existing pipe shall be tested to the nearest existing valve. Any piping which fails the test shall be repaired. Repair of existing piping will be considered and paid for as extra work.

Formatted: Indent: First line: 36 pt



Deleted: – NOT USED

Deleted: contractor

Deleted: ¶

Deleted:


B. GAS, AIR, AND VAPOR SYSTEMS: Unless otherwise specified, the testing medium for other gas, air and vapor systems shall be as follows:

Pipeline size Specified test pressure Testing medium

2 inch and smaller 75 psi or less Air or water

2 inch and smaller Greater than 75 psi Water

Greater than 2 inch 3 psi or less Air or water

Greater than 2 inch Greater than 3 psi Water The allowable leakage rate for hazardous gas systems, insulated systems, and systems tested with water shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified test period. The allowable leakage rate for other systems tested with air shall be based on a maximum pressure drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure for the duration of the period. Prior to starting a test interval using air, the air shall be at ambient temperature and specified test pressure. C. LIQUID SYSTEMS: Leakage shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified duration for the following systems: exposed piping, buried insulated piping, and buried or exposed piping carrying liquid chemicals. Unless otherwise specified, leakage from other buried liquid piping systems shall be less than 0.02 gallon per hour per inch diameter per 100 feet of buried piping. D. DRAINS: Drain systems, other than pumped drain systems, shall be tested in accordance with UPC. 3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. GENERAL: Piping systems shall be cleaned following completion of testing and prior to connection to operating, control, regulating or instrumentation equipment. The CONTRACTOR may, at his option, clean and test sections of buried or exposed piping systems. Use of this procedure, however, will not waive the requirement for a full pressure test of the completed system. Unless specified otherwise, piping 24 inches in diameter and smaller shall first be cleaned by pulling a tightly fitting cleaning ball or swab through the system. Piping larger than 24 inches in diameter may be cleaned manually or with a cleaning ball or swab.

Deleted: ¶

Deleted: D. CHLORINE AND SULFUR DIOXIDE SYSTEMS – NOT USED¶¶

E. HYDRAULIC AND LUBE OIL SYSTEMS – NOT USED¶¶

F

Deleted:


B. TEMPORARY SCREENS: Upon completion of the cleaning, the CONTRACTOR shall connect the piping systems to related process equipment. Temporary screens, provided with locator tabs which remain visible from the outside when the screens are in place, shall be inserted in pipelines at the suction of pumps and compressors in accordance with the following table:

Equipment suction or piping size, inches

Maximum screen opening, inches

0 –1 1/16

1-1/4 – 3 1/4

3-1/2 – 6 1/2

Over 6 1 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the screens during testing, initial start-up, and initial operating phases of the commissioning process. In special cases, screens may be removed as required for performance tests. The CONTRACTOR shall remove the temporary screens and make the final piping connections after the screens have remained clean for at least 24 consecutive hours of operation. Systems handling solids are exempted. C. GAS AND AIR SYSTEMS: Unless otherwise specified, gas and air system piping 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall be blown out, using air or the testing medium specified. Piping larger than 6 inches shall be cleaned by having a swab or "pig" drawn through the separate reaches of pipe. After connection to the equipment, it shall then be blown out using the equipment. Upon completion of cleaning, the piping shall be drained and dried with an airstream. D. LIQUID SYSTEMS: After completion of cleaning, liquid systems, unless otherwise specified, shall be flushed with clean water. With temporary screens in place, the liquid shall be circulated through the piping system using connected equipment for a minimum period of 15 minutes and until no debris is collected on the screens. 3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PIPESPEC) Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes or types of service lines are specified on individual piping specification sheets (PIPESPECS). Piping services are grouped according to the chemical and physical properties of the fluid conveyed and/or by the temperature or pressure requirements. Each grouping of services (PIPESPEC) is identified by a piping system number. Piping services specified in the PIPESPECS and on the drawings are alphabetically

Deleted: ¶

Deleted: ¶

Deleted:


arranged by designated service symbols as shown in Table A. Table A also indicates the system number, fluid category, and pipe marker background color of each service.

Table A. Piping Services

Symbol

Service

System

Fluid category NG Natural Gas 5 Gas CW City Water 7 Water HW Hot Water 7 Water NPW Non-Potable

Water 7 Water

NAOCL Sodium Hypochlorite

19 Chemical

SPD Sump Pump Discharge

19 Chemical/Water

CD Chemical Drain 19 Drain/Vent D Drain 24 Drain VC Chemical Vent 25 Drain/Vent

Formatted: Font: 12 pt

Deleted: E. CHLORINE AND SULFUR DIOXIDE SYSTEMS – NOT USED¶¶

F. STEAM SYSTEMS – NOT USED¶¶

G. HYDRAULIC AND FLUID POWER OIL SYSTEMS – NOT USED¶¶

H. POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS – NOT USED¶¶3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PIPESPEC)¶¶

Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes or types of service lines are specified on individual piping specification sheets (PIPESPECS). Piping services are grouped according to the chemical and physical properties of the fluid conveyed and/or by the temperature or pressure requirements. Each grouping of services (PIPESPEC) is identified by a piping system number. Piping services specified in the PIPESPECS and on the drawings are alphabetically arranged by designated

Deleted: CD

Deleted: Chemical Drain

Deleted: 25

Deleted: Drain/Vent

Deleted: (non-potable)

Deleted: HHWR


Deleted: IA

Deleted: NAOCL

Deleted: 19

Deleted: Chemical

Deleted: Sodium Hypochlorite

Deleted: RWP

Deleted: NPW

Deleted: 7

Deleted: Water

Deleted: Non-Potable Water

Deleted: STD

Deleted: VC

Deleted: Chemical Vent

Deleted: 25

Deleted: Drain/Vent

Deleted:

... [3]

... [2]

... [1]

... [4]

... [5]


3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: NG--Natural Gas System--5 Test Requirements: Medium: Ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 B. Pressure: 150 psig Duration: 120 minutes Gasket Requirements: Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar)

and neoprene binder Push-on/Mech Cpl: N/A Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (2" and smaller) Pipe: Steel; ASTM A106, seamless, Grade B, black, no lining. Conn; taper threaded, ANSI B1.20.1. Ftgs; malleable iron, ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3, Class 150;

ends to match pipe. Valves: Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or equal. Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or

equal. Lift check; Crane 366E, Lunkenheimer 1616, or equal. (2 1/2" thru 8") Pipe: Steel; ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B, black, no lining.

Conn; butt weld, flanged for valves. Ftgs; steel, ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9; ends to match pipe. Valves: Lubricated plug; cast iron, flanged, PTFE or molydisulfide

coated plug, Nordstrom Fig. 143, Walworth Fig. 1797F, or equal, thru 5 inch; worm gear operator, Nordstrom Fig. 149, Walworth Fig. 1727F, or equal, 6 to 8 inch.

Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type. Omit coating on encased pipe.) (2" and smaller)

Formatted: Indent: Left: 0 pt, Firstline: 0 pt

Deleted: ¶

Deleted:


3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping System: 5 (continued) Pipe: Steel; same as exposed with polyethylene tape coating. Field

application of coating to all couplings. Provide plastic tracer tape.

Conn; same as exposed with coating. Ftgs; same as exposed with coating. Valves: Ball; same as exposed with extension stem and valve box. (2 1/2" thru 8") Pipe: Steel; same as exposed with coating specified above.

Provide plastic tracer tape. Conn; same as exposed with coating. Ftgs; same as exposed with coating. Valves: Lubricated plug; same as exposed with extension stem and

valve box. Remarks:

Deleted:



3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service CW--City Water System--7 HW--Hot Water NPW--Non Potable Water Test Requirements: Medium: Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 C. Pressure: 150 psig Duration: 60 minutes Gasket Requirements: Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar)

and neoprene binder Push-on/Mech Cpl: EPDM Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type.) (2" and smaller) Pipe: Copper tube; ASTM B88, Type L, drawn. Ref. spec Section

15066. Conn; solder type with threaded or flanged adapters for

valves. Ftgs; wrought copper or bronze, ANSI B16.22. (2" and smaller) Valves: Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or equal. Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or

equal. Swing check; Crane 137, Lunkenheimer 230, or equal. Remarks: 1. Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at the low points

of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph 15095-3.03. 2. Insulate all city water (CW) piping per Section 15250. 3. Insulate all hot water (HW) piping per Section 15250.

Deleted: 3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC¶¶Piping Symbol/Service: IA--Instrument Air System--2¶

¶Test Requirements:¶

Medium: Ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 B.¶

Pressure: 200 psig¶Duration: 120 minutes¶

¶Gasket Requirements:¶

Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene binder¶

Push-on/Mech Cpl: N/A¶¶Exposed Pipe and Valves:¶ (See drawings for pipe size and valve type)¶¶ (1/2" and smaller)¶

Pipe: Copper tube; ASTM B88, Type L, drawn. Ref. spec Section 15066.¶

Conn; brass compression type.¶Ftgs; brass compression type,

Swagelok, Gyrolok, or equal.¶¶ (3/4" thru 2")¶

Pipe: Copper tube; ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.¶

Conn; solder type with threaded adapters or valves.¶

Ftgs; wrought copper or bronze, ANSI B16.22.¶¶ (2" and smaller)¶

Valves: Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or equal.¶

Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or equal.¶

Lift check; Lunkenheimer 1616, Crane 366E, or equal.¶¶Remarks:¶¶1. Insulate exterior piping per Section 15250.

Section Break (Continuous)Page Break



Deleted: , except for piping located in the containment area in Building 23.

Deleted: <#>CW pipe located in the containment area in Building 23 is to be Schedule 80 PVC piping as specified in Piping System 19. No containment piping or insulation is required. See Piping System 19 in this section and Specification 15064.¶

Deleted:


3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: NaOCl--Sodium Hypochlorite System--19 SPD--Sump Pump Discharge CD--Chemical Drain Test Requirements: Medium: Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 C. Pressure: 150 psig Duration: 120 minutes Gasket Requirements: Flange: PTFE bonded EPDM, full-face gaskets, ANSI B16.1. Push-on/Mech Cpl: N/A Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (All sizes) Pipe: CPVC; ASTM D1784, Class 23447-B, NSF certified, Sch.

80. Ref. spec Section 15064. Conn; plain end, solvent weld. Solvent weld cement to be

ASTM F-493 (IPS 724) with ASTM F-656 (IPS P-70) primer or approved equal.

Ftgs; CPVC, Sch. 80, solvent weld. Solvent weld cement to be ASTM F-493 (IPS 724) with ASTM F-656 (IPS P-70) primer or approved equal.

(All sizes) Valves: Diaphragm; PVC body, Chemtrol, George Fischer,

Asahi/America, or equal, with PTFE diaphragm. Ref. spec Section 15139.

Ball check; PVC body, Chemtrol, Asahi/America, George Fischer, or equal with Viton seats and seals. Ref. spec Section 15120.

Remarks: 1. NaOCl and SPD piping located outside of any containment area and NaOCl piping in any

containment area equal to or higher than 4’- 6” above finished floor shall be double containment CPVC piping. Carrier piping is Schedule 80 CPVC as specified above. Containment piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Refer to Section 15064. See Drawings for location and pipe sizes.

Formatted: Underline

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

Deleted: 3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC¶¶Piping Symbol/Service: HHWR--Heating Hot Water Return System--8¶

HHWS--Heating Hot Water Supply¶

Section Break (Continuous)Test Requirements:¶

Medium: Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 C.¶

Pressure: 75 psig¶Duration: 120 minutes¶

¶Gasket Requirements:¶


Push-on/Mech Cpl: EPDM¶¶

Deleted: A

Deleted: L

Deleted: SPEC - CPVC

Deleted: 12454

Deleted: ASTM D1785,

Deleted: Pipe and fittings exposed to

Deleted: ,

Deleted: flanged for butterfly valves 3

Deleted: D2564

Deleted: ,

Deleted: 724

Deleted: CPVC

Deleted: D2564

Deleted: ,

Deleted: 724

Deleted: CPVC

Deleted: (2" and less

Deleted: Viton or

Deleted:

Deleted: ¶

Deleted: 1. Ball valves are not

Deleted: A

Deleted: L

Deleted: the

Deleted: in Building 23 is to be

Deleted: to

Deleted: clear

Deleted:

... [7]

... [9]

... [6]

... [10]

... [8]

3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping System: 19 (continued)


2. NaOCl and SPC piping located inside of any containment area lower than 4’ – 6” above finished floor shall be Schedule 80 CPVC piping as specified above. No containment piping is necessary. See Drawings for location and pipe size.

3. NaOCl piping in tunnels shall be double containment CPVC piping. Carrier piping is

Schedule 80 CPVC as specified above. Containment piping is Schedule 40 PVC. Refer to Section 15064. See Drawings for location and pipe sizes.

4. Air release valves shall be provided at the high points and containment leak detection

stations provided at the low points of each reach of NaOCl pipeline as specified in Section 15150-2.10 and 15095-3.03. Containment piping in drop legs to be clear Schedule 40 PVC.

5. Provide magnetic tracer tape for buried piping.

Formatted: Indent: Left: 0 pt,Hanging: 36 pt




Formatted: Condensed by 0.15 pt



Deleted: ¶

Deleted: A

Deleted: L

Deleted: the

Deleted: in Building 23 is to

Deleted: ¶

Deleted: All SPD piping is to be Schedule 80 PVC piping as specified above. No containment piping is necessary.

Deleted: <#>Solvent weld cement shall meet requirements of ASTM D2564 and shall be IPS 724 CPVC or approved equal, suitable for sodium hypochlorite service.¶¶

Deleted: drains

Deleted: A

Deleted: L

Deleted: <#>CW piping that is located in the containment area of Building 23 shall comply with Piping System 19.¶¶

Deleted:


3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: SA—Supply Air System--22 Test Requirements: Medium: Air; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 B. Pressure: 15 psig Duration: 60 minutes Gasket Requirements, 16” and smaller: Flange: Gylon gasketing, Garlock style 3504 Push-on/Mech Cpl: PTFE Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (16" and smaller) Pipe: Reinforced thermosetting resin (RTRP); Type 4, ref. spec

Section 15058. Conn; bonded bell and spigot or flanged. Ftgs; RTRP to match pipe, glass filament wound reinforcing

only. Valves: Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103. (18" and larger) FRP Ductwork; ref. spec Section 13234 Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (16" and smaller) Pipe: RTRP; same as exposed. Provide magnetic tracer tape. Conn; same as exposed. Ftgs; same as exposed. Valves: Butterfly; same as exposed with extension stem and valve

box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900. Remarks: FRP Ductwork will be used for the supply air in the Disinfection Chemical Building only. The electrical rooms and control rooms will utilize low pressure aluminum ductwork.


Deleted: ¶¶

Deleted:


3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: D--Drain System--24 Test Requirements: Medium: In accordance with Ohio Plumbing Code. Pressure: In accordance with Ohio Plumbing Code. Duration: In accordance with Ohio Plumbing Code. Gasket Requirements: Push-on/Mech Cpl: Nitrile or neoprene Buried and Encased Pipe (See drawings for pipe size.) (4" and smaller) Pipe: PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D2665, Sch. 40.

Ref. spec Section 15064. Provide magnetic tracer tape. Conn; plain end, solvent weld. Ftgs; PVC, socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665. (6”, 8”, 10" and 12") Pipe: PVC; ASTM D3034, SDR 35. Provide magnetic tracer tape. Conn; Push-on with nitrile gasket. Ftgs; PVC; ends to match pipe. (14" and larger) Pipe: Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP); ref. spec Section 15056. Conn; ASTM C443, rubber gasket type. Ftgs; concrete manhole as specified on the drawings.


Deleted: Page Break

Deleted:


3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: VC--Chemical Vent System--25 Test Requirements: Medium: In accordance with the Ohio Plumbing Code. Pressure: In accordance with the Ohio Plumbing Code. Duration: In accordance with the Ohio Plumbing Code. Gasket Requirements: Flange: N/A Push-on/Mech Cpl: N/A Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (8" and smaller) Pipe: PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D2665, Sch. 40.

Ref. spec Section 15064. Conn; plain end, solvent weld. Solvent weld cement to be

ASTM D2564, IPS 724 CPVC or approved equal. Ftgs; PVC, socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665. Valves: None Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (All sizes) Pipe: PVC; same as exposed. Conn; same as exposed. Ftgs; same as exposed. Valves: None Remarks:

1. HVAC equipment condensate drains shall be copper tube; ASTM B88, Type M, drawn.

Fittings shall be wrought copper or bronze, ANSI B16.22. Connections shall be solder type with threaded adapters for equipment connections where required. Products and fabrication shall be as specified in Section 15066.


Deleted: 3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC¶¶Piping Symbol/Service: RWP--Rainwater Pipe System--24¶

STD--Storm Drain¶¶

Section Break (Continuous)Test Requirements:¶

Medium: In accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code¶¶

Pressure: In accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code¶¶

Duration: In accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code¶¶Gasket Requirements:¶


Push-on/Mech Cpl: Nitrile or neoprene¶¶Exposed Pipe and Valves:¶ (See drawings for pipe size.)¶¶ (12" and smaller)¶

Pipe: PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D2665, Sch. 40. Ref. spec Section 15064. ¶

Conn; plain end, solvent weld.¶Ftgs; PVC, socket type, DWV,

ASTM D2665.¶¶

Valves: None¶¶¶Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves¶(See drawings for pipe size.)¶¶ (12" and smaller)¶

Pipe: Ductile iron; AWWA C151. Ref. spec Section 15062.¶

Conn; mechanical or push-on¶Ftgs; ductile iron, per spec Section

15062; ends to match pipe.¶¶

Valves: None¶¶Remarks:¶¶

Deleted: CD--Chemical Drain System--25¶

Deleted: VC--Chemical Vent¶

Deleted: Minnesota

Deleted: Minnesota

Deleted: Minnesota

Deleted: ¶Insulate all exterior piping per Section 15250.¶

Deleted:

... [11]



2. HVAC equipment condensate drains shall be insulated for condensation control. See

Section 15250.

**END OF SECTION**


Formatted: Indent: Left: 18 pt

Formatted: Centered

Deleted: ¶

Deleted: <#>Solvent weld cement shall meet requirements of ASTM D2564 and shall be IPS 724 CPVC or approved equal, suitable for sodium hypochlorite service.¶¶

Deleted: <#>Insulate VC piping from the fume scrubber (FS23001) outlet to the wall penetration per Section 15250.¶

Deleted:

Page 11: [1] Deleted 02/15/2008 4:55:00 PM

E. CHLORINE AND SULFUR DIOXIDE SYSTEMS – NOT USED F. STEAM SYSTEMS – NOT USED G. HYDRAULIC AND FLUID POWER OIL SYSTEMS – NOT USED H. POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS – NOT USED 3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PIPESPEC) Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes or types of service lines are specified on individual piping specification sheets (PIPESPECS). Piping services are grouped according to the chemical and physical properties of the fluid conveyed and/or by the temperature or pressure requirements. Each grouping of services (PIPESPEC) is identified by a piping system number. Piping services specified in the PIPESPECS and on the drawings are alphabetically arranged by designated service symbols as shown in Table A. Table A also indicates the system number, fluid category, and pipe marker background color of each service.

Page 11: [2] Deleted 12/18/2007 12:50:00 PM

HHWR Heating Hot Water Return

8 Water

HHWS Heating Hot Water Supply

8 Water

Page 11: [3] Deleted 10/24/2007 12:38:00 PM

IA Instrument Air 2 Air

Page 11: [4] Deleted 10/24/2007 12:38:00 PM

RWP Rain Water Pipe

24 Drain/Vent

Page 11: [5] Deleted 12/18/2007 12:52:00 PM

STD Storm Water Drain

24 Drain/Vent

Page 15: [6] Deleted 12/18/2007 12:54:00 PM

3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: HHWR--Heating Hot Water Return System--8 HHWS--Heating Hot Water Supply

Section Break (Continuous)

3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping System: 8 (continued) Test Requirements: Medium: Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.04 C. Pressure: 75 psig Duration: 120 minutes Gasket Requirements: Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar)

and neoprene binder Push-on/Mech Cpl: EPDM Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (2" and smaller) Pipe: Copper tube; ASTM B88, Type L, drawn. Ref. Section

15066. Insulation per Section 15250. Conn; solder type with threaded adapters for valves.

Insulation per Section 15250. Ftgs; wrought copper or bronze, ANSI B16.22. Insulation

per Section 15250. Valves: Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or equal. Insulate. Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or

equal. Insulate. Swing check; Crane 137, Lunkenheimer 230, or equal.

Insulate. (2 1/2" and larger) Pipe: Steel; ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B, black, no lining. Ref.

spec Section 15061. Insulation per Section 15250. Conn; butt weld, grooved mechanical joint coupling or

flanged. Insulate per Section 15250. Ftgs; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section

15061; ends to match pipe. Insulation per Section 15250. Valves: Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103. Insulate. Swing check; spring loaded per Section 15118. Insulate. Remarks:


Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph 15095-3.03.

Exposed piping, 2 1/2 inches and larger, has been designed using butt weld and flanged piping.

CONTRACTOR may substitute a Victaulic system with all specified anchors, guides and expansion joints. System shall be provided with Zero Flex and rigid couplings and cut grooved piping. Standard grooved type couplings to allow coupling flexibility may be provided where recommended by the manufacturer. Additional pipe hangers and supports shall be provided if recommended by the manufacturer.

Section Break (Continuous)

Page Break

Page 15: [7] Deleted 12/18/2007 12:55:00 PM

Pipe and fittings exposed to sunlight shall be painted.

Page 15: [8] Deleted 12/18/2007 12:56:00 PM

flanged for butterfly valves 3 inch and larger.

Page 15: [9] Deleted 10/24/2007 12:42:00 PM

(2 1/2" and larger) Valves: Butterfly; PVC Body, Asahi-America, Chemtrol, George

Fischer, or equal. Ref. spec Section 15104. Ball check; PVC body, Chemtrol, Asahi/America, George

Fischer, or equal with Viton seats and seals. Ref. spec Section 15120.

Page 15: [10] Deleted 12/18/2007 12:58:00 PM

1. Ball valves are not permitted for NAOCL or SPD service. 2. Insulate all exterior sodium hypochlorite (NAOCL) and sump pump discharge (SPD) piping

per Section 15250.

Page 19: [11] Deleted 12/18/2007 1:08:00 PM

3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: RWP--Rainwater Pipe System--24 STD--Storm Drain

Section Break (Next Page)

Test Requirements: Medium: In accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code Pressure: In accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code Duration: In accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code Gasket Requirements: Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene binder Push-on/Mech Cpl: Nitrile or neoprene Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size.) (12" and smaller) Pipe: PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D2665, Sch. 40. Ref. spec Section 15064. Conn; plain end, solvent weld. Ftgs; PVC, socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665. Valves: None Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves (See drawings for pipe size.) (12" and smaller) Pipe: Ductile iron; AWWA C151. Ref. spec Section 15062. Conn; mechanical or push-on Ftgs; ductile iron, per spec Section 15062; ends to match pipe. Valves: None Remarks: Insulate all exposed rainwater pipe (RWP) per Section 15250.

S. S. No. 5496 15064-1 Plastic Pipe

SECTION 15064

PLASTIC PIPE

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies chlorinated polyvinylchloride (CPVC) and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2466 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D2467 Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings


Reference Title

ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F402 Safe Handling of Solvent Cements and Primers Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F439 Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F441 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

B. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS:

1. The double containment piping system shall be a pre-fabricated system. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of three years experience manufacturing similar systems as that specified in this Section.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC PIPE A. PRESSURE PIPE: PVC material for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM D1785. Pressure rating for pipe shall be in excess of test pressure specified in Section 15050. Schedule 80 PVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467. PVC solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2564 and shall be IPS 724 CPVC or approved equal, suitable for sodium hypochlorite service. B. NONPRESSURE PIPE: 1. DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPE: PVC material for drain, waste and vent (DWV) pipe and fittings shall conform to Class 12454-B, ASTM D1784. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2665. Unless otherwise specified, connections shall be solvent weld. Connections to traps, closet flanges, and nonplastic pipe shall be with approved adapter type fittings designed for intended use. Solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet requirements of ASTM D2564 and shall be IPS 724 CPVC or approved equal, suitable for sodium hypochlorite service.


C. DOUBLE CONTAINMENT PIPING:

Double containment piping system shall be provided by Spears, Guardian (IPEX), or equal. Manufacturer is to provide all components required for a complete double containment piping system. Size of primary and secondary piping is indicated on the drawings. Primary pipe and fittings shall be as specified in paragraph 2.02.

Secondary piping shall be PVC for pipe and fittings and shall conform to ASTM D1784,

Class 12454-B. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 in accordance with ASTM D1785. Fittings shall be Schedule 40 in accordance with ASTM D2466, but do not need to be clear. PVC solvent weld cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2564 and shall be IPS 717 PVC or approved equal, suitable for sodium hypochlorite service. Primer shall be IPS Weld-On P-70 or approved equal. Interstitial supporting devices used to center and support the primary piping within the secondary containment piping shall be provided and installed at a spacing recommended by the manufacturer. Supports shall be designed to allow continuous drainage in the annular space to the leak detection/drain points. 2.02 CPVC PIPE CPVC material for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 23447-B. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM F441. Neoprene gaskets with push-on joints shall conform to ASTM F477. Schedule 80 CPVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM F439. CPVC solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet the requirements of ASTM F493 and shall be IPS 724 CPVC or approved equal, suitable for sodium hypochlorite service. Primer shall be IPS Weld-On P-70 or approved equal. 2.03 Interstitial Supporting Devices Interstitial supporting devices used to center and support the primary piping within the secondary containment piping shall be manufactured from Polypropylene Centra-Guide supports, according to ASTM and ANSI. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Manufacturer's certificates of compliance with the specified standards. 2. Manufacturer’s literature and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for

solvent weld cement. 3. Double containment piping layout drawings and catalog information

including details of pipe fabrications, pre-fabricated double containment fitting dimensions, starting and terminating connections, vent and drain details for secondary containment, valves, and accessories. Provide joint


details, method and locations of interstitial support, and all other pertinent technical data for piping system being provided.

4. Quality Assurance data for the installation of Solvent Weld PVC and CPVC Piping Systems for Sodium Hypochlorite including the following:

a. Certification of proper training for solvent cemented joint installation for PVC and CPVC pipe.

b. Certification of proper installation of PVC and CPVC pipe. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION PVC pipe shall be joined by means of socket fittings and solvent welding in conformance with ASTM F402. Solvent-cemented joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer's/supplier's instructions and recommended procedures.

All installation procedures shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specific recommendations. Splitting and re-welding of fittings shall not be permitted.

Connections to different types of pipe shall be by means of flanges, specified adapters or transition fittings. Where sleeve type couplings are used, both shall be uniformly torqued in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendation. Foreign material shall be removed from the pipe interior prior to assembly.

CONTRACTOR personnel that will prepare solvent cemented joints shall be qualified for such work according to procedures described in ASME B 31.3, Chapter VII for bonding of plastic piping. Bonding qualification procedure shall be as written and provided by the manufacturer.

For the double containment piping systems, the manufacturer shall provide a representative to provide site assistance to the CONTRACTOR’s personnel during start of installation. 3.02 TESTING Testing of plastic piping shall be as specified in Section 15050.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15066

COPPER PIPING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies copper piping, tubing, couplings and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ANSI B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ASTM B32 Solder Metal

ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBING Copper tubing shall be seamless copper, conforming to ASTM B88. Unless otherwise specified, copper tubing shall be Type L, drawn, where used in exposed service and Type K, annealed or drawn for buried service.

S. S. No 5496 15066-1 Copper Piping

2.02 COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING Unless otherwise specified, couplings and fittings for copper tubing 1/2 inch and smaller nominal diameter shall be compression type, brass or bronze, capable of holding the full bursting strength of the tubing; shall meet the requirements of ANSI B16.26; and shall be Swagelok, Gyrolok, or equal. Couplings and fittings for copper tubing larger than 1/2-inch nominal diameter shall be wrought copper or bronze, solder joint pressure fittings and shall conform to ANSI B16.22. 2.03 SOLDER Solder to be used in copper piping shall be ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sn95 or Silvabrite 100. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA CONTRACTOR's layout drawings and catalog data demonstrating compliance with this specification and giving full description of the copper piping shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. SOLDER JOINTS: All pipe and fittings to be jointed with solder shall be free from all burrs and wire brushed or steel wool cleaned. After cleaning, a paste flux shall be evenly and sparingly applied to the surfaces to be joined. Solder shall then be applied and flame passed toward the center of the fitting until the solder disappears. All excess solder shall be removed while it is still plastic. Absolutely no acid flux or acid wipe shall be used in making solder joints. B. TAKEDOWN COUPLINGS: Takedown couplings shall be screw union type and shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 15085-3.05. C. DIELECTRIC PROTECTION: Copper tubing or fittings shall not be permitted to come in contact with steel piping, reinforcing steel, or other steel at any location. Electrical checks shall be made to assure no contact is made between copper tubing and steel elements. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by such tests, the CONTRACTOR shall provide dielectric protection as specified in paragraph 15085-3.01 E.



3.02 INSTALLATION, CLEANING, DISINFECTION, AND TESTING The installation, cleaning, disinfection, and testing of copper piping shall be as specified in Section 15050.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15085-1 Piping Connections

SECTION 15085

PIPING CONNECTIONS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the following methods of connecting metallic piping: flanges, threading, mechanical couplings, equipment connection fittings, dielectric unions, and welding. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI Bl.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)

ANSI Bl.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series

ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

ANSI B31.1 Power Piping

ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators Qualifications

ASTM B98 Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes

ASTM F37 Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials


Reference Title

ASTM F104 Standard Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

ASTM F152 Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe

AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Size 4 in. through 144 in.

AWWA C219 Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe

AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints

AWWA M11 Steel Pipe-A Guide for Design and Installation

NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 FLANGE ASSEMBLIES A. FLANGES: 1. GENERAL: Flanges shall either be flat flanges or convoluted ring flanges as specified in the following paragraphs. 2. FLAT FLANGES: Cast iron flanges shall be faced in accordance with ANSI B16.1. Where companion flanges are used, the flanges on pipe shall be refaced to be flush with the companion flange face. Class 150 and Class 300 forged steel flanges shall be raised face conforming to ANSI B16.5. Lightweight slip-on flanges shall be plain face conforming to AWWA C207, Class B and ANSI B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, steel flanges shall be ANSI B16.5, Class 150 or AWWA C207, Class D. Class E AWWA flanges shall be provided where test pressure exceeds 175 psi. Plain faced flanges shall not be bolted to raised face flanges. 3. CONVOLUTED RING FLANGES: Convoluted ring flanges shall be ductile iron, forged steel or cast stainless steel, designed to bear on hubs welded to the pipe and shall be as manufactured by Improved Piping Products. The ENGINEER knows of no equal. The flange joints shall be rated for not less than 150 percent of the test pressures listed in Section 15050 and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B 16.5 and AWWA C207. The flange manufacturer shall be prepared to demonstrate, by certified pressure test that the flanges will meet these requirements.


B. GASKETS: Gasket material shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03. Gaskets for plain faced flanges shall be the full face type. Thickness shall be 1/16 inch for pipe 10 inches and less in diameter and 1/8 inch for pipe 12 inches and larger in diameter. Unless otherwise specified, gaskets for raised face flanges shall match the raised face and shall be 1/16 inch thick for pipe 3-1/2 inches and less in diameter and 1/8 inch thick for pipe 4 inches and larger. C. BOLTS: Flange assembly bolts shall be ANSI B18.2.1 standard square or hexagon head bolts with ANSI B18.2.2 standard hexagon nuts. Threads shall be ANSI Bl.1, standard coarse thread series; bolts shall be Class 2A, nuts shall be Class 2B. Bolt length shall conform to ANSI B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, bolts shall be carbon steel machined bolts with hot pressed hexagon nuts. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall be made of noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having the characteristics specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective coating. Where washers are required, they shall be of the same material as the associated bolts. 2.02 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS A. SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS: Unless otherwise specified, sleeve-type mechanical pipe couplings shall be Smith-Blair Type 411, Dresser Style 38, or equal, with the stop removed from the middle ring. Reducing couplings shall be Smith-Blair Type 415, Dresser Style 62, or equal. Sleeve-type flanged coupling adapters shall be Smith-Blair Type 913, Dresser Style 128, or equal. Insulating couplings shall be Smith-Blair Type 416, Dresser Style 39, or equal. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall be made of noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having the characteristics specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective coating. Where washers are required, they shall be of the same material as the associated bolts. Gaskets shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03 and AWWA C111. B. PLAIN END COUPLINGS: Plain end pipe couplings for pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller shall be Gustin-Bacon 200, Victaulic Style 99, or equal for Schedule 80 pipe and Gustin-Bacon 205, Victaulic Style 90, or equal for lighter weight pipe. Plain end couplings for pipe sizes 8 inches and larger shall be Gustin-Bacon 200, Victaulic Style 99, or equal. Unless otherwise specified, bolts and nuts shall comply with AWWA C606.


Gaskets shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03 and AWWA C606. C. GROOVED END COUPLINGS: Grooved end flexible-type couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 100, Victaulic Style 77, or equal. Grooved end rigid-type couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 120 Rigi-Grip, Victaulic Style 07 Zero-Flex, or equal. Flexible-type couplings shall be used for all piping greater than 12 inches in diameter; for pipe 12 inches in diameter and less in rack-mounted tunnel piping applications; and for grooved joints adjacent to pump or blower suction and discharge where grooved couplings are used for noise and vibration control. All other applications for piping 12 inches in diameter and less shall utilize rigid-type couplings. Grooved end flanged coupling adapters shall be either Gustin-Bacon 154, Victaulic Style 741, or equal. Snap-joint grooved end couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 115, Victaulic Style 78, or equal. Cut grooves are not permitted on fabricated or lightwall pipe. Unless otherwise specified, bolts and nuts shall comply with AWWA C606. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall be made of noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having the characteristics specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective coating. Where washers are required, they shall be of the same material as the associated bolts. Gaskets shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03 and AWWA C 606.

D. EQUIPMENT CONNECTION FITTINGS – NOT USED

2.03 GASKETS Gaskets designated in Section 15050 shall be as follows: 1. EPDM: ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer. 2. Neoprene: neoprene. 3. Nitrile: nitrile (Buna N). 4. Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene

binder; ASTM F104 (F712400), 2500 psi (ASTM F152), 0.2 ML/HR LEAKAGE FUEL A (ASTM F37).

5. PTFE bonded EPDM: PTFE bonded to EPDM in full-face gasket having

concentric-convex molded rings; Garlock Stress Saver 370 or equal. 2.04 THREAD Pipe thread dimensions and size limits shall conform to ANSI Bl.20.1.


2.05 DIELECTRIC UNIONS Dielectric unions shall be EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, or equal. 2.06 COATINGS – NOT USED 2.07 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Teflon expansion joints shall be molded TFE bellows and shall be Metraflex T-2, Garlock Style 215, Resistoflex R-6905, EGC Style M-150, or equal. Wetted materials shall be chemically compatible with up to 15 percent sodium hypochlorite. 2.08 PRODUCT DATA In accordance with Section 01300, the CONTRACTOR shall provide for each welder, a welder qualification certificate indicating the welder is certified for pipe welding in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel, Section IX. Each welder's certificate shall be provided to the ENGINEER prior to that welder working on the job. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING AND JOINTING Pipe cutting, threading and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. 3.02 PIPE WELDING Pipe shall be welded by ASME-certified welders using shielded metal arc, gas shielded arc or submerged arc welding methods. Welds shall be made in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31.1 for piping System 8 specified in Section 15050. Welds for piping systems not specified above shall be made in accordance with AWWA C206. 3.03 TAKEDOWN COUPLINGS Takedown couplings shall be screw unions, flanged or grooved end mechanical coupling type joints and shall be provided as specified. Flanged or grooved end joints shall be employed on pipelines 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger. Where piping passes through walls, takedown couplings shall be provided within 3 feet of the wall, unless specified otherwise. A union or flanged connection shall be provided within 2 feet of each threaded end valve.


3.04 FLEXIBILITY Unless otherwise specified, piping passing from concrete to earth shall be provided with two pipe couplings or flexible joints as specified on the buried pipe within 2 feet of the structure for 2-inch through 6-inch diameter pipe; within 3 feet of the structure for 8-inch through 24-inch diameter pipe; and within one and one-half pipe diameters of the structure for larger pipe. Where required for resistance to pressure, mechanical couplings shall be restrained in accordance with Chapter 13 of AWWA M11, including Tables 13-4, 13-5 and 13-5A, and Figure 13-20. 3.05 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS Where a copper pipe is connected to steel or cast iron pipe, an insulating section of rubber or plastic pipe shall be provided. The insulating section shall have a minimum length of 12 pipe diameters. Dielectric unions as specified in paragraph 15085-2.05 may be used instead of the specified insulating sections. Where copper pipe is supported from hangers, it shall be insulated from the hangers, or copper-plated hangers shall be used. 3.06 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION FITTINGS

Where shown, equipment connection fittings shall be provided between field piping systems and equipment inlet and outlet connections.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15095

PIPING APPURTENANCES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies pipeline thermometers, flow and level gages, pressure gages, strainers, steam traps, vents and drains.

B. EXCLUSIONS: Temperature, pressure and flow measuring devices used for instrumentation are specified in Division 13. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPELINE THERMOMETERS – NOT USED 2.02 FLOW AND LEVEL GAGES – NOT USED 2.03 PRESSURE DEVICES A. GAGE COCKS: Unless otherwise specified, gage cocks shall be Robertshaw 1303, Ashcroft 1095, or equal. The exposed threads of each gage cock shall be protected by a brass plug. All gage cocks to be used with sodium hypochlorite are to have wetted materials that are chemically compatible with up to 15 percent sodium hypochlorite. B. PRESSURE GAGES: Unless otherwise specified, pressure gage scales shall be selected so that the normal operating pressure falls between 50 and 80 percent of full scale, shall be 4 1/2-inch, 270-degree movement, 1/2-percent accuracy, full-scale, and suitable for bottom stem mounting. Gages shall have a 316-SS bourdon tube. All gages shall have a 300 series stainless steel case, shatterproof glass, and a 1/2-inch NPT bottom connection.

Pressure gages for air, gas, and low pressure services (0-10 feet) shall be premium grade, heavy-duty bourdon-tube units (bellow type for vacuum) with Delrin bushings and pinion, and stainless steel sector.

S. S. No. 5496 15095-1 Piping Appurtenances

Gages on liquid service shall be as noted above, except they shall be provided with an internal pulsation dampening system consisting of either a glycerin fill or a silicone fluid fill. Snubbers or orifices shall not be utilized. Gages shall be Ashcroft Duragauge Fig. 1279, Ametek 1981L, or equal.

C. DIAPHRAGM SEALS: Unless otherwise specified, seals shall be diaphragm type with 1/4-inch flushing connection, Type 316 stainless steel body and Type 316L diaphragm. Fill fluid shall be Silicone DC200 unless otherwise specified. Seal shall be Mansfield and Green Type SG, Ashcroft Type 101, or equal. The wetted materials of the seals to be used with sodium hypochlorite shall be chemically compatible with up to 15 percent sodium hypochlorite. All other materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel. D. PRESSURE SENSORS: Unless otherwise specified, pressure sensors (tubular chemical seals) shall be the in-line full stream captive sensing liquid type. Wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel. Flexible cylinder shall be Buna-N unless otherwise specified. Seals shall be rated for 200 psi with 5-inch SC hysteresis. Seals shall be Ronningen-Petter, Red Valve, or equal. Fill fluid shall be rated for a temperature range of -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Capillary tubing shall be armored stainless steel. Fittings shall be provided for vacuum filling of system. Systems that are not factory filled shall be vacuum filled in the field. Filling connections shall be soldered shut after vacuum evacuation and filling. 2.04 STRAINERS A. AIR STRAINERS: Unless otherwise specified, air and gas line strainers shall be Y-pattern, cast iron body, with 40 mesh Monel screens packed with Everdur wool. Bronze bodies shall be provided with copper piping. Air line strainers shall be fitted with a brass blowoff cock. Strainers shall be Mueller, Armstrong, or equal. B. WATER AND STEAM STRAINERS: Steam and water strainers shall be of Y-pattern, unless otherwise specified. Steam strainers shall have carbon steel body; water strainers shall have cast iron body. Bronze bodies shall be provided with copper piping. Strainers shall have 304 stainless steel screens and tapped and plugged blowoff connections. Screen perforations shall be 0.020 inch for steam service and 0.045 inch for water service. Strainers shall be Mueller, Armstrong, or equal.



C. BASKET STRAINERS: Basket strainers shall be cast iron or bronze, flanged, 200 PSIG construction, with removable top and lift-out perforated stainless steel baskets, equal to MUELLER Model 125F or equal. A plugged drain connection shall be included. Floor supports with bolt holes shall be provided on 4" sizes and up. 2.05 STEAM TRAPS – NOT USED 2.06 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 PIPELINE THERMOMETERS – NOT USED 3.02 GAGE TAPS Gage taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge of pumps, fans, compressors, vacuum pumps and blowers. Gage taps shall consist of a 1/4-inch gage cock attached by a threaded nipple to the pipeline, duct or equipment. 3.03 VENTS AND DRAINS Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points of each reach of pipeline where specified (refer to Section 15050). Air vents shall consist of bronze cock and copper tubing return. Air vents shall be taken to the nearest floor with cock mounted 4 feet above the floor. Drains shall be piped to a sump, gutter, floor drain or other collection point with a valve mounted 4 feet above the floor. Drain valves are specified in Section 15150. When drains cannot be run to collection points, they shall be routed to a point of easy access and shall have hose gate valve.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15096

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1--GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE:

This section specifies hangers and supports for all piping systems specified in Section 15050. This section does not include pipe supports for fire sprinkler systems, pipe anchors, guides or seismic restraints.

B. OPERATING CONDITIONS:

The hangers and supports specified in this section are provided to resist pipe loads occurring primarily in the downward (gravity) direction. For the purpose of pipe hanger and support selection, this section establishes pipe support classifications based on the operating temperatures of the piping contents. Pipe support classifications are as follows:

1. Hot Systems A - 1. 120 degrees F to 450 degrees F A - 2. 451 degrees F to 750 degrees F A - 3. Over 750 degrees F

2. Ambient Systems B. 60 degrees F to 119 degrees F

3. Cold Systems C - 1. 33 degrees F to 59 degrees F C - 2. -20 degrees F to 32 degrees F

C. HANGER AND SUPPORT SELECTION:

The CONTRACTOR shall cause the pipe hangers and supports to be designed by the design professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02 C. This provision, however, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for this portion of the work. Hanger and support selection shall be based on the following:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall select pipe hangers and supports based upon the pipe support classifications specified in MSS-SP 69 and the piping insulation thickness specified in Section 15250.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall review the piping layout in relation to the surrounding structure and adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the type of support to be used at each hanger point.

S. S. No. 5496 15096-1 Pipe Hangers and Supports

3. Hangers and supports shall withstand all static and specified dynamic conditions of loading to which the piping and associated equipment may be subjected. As a minimum, consideration shall be given to the following conditions:

a. Weights of pipe, valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended hanger components, and normal fluid contents.

b. Weight of hydrostatic test fluid or cleaning fluid if normal operating fluid contents are lighter.

c. Reaction forces due to test and operational conditions.

d. Reaction forces due to the operation of safety, relief, or other valves.

e. Wind, snow or ice loadings on outdoor piping.

f. Supports shall be designed to prevent transfer of the weight of piping, valves and piping appurtenances to equipment piping connections. All supports adjacent at equipment connections to piping systems shall have provisions for vertical and horizontal adjustment. Two flexible piping connections not less than one pipe diameter apart shall be provided between piping supports and any equipment piping connection.

4. Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe, tubing, or, where specified, the outside diameter of insulation.

5. Where negligible movement occurs at hanger locations, rod hangers shall be used for suspended lines, wherever practical. For piping supported from below, bases, brackets or structural cross members shall be used.

6. Hangers for the suspension of size 2 1/2 inches and larger pipe and tubing shall be capable of vertical hanger component adjustment under load.

7. The supporting systems shall provide for and control the free or intended movement of the piping including its movement in relation to that of connected equipment.

8. Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location, hanger components shall be selected to allow for swing. The vertical angle of the hanger rod shall not, at any time, exceed 4 degrees.

9. There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component of dissimilar metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when supporting copper tubing by use of copper-plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel hanger and support components.


10. Unless otherwise specified, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new piping.

11. Unless otherwise specified, pipe support components shall not be attached to pressure vessels.

12. Stock hanger and support components shall be used wherever practical.

13. See Drawings for pipe span and support rod size requirements.


A. REFERENCES:

This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title AISC M011 Manual of Steel Construction - 8th Edition

FEDSPEC WW-H-171e Hangers and Supports, Pipe

MFMA-1 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MFMA-101 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

MSS SP Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices


B. DESIGN:

The CONTRACTOR shall cause the design of pipe hanger and support systems to be developed by the design professional selected in accordance with Paragraph 15050-1.02 C. The pipe system drawings specified in paragraph 15050-2.04 shall show the hanger and support locations. The pipe hanger and support design drawings and calculations shall be prepared and signed by the design professional and shall bear the design professional’s registration seal.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Pipe hanger and support system drawings and calculations as specified in paragraph 15096-1.02 B.

PART 2-- PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

Standard pipe supports and components shall be manufactured by B-Line, Carpenter & Patterson, Kin-Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Pipe Shields Incorporated, Superstrut, Unistrut, or equal.

Pipe support components shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-69 and FEDSPEC WW-H-171e and governing state and local codes. In case of conflict, governing state or local codes shall be followed. Pipe hanger and support materials, design, and manufacture shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-58. Pipe hanger and support fabrication and installation shall conform to the requirements of MSS-SP-89. Metal framing system components shall conform to the Metal Framing Manufacturer's Association standard MFMA-1 and MFMA-101.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL:

All pipe supports will be located in areas that are subject to moisture or a corrosive atmosphere. All pipe hangers, supports, anchors, structural attachments, fittings, and accessories (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.) shall be made of stainless steel or fiberglass. All hangers, supports, anchors, structural attachments, fittings, and accessories (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.) located within the Disinfection Chemical Storage Building and within NaOCl containment areas in other locations shall be Hastelloy C or fiberglass.


2.03 THERMAL PIPE HANGER SHIELD

A. GENERAL:

Thermal shields shall be provided at hanger, support and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation. The shield shall consist of an insulation layer encircling the entire circumference of the pipe and a steel jacket encircling the insulation layer. The thermal shield shall be the same thickness as the piping system insulation specified in Section 15250. The standard shield shall be used for hot systems and the vapor barrier shield shall be used for cold systems. Stainless steel band clamps shall be used where specified to ensure against slippage between the pipe wall and the thermal shield.

B. STANDARD SHIELD:

1. INSULATION:

a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof b. Compressive strength: 100 psi average c. Flexural strength: 75 psi average d. K factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees F mean e. Temperature range: 20 degrees F to 500 degrees F

2. STEEL JACKET: Galvanized steel. Gage shall be the manufacturer’s standard supplied for the given pipe size.

3. CONNECTION: Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation. Steel jacket and insulation shall be flush with end.

C. VAPOR BARRIER SHIELD:

1. INSULATION:

a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof b. Compressive strength: 100 psi average c. Flexural strength: 75 psi average d. K factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees F mean e. Temperature range: 20 degrees F to 500 degrees F

2. STEEL JACKET: Galvanized steel. Gage shall be the manufacturer’s standard supplied for the given pipe size.

3. CONNECTION: Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation. Insulation shall extend 1 inch each side of steel jacket for vaportight connection to pipe insulation vapor barrier.

2.04 PRODUCT DATA

The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:


1. Design Professional’s monthly and final reports as specified in paragraph 15096-3.05.

PART 3--EXECUTION

3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS

The CONTRACTOR shall locate hangers and supports as near as possible to concentrated loads such as valves, flanges, etc. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within the maximum span lengths specified on the Drawings to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loads.

At least one hanger or support shall be located within 2 feet from a pipe change in direction.

For any valve 6 inches in size and greater, at least one hanger or support shall be located within 2 feet in either direction of the valve.

The CONTRACTOR shall locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment, tanks, etc., are substantially free from loads transmitted by the piping.

Where piping is connected to equipment, a valve, piping assembly, etc., that will require removal for maintenance, the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary supports shall not be necessary for this procedure.

Pipe shall not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC M011. Unless otherwise specified, there shall be no drilling or burning of holes in the building structural steel.

Hanger components shall not be used for purposes other than for which they were designed. They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes.

The CONTRACTOR shall install items to be embedded before concrete is poured. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is poured.

Embedded anchor bolts shall be used instead of concrete inserts for support installations in new concrete areas below water surface or normally subject to submerging. Otherwise, anchor bolts shall be provided in accordance with Section 05501.

The CONTRACTOR shall install thermal pipe hanger shields on insulated piping at required locations during hanger and support installation. Butt joint connections to pipe insulation shall be made at the time of insulation installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.



Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp edges.

Rollers shall roll freely without binding.

Baseplates shall be cut and drilled to specified dimensions prior to welding stanchions or other attachments and prior to setting anchor bolts.

3.03 ADJUSTMENTS

The CONTRACTOR shall adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation. Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Stanchions shall be adjusted prior to grouting their baseplates.

3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS

Anchor bolts in new concrete shall be cast in place. Refer to Section 05501.

3.05 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

The design professional retained by the CONTRACTOR under the provisions of paragraphs 15050-1.02 C and 15096-1.02 B shall inspect the pipe hangers and support systems at not more than weekly intervals during construction and furnish the ENGINEER with weekly reports. The design professional shall inspect the completed pipe hanger and support system before the OWNER assumes beneficial occupancy and provide written certification that the installation conforms to the design professional’s design. The certification shall bear the design professional’s registration seal and original signature.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15120-1 Ball Check Valves

SECTION 15120

BALL CHECK VALVES


A. SCOPE: This section specifies PVC ball check valves. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

The OWNER and ENGINEER believe the following candidate manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers’ standard equipment or products will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include Asahi-America, Chemtrol, and George Fischer, or equal.

S. S. No. 5496 15120-2 Ball Check Valves

2.02 MATERIALS Materials of construction shall be as follows:

Component Material

Body, Ball, End Connectors, Union Nut

PVC, ASTM D1784 Class 12454

Seat and O-Ring Viton

All materials shall be compatible for up to 15 percent solution of sodium hypochlorite. Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.03 MANUFACTURE A. BODY: Valve shall be solid thermoplastic construction with an elastomeric seat. Valve shall have single union or true union socket weld ends. Valves shall be rated at a minimum of 150 psi at 70 degrees F for valves up to 2 inches, and rated at a minimum of 100 psi at 70 degrees F for valves over 2 inches. There shall be no outside levers, weights, springs, dashpots, or other accessories. B. BALL: Ball is to be the only moving part. It shall unseat to permit flow in one direction and seal tightly against seat to prevent backflow. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s catalog information including dimensions, cross-sectional views, details of construction and materials list shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15127

BALL VALVES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies CPVC vented ball valves and electric actuators specifically designed for Sodium Hypochlorite service. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM F1970 Standard Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for use in Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems


The OWNER and ENGINEER believe the following candidate manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s

S. S. No. 5496 15127-1 Ball Valves

products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers’ standard equipment or products will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate valve manufacturers include Asahi-America, Chemtrol, George Fischer, or equal. Candidate electric actuator manufacturers include RCS MAR/DCR Series by Dresser, Inc., or equal.


Component Material

Body CPVC, ASTM F1970

Seals EPDM

All materials shall be compatible for up to a 15 percent solution of sodium hypochlorite. Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose.

2.03 MANUFACTURE The valve body shall be of solid thermoplastic construction and have true union socket weld ends. Valve shall have an energized seat that will provide automatic adjustment for wear and leak-free service at the lower pressure port. Ball shall contain an adequate vent to the higher pressure port.

Valve shall be rated at 150 psig at 70 degrees F. Motor operated valves shall be provided with mounting bracket to accept the motor operator

as specified in Division 16. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s catalog information including dimensions, cross-sectional views, details of construction and materials list shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. 2.05 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

A. General The electric actuator shall consist of a chemical resistant enclosure and exposed components

suitable for use in locations with up to 15% sodium hypochlorite. The actuator shall contain a single-phase, split-capacitor type electric motor, a high-efficiency gear train and a minimum of two


(2) single pole, double-throw (Form C) limit switches. Internal wiring shall be 18-AWG 600-volt UL/CSA-approved insulated wire that is terminated at a marked terminal block. A printed terminal identification strip shall be provided for ease in field wiring. Each actuator shall include a copy of the relevant wiring diagram and field installation instructions. The actuator housing shall have a suitably sized female NPT entry to facilitate the installation of conduit or cabling. The actuator shall be capable of operating in any mounting position or orientation. The actuator shall be supplied with local visual indication of valve position.

The actuator output shaft shall be corrosion resistant and suitable for use in locations with up

to 15% sodium hypochlorite. The enclosure shall be designed to meet NEMA 4X requirements. The external fasteners shall be corrosion proof FRP or Hastelloy-C. The actuator mounting surface shall permit 90º indexing to allow for efficient electrical conduit connections, with minimal interference from piping or structural components.

The actuator shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperature ranging from –40° to

+150° degrees Fahrenheit(+65ºC). B. Motor The AC motor shall be a fractional horsepower, permanent split-capacitor-type, electric

motor designed to operate on a single phase, alternating current power supply, 120VAC, 1-phase, 60HZ The motor winding insulation shall be class "B", as a minimum. A thermal overload protection device shall be imbedded in the motor for overload protection.

C. Gearing Reduction gearing shall be designed to withstand the actual motor stall torque. This gearing

shall be high efficiency, spur type and bearing supported. The gearing shall be manufactured of hardened alloy steel and permanently lubricated at the time of manufacture and not require additional field lubrication.

D. Limit Switches Two adjustable, cam-actuated, end-of-travel switches shall be provided to stop the actuator

at the ends of travel. These switches shall be of the snap-acting, single pole, double-throw (Form C) type rated to 250VAC. The limit switches shall be UL/CSA listed to carry a power load equal to or greater than the locked rotor current of the actuator. The actuator shall have a minimum of two (2) additional switches installed for additional feedback or interlock purposes; these switches shall be voltage free.

E. Manual Override The actuator shall be equipped with a manual override to permit operation of the valve in the

event of electrical power failure or system malfunction. The override device must be permanently attached to the actuator. When in manual operation, electrical power to the actuator motor will be automatically interrupted, or motor operation will be mechanically detached from output shaft



rotation. This feature is to insure the safety of the individual in the event that electrical power is restored during manual operation. The actuator shaft shall not be capable of electrical operation when the manual override is engaged. After manual operation, the override will be required to be placed in the electrical mode to allow for electrical operation.

F. Controls The actuator shall be provided with local control boxes or remote mounted control stations

with open and close pushbuttons and pilot lights and manual/auto selector switches for local operation. DeviceNet network communications interface cards shall be provided for each actuator. Controls shall conform to Division 13 and 16 requirements.

PART 3--EXECUTION

Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15139-1 Diaphragm Valves

SECTION 15139

DIAPHRAGM VALVES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies PVC diaphragm valves. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds


The OWNER and ENGINEER believe the following candidate manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers’ standard equipment or products

S. S. No. 5496 15139-2 Diaphragm Valves

will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include Asahi-America, Chemtrol, George Fischer, or equal.


Component Material

Body PVC, ASTM D1784

Diaphragm Teflon

All valves shall be compatible for up to a 15% solution of sodium hypochlorite. Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose.

2.03 MANUFACTURE The valve shall be weir-type. The valve body shall be of solid thermoplastic construction. All wetted parts are to be chemically compatible with the fluid being used. Resilient diaphragm shall provide bubble-tight sealing. Diaphragm shall be replaceable without disruption to the adjacent piping. Valve shall have true union socket weld ends and visual positioner indicator to determine diaphragm position.

Valve shall be rated at 150 psig at 70 degrees F. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s catalog information including dimensions, cross-sectional views, details of construction and materials list shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION

Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15150

SPECIALTY VALVES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies specialty valves which are auxiliary to process piping systems. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASME SEC VIII D2 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Pressure Relief Devices

ASTM A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEAR GATES – NOT USED 2.02 FLAP GATES – NOT USED 2.03 MUD VALVES – NOT USED

S. S. No. 5496 15150-1 Specialty Valves

2.04 COMBINATION TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES – NOT USED 2.05 HOSE VALVES Unless specified otherwise, hose valves shall be a brass angle valve, composition disc, Crane 17, Lunkenheimer 214, Powell 151, or equal with threaded nipple adapter for hose connection. 2.06 FLUSHING COCKS Flushing cocks shall consist of a DeZurik 159/118-S, Keystone Fig 541, or equal, neoprene-faced eccentric plug valve with a hose nipple adapter if required. Unless specified otherwise, flushing cocks shall be 1 inch in diameter. Flushing cocks for sodium hypochlorite service shall have a ball valve. All wetted materials of valve and flushing cock shall be chemically compatible with up to 15 percent sodium hypochlorite. 2.07 QUICK DISCONNECTS Quick disconnects shall not be disconnectable under pressure. Quick disconnects for air service shall be Swagelok, Tomco, or equal, and shall be 1/2 inch, unless otherwise specified. Quick disconnects for water service shall be EverTite Part B, Gate Part B, or equal, and shall be 1 inch, unless specified otherwise. Quick disconnects for sodium hypochlorite service shall be chemically compatible with up to 15 percent sodium hypochlorite. 2.08 STOP AND DRAIN VALVES Unless otherwise specified, stop and drain valves shall be Mueller H-10284, or equal. Drain valves for sodium hypochlorite service shall be diaphragm valves. All wetted materials of valve are to be chemically compatible with up to 15 percent sodium hypochlorite. 2.09 AIR RELEASE VALVES Air release valves are to be provided at the high points on NaOCl lines as shown on Drawings. Air release valves shall be “IPEX ¾” Xirtec 140 or equal. Body and piston shall be PVC, ASTM D-1784, Class 12454, with EPDM seal and seat. Air release valve shall be rated at 232 psi at 73 degrees F. Valve shall be of single union design with a hollow piston sealing mechanism. Valve shall open when air is in contact with the piston and close when liquid is in contact with the piston. Opening and closing of the valve shall not be affected by pressure.



2.10 BACK PRESSURE VALVES

Back pressure valves for sodium hypochlorite shall be Plast-O-Matic Series RVDT. Valve shall offer infinite adjustable relief settings from 5 to 100 psi. Body construction shall be PTFE to resist chemical deterioration. Wetted diaphragm is PTFE energized by non-wetted Viton (EPDM). 2.11 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION Specialty valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15250-1 Insulation for Exposed Piping and Equipment

SECTION 15250

INSULATION FOR EXPOSED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies insulation for exposed piping and related equipment and appurtenant surfaces. B. TEMPERATURE CLASSES: Insulation for exposed piping and equipment is classified for the following temperature ranges: low, medium, high, and very high. Low temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 100 to plus 100 degrees F. Medium temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 100 to 800 degrees F. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM C534 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C552 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

FEDSPEC L-P-535E Plastic Sheet (Sheeting) “Plastic Strip” Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid

ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Piping insulation shall be tubular type or the flexible blanket type. Insulation for valves, strainers, fittings, expansion joints, flanges and other connections shall be segmented sections, molded, or blanket type coverings of the specified type and thickness of pipe insulation, or the flexible blanket type. Equipment insulation shall be flexible blanket type or rigid board type cut to fit the surface. 2.02 INSULATION A. GENERAL: Low temperature class insulation shall be of the unicellular elastomeric thermal, cellular glass, or fiberglass type. Medium temperature class insulation shall be of the cellular glass or fiberglass type. B. UNICELLULAR ELASTOMERIC THERMAL TYPE: Unicellular elastomeric thermal type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C534, Type I. C. CELLULAR GLASS TYPE: Cellular glass type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C552, Type II.


D. FIBERGLASS TYPE:

Fiberglass type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C547, Type I, Grade 2.03 INSULATION JACKETS A. LAMINATED JACKETS: Laminated jackets shall consist of aluminum and white kraft paper. Jackets shall have a perm rating for water vapor transmission of not more than 0.02 in accordance with procedure A of ASTM E96. B. ALUMINUM JACKETS: Aluminum jackets shall be constructed of smooth finish aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209, alloy 5005, temper H16, with integral vapor barrier. Jackets shall be 0.016 inch thick. Sheet metal screws shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Jackets shall be secured with 0.020 by 3/4 inch type 304 stainless steel expansion bands. 2.04 INSULATION COVERS A. POLYVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC) COVERS: Polyvinylchloride covers shall be one piece, premolded polyvinylchloride conforming to FEDSPEC L-P-535E, Composition A, Type II, Grade E4. B. ALUMINUM COVERS: Aluminum covers shall be constructed of smooth finish aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209, alloy 5005, temper H16, with integral vapor barrier. Covers shall be 0.016 inch thick. C. SOFT COVERS: Soft covers shall be of the reusable type with TFE-coated fiberglass covers and liner. 2.05 SHIELDS Unless otherwise specified, thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided at pipe supports. Thermal hanger shields shall be as specified in paragraph 15096-2.03.


2.06 FLASHING Flashing shall include aluminum caps, sealant and reinforcing. Aluminum caps shall be 20 gage thick and shall be cut to completely cover the insulation. Sealants shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Reinforcement in flashing heated up to 370 degrees F shall be nylon fabric. Reinforcement in flashing for hotter surfaces shall be wire mesh or as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer and manufacturer’s type designation. 2. Samples, for each insulation material type, of typical jacket and closures for

fittings, valves and appurtenances. 3. Descriptive literature and catalog data for materials to be used showing

methods of installation. 4. Certification of ratings for water vapor transmission and puncture and

stiffness as specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Insulation shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Double layer insulation, where specified or required to achieve the specified surface temperature, shall be provided with staggered section joints. B. PIPE SUPPORTS AND SHIELDS: Unless otherwise specified, thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR and installed during pipe support installation. Where thermal pipe hanger shields are used, apply the following to all butt joints: 1. On hot pipe systems, the CONTRACTOR shall apply 3-inch wide vapor

barrier tape or band over the butt joints.


2. On cold water, chilled water, or refrigerant piping, the CONTRACTOR shall apply a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on all butt joints and seal the joints with a minimum 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band.

C. PROTECTION: Insulation and jackets shall be protected from crushing, denting, and similar damage during construction. Vapor barriers shall not be penetrated or otherwise damaged. Insulation, jacket, and vapor barriers damaged during construction shall be removed and new material shall be installed. D. PIPING INSULATION: 1. GENERAL: a. PIPE: Piping shall be continuously insulated along its entire length including all in-line devices such as valves, fittings, flanges, couplings, strainers and other piping appurtenances. Unless otherwise specified, piping insulation shall be provided with laminated jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. Insulation shall be butted firmly together and jacket laps and joint strips provided with lap adhesive. Jackets shall be provided with their seams located on the underside of pipe. PVC covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 A shall not be used with medium- or high-temperature class insulation. Removable flexible blanket-type insulation need not be jacketed. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Fitting, connection, flange and valve insulation shall be provided with covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04. Insulation shall be secured in place with 20-gage wire and a coat of insulating cement. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation and jackets. Covers shall be provided with their seams located on the underside of fittings and valves. 2. LOW TEMPERATURE CLASS: a. PIPE: Insulation shall have ends sealed off with a vapor barrier coating. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Except where soft covers are specified, insulation for pipe sizes 2 inches and less, shall be provided with rigid PVC covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 A. Covers shall be sealed at edges with vapor barrier adhesive. The ends of covers shall be secured with vinyl tape. The tape shall overlap the jacket and the cover at least 1 inch. Vapor barrier shall not be penetrated. Except where soft covers are specified, insulation for pipes 2 1/2 inches and larger shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 B. Covers shall be mechanically secured by corrosion-resistant tacks pushed into the overlapping throat joint.


3. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE CLASS: a. PIPE: Insulation shall have ends sealed with end joint strips and held in place by waterproof adhesive. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Except where soft covers are specified, rigid insulation shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 B. Covers shall be mechanically secured by corrosion-resistant tacks pushed into the overlapping throat joint. 4. OUTDOOR PIPING: a. PIPE: Rigid insulation shall be provided with aluminum jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 B. Flexible blanket-type insulation shall be designed for outdoor, weather-exposed service. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Rigid insulation shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 B. Flexible blanket type insulation shall be designed for outdoor, weather-exposed service. E. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSULATION: 1. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall fit the contours of equipment and shall be secured with 1/2 by 0.015 inch galvanized steel bands. Weld pins or stick clips with washers may be used for flat surfaces and spaced a maximum 18 inches apart. Joints shall be staggered and voids filled with insulating cement. Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall be provided with laminated jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. Unless specifically specified to be uninsulated, equipment connected to insulated piping shall be insulated. 2. OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: Insulation shall be provided with a coat of weatherproof mastic and a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into a wet tack coat. Seams shall overlap at least 2 inches. A finish coat of weatherproof mastic shall be provided. The total coating thickness shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch. 3. LOW TEMPERATURE CLASS: Insulation shall have joints, breaks, and punctures sealed in facing with fire-retardant vapor barrier adhesive reinforced with 4-inch tape. Insulation shall be provided with a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into a wet coat of fire-retardant adhesive. Seams shall overlap at least 2 inches. A finish coat of fire-retardant adhesive shall be provided. 4. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE CLASS: Joints shall be covered and cemented in place with 4-inch-wide strips of the same material as the laminated jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A.


F. FLASHING: Flashing shall be provided at jacket penetrations and terminations. Clearance for flashing shall be provided between insulation system and piping supports. A heavy tack coat of sealant shall be troweled over the insulation, extending over the jacket edge 1 inch and over the pipe or protrusion 2 inches. Reinforcement shall be stretched over the tack coat after clipping to fit over pipe and jacket. Clipped reinforcing shall be strapped with a continuous band of reinforcing to prevent curling. Sealant shall then be troweled over the reinforcement to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Aluminum caps shall be formed to fit over the adjacent jacketing and to completely cover coated insulation. Cap shall be held in place with a jacket strap. 3.02 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE The insulation dimensional tolerances shall comply with the specified standards. Equipment insulation shall match thickness of attached piping. The minimum insulation thicknesses, exclusive of jacket, shall be as follows:

Insulation thickness in inches for nominal pipe sizes

Piping servicea

Fluid temperature

range, degrees F

Runouts up to 2 inchesb

1 inch and less

1.25 to 2 inches

2.50 to 4 inches

5 and 6 inches

8 inches and larger

Heating:

HVAC Condensate Drain

55-120 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Plumbing:

CWd, HW 55-120 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ____________________ a See specification Section 15050. b Runouts to individual terminal units (not exceeding 12 feet in length). c Insulation thickness is to be determined by pipe size of secondary containment piping. d For condensation control. Unless otherwise specified, connected equipment shall be uninsulated.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15400

PLUMBING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies drains, piping, appurtenances and general requirements for plumbing systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

OPC Ohio Plumbing Code

1.03 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS The CONTRACTOR shall secure and pay for all permits for plumbing work as specified in Division 1. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange and pay for inspections required and shall deliver inspection certificates to the ENGINEER.

S. S. No. 5496 15400-1 Plumbing

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe connected. Cleanouts shall be provided with clamping collars where waterproofing membranes are located in the floor. Cleanouts located inside buildings shall be provided with nickel-bronze covers. Bronze plug with tapered thread shall be provided for cleanouts on pressurized systems. Cleanouts on chemical waste or drain lines shall be of the same material and type of joint as the pipe. B. CLEANOUT: Unless otherwise specified, cleanouts shall be Josam series 56010, J. R. Smith series 4020, or equal. 2.02 DRAINS – NOT USED 2.03 VALVE ACCESS COVERS - NOT USED 2.04 COUPLINGS, NIPPLES AND UNIONS Couplings and nipples shall be of the same material as the pipe on which they are used. Unions 2 inches and smaller shall be ground joint screwed pattern unions. Unions larger than 2 inches shall be flanged. Unions shall be packed with 1/16-inch thick rubber packing. Dielectric unions shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.05. 2.05 SINK HOSE BIBBS Sink hose bibbs shall be Acorn No. 8126, Chicago 387-LF, or equal. 2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS – NOT USED 2.07 SLEEVES – NOT USED 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be stainless steel. 2.09 PRODUCT DATA Brochures of plumbing equipment, including catalog data and installation information, shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.

S. S. No. 5496 15400-2 Plumbing

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Work shall be in accordance with the Ohio Plumbing Code. Plumbing shall be provided to avoid obstructions, allow 7.5-foot minimum headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear. No holes shall be made in structural members. Torn and pierced waterproofing shall be repaired. Fixtures, fittings, valves, and copper and brass items shall be wrapped with burlap or building paper. Wrapping shall be removed at completion of the work. B. VALVES AND ACCESSORIES: Valves shall be provided upstream of branches, apparatus and fixtures. Valves on branch lines and at distribution points shall be provided with a 2-inch heavy brass disc, stamped and stenciled with 1/4-inch high letters, stating portion of system controlled by valve. Valve locations shall be shown on record drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a chart of location and use of main valves. Adjustable shaft valve boxes shall be provided for underground valves. C. DIELECTRIC UNIONS: Dielectric unions shall be provided at connections between pipe or fittings of different material. D. ESCUTCHEONS: Escutcheons shall be provided where pipes penetrate finished walls, ceilings or floors. Escutcheons shall be securely mounted allowing clearance for expansion. E. PIPING: Piping shall be carried in chases or recesses where provided in walls, through floors and partitions, and over ceilings. Unless otherwise specified, piping shall not be run in floor slabs. Pipes shall not be supported by plumbing fixtures or equipment. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of bushings is not acceptable.

S. S. No. 5496 15400-3 Plumbing

S. S. No. 5496 15400-4 Plumbing

Unless otherwise specified, underground piping outside buildings shall have a minimum cover of 24 inches. Piping under buildings shall have a minimum clearance from structure of 12 inches. Hot and cold water piping shall be separated by at least 6 inches. 3.02 CLEANING AND FLUSHING Piping and equipment shall be cleaned and flushed in accordance with Section 15050.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15431-1 Emergency Eyewash and Shower Units

SECTION 15431

EMERGENCY EYEWASH AND SHOWER UNITS


A. SCOPE: This section specifies emergency eyewash and shower units for indoor use.

B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item No. Location No.

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Eyewash and Shower Unit

MLC-C3-33-0001

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 EYEWASH AND SHOWER UNITS Units shall be Haws 8336, or equal. Units shall be combination eye-face wash and drench shower, complete with 1-1/4” piping and 7” floor flange. Eye-face wash shall include stay-open type valve activated by push flag. Shower shall include stay-open type valve with rigid pull rod with triangle handle. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s catalog data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

With each fixture furnish and install an automatic flow switch, Dwyer “Flotect” Model or equal, 1-1/4” pipe size, vane operated to activate a single pole/double throw switch.

Provide tempered water blending system for each unit, Haws TWBS.SH, or equal, pre-

packaged system complete with inlet and outlet connections, mixing valve, outlet thermometer, pressure relief bypass, and optional corrosion-resistant fiberglass cabinet TWBS.CAB.

S. S. No. 5496 15431-2 Emergency Eyewash and Shower Units

PART 3--EXECUTION Install as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15440

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies plumbing fixtures, trim and fittings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. WORK: Work shall be in accordance with the Ohio Plumbing Code. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

OPC Ohio Plumbing Code PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 UTILITY SINKS

Utility sinks shall be Florestone Model PT or equal. Sinks shall be made of polypropylene or equal material suitable for sodium hypochlorite service.

S. S. No. 5496 15440-1 Plumbing Fixtures

S. S. No. 5496 15440-2 Plumbing Fixtures

2.02 HOSE REEL Hose reels shall be Ames True Temper Model # 2388310 or equal. Reels shall be equipped with a 5/8” hose cap for use with a 5/8” garden hose. The rack shall be made of polypropylene or equal material suitable for sodium hypochlorite service. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s catalog data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION Fixtures shall be provided plumb and level. Fixtures shall remain in manufacturer’s packaging until installation. Fixtures shall be provided with required holes for fittings and mounting hardware. Unoccupied fixture faucet holes are not acceptable. Exposed fixture setting bolts shall be fitted with china caps. Fixtures shall be supported in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Wall mounted fixtures shall be provided with brackets and anchorage. Drop-eared fittings shall be provided at fixture outlets and securely fastened to backing. Openings into pipes shall be capped during construction. Vitreous finished surfaces on lavatories, toilets, and sinks shall have heavy paper pasted thereon during construction.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15473-1 Gas-Fired Water Heaters

SECTION 15473

GAS-FIRED WATER HEATERS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies commercial water heaters with storage for domestic hot water applications. Units shall be designed to burn natural gas. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building water heater MLC-C3-26-0005 C. OPERATING CONDITIONS: Water heater shall be identified by their equipment numbers and designed for continuous duty under the following operating conditions:

Location No.

Btu/hr input

Usable storage, gallons,

minimum

Thermal efficiency,

percent, minimum

Operating temperature,

degrees F Type

MLC-C3-26-0005 75,000 74 80 120 Domestic hot water

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the document listed below. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document cites other standards, such standards are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization,


references to those document s shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are not replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, has been discontinued or has been replaced.

Reference Title

OPC Ohio Plumbing Code

ASHRAE 90.1b Thermal Efficiency and Standby Loss Requirements

1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Catalogue data in sufficient detail to verify compliance with this section.

3. Electrical and plumbing connections. 4. Dimensions and weights.



The OWNER and ENGINEER believe the following candidate manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers’ standard equipment or products will comply with the requirements of this section. Candidate manufacturers include Bradford White, Rheem, A.O. Smith, or equal. 2.02 EQUIPMENT Domestic water heaters shall have a 74 gallon, minimum, glass lined steel storage tank designed for 150 psi working pressure. Factory installed anode rods for cathodic protection shall be supplied with the unit. Water connections shall be brass nipples. Tanks shall be insulated with non-CFC injected foam with a minimum insulation value of R-16, and the heating element compartment shall be insulated with removable fiberglass for easy service access. A handhole cleanout and a bimetallic thermometer shall be provided on the tank. Manufacturer shall provide a 3-year warranty against tank failure. Water heater shall meet or exceed the Thermal Efficiency and Standby Loss Requirements of ASHRAE 90.1b. PART 3--EXECUTION Unit shall be plumbed and wired per manufacturer’s recommendations. In addition, the tank shall be seismically braced in accordance with local codes. The pressure relief valve and tank drain shall be plumbed to the equipment drain in accordance with the Ohio Plumbing Code.

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 15663-1 Split System Air Conditioning Equipment

SECTION 15663

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies packaged split system air conditioning units. The systems will be comprised of a compressor/condenser unit, coupled to a blower/coil unit provided as a single packaged system, or split system unit as shown on the drawings. Air handling units shall be located inside; all other equipment shall be outside. The unit blower shall operate continuously, with cooling provided as required by the control thermostat. B. TYPE: The compressor/condenser unit shall consist of direct driver reciprocating or scroll compressor, condenser fan and motor, condenser coil, controls, internal wiring, and electrical devices. The blower/coil unit shall consist of casing, blower fan and drives, evaporator coils, filter section, thermostats, and electrical controls. The unit shall be equipped with all accessories and controls required to provide a complete cooling, and ventilation package. C. EQUIPMENT:

Item Equipment DCSB MCC/Operator Room Air Conditioner

MLC-C3-25-0004

Primary Odor Control Building MCC Room Air Conditioner

MLC-OC-25-0004

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: All components shall be U.L. listed and conform to all applicable National Electric Code requirements. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI standards.


B. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: The air handler shall be designed for the following performance:

MLC-C3-25-0004 and MLC-C3-25-0005

1. Air flow rate, acfm 1200 2. Evaporator temperatures, degrees F

EDB 80 EWB 67

3. Indoor Coil Number of Coils 1 Approximate face area, sq. ft. 3.67 Rows 3 4. Indoor Fan Number of fans 1 Diameter, inches 10 Nominal HP 1/3 Nominal rpm 1080

The compressor/condenser shall be designed to comply with the following:

ACU-1 and ACU-2

1. Refrigerant compressors Number of units, minimum 1

2. Cooling capacity, Btuh

Sensible 23,000 Total 33,000 Cooling EER 12

3. Outdoor coils

Number of coils 1 Approximate face area, sq. ft 19 Rows 2

4. Outdoor fans

Number of fans 1 Nominal HP 1/6


Deviations from specified condenser criteria, required to achieve overall cooling performance shall be identified in the submittal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall comply with the requirements of Sections 01300 and 11000 and shall include the following: 1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all


2. Fan performance curves for the specified operation conditions. 3. The motor data required under Section 11060. 4. Full product information, including all appurtenances, to establish

conformance to these specifications. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

The OWNER and ENGINEER believe the following manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products, which will satisfy the requirements of this section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer's products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers’ standard equipment or products will comply with the requirements of this section. Candidate manufacturers include Trane, Carrier, AAON or equal, with field or factory modifications to achieve conformance to the specification. Blower coil units shall be horizontally oriented for horizontal entry return air and horizontal discharge of conditioned air.


2.02 EQUIPMENT FEATURES

A. CABINET: Cabinet shall be a one-piece welded assembly of 20 ga. or heavier galvanized steel.

Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned and coated with an epoxy resin primer and finished with an enamel finish. Hinged access doors shall have quick turn latches and shall be located for access to blowers, filters, main control panel, heater, evaporator, and condenser. Unit shall be insulated with mastic coated fiberglass. Unit shall be configured with the supply and returns as shown on the drawings. A mixing box shall be provided to allow outside air as well as return air to the unit. The CONTRACTOR shall provide dampers on the supply and return sections to provide accurate balancing of return and outside air quality.

The copper tubing refrigerant lines shall be coated with an epoxy coating. Refrigerant

lines shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. FAN:

The fan shall be a belt driven, double width, double inlet, airfoil or forward curved fan

with two outboard bearings. The blower assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Bearings shall be self-aligning pillow block type with a minimum rated average life of at least 100,000 hours. Drives shall be an adjustable pitch V-belt drive with a minimum service factor of 140 percent. Motors shall be heavy duty, high efficiency, TEFC, 3 phase, 1800 rpm with Class F insulation, mounted on a heavy duty slide base. The motor and blower assembly shall be mounted on a heavy duty steel frame supported by spring isolators. The blower shall be sized to operate at no greater than 90 percent of its maximum rpm.

C. EVAPORATOR COIL:

The evaporator coil shall consist of seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to

aluminum fins. The evaporator coil will be provided with thermostatic expansion valves, adjustable superheat controls, and external equalizers. The coil shall be factory pressure tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig. Evaporator coil shall be Heresite coated.

D. FILTERS:

Filters shall consist of an integral 2-inch, pleated fiberglass prefilter. Each filter will be

provided with a 0-1 inch W.C. manometer located on the unit and connected by tubing to the filter pressure taps.


E. THERMOSTAT:

A room thermostat shall be provided, mounted in the location shown and connected with factory specified wiring. The thermostat shall be suitable to control cooling from 65 degrees F to 90 degrees F.

F. CONTROLS:

The unit shall be furnished complete with all operational controls. Refer to specification section 15901 for all HVAC controls.

Unit controls shall be compatible with the additional controls required under

specification section 15901. 2.03 COMPRESSOR/CONDENSER A. COMPRESSOR: The units shall have a single-speed hermetic reciprocating or scroll type compressors with centrifugal oil pump and lubrication system. The units shall be provided with crankcase heater and well, high-strength, ring type suction and discharge valves. The compressor shall have low ambient lockout, overload protection, internal pressure relief, and vibration isolation mountings. Suction and discharge line piping shall include thermal expansion valve, service pressure ports, and filter dryer. B. CONDENSER COIL: The condenser coil shall consist of 3/8-inch O.D. seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Subcooling circuits provided as standard for each refrigeration circuit. Condenser coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested to 425 psig. The condenser coil shall be Heresite coated by dipping. Spray coating is not acceptable. C. CONDENSER FAN: Condenser fan shall be direct driven propeller fans with aluminum blades and zinc plated steel hubs. The fans shall be driven by 1100 rpm totally enclosed motors with permanently lubricated bearings and built-in thermal overload protectors. D. CONTROLS: The compressor/condenser shall be completely prewired in accordance with Division 16 requirements, and complete with the following to include but not limited to:

1. Magnetic contactors for the compressors and fans.


2. Cooling low ambient fan switches. 3. High and low pressure cutouts and reset relays. 4. All control circuitry transformers and fusing. 5. Cooling thermostat with fan switch and automatic switchover, to be

shipped separately for remote mounting. 6. Controls for lead and lag compressor, where applicable.

2.04 PRODUCT DATA In accordance with Section 01300, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the following additional information: 1. Operations and maintenance data. 2. Wiring information. 3. Training Certification Form 11000-B specified in paragraph 15663-3.03. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION The air conditioner shall be installed as shown in the Contract drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Mount thermostat at locations shown on drawings and wire to unit controls. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, the air conditioning unit shall be completely field tested to guarantee compliance with these specifications. 3.03 TRAINING The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of a factory trained instructor for the purpose of training the OWNER’s personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the air conditioning equipment and associated appurtenances. Training shall consist of a minimum of 4 hours addressing the theory of operation, testing, troubleshooting, and maintenance of all air conditioner equipment in this specification section. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 15850-1 Air Handling Units

SECTION 15850

AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies single zone, low or medium pressure direct fired heating and make up air units for heating and ventilating. Units shall be utilized to provide outside air ventilation to process areas within a Chemical Disinfection Storage Building located at the Mill Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant in Cincinnati, Ohio. The unit will be located outdoors and shall be located and configured as shown on the Drawings. Unit shall handle 100 percent outside air. Units shall include all filters, burners, fans, fresh air hoods, mounting curbs, and any other equipment specified herein. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

Chemical Disinfection Storage Building Air Handling Unit 1

MLC-C3-25-0003

C. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: 1. AIR HANDLING UNIT: Air handling units shall be designed to meet the following operating requirements:

Location No. Capacity, cfm

External static pressure, in,

w.c.

Approximate fan speed,

rpm Power,

hp Type

Furnace

Net heating capacity,

BTU/hr.1,2 MLC-C3-25-0003

3,200 1.2 1100 5 Direct Natural Gas

Fired Furnace

250,000

1. Gas train and furnace heating capacity shall be adjusted for elevation at the site. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES:


This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

AFBMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

AFBMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

AMCA Certified Ratings Program

ARI 410 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils

ARI 430 Central-Station Air Handling Units

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

UL 465 Central Cooling and Air Conditioners

ANSI Z83.4 Standard for Make-up Air Heaters B. COMPATIBILITY: Air handling units of a specific type shall be of a single manufacturer to assure compatibility and consistency of installation. Air handling units shall comply with ARI 430 and UL 465 standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include the following:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check


marks ( ) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Where applicable, a copy of the contract document control diagrams and

process and instrumentation diagrams relating to the submitted equipment, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required". Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.

3. Fan performance curves for the specified operating conditions. 4. Heating capacity at rated conditions. 5. Motor data form 11060-A as required under Section 11060.

6. Catalog dimensional data for the unit and all accessory components. 7. Gas train schematic, including gas service pressure requirements.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS It is believed the following candidate manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer's products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers' standard equipment or products will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include AAON, Cambridge, Reznor, Hartzell or equal.


2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Structural base Galvanized steel tube or channel

Fan housing Epoxy Coated Steel

Fan wheel Aluminum

Shaft Solid Steel

Furnace Burner Stainless Steel

Gas Burners Stainless Steel Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES A. FAN: Fan shall have a fully welded, DWDI wheel with backward inclined, airfoil or flat blades with one piece shaft. Fan shall be selected for stable operation and shall be v-belt driven. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly with motor. Maximum fan rpm shall be below the first critical speed, and operating rpm shall not exceed 85 percent of the fan’s rated maximum rpm. Fan motor shall be selected to allow a 10% speed increase without overloading the motor. All fans and motor assemblies shall employ spring type vibration isolators. Outside air inlet of the unit shall have a horizontal inlet damper with electric actuator (120 volt) interlocked to close when the fan is shutdown. B. BEARINGS: Fan bearings shall be self-aligning permanently lubricated ball bearings rated for a minimum AFBMA L-10 bearing life of 60,000 hours, respectively.


C. MOTOR AND DRIVE UNIT: The motor shall be Type 2 as specified in Section 11060. Motors 1 HP and larger shall be the energy-efficient type. Motor shall be mounted and isolated internally in the fan cabinet. Fan shall be provided with internal overload protection and a motor starter for external overload protection. V-belt drive shall be as specified in Section 11000. All belt driven fans shall be furnished with adjustable pitch sheaves and adjustable motor bases suitable for a plus or minus 10 percent adjustment in operating speed. D. HEATING SYSTEM: The burner section shall contain a burner constructed of rust resistant cast iron bodies drilled to discharge the fuel between diverging stainless steel mixing plates. Raw natural gas shall be delivered directly to the burner ports and shall be suitable for gas pressures between 0.25 and 5 psi. For gas pressures exceeding 14” w.c. an auxillary regulator suitable for 5 psig shall be provided. The entire burner assembly shall be mounted directly in the air stream being heated. The gas manifold shall be located in the control cabinet outside of the air stream. Units shall be supplied with a wide range burner with a modulating turndown ratio of 30 to 1. Profile plates shall be provided and sized to maintain the required velocity across the line burner in the range of 2,500 & 3,200 FPM. An observation port shall be located to provide a view of pilot and main flame. The operation of the burner shall be programmed through the flame safeguard with timed prepurge and flame sensing. Unit controls shall consist of a spark ignition system with flame rod sensing of flame, an adjustment high limit switch (factory set at 185ºF), flame safeguard with alarm contacts, ignition transformer, air proving differential switch, and modulating control system. The burner section shall be manifold individually to accomplish the desired capacity. Burners shall be precision-built, sturdy, compact and virtually maintenance free. Gas train shall consist of a main manual gas shutoff valve, a motorized electric main gas valve, a modulating gas valve, a manual pilot gas shutoff valve, a manual pilot gas pressure regulator, a pilot gas valve and an orificed needle valve. The gas valves shall be capable of operating to -40ºC. The anticipated gas pressure at the unit may reach 5 psi. The pressure regulating valve shall be capable of reducing pressure from high pressure conditions. The burner and gas train shall conform to IRI and FM requirements.

Combustion efficiency shall be suitable to meet all ANSI, local, state, and federal health and safety standards for carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, and unburned hydrocarbons.

The following gas train features shall be provided:

1. High pressure and low pressure gas switches 2. Interlock to exhaust fan 3. One to five psi high gas pressure regulator 4. Carbon monoxide detector 5. Fire stat set at 200 deg F A control contact shall be provided to interlock the make-up air burner to the room exhaust fan.


E. CASING:

Unit casing shall be 2” double wall fabricated of 18-gauge galvanized steel coated inside and out minimum of 3 mils thick Epoxy Powder Coat Finish with a 22-gauge solid galvanized steel liner designed for outdoor installation. Casing shall be leak tight against 3 inch negative pressure minimum or the maximum vacuum produced by the fan and reinforced to prevent vibration and air leakage. All unprotected metal and welds shall be factory coated. Unit shall be internally insulated with a minimum of 2-inch thick, 3 pounds per cubic foot, neoprene coated fiberglass thermal insulation. F. FILTERS: Filter sections shall have individual filter access doors and shall have inlet and outlet flanges with bolt holes compatible with unit accessories. Filters shall be 2-inch thick, pleated media, disposable type, meeting the fire resistance requirements of UL 900 Class 2, and size for no greater than 500 fpm face velocity. Filters shall be medium efficiency Camfarr 30/30 or equal. Pressure taps shall be provided to connect filter pressure gauges. G. ACCESS DOORS: Access doors shall be provided on all accessible sections of the makeup air unit. Access doors shall be of the same gage thickness and material as the surrounding unit casing. Doors shall be double wall and completely insulated between the interior and exterior walls with the same insulation used in the surrounding unit casing panels. Each door shall have a minimum of two stainless steel butt-type hinges and stainless steel ventlock high compression latches. All access doors shall be gasketed around their entire perimeter with neoprene/EPDM rubber bulb type gaskets. Doors shall swing open against the unit section’s pressure and have factory installed door tie backs. A rain drip-lip shall be provided above each access door on outdoor units. H. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Each makeup air unit shall be provided with a NEMA 4 and 12 weatherproof control panel built as an integral part of the unit. Panel shall be suitable to operate from a single 480V, single phase, 60 Hz power feed. Makeup air units shall be wired and tested at the factory before shipment. Wiring shall comply with the National Electric Code. All components shall be labeled and wire shall be numbered. The control panel shall contain the following equipment, which shall be as specified in Division 16 of this project manual; a three pole main power terminal, panel disconnect switch, starters, relays, contactors, three phase overload protection, fuse blocks with fuses, numbered terminal strip, a line voltage to 120 volt control transformer with primary and secondary control circuit switch. The control panel shall be provided with a flush mounted and wired non-fused disconnect switch, a 120 volt duplex receptacle, and clogged filter light for each filter bank. Inlet head shall be storm-proof weatherhead with bird screen. 2.04 CONTROLS


Refer to Section 15901 for HVAC system controls. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Applicable operation and maintenance information in accordance with Section 01730.

2. AFBMA bearing ratings for the fan and the motor at design conditions. 3. Dimensional drawings of air handling unit. 4. Heating system controls information. 5. Certification that the units have been tested and rated in accordance with the

applicable AMCA standard test code and certified ratings program. 6. NEC and UL labels.

2.06 SPARE PARTS One extra set of V-belts and one set of filters shall be provided for each air handling unit. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Air handling unit shall be installed as specified and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Piping and ductwork shall be connected to coils and air handling units through flexible connections. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, each air handling unit shall be completely field-tested and balanced in accordance with Sections 01660 and 15990 to guarantee compliance with these specifications.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15873

CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUST FANS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies roof mounted exhaust fans complete with fans, motors, dampers, curbs and accessories required for ventilation systems. The fan shall be fiberglass constructed for resistance to 15% sodium hypochlorite. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Location No.

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Exhaust Fan 1

MLC-C3-25-0001

Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Exhaust Fan 2

MLC-C3-25-0002

C. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: Fan motors shall be nonoverloading on all points of the operating curve. Fans shall be designed for continuous duty service and to comply with the following:

Equipment No.

Capacity, scfm

Static pressure, in.,

w.c.

Maximum motor

speed, rpm Motor HP

Wheel diameter,

inches Drive type Operating

voltage/phase

MLC-C3-25-0001

1600 0.25 1800 3/4 12 Belt 115/1

MLC-C3-25-0002

1600 0.25 1800 3/4 12 Belt 115/1

D. SOUND AND VIBRATION: Fans specified in this section shall operate at noise levels below 20 sones, as defined by AMCA Standard 300, and at tip speeds below 6000 fpm. -

S. S. No. 5496 15873-1 Centrifugal Roof Exhaust Fans


Reference Title

AMCA Standard 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating

AMCA Standard 300 Test Code for Sound Rating B. CERTIFICATION: Fans shall bear the AMCA rating seal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with


the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


instrumentation diagrams relating to the submitted equipment, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required". Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.

3. Fan performance curves for the specified operating conditions.

4. Motor data form 11060-A as required in Section 11060. 5. Full product information, including all appurtenances, to establish

conformance to these specifications. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Fans shall be weatherproof, curb mounted, centrifugal exhaust fans manufactured by Hartzell, or equal, modified to provide the specified features and to meet the specified operating conditions. 2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Hood Fiberglass

Fan wheel Fiberglass

Fan wheel shaft Stainless steel

Fan housing Fiberglass

Motor Cover Fiberglass

Fasteners Hastelloy C

Curb Fiberglass

Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The CONTRACTOR may propose alternative


materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. FAN: Fan housing shall be designed to provide easy access to the motor and fan unit. The fan inlet shall be provided with a venturi throat that is overlapped by the fan wheel. The unit shall be provided with a formed fiberglass venturi inlet and outlet. The fan wheel shall have forward curved, backward inclined or airfoil blades as provided standard by the manufacturer for the specified conditions. The wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. The fan wheel shaft, on belt-driven fans, shall be mounted in a heavy duty, permanently sealed, permanently lubricated, ball bearing pillow block. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum AFBMA L-10 bearing life of 100,000 hours. The entire drive assembly, as a unit, shall be removable through the support structure without dismantling the fan housing. Belt-driven fans shall be furnished with adjustable pitch sheaves and adjustable motor bases suitable for a plus or minus 5 percent adjustment in operating speed. The V-belt drive shall be as specified in paragraph 11000-2.03. B. MOTOR: Unless otherwise specified, motors shall operate at 1750 rpm and shall be Type 2 as specified in Section 11060. Motors 1 HP and larger shall be the high efficiency type. Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and shall be sealed from the exhaust airstream. Each fan housing shall contain a weatherproof motor shutoff switch, a wiring post and watertight conduit penetration. C. DAMPER: Each fan shall be provided with spring loaded barometric type, fiberglass backdraft dampers at the fan inlet. D. CURB: Each fan shall be provided with a prefabricated fiberglass mounting curb. The outer shell of the curb shall be formed with an integral cant strip and mounting flange. The corners shall be mitered and welded continuously to form a one-piece leakproof shell. The bottom of the curb shall have a baseplate which encloses the lower edge of the roof insulation. A damper holding tray shall be provided. Wooden nailing strips shall be bolted to the top of the curb shell to provide means for easily attaching the flashing material to the curb.



E. ACCESSORIES: All fans shall be provided with plastic coated steel bird screens. 2.04 SPARE PARTS One set of V-belts shall be provided for each belt-driven fan. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Motor data as specified in paragraph 11060-2.05. 2. Bearing ratings for the fan and motor at operating conditions. 3. Certification that the units have been tested and rated in accordance with the

applicable AMCA Standard Test Code and Certified Ratings Program. 4. Applicable operating and maintenance data in accordance with Section

01730. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Each fan shall be installed as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.02 FIELD TESTING Each fan shall be completely field tested to guarantee compliance with the project manual.

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 15901-1 HVAC Control Systems

SECTION 15901

HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies the control systems for heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install all equipment and ancillary devices to meet control functions described herein including electrical conduit and wiring as required for a complete and operating system. In general, all HVAC control system components required for a building or a specific system shall be enclosed in a single control panel in an MCC or control room located at the facility. Control systems shall be electric or electronic. Unless otherwise specified, remote thermostats, smoke detectors, and control panels are to be provided under this specification. Refer to Section 11000 for other requirements which may apply to this equipment. Refer to the electrical drawings and specifications for selected wiring schematics, relating to HVAC controls and control panels. All work under this specification shall be fully coordinated with all HVAC equipment provided. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Functional descriptions of the major control systems are provided for the CONTRACTOR’S reference. The information is provided to give the CONTRACTOR an understanding of each system's function and to aid him in the checkout of the installation. The CONTRACTOR shall not use the functional description as a basis for providing a system having equipment of lesser quality and/or of fewer component parts than specified. The CONTRACTOR shall not assume that the functional description is an attempt to set forth a complete system specification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The data required by Section 01300 shall be submitted for review in one complete package for equipment in this section in accordance with Section 01300. In addition the following information shall be included in the submittal:


referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked


to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Electrical control diagram drawings which show the interconnection of all

control components. 3. Where applicable, detail drawings showing panel layout and dimensions. 4. Any exceptions to the specified control strategies. 5. Diagram showing control panel terminal strips for wiring to all outside control

devices and panels. 6. Equipment control device data in accordance with Section 11010. 7. Manufacturer’s recommended storage, installation, and start-up procedures. 1.04 DESIGN AND SYSTEM OPERATION REQUIREMENTS The following general requirements apply to all HVAC control systems 1. All air moving devices shall be provided with differential pressure switches

across the fan to indicate proper operation. Make-up air units, air conditioners and exhaust fans shall include differential pressure gauges for fans and filters.

2. Smoke detectors shall be provided in all ACU and AHU supply ducting.

Smoke detectors shall be wired to indicate a separate alarm in the HVAC panel and at the Plant Control System. Smoke detector activation shall stop the air handling or air conditioning unit and associated exhaust fans.

3. All air handling units shall be provided with a freezestat to indicate a low

supply air temperature shutdown and alarm. Set freezestat at 38 degrees F.


4. Local panels shall be provided to indicate operating status of the HVAC equipment in the building and provide an interface to the Plant Control System signaling a common equipment failure and a common smoke detector output. The equipment failure output shall not be triggered by a “normal” equipment shutdown event. The equipment failure output and smoke detector output shall be dry contact and shall open upon equipment failure or smoke detection.

PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Materials shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. Each type of instrument, instrument accessory, and device shall be, as much as possible, by the same manufacturer throughout the work. 2.02 ELECTRICAL All internal logic within HVAC control panels shall be fully compatible and interface to control circuits as shown on control and logic diagrams. Isolated contacts shall be used for all interface to external circuits. 120V and 480V power wiring to HVAC equipment shall be provided under Division 16. Motor starters for 120V and 480V fans, excluding air handling units and air conditioning units, shall be provided under Division 16. Conduit and wiring for HVAC control systems shall be provided under Division 15, in accordance with the requirements of Division 16. Control for all HVAC systems shall be provided under Division 15. Additional conduit and wiring required for a complete and operating system but not shown on the drawings shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER.

A combination cooling and heating, low voltage room thermostat shall be provided for all air conditioning units as specified in specification section 15663, mounted in the locations shown. The bottom of the thermostat shall be mounted 5 feet above finished floor.

Make-up air unit’s thermostats shall be provided and shall allow continuous fan operation

with heating provided as demanded by space conditions. The thermostats shall be equipped with fan control on-off settings, digital temperature and set point indication, an indicator light for unit failure, and contacts necessary for unit operation as specified in this section. Contacts shall be rated for 24 volt AC. The thermostats shall be mounted in the locations shown and the bottom of the thermostat shall be mounted 5 feet above finished floor. The thermostats shall be suitable to control heating from 50 degrees F to 85 degrees F. All electrical installations shall meet the requirements of Division 16.


2.03 CONTROL PANELS A. GENERAL: Provide all control panels listed below. Provide additional control panels and control stations

as necessary to perform all required HVAC system functions. Equipment supplier’s thermostats and fan controls shall interface to the area HVAC panels as required. Control panel construction and components shall comply with the requirements of Section 11010. Control panel shall be NEMA 4X fiberglass construction. B. PANEL LIST:

Item Equipment No.

Chemical Disinfection Storage Building HVAC Local Control Panel

CDSB-HV-LCP

2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01730. 2. Spare parts listing. 3. Installation Certification Form 11000-A specified in Section 15901-4.01. 4. Training Certification Form 11000-B specified in paragraph 15901-4.02. PART 3--SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 3.01 GENERAL Heating, cooling and ventilating will be supplied by various HVAC equipment.

HVAC EQUIPMENT LIST

Equipment Location

No. Control Chemical Disinfection Storage Building Air Handling Unit

MLC-C3-25-0003

Remote thermostat. Heat temperature to maintain 55 deg F. Freezestat shutdown and alarm at CDSB-HV-LCP at 38 deg F.


HVAC EQUIPMENT LIST

Equipment Location

No. Control Chemical Disinfection Storage Building Exhaust Fan 1

MLC-C3-25-0001

Manual HAND-OFF-AUTO switch at CDSB-HV-LCP. Interlock fan with MLC-C3-25-0003 to operate simultaneously. Provide a run light at CDSB-HV-LCP.

Chemical Disinfection Storage Building Exhaust Fan 2

MLC-C3-25-0002

Manual HAND-OFF-AUTO switch at CDSB-HV-LCP. Interlock fan with MLC-C3-25-0003 to operate simultaneously. Provide a run light at CDSB-HV-LCP.

Chemical Disinfection Storage Building Air Conditioning Unit

MLC-C3-25-0004

Remote thermostat. Heat temperature to maintain 55 deg F. Cooling temperature to maintain 85 deg F room temperature.

Primary Odor Control Building MCC Room Air Conditioning Unit

MLC-OC-25-0004

Remote thermostat. Heat temperature to maintain 55 deg F. Cooling temperature to maintain 85 deg F room temperature.

1. HEATING: Heating provided by air handling units shall be controlled by a remote thermostat. When the supply air temperature is cooler than the setpoint, the gas valves shall open and modulate to maintain the setpoint temperature. 2. VENTILATION: Ventilation provided by the air handling units shall be 100 percent outside filtered air. 3. COOLING: Cooling provided by an air conditioning unit shall be controlled by a remote thermostat. 4. CONTROLS: Air temperatures downstream of the heating section in the air handling units shall be monitored by freezestats. If the supply air temperature drops below 38 degrees F, indicating a malfunction of the heating system; an alarm shall be signaled at the control panel and the air handling units and associated exhaust fans shall be deenergized. The supply air filters pressure drop on the air handling units shall be monitored with a differential pressure gauge located in the HVAC local control panels. Differential pressure gauges shall be provided with a high differential pressure alarm contact to energize a filter pressure drop alarm at the local control panel. The HVAC control panels shall be provided for control of all HVAC equipment associated with the different areas. Refer to paragraph 15901-2.03B for a list of control panels. Each control panel shall monitor the status of each piece of equipment controlled and shall be included with indicating lights displaying status and alarm for each piece of equipment controlled. Any equipment failure shall activate a single common alarm dry contact that will


signal an equipment failure to the Plant Control System. Also, the smoke detector shall activate a dry contact that will signal a smoke detection alarm to the Plant Control System. 3.02 CHEMICAL DISINFECTION STORAGE BUILDING HVAC

The Chemical Disinfection Storage Building is served by one air handling unit provided with a direct gas fired heater. Two roof mounted centrifugal exhaust fans operate to remove air from the process area. The air handling unit is provided with its own internal operating controls and with a remote thermostat. Controls shall include fan only (on-off-auto) and heating operation. A dry contact shall be provided to indicate “unit failure” to the Plant Control System. Heating setpoint shall be adjustable between 50 and 75 degrees F. Heating will be provided by the air handling unit to maintain a room temperature of 55 deg F. The exhaust fans will be interlocked to the air handling unit such that the exhaust fans and supply fan operate simultaneously. The AHU’s shall be sized for a minimum of 6 air changes per hour.

Air conditioning units will provide cooling for the Disinfection Chemical Storage Building

Electrical and Control Rooms and the Primary Odor Control MCC Room. The units will be split system type and will provided with internal operating controls and with a remote thermostat. The air handling units will be located indoors and the condensers will be located outside during summer conditions, cool air will be supplied.

A dry contact shall be provided to indicate “unit failure” to the HVAC panel and to the Plant

Control System.

PART 4--EXECUTION 4.01 GENERAL All HVAC controls shall be connected and installed at the locations shown and in strict accordance with the control manufacturer's recommendations and Section 01660. Manufacturer’s certifications (Form 11000-A, per Section 01999) that the equipment has been properly installed, aligned and tested and meets all requirements for satisfactory performance under the conditions specified. 4.02 TESTING, BALANCING AND TRAINING After the completion of installation, the control systems shall be completely field tested in accordance with Sections 01660 and 15990 to ensure compliance with the performance requirements as specified. A minimum of two (2) hours of training shall be provided in accordance with Section 01664. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.


**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 15940-1 Diffusers, Grilles, Registers and Extractors

SECTION 15940

DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND EXTRACTORS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies all diffusers, grilles, registers, and extractors associated with the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

All diffusers, grilles, registers, and extractors shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be of the size and capacity indicated thereon. Ratings and performance shall be in accordance with AMCA and ADC Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.


2. Catalog data and a complete description of the diffusers, grilles, registers,

extractors, and accessories.

3. Specified air quantity, blow length, static pressure design and acoustical performance.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A factory applied finish shall be provided as scheduled on the drawings. Color for diffusers installed in ceilings shall match ceiling tile color. Each unit shall be set flat against the room surface finish and shall have a felt gasket or seal to prevent air leakage. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be as specified on the drawings. All air outlets shall be factory painted and protected prior to shipment. Color shall be as selected by the ENGINEER. All diffusers, grilles, registers, and extractors shall be by a single manufacturer. 2.02 RECTANGULAR SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS (ELECTRICAL ROOMS AND CONTROL ROOMS)

A. MANUFACTURERS: Provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Krueger 3. Anemostat 4. Metalaire 5. APD 6. Or equal B. TYPE: Titus 300FS or similar model

1. MATERIAL: Aluminum 2. FINISH: Satin Aluminum 3. TYPE: Surface mounted or duct mounted removable grille with double

deflection blades spaced at 3/4 inches. Vanes shall be adjustable. Front blades shall be parallel to the short dimension. A gasket shall be provided at the frame for sealing. A 4 inch flanged drop frame shall be provided when duct mounted.

4. DAMPER: Provide a control damper as specified in Paragraph 15940-2.06.


2.03 RECTANGULAR RETURN/EXHAUST GRILLES (ELETRICAL ROOMS AND CONTROL ROOMS)

A. MANUFACTURERS: Provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Krueger 3. Anemostat 4. APD 5. Or equal B. TYPE: Titus 350FS or similar model

1. MATERIAL: Aluminum 2. FINISH: Aluminum 3. TYPE: Surface mounted or duct mounted removable grille with double

deflection blades spaced at 3/4 inches. Vanes shall be fixed. Front blades shall be parallel to the short dimension with 35 degree defelction. A gasket shall be provided at the frame for sealing. A 4 inch flanged drop frame shall be provided when duct mounted.

2.04 DAMPERS

Damper shall be all aluminum opposed blade type, unless otherwise noted. Damper shall be mounted on back of grilles. Dampers shall be furnished by the diffuser manufacturer and shall be operated by a key through the grille face. 2.05 EXTRACTORS

Extractors shall be furnished by the diffuser manufacturer and shall be operated by a No. 3 key through the grille face or a No. 2 adaptor for operation from a knob located at the ceiling or on the duct. The extractor unit shall be aluminum, finished with an air-dried phenolic corrosion resistant coating prior to installation.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

Diffusers, grilles, registers, and extractors shall be aligned, connected, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and with SMACNA Standards. Adjust diffuser vanes to maximize air coverage in the room being ventilated. 3.02 TESTING AND BALANCING

Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 15990.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 15944

LOUVERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies intake and exhaust air louvers and accessories. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Equipment No. Area serviced

LVR-1 Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Intake Louver 1

LVR-2 Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Intake Louver 1

C. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: 1. GENERAL: Louver shall be suitable for air supply or discharge service and shall be sized as specified.

Louver dimension, inches Equipment No. Width Height Depth

Minimum free area, sq ft Airflow, cfm Remarks

LVR-1 16 16 200 Combination

LVR-2 16 16 200 Combination 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCE: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

S. S. No. 5496 15944-1 Louvers


Reference Title

AA 45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AMCA Standard 500 Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters

ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes

ASTM C1071 Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material)

B. CERTIFICATION: Louvers shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for both air performance and water penetration. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Louvers shall be Airolite, Construction Specialties, Ruskin, or equal, modified to provide the specified features. 2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material

Blades ASTM B221, 6063-T52 extruded aluminum alloy

Frame ASTM B221, 6063-T52 extruded aluminum alloy

Fasteners Stainless steel or aluminum

Bird screen Aluminum

S. S. No. 5496 15944-2 Louvers

2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES A. BLADES: Blades shall be of the fixed, drainable type with interlocking blade braces to provide an uninterrupted horizontal line. Blades for all louvers shall be minimum 0.081 inch (12 gage) thick. Slideable interlocked mullions shall have provisions for expansion and contraction. B. FRAME: The frame shall be minimum 0.081 inch (12 gage) thick for all louvers. The louver frame shall be assembled by welding. The head, sill, and jamb shall be one-piece structural members and shall have an integral calking slot and retaining bead. C. SCREEN: The louver shall be furnished with a removable bird screen constructed of 1/2-inch mesh, 16-gage (0.063 inch) wire and secured within a 10-gage extruded aluminum frame. The screen shall be mounted on the interior louver face but independent of the louver. D. FINISH: Unless otherwise specified, all louvers shall receive a 215-R1, Aluminum Association Code AA-C22A41, clear anodized finish after assembly. Minimum coating thickness shall be 0.7 mil. 2.04 COMBINATION LOUVERS Combination louver shall be a stationary blade type louver and adjustable blade damper mounted together in a common frame. The stationary louver and frame shall be as specified in paragraphs 15944-2.02 and 15944-2.03. The adjustable blades shall be extruded 6063T5 aluminum, 0.125 inch (8 gage) thick. The adjustable blade linkage shall be concealed in the louver frame and located out of the air stream. Vinyl edge seals shall be provided on the damper blades. The adjustable blades shall pivot on 1/2-inch diameter aluminum or steel pins located at the blade ends and attached to the operator linkage. The pivot pins shall be mounted on self-lubricating nylon or oil impregnated bronze bearings. Jamb seals shall be provided to prevent air leakage around closed damper blades. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA Certified results of pressure drop test data and water penetration data for all louvers shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.

S. S. No. 5496 15944-3 Louvers

S. S. No. 5496 15944-4 Louvers

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION The louver shall be aligned, connected, and installed as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A bituminous coat shall be applied to all aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or masonry. 3.02 TESTING After completion of installation, all louvers with operating dampers, both manually and automatically operated, shall be completely field tested to ensure compliance with these specifications.

**END OF SECTION**

S. S. No. 5496 15990-1 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

SECTION 15990

HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the labor and services necessary to test, adjust, and balance under actual operating conditions air system design flow rates. Nothing herein shall be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of his overall responsibility of this portion of the work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

AABC National Standards for Total System Balance

ASHRAE 70 Standards--Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets

B. TESTING AGENCY: The CONTRACTOR shall procure the services of an independent air balancing and testing agency, belonging to the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental


Balancing Bureau (NEBB), to perform air balancing, testing and adjustment of systems. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the National Project Certification Performance Guaranty, issued to the testing agency by the AABC, as a part of the balancing report specified in paragraph 15990-2.01 B. C. CODES AND STANDARDS: The CONTRACTOR shall comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association: 1. “National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total

Systems Balance, Air Distribution,” AABC. 2. “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Environmental Systems”, NEBB. 3. “Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and

Inlets,” ASHRAE. Calibration and maintenance of instruments and accuracy of measurements shall comply with the requirements of the standards. 1.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Tests and adjustments shall include the complete testing and balancing of all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and necessary adjustments to the heating, air conditioning, and ventilating equipment to accomplish the specified design flow rates. Should any apparatus, material or work fail to meet the specified requirements in these tests, the CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and retest the apparatus, material, or work at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.04 BALANCING A. GENERAL: The CONTRACTOR shall review plans and specifications prior to testing and balancing the air systems. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a proposed approach and schedule for approval prior to the start of testing and balancing work. Characteristics to be tested and adjusted to conform to the values specified include the following: 1. Total airflow rates delivered by fans and air-handling units. 2. Flow rates at all grilles, registers, diffusers, supply and exhaust and return

ducts.


3. Distribution patterns at air outlets. 4. Capacity and temperature rise or drop across each heating and cooling coil. 5. Operation and modulation of each control valve. B. AIRFLOW RATE MEASUREMENTS: Airflow rates shall be obtained by adjustment of the fan speeds, dampers, or registers. All flow rates shall be measured with supply, return, and exhaust systems operating with heating and cooling coils wet, with filter bank resistance midway between the design values specified for clean and dirty filters, with auxiliary systems in operation and with all doors and windows closed. Flow rates at grilles, registers, branch ductwork and air distribution patterns shall be tested in strict accordance with ASHRAE Standard-70. 1.05 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Sample copy of each of the NEBB or AABC report forms. 3. Proposed approach and schedule of testing and balancing work as specified

in paragraph 15990-1.04 A. 4. A description of each air system including equipment to be balanced.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 BALANCING REPORT A. REPORT DATA: The final certified balancing report shall include the following actual field-verified data: 1. Equipment data a. Manufacturer and model, size, arrangement, class, location, and

equipment number. b. Motor horsepower, voltage, phase, and full load amperage. c. Fan cfm, static pressure, rpm, and operating motor BHP. 2. Duct size, supply or exhaust recorded cfm, velocity, pressure measurements,

location of all measurements. 3. Terminal units a. Manufacturer and model, supply or exhaust, location, and

identification number. b. Recorded and design cfm. c. Recorded and design noise levels and velocities, where specified. B. REPORT REQUIREMENTS: 1. Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person

who recorded the data and that of the supervisor of the reporting organization.

2. One certified organization shall perform the testing and balancing services. 3. All instruments which were used shall be listed and identified including the

last date each was calibrated. C. FINAL REPORT: Final report shall be submitted prior to CONTRACTOR’s request for final inspection. In addition to providing all specified data and information on applicable reporting forms, report shall include the following:


1. A schedule for testing and balancing parts of the systems which must be delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of the CONTRACTOR. Delayed work shall be completed as early as the proper conditions will allow, after consultation with the ENGINEER.

2. Due to delayed testing, reports shall be submitted after execution of those

services. 3. A total balance report shall include the following components: a. General Information and Summary b. Instrument Calibration c. Air Systems d. Temperature Control Systems e. Special Systems f. Sound and Vibration Systems g. Record drawings with specified and measured flow rates 2.02 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION At completion of testing and balancing, CONTRACTOR shall submit a Certificate of Compliance stating that each apparatus, device, outlet, and system has been tested, adjusted, and balanced so that it is operating in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and with the specified conditions. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. The balancing report specified in paragraph 15990-2.01. 2. Documentation to confirm compliance with codes and standards. 3. NEBB or AABC certification. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL The balancing agency shall conduct the above field tests in the presence of the ENGINEER. Following completion of testing and balancing the system shall be left in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.


3.02 PERFORMANCE OF WORK A. AIR SYSTEMS: 1. GENERAL: Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed after the system installation is complete but prior to acceptance of the project. 2. MEASUREMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall perform the following: a. Measure and adjust air supply and exhaust units to deliver at least

100 percent of the design air volume at 100 percent cooling. b. Measure static air pressure conditions on fans, including filter and

coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. c. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations, for

required air volume. Set a speed to provide air volume farthest distance from the fan without excess static pressure. Check draw amps of fans on initial start-up. If running amps exceed nameplate, shut off motor immediately, notify ENGINEER, and make necessary drive changes as directed.

d. Evaluate building and room pressure conditions to determine

adequate supply and return air conditions. Airflow rates shall be measured with supply, return, and exhaust systems operating with heating and cooling coils wet, with filter bank resistance midway between design values specified for clean and dirty filters, with auxiliary systems in operation. The deflection pattern of supply outlets shall be adjusted to ensure uniform air distribution throughout the space served. Airflow rates supplied, exhausted, or returned shall be within plus or minus 5 percent of the design values specified. 3. SYSTEMS TO BE BALANCED: Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Bulk Tank Room Disinfection Chemical Storage Building Control/MCC Room/Operator Room Primary Odor Control Building MCC Room 3.03 FINAL INSPECTION Following completion of testing and balancing, but prior to submitting the balancing report, the CONTRACTOR shall recheck, in the presence of the ENGINEER, random selections of data air quantities, air motion, and sound levels recorded in the report. Points and areas for recheck shall be


as selected by the ENGINEER. Measurement and test procedures shall be as approved for work forming basis of the report. Selections for recheck will not exceed 25 percent of the total tabulated in the report, except for special air systems, as described in Section 15891, which may require 100 percent recheck for safety reasons. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new reports submitted, and new inspection test made. Following acceptance of the reports by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall permanently mark all damper positions, circuit balancing valves, and balancing valves so that they can be restored to their correct position if disturbed at any time. If a balancing device is provided with a memory stop, it shall be set and locked. Devices shall not be marked until after final inspection.

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16000-1 General Requirements for Electrical Work


SECTION 16000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items are specified in other sections but are subject to the general requirements of this section. The electrical drawings and schedules included in this project manual are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations. B. DEFINITIONS: 1. ELEMENTARY OR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts. 2. SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM: A single-line diagram or one-line diagram shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded. 3. BLOCK DIAGRAM: A block diagram is a diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines. The system architecture drawings are considered block diagrams. 4. WIRING DIAGRAM OR CONNECTION SYSTEM: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram. 5. INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM: Interconnection diagrams shall show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors and auxiliary devices. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection diagrams.

Deleted: ONE

Deleted: one

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861

Deleted: July 2004 Bid Set



Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable. Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical. All devices and equipment shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with individual terminal identification. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on the interconnection diagram. Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown. Spare wires and cables shall be shown. 6. ARRANGEMENT, LAYOUT, OR OUTLINE DRAWINGS: An arrange-ment, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made. C. DRAWINGS: The electrical drawings and schedules included in this project manual are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations or configurations of equipment, raceway systems, or equipment terminations. Refer to all contract drawings and details in coordinating and completing the work. Installation details are included in the Drawings to describe the specific installation practices to be followed as work of this contract. Although the details are not specifically referenced from the plan drawings, the installation practices described by each detail shall be applied as generally described by the title of the detail. D. COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK: It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Provide offsets, transitions, fittings, and accessories which may be required but have not been shown because of the small scale of the Drawings. Verify all voltages and connection requirements for equipment furnished by others and wired as work of this contract. Arrange all electrical work and equipment to provide ready access to equipment for

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




inspection, operation and maintenance. Final locations of electrical control and safety devices on the process floor shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to installation. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of electrical work (equipment). 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) OBC Ohio Building Code

B. IDENTIFICATION OF LISTED PRODUCTS: Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed for the purpose for which they are to be used, by an independent testing laboratory. Three such organizations are Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). Independent testing laboratory shall be acceptable to the inspection authority having jurisdiction. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority, to undergo a special inspection at the manufacturer's place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price.

Deleted: U

Deleted: Uniform

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




C. FACTORY TESTS: Where specified in the individual product specification section, factory tests shall be performed at the place of fabrication and performed on completion of manufacture or assembly. The costs of factory tests shall be included in the contract price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Catalog cuts of equipment, devices, and materials requested by the

individual specification sections. Catalog information shall include technical specifications and application information, including ratings, range, weight, accuracy, etc. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which apply.

Catalog cuts shall be assembled in a folder or three ring binder. Each

folder shall contain a cover sheet, indexed by item, and cross-referenced to the appropriate specification paragraph.

2. A copy of this specification, with addendum updates included, and all

referenced and applicable sections with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (√) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

Deleted: 3

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




1.04 DRAWINGS Where the CONTRACTOR is required to provide information on drawings as part of the specified work, such drawings shall be prepared on 11-inch by 17-inch paper complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying project name, equipment and the scope of the Drawing. The title block of all drawings shall include the date and revision date, and a unique identifying drawing number. Drawings shall be prepared on a computer-aided drafting (CAD) system. All CAD drawing files shall be converted to AutoCAD Release 2006 file format and submitted on CD-ROM media. All CAD drawing files shall be updated to reflect final as-constructed conditions. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be sized and derated for the ambient conditions specified in Section 01800, without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances. B. AREA CLASSIFICATIONS: For the purpose of delineating the basic electrical construction materials and installation requirements for this project, areas of the project have been classified on the contract drawings as defined below. Electrical work within these areas shall conform to the requirements described below as well as the referenced code requirements. 1. GENERAL PURPOSE (NEMA 1): Areas requiring general purpose, NEMA 1, construction are indoor areas typically architecturally finished and occupied by plant personnel. 2. OUTDOOR AND CORROSIVE PROCESS AREAS (NEMA 4X): Areas requiring corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X, construction are all outdoor areas unless noted otherwise and all indoor corrosive process areas. Corrosive process areas typically contain wastewater or sludge pumping or piping systems and are subject to spills and washdown. Corrosive process areas shall also include those areas containing corrosive chemicals. All process areas associated with this project shall be considered corrosive areas and shall meet the NEMA 4X design requirements. The process areas located within the Disinfection Chemical Storage Building and within NaOCl containment areas in other locations shall be Hastelloy C or fiberglass. 3. HAZARDOUS AREAS (NEMA 7): Unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings, areas requiring hazardous location, NEMA 7, construction are classified as Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations per Articles 500 and 501 of the National Electrical Code. All electrical work in these areas shall be in conformance with the requirements of these codes. 4. PROCESS AREAS (NEMA 12): Areas requiring drip-proof, NEMA 12,

Deleted: .DXF

Deleted: 3.5-inch flexible storage media or

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




construction are indoor process and support system areas and are not typically subject to spills, direct washdown, or corrosive chemicals under normal operating conditions. C. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS: All construction materials, supports, anchors, structural attachments, fittings, and accessories (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.) located within the Disinfection Chemical Storage Building and within NaOCl containment areas in other locations shall be Hastelloy C or fiberglass. All conduit systems located within the Disinfection Chemical Storage Building and within NaOCl containment areas in other locations shall be type PGRS. Construction materials for all other areas, as required for each area classification, are listed in Table A-16000 below. Refer to the individual specification section for each component for material composition and installation practices.

Table A-16000

Area Classification

Component NEMA 1 NEMA 4X NEMA 7 NEMA 12

Rigid Conduit (exposed)

RAC RAC/PGRS

RAC/PGRS RAC

Rigid Conduit (concealed)

PVC4 PVC4 PGRS PVC4

Flexible conduit LFS LFS XPFS LFS Support Systems Galvanized

Steel Stainless

steel Stainless

steel Galvanized

Steel

Fastening hardware and hanger rods

Cadmium plated steel

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

Cadmium plated steel

Control Stations Gasketed Steel Stainless Steel/non-metallic

Cast ferrous Gasketed Steel

Enclosures Gasketed Steel Stainless Steel/non-metallic

Steel Gasketed Steel

Receptacles Surface General WP XP General Recessed General WP N/A General Switches Surface General WP XP General Recessed General WP N/A General

Deleted: 1

Deleted: 1

Deleted: 1

Deleted: GRS

Deleted: GRS

Deleted: 7

Deleted: GRS

Deleted: GRS

Deleted: GRS3

Deleted: GRS

Deleted: GRS

Deleted: 4

Deleted: 5

Deleted: Galvanized

Deleted: /fiberglass

Deleted: Galvanized

Deleted: 7

Deleted:

Deleted: /fiberglass

Deleted: 2,6

Deleted: 2,6

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 2

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




NOTES:

1. Enclosures, device boxes, control stations, and raceway systems shall be mounted with 1/4-inch (minimum) air space between the electrical system and supporting structure.

2. Conduit terminations to control stations, enclosures, and device boxes in NEMA

4X, 7, and 12 areas shall be made through threaded hubs. 3. Conduit encased in concrete or installed within floor slabs and walls in non-

hazardous locations shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC. Conduits installed in floor slabs and walls in hazardous locations shall be PVC coated rigid steel conduit. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer’s instructions. .

4. Flexible conduit RACESPEC LFS/XPFS shall be utilized for final connections to

equipment. 5. Control station and enclosure NEMA sealing ratings shall meet or exceed the

rating designated by the area classification. 6. Conduit installed in all exposed indoor locations, except for power wiring to/from

variable frequency drives, all 4-20mA current signaling circuits, and any conduit in contact with concrete, shall be rigid aluminum conduit (RAC).

7. Power conductors to and from adjustable frequency drives, all 4-20ma signal

conductors, all communication cables (including data highways), and conduits in contact with concrete shall be installed in PVC coated rigid steel conduit.

8. Exposed conduit shall be rigidly supported by stainless steel hardware and

framing materials, including nuts and bolts.

9. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be assembled using an anti-galling compound approved by the conduit manufacturer.

10. Conduit installed in all exposed outdoor locations shall be rigid aluminum.

Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel.

11. Nonmetallic conduit, which turns out of concrete slabs or walls, shall be

connected to a 90 degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before it emerges. When transitioning from concrete encased rigid steel conduit to exposed rigid aluminum conduit install an isolation coupling to eliminate dissimilar metal contact. A PCV coated rigid aluminum elbow may be substituted for PVC coated rigid steel elbow and coupling.


Formatted: Indent: Left: 36 pt,Hanging: 36 pt







Deleted: Rigid conduit concealed in framed walls, block walls, and ceiling spaces shall be RACESPEC type GRS. ¶¶4.

Deleted: Conduit encased in concrete ductbank or beneath slab on grade shall be rigid nonmetallic conduit, RACESPEC type PVC4 for circuits over 50V, and RACESPEC GRS for signal circuits less than 50V. Conduit concealed in concrete structures shall be RACESPEC type GRS

Deleted: 5

Deleted: <#>Conduit exposed outdoors shall be type PGRS.¶

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




12. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in place, or concreted into boxouts, with water stops on all sides of the boxout.

13. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls, which have one side

in contact with earth, shall be sealed watertight with special rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

14. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings to manholes.

Legend:

GRS, PVC4, RACESPEC designations for raceway types. PGRS, LFS, XPFS, Refer to specification 16110 RAC Rigid Aluminum Conduit WP Weatherproof XP Explosionproof N/A Not applicable

D. SEISMIC: Electrical equipment and supports shall be braced in accordance with the Ohio Building Code for the Seismic Zone of the region for which it will be installed. 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment shall be stored as specified in paragraph 01600-1.5. Equipment and materials to be located indoors shall be stored indoors and sealed with plastic film wrap. 1.07 ELECTRICAL NUMBERING SYSTEMS A. CABLE AND CONDUCTOR NUMBERS: Cables shall be identified with identical numbers at both ends. Cable tag numbers shall consist of the number shown on the wiring diagrams and on the cable schedule. Individual conductors shall be identified by color and/or number in accordance with Section 16120. Single conductors which are not part of a cable assembly shall be labeled with the number shown on the drawings. Wherever possible, the conductor number shall be the same as the terminal to which it connects. When factory-wired equipment has terminal numbers different than the conductor numbers shown on the control diagrams, both shall be shown on the interconnection diagram, and a copy of the interconnection diagram shall be fastened to the inside of the equipment




Deleted: .

Deleted: Uniform

Deleted: 1.

Deleted: 5

Deleted: 3.0 E

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




cabinet. 1.08 SALVAGE AND DEMOLITION A. GENERAL: Electrical salvage and demolition work shall be performed as described herein. The general extent of the salvage and demolition work is described on the contract drawings through the identification of major system components to be salvaged or demolished. This specification further defines the requirements of the salvage and demolition work; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspecting each of the facilities in which salvage and demolition work is specified for the purpose of determining the nature, condition and full extent of the work. B. SEQUENCING: The execution of electrical salvage and demolition work shall be sequenced in accordance with specification Section 01114, Work Sequence. C. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION: 1. POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT: Unless otherwise noted, existing power distribution equipment shall remain in place. Feeder circuits serving such equipment shall also remain in service. Feeder and branch circuit overcurrent devices in power distribution equipment serving process and mechanical equipment which is identified for removal and/or relocation shall remain in the power distribution equipment. Hole seals shall be installed in all openings in power distribution equipment created by the removal of a raceway system. Power distribution equipment identified for demolition shall be removed in its entirety. Conductor and raceway systems associated with the power distribution equipment shall also be removed, unless specifically noted otherwise. The OWNER shall be provided 14 days notification of intent to remove transformers. The OWNER reserves the right to salvage all liquid-filled or dry-type transformers. 2. POWER AND CONTROL CIRCUITS: Power and control circuits which serve process or mechanical equipment identified for removal and/or relocation shall be removed in their entirety to the source of power or control. Demolition shall include conductors, raceway systems, control stations, safety switches, support systems, etc., unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 3. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Motor control center units serving equipment which is identified for removal shall be removed from the motor control center and delivered to the OWNER. New blank doors shall be provided over all unused motor control

Deleted: in accordance with specification section 01046 and

Deleted: 0

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




center space. Existing motor control centers shall be reconfigured as indicated on the Drawings utilizing new components. 4. PROCESS CONTROL PANELS: Process control panels identified to be demolished shall be removed in their entirety. The OWNER shall be provided 14 days notification of intent to remove the equipment. The OWNER reserves the right to salvage all or part of the process control panels prior to demolition. All conductors, conduit and support systems associated with the process control panels shall be removed unless otherwise noted. 5. PROCESS EQUIPMENT: The OWNER shall be provided 14 days notification of intent to remove motors serving process equipment. The OWNER reserves the right to salvage all motors suitable for operation at 480V AC. D. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TO REMAIN INTACT: Electrical systems to remain intact for reuse shall be as identified on the Drawings. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the work. Standard production materials shall be used wherever possible. B. EQUIPMENT FINISH: Unless otherwise specified as manufacturer's standard finish, electrical equipment and materials shall be painted by the manufacturer as specified in Section 09900. C. GALVANIZING: Where specified, galvanizing shall be in accordance with Section 05910. 2.02 WIRE MARKERS Each power, control, and signal conductor with the exception of lighting and receptacle power conductors shall be identified at each terminal to which it is connected. Roadway lighting circuits shall be tagged identifying the panelboard and circuit from which it is served. All conductors, including spares, shall be identified in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.07 A. Conductors size No. 10 AWG or smaller shall have slip-on PVC cable marker sleeves. Conductors shall be identified in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.07A. The letters and numbers that identify each wire shall be machine printed on cable marker sleeves with

Deleted: -3.03 H

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




permanent black ink. The figures shall be 1/8 inch high. Cable marker sleeves shall be yellow or white, sized to fit the conductor insulation. Cable marker sleeves shall be Wieland, Z Series Slip-on PVC cable markers. Adhesive strips are not acceptable. Conductors No. 8 AWG or larger shall be machine printed, adhesive, self-laminating labels. Labels shall be designed to laminate the legend printed on the label with a film overwrap. The figures shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch high. Labels shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. Label material shall be polyvinyl fluoride film. Self-laminating labels shall be Panduit, Type EDP, or equal. 2.03 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be made from laminated phenolic plastic. The nominal size of the nameplates shall be 3/4 inch high by 2 inches long. Nameplates for equipment identification shall have black backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters. Nameplate engraving shall minimally identify the equipment or equipment served by the labeled device and shall be in complete English terminology as indicated on the Drawings. Nameplates for cautionary identification shall have red backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters. Descriptions given on the single-line diagrams and panel schedules shall be used as the basis for nameplate engraving. Additional engraving legend requirements shall be as defined below. If abbreviations are required because of space limitations, abbreviations shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to manufacture. Nameplates shall be fastened to the associated equipment with epoxy-based adhesive. Nameplates shall be provided for the following equipment. Additional engraving requirements shall be as indicated in parenthesis for each equipment type.

1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures

2. Electrical switchgear, and switchboards 3. Motor control centers (Motor control center designation, and

equipment served by individual cubicles) 4. Control panels 5. Control stations (indicating equipment controlled) 6. Power transfer equipment 7. Transformers 8. Disconnect and bypass switches 9. Local motor starters

Deleted: one

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




10. Variable Frequency Drives

2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS Terminal blocks shall be rated 600 volts AC, with minimum current rating to match largest conductor connected to the assembly. Terminals shall be provided with integral marking strips which shall be permanently identified with the connecting wire numbers. Terminal block assemblies shall be provided with mounting channels, barriers, and end clamps. Terminal blocks shall be constructed of nylon. Terminal blocks for power circuits and grounding shall be solderless box lug type. Terminal blocks for control and signal circuits shall be as specified in Section 13110 of these specifications. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information and product data specified under individual specification sections shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Applicable operation and maintenance information on an item-by-item

basis in accordance with Section 01730. Operation and maintenance information shall be provided at the time of equipment, device, or material site delivery, or at a certain stage of project completion as required by Section 01730, whichever is the earlier. Full-size drawings shall be reduced to 11 x 17 inches.

2. Record documents specified in Section 01730 and paragraph 16000-3.03. 2.06 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT Where existing equipment is being modified, CONTRACTOR shall provide materials matching existing manufacturer, model, and type. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. CONSTRUCTION: The work under Division 16 shall be performed in accordance with these specifications. In addition, all work shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 as currently adopted by the authority having jurisdiction, and all state and local codes.

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861




Unless otherwise detailed or dimensioned, electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with the work. Final locations of control stations, equipment control panels, safety switches, etc., shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to installation. Minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment made prior to installation shall be made at no cost to the OWNER. B. HOUSEKEEPING: Electrical equipment shall be protected from dust, water and damage. Motor control centers, switchgear, and buses shall be wiped free of dust and dirt on the outside kept dry and shall be vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of acceptance of the work. Before final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in Section 09900. Electrical equipment temporarily exposed to weather, debris, liquids, or damage during construction shall be protected as specified in Section 01600. 3.02 TESTING The tests specified in Section 16030 of these specifications shall be performed prior to energizing the electrical circuits. 3.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS Record documents refer to those documents maintained and annotated by the CONTRACTOR during construction, and include record drawings in accordance with Section 01700, and the following additional schedules, lists, and drawings: Interconnection Diagrams (16000, part 1) Original Submittal Drawings (16000, part 1)

**END OF SECTION**

Deleted: paragraph

Deleted: -3.03 H

Deleted: paragraph

Deleted: 5-3.0 F

Deleted: 2

Deleted: PAR

Deleted: 861


SECTION 16030

TESTING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the acceptance testing of electrical materials, equipment and systems. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, tools, material, power and other services necessary to provide the specified tests. CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of an independent electrical testing firm to conduct and perform the inspection and test procedures specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA), ATS-2003: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, copyright 2003. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of said document, the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1.03 APPLICATION Requirements for testing in accordance with this section are specified in this and other sections of Division 16. Where testing in accordance with this section is required, the required tests, including correction of defects where found, and subsequent retesting, shall be completed prior to energization of material, equipment or systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS CONTRACTOR shall submit the following information in accordance with Specification Section 01300: 1. Qualifications of independent testing firm in accordance with Section 3 of

ATS-2003. 2. Description of all test procedures. 3. Examples of test report forms for all specified tests including deficiency

report forms. 4. Final test report.

S.S. No. 5496 16030-1 Testing

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date recalibration is required. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided as specified herein and in accordance with specification Section 01300: 1. Deficiency Reports PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Electrical testing shall be comprised of test procedures which shall be conducted by the Installing Contractor and test procedures which shall be performed by an independent electrical testing laboratory. The test procedures to be conducted by the Installing Contractor are defined as those tests specified in paragraph 16030-3.04 C. All other tests as specified in paragraphs 16030-3.02 and 3.04 shall be conducted and performed by the independent testing firm meeting the qualification requirements of ATS-2003, Section 3. All inspections and tests shall be performed in strict conformance with the electrical acceptance test specifications in paragraphs 16030-3.02 and 3.03. The types of equipment and/or systems to be inspected and tested by the independent testing firm shall be as specified in paragraph 16030-3.04B. 3.02 NETA ATS-2003 TEST REQUIREMENTS A. MODIFICATIONS TO NETA ATS-2003 TEST REQUIREMENTS: NETA ATS-2003, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, shall be modified as described below and included as part of this section of the specifications. 1. ATS-2003, Section 4, paragraphs 4.1.5 and 4.1.7 shall be changed to read

as follows: "The CONTRACTOR shall . . ."

S.S. No. 5496 16030-2 Testing

2. ATS-2003, Section 4, paragraph 4.1.1 shall be changed to read as follows: "The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining an approved short circuit analysis and coordination study in accordance with Specification 16431 of the Contract Documents.

3. ATS-2003, Section 4, paragraph 4.2.3 shall be changed to read as follows:

"The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER 30 days prior to commencement of any testing."


"The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a written record of all inspection and test results and, upon completion of the project, shall assemble and certify a final test report. A copy of the preliminary test results shall be provided to the ENGINEER at the end of each day of testing."


"Furnish 6 copies of the complete report to the ENGINEER no later than 30 days after completion of all testing activities. Furnish 1 copy of the complete report in electronic format on CD-ROM media."

6. ATS-2003, Section 6 shall be deleted. B. OPTIONAL INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES: Inspection and test procedures identified as "optional" in Section 7 of ATS-2003 shall not be required as work of this specification except as specified below: 1. Perform all inspections and tests required by Section 7, paragraph

7.6.1.1.2.10. 2. Perform all inspections and tests required by Section 7, paragraph

7.6.1.2.2.11. 3. Perform all inspections and tests required by Section 7.16.1.1.1.6. 4. Perform all inspections and tests required by Section 7.16.1.1.2.4. 5. Perform all inspections and tests required by Section 9, paragraph 9.2.7.

S.S. No. 5496 16030-3 Testing

3.03 TEST DOCUMENTATION A. INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES DOCUMENTATION: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed description of the proposed inspection and test procedures to be performed by the independent testing firm. The inspection and test description shall also identify the test equipment required for each test. Test procedure documentation shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph 16030-1.04. B. TEST REPORT FORMS: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare test report forms for all test procedures as specified herein. Test report forms which appropriately and completely address the ATS-2003 test procedures shall include, but not by way of limitation, the following information: 1. Electrical equipment description. 2. Electrical equipment identification number. 3. Electrical equipment nameplate data. 4. Electrical equipment settings. 5. Time and date of test. 6. Ambient conditions at time of test. 7. Inspection checklist and results. 8. Test results. 9. Test equipment used. 10. Remarks regarding test procedure or results, unusual or noteworthy

observations, etc. 11. Name and signature of testing personnel. 12. Name and signature of test witness. Examples of all test report forms shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph 16030-1.04. Examples of test report forms for CONTRACTOR conducted electrical tests are included in Section 01999 of this these specifications.

S.S. No. 5496 16030-4 Testing

C. DEFICIENCY REPORTS: Deficiency reports shall be prepared for each item under test and submitted to the ENGINEER at the end of each day of testing. Deficiency reports shall identify the equipment under test by tag number and location and shall describe all deficiencies observed through the course of inspection and testing. 3.04 EQUIPMENT TESTING A. GENERAL: The inspection and test procedures described by ATS-2003, Section 7 shall establish the minimum requirements for electrical equipment inspection and testing. Additional test procedures, beyond the scope of ATS-2003, Section 7, are defined herein and shall be conducted as specified. B. INDEPENDENT TESTING FIRM TESTS: The following types of equipment and/or systems shall be inspected and tested by the independent testing firm: 1. Switchgear and switchboard assemblies.

2. Low voltage, three pole, power circuit breakers, 600 amperes and above. 3. Low voltage, three pole, insulated and molded case circuit breakers (225

ampere frame rating and larger). 4. Existing low voltage circuit breakers, 600 amperes and above, modified or

adjusted as work of this contract. 5. Instrument transformers and power metering systems. Digital metering

and protective systems shall be inspected and tested in accordance with system manufacturers instructions to verify system accuracy and performance.

6. Grounding systems. 7. Ground fault protection systems. 8. Low voltage motor control centers. 9. Low voltage motors, 200 horsepower and larger.

10. Low voltage, 480 volt AC, individual motor controllers.

S.S. No. 5496 16030-5 Testing

11. Fiber optic cables and terminations. 12. Thermographic surveys shall be performed on the following equipment: a. Low voltage AC power distribution and control equipment. b. Adjustable frequency drives. c. Dry-type transformers and panelboards.

d. 480 volt AC motors, 10 horsepower and larger. e. Transient voltage surge suppression systems.

C. INSTALLING CONTRACTOR TESTS: 1. INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS: Insulation resistance tests shall be performed on the following types of equipment or systems: a. LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Insulation resistance tests shall be performed on all 480 volt circuits. Power conductor and cable insulation tests shall be performed in accordance with ATS-2003, Paragraph 7.3.2. Tests may be conducted with motors and other equipment connected, except that solid state equipment shall be disconnected unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC. The ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured shall be recorded on the test form. Test results shall be evaluated against the results for cables of same type and length. Test results of less than 50 megohms shall be investigated. b. DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS: Insulation resistance tests shall be performed on all dry-type transformers 30KVA and above in accordance with ATS-2003, Paragraph 7.2.1.1.2 In addition, the secondary voltage shall be measured and recorded with the load disconnected. Insulation test results less than 500 megohms shall be investigated. c. TEST RECORDS: Insulation resistance measurements shall be recorded in a format similar to Forms 16000-A, B, and C, contained in Section 01999.

S.S. No. 5496 16030-6 Testing

2. MOTOR TESTS: The Installed Motor Test Form, 16000-B, contained in Section 01999, shall be completed for each motor after installation. Motors shall be tested and inspected in accordance with ATS-2003, Paragraph 7.15.1. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery as well as when they are connected. Motor running current shall be measured on each phase with the motor operating under load. Current imbalance shall not exceed the values tabulated below when the motor is operating at any load within its service factor rating and is supplied by a balanced voltage system. Current imbalance shall be based on the lowest measured value. Under 5 horsepower: 25 percent 5 horsepower and above: 10 percent Motors rated 120 VAC shall not be required to be tested. 3. PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKOUT: Functional testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Prior to functional testing, all protective devices shall be adjusted and made operative. Prior to energization of equipment, all system component tests shall be completed and the CONTRACTOR shall perform a functional checkout of the control circuit. Checkout shall consist of energizing each control circuit and operating each control, alarm or malfunction device and each interlock in turn to verify that the specified action occurs. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a description of his proposed functional test procedures prior to the performance of functional checkout. 4. WITNESSING: The ENGINEER reserves the right to observe all Installing CONTRACTOR testing. The ENGINEER shall be notified five (5) days prior to testing. 3.05 TEST RESULTS Minimum acceptable test values shall be as specified in this specification and ATS-2003. Where acceptable test values are not specified, the equipment manufacturers recommended test values shall be used. 3.06 EQUIPMENT ACCEPTANCE An acceptance sticker shall be placed on each equipment item which successfully passes all inspection and test procedures. Acceptance stickers shall not be placed on any equipment item until all identified deficiencies have been corrected by the CONTRACTOR and verified by the testing agency. The sticker shall indicate the testing agency’s name, the initials of the person who conducted the inspection and test, the date of the test, and the recommended date of retest.

S.S. No. 5496 16030-7 Testing

S.S. No. 5496 16030-8 Testing

3.07 TEST REPORT Test report shall be assembled as described in ATS-2003, Paragraphs 4.2.5 and 5.4 and submitted in accordance with paragraph 16030-1.04. Test results shall be organized by equipment item or system with individual, labeled tab dividers to identify each. All system deficiencies and non-compliant test results identified in the final test report shall be acknowledged as corrected by the responsible testing entity. **END OF SECTION**

SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE This section covers the furnishing and installation of electrical conduits, wireways, pull boxes, manholes, handholes, cable trays, fittings and supports. Raceways shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, power, control, instrumentation, signaling and grounding systems. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title AASHTO H20-44 Highway Bridges ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated ANSI C80.5 Rigid Aluminium Conduit ASTM A48 REV A Gray Iron Castings ASTM A193/A193M Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel REV C Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service ASTM F512 Smooth-Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings

for Underground Installation FEDSPEC WW-C-581E-77

Conduit, Metal, Rigid and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple, Electrical Conduit; Zinc Coated

S.S. No. 5496 16110-1 Raceways, Boxes, and Supports


Reference Title FEDSPEC W-C-1094A-75

Conduit and Conduit Fittings, Plastic, Rigid

JIC EMP-1 Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures NEMA TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC 40

and EPC 80) NEMA TC6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground

Installation NEMA VE1 Cable Tray Systems NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts

maximum) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit UL 651 Rigid Nonmetal Electrical Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Dimensioned outline drawings for manholes and handholes indicating all

interior and exterior appurtenances. 2. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY A. GENERAL: General requirements for raceway materials specified in this section are listed in the RACESPECS sheets at the end of this section. The type of raceway to be used for any given area and application shall conform with the requirements of paragraph 16110-3.01 in this section. 2.02 BOXES AND FITTINGS A. PULL BOXES AND WIRING GUTTERS: Indoor boxes larger than FD boxes shall be constructed of sheet steel and galvanized after fabrication. Similar enclosures outdoors shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors or removable covers. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and grounding shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have a rigid handle. Covers with any dimension greater than 3 feet shall be split. Pull boxes and wiring gutters shall be provided with NEMA classifications as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05. B. TERMINAL CABINETS: Terminal cabinets sealing rating and materials of construction shall be in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05. Cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors and adjustable terminal strip mounting accessories. Cabinets shall be provided with channel mounted terminal blocks. 2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS A. GENERAL: Raceway support system materials of construction, unless otherwise specified, shall be in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05 and as specified below. B. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: Framing channel shall be provided to support groups of conduit. Framing channel for PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be PVC coated framing channel, with stainless steel fastening hardware.


Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Individual conduit supports for PVC coated rigid steel conduit systems shall be one-hole PVC coated rigid steel pipe straps with clamp backs and nesting backs where required. C. CEILING HANGERS: Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable steel rod hangers as specified. Straps or hangers of plumber's perforated tape are not acceptable. Unless otherwise specified, hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193. D. SUSPENDED RACEWAY SUPPORTS (RACKS): Suspended raceway supports shall consist of concrete inserts, steel rod hangers, and jamb nuts supporting framing channel or lay-in pipe hangers as required. Hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193, unless otherwise specified. 2.04 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS Concrete used for duct banks shall be Class E with red oxide added as specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete specification section. 2.05 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE Underground marking tape shall be for location and early warning protection of buried power, control, and communications utilities. Tape shall be detectable by a pipe/cable locator or metal detector from above the undisturbed ground. Tape shall be nominally 6 inches wide with a type B721 aluminum foil core laminated between layers of 5 mil thickness polyester plastic. The plastic color shall be red. A warning shall be imprinted continuously along the length, with message reading similar to "CAUTION - STOP DIGGING - BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." Tape shall be Brady "Identoline"; Services and Materials "Buried Underground Tape"; Somerset (Thomas & Betts) "Protect-A-Line"; or equal. Underground marking tape for directly buried cables and conduits shall be 6-inch wide metallic lined tape with red polyethylene film on top and clear polyethylene film on the bottom. The message shall be clearly printed with black over red tape and shall read “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”. 2.06 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be provided for all terminal cabinets in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000


2.07 FIRESTOPS Firestops and seals shall be Flamemastic 77, Vimasco No. 1-A, or equal, and shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Products which are affected by water are not acceptable. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Unless otherwise specified, application of raceway types shall be in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05 of these specifications. General requirements for raceway installation shall be in accordance with Table A below and as specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, in 16000-1.05 Table A, unscheduled conduit shall be rigid aluminum conduit. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated or controlled equipment furnished by equipment supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after receiving and reviewing dimensions and coordinating locations with other trades. It is recognized that the raceway requirements indicated on the contract drawings are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and its interface with other work including utilities, and mechanical and structural work and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall provide offsets, transitions, boxes, fittings and accessories which may be required but have not been shown because of the small scale of the Drawings.


Table A

Location Application/Installation Condition Architecturally finished spaces - offices, restrooms, control rooms, etc.

Concealed in walls and ceiling spaces

General purpose, NEMA 1, process or utility spaces

Receptacle and light switch circuits concealed All other systems exposed

Noncorrosive, NEMA 12, and corrosive, NEMA 4X, process spaces

Exposed

Hazardous Spaces Exposed New slab on grade construction - conduits to equipment stubbed up more than 2 ft. from walls (or as directed by the ENGINEER.)

Concealed below slab

Exterior surfaces of new structures Concealed Water containing structures Exposed 3.02 CONDUIT A. GENERAL: The number of directional changes of a conduit shall be limited to 270 degrees in any run between pull boxes. Pull boxes shall be provided in conduit runs to limit the maximum conduit run to a maximum of 400 feet, less 100 feet or fraction thereof, for every 90 degrees of change in direction. B. INDOOR AND OUTDOOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS: In general, conduit systems shall be installed in accordance with Table A - 16110 unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. No conduit shall be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining conduit routing that conforms to the installation requirements set forth herein. Conduit installation shall conform to the requirements of the RACESPEC sheets and the following: 1. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpendicular to

structural members and surfaces.


2. Two or more exposed conduits in the same general routing shall be in parallel with symmetrical bends.

3. Exposed conduit shall be installed on supports spaced not more than 10

feet apart. 4. Where three or more conduits are installed in a parallel run, they shall be

spaced out from the wall using framing channel. 5. Where conduits are suspended from the ceiling, support systems shall

comply with the requirements of Section 16000. 6. Conduit rack supports shall be secured to concrete walls and ceilings by

means of cast-in-place anchors or framing channel concrete inserts. 7. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts,

and flues with temperatures higher than 90 degree C. 8. Conduits shall be installed between the reinforcing steel in walls or slabs

which have reinforcing in both faces. In slabs which have only a single layer of reinforcing steel, conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement.

9. Conduit shall be routed clear of structural openings and indicated future

openings. 10. Conduits through roofs or walls shall be flashed and sealed watertight.

Roof penetrations in MCC rooms and control rooms shall not be permitted, unless approved by OWNER.

11. Conduit shall be neatly grouted into any openings cut into concrete and

masonry structures. 12. Conduits shall be capped with thermoplastic plugs during construction to

prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water. 13. Conduit stubs for future use shall be terminated as indicated on the

Drawings. 14. Concealed conduit stub-up locations shall be determined from the

manufacturer's shop drawings. 15. Where the Drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired

hereunder, concealed portions of conduits for future equipment shall be provided.


16. Conduit installed horizontally shall allow headroom of at least 7 feet except where it may be installed along structures, piping, and equipment, or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained because of other considerations.

17. All conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated by fittings which

ensure that the NEMA sealing rating of the enclosure is not affected or changed in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05.

18. Underground metallic or nonmetallic conduit which turns out of concrete,

masonry or earth shall be connected to a 90-degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before emergence.

19. Conduit across structural joints where structural movement is allowed

shall have an O-Z "Type DX" or Crouse-Hinds "Type XD," bonded, weathertight expansion and deflection fitting of that conduit size.

C. UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEM: All excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to respective sections of these specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements: 1. All underground conduits not indicated otherwise on the Drawings shall

be concrete encased. All concrete encasement shall be formed and reinforced.

2. Concrete encased conduit shall have minimum concrete thickness of 2

inches between conduits, 1-1/2 inches between conduit and reinforcing, and 1-1/2 inches over reinforcing.

3. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall continue to

3 inches above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered. 4. Underground conduit bend radius shall be not less than 2 feet minimum at

vertical risers nor less than 3 feet elsewhere. 5. Where conduit and concrete encasement are terminated underground, the

conduit and reinforcing shall both extend at least 2 feet past the concrete. Conduits shall be capped and threads shall be protected. All steel surfaces shall be given two coats of thixotropic coal tar paint.


6. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have 2 feet minimum earth cover except where indicated otherwise.

7. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in place

or concreted into boxouts with waterstops on all sides of the boxout. Waterstops shall be as specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete section.

8. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls which have

one side in contact with earth shall be sealed watertight with special rubber gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

9. Conduits shall be thoroughly swabbed on the inside, immediately upon

completion of pouring concrete. After the concrete has set, and before backfilling, a mandrel having a diameter equal to the nominal conduit inside diameter minus 1/2 inch, and not less than 4 inches long, shall be pulled through each conduit. If the mandrel showed signs of protrusions on the inside of the conduit, the conduit shall be repaired or replaced.

10. All spare raceways shall be provided with a nylon pull rope. D. SEALING OF CONDUIT: Conduits passing from a hazardous or corrosive area into a nonhazardous or noncorrosive area, or between Class 1, Division 1 area and Class 1, Division 2 area shall be provided with a sealing fitting which shall be located at the boundary in accordance with NEC. Seal fittings for conduit systems shall be of the same materials of construction and finish as the associated raceway system. Sealing compound shall be hard type, UL listed for explosionproof sealing fittings. Sealing compound shall be non-hardening type for corrosive areas. E. CONDUIT SEPARATION: Signal conduits shall be separated from AC power or control conduits. The separation shall be a minimum of 12 inches for metallic conduits and 24 inches for nonmetallic conduits. 3.03 CABLE TRAY Unless otherwise specified, cable tray installation shall be as follows: 1. Cable trays shall be supported at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. 2. Corners shall be supported by two supports installed as close as possible to

the corner, with one support on each side of the corner.


3. All field cuts shall be treated with zinc rich paint. 4. Expansion joint splice plates shall be used to allow 1-1/2-inch free movement

between adjacent trays when crossing building expansion joint. 5. Cable tray shall have minimum clearance of 3/4 inch from concrete surfaces

and minimum spacing of 12 inches from other trays. The top of the tray shall be minimum 9 inches from the ceiling.

6. Signal cable trays shall be provided with covers. Covers shall be solid or

louvered type. 7. Each cable tray shall be provided with No. 2/0 AWG minimum bare copper

equipment ground conductor. The ground conductor shall be attached to the outside of each tray section using UL Listed bolted bronze or brass ground clamp.

8. Power cables shall be placed in cable trays not more than two layers deep. 9. Cables shall be arranged in trays so as to provide minimum cross-over. 3.04 RACEWAYS A. GENERAL: Raceways shall be field routed as required. General locations for electrical and instrumentation equipment are indicated on the electrical and instrumentation plans. Contractor shall determine final location of all equipment, prior to routing of conduit. The Electrical and Instrument Single-Line Diagrams include the major process instrumentation and electrical wiring and conduit sizing. B. CONDUIT RACEWAY SIZES: Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch for exposed and 1 inch for embedded raceway. The size and type of conduit shall be as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Any conduit or raceway system for a trade size is not indicated on the Drawings shall be sized by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the NEC, and shall be subject to the minimum sizes specified herein.


3.05 RACESPECS SHEETS The following RACESPECS are included in this section: GRS LFS PGRS PVC4 WW TRAY XPFS


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: GRS Description: Rigid Steel Conduit Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6 Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside.

Smooth finished surfaces. Minimum size: Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch for exposed, 1 inch

for embedded, encased, or otherwise inaccessible. Fittings: Hubs: Threaded and of cast ferrous alloy construction,

electrogalvanized, insulated throat, bonding locknut. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene "O" ring and shall provide a watertight connection. O-Z Gedney, CHM-XXT, or equal.

Unions: Electrogalvanized ferrous alloy type Appleton UNF or

UNY, Crouse-Hinds UNF or UNY, or equal. Threadless fittings are not acceptable.

Boxes: Indoor noncorrosive Type FD cast ferrous for all device boxes (NEMA 1 and 12) and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. NEMA

12 welded steel 6 inches square and larger. Door shall have hinges with clamp locks.

Outdoor and corrosive Type FD cast ferrous for all device boxes (NEMA 4X) and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. NEMA

4X stainless steel nonmetallic for 6 inches square and larger.

Hazardous: NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: GRS (continued) Elbows: (3/4" thru 1-1/2") Factory fabricated or field bent. (2" thru 6") Factory fabricated only. Conduit Bodies: (3/4" thru 4") Malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise

noted. Neoprene gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for all conduit entrances. Covers shall be fastened with screws.

(5" and 6") Electrogalvanized iron or cast iron box. Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight

and shall be provided with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall be neoprene and shall allow for 3/4-inch movement in any direction.

Installation: Rigid steel conduit shall be made up tight and without

thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions. Steel conduit shall be supported away from the structures using hot-dip galvanized malleable iron straps with nesting backs.

Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a

threaded hub with a grounding bushing. Exposed male threads on rigid steel conduit shall be

coated with zinc-rich paint.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: LFS Description: Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit Application: Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or

adjustment. Compliance: UL 360 Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive

convolutions securely interlocked and jacketed with liquidtight plastic cover.

Minimum size: 3/4 inch Fittings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut with

cast-in lug, brass grounding ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral and O-ring seals around the conduit and box connection and insulated throat. Forty-five and 90-degree fittings shall be used where applicable. Fittings utilized in areas classified as NEMA 4X shall be of copper-free aluminum construction.

Installation: The length of liquidtight conduit shall not exceed

36 inches. Final connection to instruments requiring withdrawal for maintenance or calibration shall allow the removal of the instrument from the process without disconnection of raceway or conductors.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: PGRS Description: Rigid Steel Conduit, Corrosion-Resistant, Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Coated Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6 Finish: PGRS shall be hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit, to

which a minimum 40-mil thick PVC coating has been bonded to the outside of the conduit. A 2-mil coat of urethane coating shall be bonded to the inside. Coating shall be free of pinholes. Bond strength shall exceed the tensile strength of the PVC coat. Elbows shall be factory made and coated.

Minimum size: 3/4 inch Fittings: Similarly coated to the same thickness as the conduit and

provided with type 316 stainless steel hardware. Conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by the same company.

Hubs: Hubs for connection of conduit to junction, device, or

terminal boxes shall be threaded and made of cast ferrous alloy. Hubs shall have the same PVC coating as the conduit. The hub shall have and insulating grounding bushings. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene "O" ring and shall provide a watertight connection.

Boxes: Nonhazardous: NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic. Hazardous: NEMA 7 cast ferrous. Manufacturers: PVC coated conduit shall be by Robroy Industries,

Occidental Coating Company, or equal.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: PGRS (continued) Installation: Plastic coated conduit shall be made up tight, threaded,

and installed using tools approved by the conduit manufacturer. All conduit threads shall be covered by a plastic overlap which shall be coated and sealed per manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe wrenches and channel locks shall not be used for tightening plastic coated conduits. Damaged areas shall be patched, using manufacturer's recommended material. The area to be patched shall be built up to the full thickness of the coating. Painted fittings are not acceptable.

PVC coated conduit shall be supported away from the

structure using PVC coated framing channel, or one-hole PVC coated rigid steel pipe straps with clamp backs and nesting backs.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: PVC4 Description: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, heavy wall thickness for

direct bury (below building slabs only), or concrete encasement.

Compliance: NEMA TC2, UL 651 Construction: Schedule 40, high-impact, polyvinylchloride (PVC) Minimum size: 3/4 inch exposed; 1 inch embedded or encased Fittings: PVC solvent weld type Installation: Joints shall be made with standard PVC couplings. PVC

conduit shall have bell ends where terminated at walls.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: TRAY Description: Cable Tray, steel, ladder type with rungs and side rails.

Bottom to side rail connections shall be positive mechanical joints to assure lateral and longitudinal stability.

Compliance: NEMA VE-1 Loading and deflection requirements: The trays shall be designed and constructed to support a

uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds per linear foot with a maximum deflection of 0.57 inch when tested as a single 10-foot span, simple beam.

Dimensions: 3 inch minimum interior depth. 4 inch maximum outside

depth. 24 inch minimum width. Tray components shall be fabricated to a 1/16-inch tolerance.

Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside.

Smooth finished surfaces. Accessories: Fittings, barriers and covers shall be of the same

materials, finish and construction as the straight trays. The minimum radius of side rails on horizontal elbows, vertical risers, tees and crosses shall be 24 inches except where specified otherwise.

Application: As indicated on the Drawings.


3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: WW Description: Wireway and Auxiliary Gutter, flanged, oiltight type with

hinged covers Compliance: JIC EMP-1 Minimum size: 8 inch by 8 inch Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside.

Smooth finished surfaces. Application: As indicated on the Drawings.



3.05 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC) Raceway Identification: XPFS Description: Explosionproof Flexible Steel Conduit Application: XPFS Conduit shall be used for final connections to

motors and other equipment subject to vibration or adjustment in Class 1 Division 1 hazardous areas. Final connection to instruments requiring withdrawal for maintenance or calibration shall allow the removal of the instrument from the process without disconnection of raceway or conductors.

Compliance: XPFS shall be suitable for use in Class I, Division 1,

Groups C and D hazardous areas as specified in the NEC and shall be watertight.

Minimum size: 1/2 inch **END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16120-1 Wire and Cable

SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies conductors, wire, and cables rated 600 volts used for power, lighting, receptacle, signal, and control circuits. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft ASTM B33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical PurposesICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire NEMA WC7 Cross-Linked-Thermosetting Insulated Wire and Cable for

the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) UL 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables


1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Catalog cuts showing general information for all conductors, wire, and

cable. 2. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. UNSCHEDULED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Where not scheduled nor specified on the Drawings, conductors and cables shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the particular equipment served with the minimum size as specified in paragraph 16120-2.03. Unscheduled conductors shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC "Type E," unless otherwise specified. B. CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC): General requirements for conductors and cables specified in this Section are listed on CABLESPEC sheets in paragraph 16120-3.07.


2.02 COLOR CODING A. CONTROL CONDUCTORS: Multiconductor control conductors shall be color coded per ICEA. Single-conductor control conductors shall have the following colors for the indicated voltage:

120V Power (AC) Black Control (AC) Red Neutral White Ground Green Foreign Voltage (DC) Blue/White Foreign Voltage (AC) Yellow

Power (DC) Blue Control (DC) Violet

B. POWER CONDUCTORS: Multiconductor power conductors shall be color coded per ICEA. Single-conductor power conductors shall have the following colors for the indicated voltage:

480V 208/120V Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red Phase C Yellow Blue Ground Green Green Neutral White White

Conductor colors for 120 volt AC uninterruptible power supply systems shall be red with white tracer for phase conductor and gray for neutral conductor. Cables sized No. 4 AWG and larger may be black with colored 3/4-inch vinyl plastic tape applied at each cable termination and in pull boxes, handholes and manholes. Tape shall be wrapped with 25 percent overlay to provide 3 inches (minimum) of coverage. C. SIGNAL CONDUCTORS: Unless otherwise specified, signal cable conductors shall be color coded black and white for pairs or black, white, and red for triads. Each conductor shall be numbered.


2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE, 600 VOLT A. SINGLE CONDUCTOR: Minimum conductor size shall be 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and 14 AWG for control circuits. Provide solid conductors CABLESPEC "Type F" for lighting and receptacle circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors CABLESPEC "Type E" for sizes 8 AWG and larger. All conductors used for control, signal, and indication shall be stranded. Single conductor cable shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC "Type E" for the following applications: 1. 208/120 volt AC power and control circuits 2. 24 volt DC power and control circuits 3. 480 volt AC power circuits

B. MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE: Multiconductor cable shall be used for power and control circuits routed in cable tray. Cables shall be UL labeled, Type TC, designed for cable tray installation in accordance with NEC 340. Multiconductor power and control cable with cable designations “3C#12 1#12G, 4C#12 1#12G, etc.”, shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC “Type C” or "Type G" unless otherwise specified. Multiconductor power cable shall contain three or four conductors, as specified, plus an equipment grounding conductor. Unless otherwise specified multiconductor control cable shall be size 14 AWG. 2.04 SIGNAL CABLES A. GENERAL: Signal cable shall be provided for instrument signal transmission and other circuits as specified. Circuit shielding shall be provided in addition to cable shielding. Circuits for type a and b signals specified in paragraph 13000-1.01 C.9 shall be provided in compliance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations. Single circuit signal cable shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC "Type H" or "Type K" unless otherwise specified. Cable designations "1-TP-#16W/SH” or 1PR#16SH" and "1TR#16SH" shall refer to CABLESPEC types "Type H", twisted pair and triad, respectively. B. COMMUNICATION, PAGING, AND SECURITY SYSTEM CABLES: Communication, paging, and security system cables shall be as specified in their respective specification sections.


2.05 PORTABLE CORD Portable cord shall be provided in accordance with NEC Type "SO" heavy duty oil resistant, unless otherwise specified. Cords shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 2.06 SPLICING AND TERMINATING MATERIALS Connectors shall be tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application. Connectors shall be tin-plated high conductivity copper. Connectors for power cables sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be nylon self-insulated, ring tongue or locking-spade terminals. Signal and single or multiconductor control conductors connected to terminal blocks, process controller input/output systems, and field devices and instruments shall be terminated with crimp-type conductor terminal pins. Bus tap connectors for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger shall be one-hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole or four-hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors are not acceptable. In-line splices and taps shall be used only where specified, or by written consent of the ENGINEER. When used, they shall be of the same construction as other connectors. Splices shall be compression type, made with a compression tool die approved for the purpose, as made by Thomas and Betts Corp., or equal. Splice shall be covered with a heat-shrinkable sleeve or boot. Motor connection kits shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and a high dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and contamination. Motor connection kits shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations. Connection kits shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances. 2.07 CORD GRIPS Cord grips shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings to attach flexible cord to equipment enclosures. Cord grips shall consist of a threaded aluminum body and compression nut with a neoprene bushing and stainless steel wire mesh for strain relief. Cord grip shall provide a watertight seal at enclosure interface. Cord grips shall be sized as required to accommodate the associated flexible cord.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL All power, control and signal conductors shall be identified at each connection terminal; in pull boxes, manholes, and handholes; and at splice points. The identification marking system shall comply with Section 16000. Pulling wire and cable into conduit shall be completed without damaging or putting undue stress on the insulation or jacket. Soapstone, talc or UL listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and cable. Grease is not acceptable. Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before cable is installed. Where wire or cable exits a raceway, a wire or cable support shall be provided. Where flat bus bar connections are made with unplated bar, the CONTRACTOR shall scratch-brush the contact areas. Bolts shall be torqued to the bus manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE Conductors in panels and electrical equipment, No. 6 AWG and smaller, shall be bundled and laced at intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties. Lacing is not necessary in plastic panel wiring duct. Conductors crossing hinges shall be bundled into groups not exceeding 12 and enclosed in nylon spiral wrap to protect from chafing when the hinged member is moved. Slack shall be provided in junction and pull boxes, handholes and manholes. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls of the box. Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the box. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for wire runs, lacing is not required. Plastic panel wiring duct shall not be used in manholes and handholes. Stranded conductors shall be terminated as described in paragraph 16120-2.06, except where terminals will not accept such terminations. In these cases, the conductors shall be terminated directly on the terminal block. Compression lugs and connectors shall be installed using manufacturer's recommended tools. Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following: 1. Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance

with derating requirements of the NEC. However, lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power, signal, or control conductors.


Power conductors derived from uninterruptible power supply systems shall not be installed in raceways with conductors of other systems unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Solid wire shall not be lugged nor shall electrical spring connectors be used on any except for solid wires in lighting and receptacle circuits. Lugs and connectors shall be installed with a compression tool. All splices and terminations are subject to inspection by the ENGINEER prior to and after insulating. Terminations at 460 volt motors shall be made by bolt-connecting the lugged connectors. Connections shall be insulated and sealed with factory-engineered kits. Bolt connection area shall be kept free of mastics and fillers to facilitate rapid stripping and re-entry. In-line splices and tees, where approved, shall be made with tubular compression connectors and insulated as specified for motor terminations, except that conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller may be spliced using self-insulating connectors as specified in paragraph 16120-2.06. Splices and tees in underground handholes or pull boxes shall be insulated using Scotch-cast epoxy resin splicing kits. Multiconductor cables branching out to multiple field destinations shall be terminated on terminal blocks in a terminal box located adjacent to the first field device served, or in the common junction box located at the equipment as depicted on the motor feed standard detail drawings. Final connections to field devices shall be made with single conductor cable. Terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices furnished with pigtail leads shall be made using self-insulating tubular compression connectors. 3.03 SIGNAL CABLE Circuits shall be run as individually shielded twisted pairs or triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever 3-wire circuits are required. Terminal blocks shall be provided at instrument cable junctions, and circuits shall be identified at such junctions unless otherwise specified. Signal circuits shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels. Signal cable terminations shall be prepared as indicated on the Drawings. Shields are not acceptable as a signal path, except for circuits operating at radio frequencies and utilizing coaxial cables. Common ground return conductors for two or more circuits are not acceptable. Unless otherwise specified, shields shall be bonded to the signal ground bus at the control panel and isolated from ground and other shields at other locations. Terminals shall be provided for running signal leads and shield drain wires through junction boxes.


Spare circuits and the shield drain wire shall be terminated on terminal blocks at both ends of the cable run and be electrically continuous through terminal boxes. Shields or drain wires for spare circuits shall not be grounded at either end of the cable run. Terminal boxes shall be provided at instrument cable splices. If cable is buried or in raceway below grade at a splice, an instrument stand shall be provided as specified with terminal box mounted approximately 3 feet above grade. Cable for paging, telephone, communication, and security systems shall be installed and terminated in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PORTABLE CORD Portable power cords feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords feeding motors for pumps, cranes, hoists, and portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to take the tension from the cable termination. Connection of portable cords to permanent wiring shall be accomplished with the use of terminals. In-line taps and splices shall be used only where specified. 3.05 TESTING The CONTRACTOR shall test conductors, wire, and cable in accordance with Section 16030. 3.06 SCHEDULES Cables shall be as shown on the Electrical and Instrumentation Single-Line Diagrams and System Architecture Drawings and the Lighting and Instrument panel schedules. 3.07 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) A. GENERAL: Conductor, wire, and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are specified on individual cable specification sheets (CABLESPEC). Scheduled and unscheduled conductors, wires, and cables shall be installed in accordance with the CABLESPEC. B. CABLESPEC SHEETS: The following CABLESPEC sheets are included in this section: Type C 600V 3/C Tray Cable Type D 600V 1/C Tray Cable Type DN1_ DeviceNET Thick Cable


Type DN2_ DeviceNET Thin Cable Type E 600V 1/C Lighting and Power XHHW Type F 600V 1/C Lighting and Power THHN Type FF Foundation Fieldbus Cable Type G 600V Multiconductor Control Cable THHN Type H 600V Single Pair Shielded Instrument Cable Type K 600V Multi Pair Shielded Instrument Cable Type P 150V Multi Pair Plenum Rated Shielded Instrument Cable Type SIS 600V Single Conductor Switchboard Wire Type ENET Ethernet Cat. 6 network cable


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE C

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE: ICEA S-66-524 (NEMA WC 7) CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper, standard class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-66-524, Paragraph 3.6 SHIELD: None. JACKET: Cable assembly: Black flame retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape wrapped cable core. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL 1277, UL and IEEE Standard 383 ribbon burner flame tests.

CABLE DETAILS

Size

Number of Strands

Conductor Insulation

Thickness*

Assembly Jacket Thickness**

Maximum Outside Diameter

(AWG or MCM) (in.) (in.) (in.) 12 7 0.030 0.045 0.46 10 7 0.030 0.045 0.51 8 7 0.045 0.060 0.68 6 7 0.045 0.060 0.76 4 7 0.045 0.060 0.91 2 7 0.045 0.060 1.03 1 19 0.055 0.080 1.16

1/0 19 0.055 0.080 1.26 2/0 19 0.055 0.080 1.36 4/0 19 0.055 0.080 1.60

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of

the value indicated above. **The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 80 percent

of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking shall include

manufacturer's name, XLP, XHHW, TYPE TC, conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Three Conductor with Ground, Power Tray Cable (600-3-XLP-PVC-TC)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE D


REFERENCE: ICEA S-66-524 (NEMA WC 7). CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-66-524, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL and IEEE Standard for 383 Ribbon burner flame tests.

CABLE DETAILS

Size

Number of Strands Conductor Insulation

Thickness* Maximum Outside

Diameter (AWG or MCM) (in.) (in.)

250 37 0.065 0.72 350 37 0.065 0.83 500 37 0.065 0.95 750 61 0.080 1.17

1000 61 0.080 1.35

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less

than 90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking

shall include manufacturer's name, VW-1, XHHW, TYPE TC, conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Conductor, Power Tray Cable (600-1-VW-1-NONE-XHHW-TC)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE DN1


REFERENCE: ODVA CLASS 2 THICK CONDUCTOR: Tinned stranded copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride, FPE – Foam Polyethylene SHIELD: Individually shield @ 100 % coverage with an overall tinned copper braid @ 65% coverage JACKET: Sunlight/Oil-resistant PVC jacket FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL, IEEE Standard for 383 Ribbon burner flame tests, ODVA DeviceNet

CABLE DETAILS

Size

Number of Strands

Conductor Nom. Inductance (uH.ft) /

Capacitance (pF/ft)

Nominal Conductor DC Resistance @ 20 ◦C (Ohms.1000 ft)

(AWG )

15 19x28 0.174/12.0 3.6 18 19x30 0.174/12.0 6.9

The basic specification indicates the minimum requirements and does not include all the requirements.

CONTRACTOR shall provide Belden 3082A paired DeviceNet cable or equal.

300 Volt,DeviceNet Thick Cable


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE DN2


REFERENCE: ODVA CLASS 2 THIN CONDUCTOR: Tinned stranded copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride, FPE – Foam Polyethylene SHIELD: Individually shield @ 100 % coverage with an overall tinned copper braid @ 65% coverage JACKET: Sunlight/Oil-resistant PVC jacket FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL, IEEE Standard for 383 Ribbon burner flame tests, ODVA DeviceNet

CABLE DETAILS

Size

Number of Strands


Capacitance (pF/ft)


(AWG )

22 19x34 0.221/12.0 17.5 24 19x36 0.251/12.0 28.0


CONTRACTOR shall provide Belden 3084A paired DeviceNet cable or equal.

300 Volt,DeviceNet Thin Cable


3.07 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE E


REFERENCE: ICEA S-66-524 (NEMA WC 7). CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-66-524, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524.

CABLE DETAILS

Size




12 7 0.030 0.19 10 7 0.030 0.21 8 7 0.045 0.27 6 7 0.045 0.31 4 7 0.045 0.36 2 7 0.045 0.42 1 19 0.055 0.48

1/0 19 0.055 0.52 2/0 19 0.055 0.57 4/0 19 0.055 0.68 250 37 0.065 0.75 350 37 0.065 0.85 500 37 0.065 0.98 750 61 0.080 1.22

1,000 61 0.080 1.37 *The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than

90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking

shall include manufacturer's name, XLP, XHHW, conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Conductor, Lighting/Power Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE F


REFERENCE: UL 83. CONDUCTOR: Solid, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90 C dry, 75 C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, UL 83, Type THHN and THWN. SHIELD: None. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils minimum thickness, UL 83. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of UL 83 for Type THHN and THWN.

CABLE DETAILS

Size




12 1 0.015 0.17 10 1 0.020 0.20



shall include manufacturer's name, THWN or THHN, conductor size, and 600 volt.

600 Volt, Single Conductor, Lighting Cable (600-1-PVC-THHN-THWN)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE FF


REFERENCE: ISA/SP-50 DOUNDATION FIELDBUS CONDUCTOR: Tinned stranded copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride, PO – Polyolefin, Color Code 1 (Blue & Orange) SHIELD: Shield @ 100 % coverage with an overall 20 AWG tinned copper JACKET: Sunlight/Oil-resistant PVC jacket FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL, IEEE Standard for 383 Ribbon burner flame tests, ISA/SP-50, and Fieldbus Foundation

CABLE DETAILS

Size

Number of Strands


Capacitance (pF/ft)


(AWG )

18 7x26 0.19/45.0 5.86


CONTRACTOR shall provide Belden 3076F paired Foundation Fieldbus cable or equal.

300 Volt, Foundation Fieldbus Cable


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE G


REFERENCE: UL 83, UL 1277, ICEA S-61-402 (NEMA WC 5) CONDUCTOR: 14 AWG, 7 or 19 strands, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90 C dry, 75 C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils average thickness (13 mils minimum thickness), UL 83, Type THHN and THWN. SHIELD: None. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils minimum thickness, UL 83. CONDUCTOR: Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core. IDENTIFICATION: Identify ICEA, Appendix K, Method 1, Table K2. White or green conductors shall not be provided. FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 83 for Type THHN and THWN.

Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the flame test requirements of UL 1277 for Type TC power and control tray cable.

CABLE DETAILS

Number of Conductors

Assembly Jacket Thickness*


(in.) (in.)

3 0.045 0.39 7 0.045 0.49

12 0.060 0.66

The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 80

percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking shall

include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type THWN or THHN, conductor size, number of conductors, and voltage class.

600 VOLT, MULTICONDUCTOR, 14 AWG CONTROL CABLE (600-MULTI-THHN-THWN)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE H


REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 16 AWG, 7-strand, concentric-lay, tin-coated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90 C dry, 75 C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils average thickness (13 mils minimum thickness), UL 62, Type TFFN. LAY: Twisted pair with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch lay. SHIELD: Cable assembly, combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20 AWG minimum size, tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils minimum thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape- wrapped cable core. CONDUCTOR: One conductor black, one conductor white. IDENTIFICATION FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFFN. Assembly jacket

shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

CABLE DETAILS



(in.) (in.)

Single Pair 0.045 0.34



shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFFN, conductor size, single pair, and voltage class.

600 VOLT, SINGLE PAIR, SHIELDED INSTRUMENT CABLE (600-SINGLE-PAIR-SH-INSTR)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE K


REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 18 AWG, 7-strand, concentric-lay, tin-coated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90 C

dry,75 C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils average thickness (13 mils minimum thickness), UL 62, Type TFFN. LAY: Twisted pairs or triads with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch lay. SHIELD: Each pair or triad and cable assembly: Combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20

AWG minimum size, tinned copper drain wire, shield applied for 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. Shield tape on pair and/or triad assemblies applied to give total shield isolation from all other shields.

JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils minimum thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black, 90 C, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, Table 10.17, applied over tape-wrapped cable core. CONDUCTOR: PAIR: One conductor black, one conductor white IDENTIFICATION TRIAD: One conductor black, one conductor white, one conductor red. IDENTIFICATION: Each pair and/or triad numbered. FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFFN. Assembly jacket

shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

CABLE DETAILS



(in.) (in.) Number of Pairs

4 0.045 0.554 8 0.060 0.749

12 0.060 0.896 24 0.080 1.256

Number of Triads 4 0.060 0.648 8 0.060 0.823

12 0.080 1.030 24 0.080 1.393

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than

90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFFN, conductor size, number of pairs or triads, and voltage class.

600 VOLT, MULTIPLE PAIR AND/OR TRIAD, SHIELDED INSTRUMENT CABLE (600-MULTI-PAIRS-TRIADS-SH-INSTR)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE P


REFERENCE: UL 13, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 24 AWG, 7-strand, tin-coated copper. Maximum operating temperature 60 C. INSULATION: Color coded, Plenum rated, PVC. SHIELD: Combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 24 AWG size, tinned copper drain wire, shield applied for 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Gray, Plenum rated, PVC. CONDUCTOR: Pair: 1- Black with Red, 2- Black with White, 3- Black with Green, 4-Black with Orange. IDENTIFICATION FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 13 for Type CL2P. Assembly

jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

CABLE DETAILS

Number of Pairs



(in.) (in.) 2 0.015 0.160 3 0.015 0.170 4 0.015 0.185


than 90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.

Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type CL2P, conductor size, number of pairs, and voltage class.

150 VOLT, MULTIPLE PAIR, PLENUM RATED, SHIELDED INSTRUMENT CABLE (150-MULTI-PAIRS-PLENUM-SH-INSTR)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE SIS


REFERENCE: ICEA S-66-524 (NEMA WC 7). CONDUCTOR: Tinned, annealed copper; strand Class B. Normal maximum operating temperature 90 C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-66-524, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the UL requirements for type SIS switchboard wire.

Cable Details

Size

Number of Strands

Conductor Insulation Thickness*


(AWG or MCM) (in.) (in.) 14 7 0.030 0.140 12 7 0.030 0.159 10 7 0.030 0.183 8 7 0.045 0.243

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking shall include manufacturer's name, XLP, SIS,

conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Conductor, Switchboard Wire (600-1-XLP-NONE-SIS)


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE ENET


REFERENCE: NEC TYPE CMR, CMX, NEMA WC-63.1 Category 5e,TIA/EIA 568B.2 Cat 6e CONDUCTOR: Solid copper; 24 AWG, twisted pairs. Normal maximum operating temperature 75 C. INSULATION: Polyolefin conductor insulation. SHIELD: None. JACKET: Oil and UV resistant PVC jacket with ripcord, Vertical Tray Rated to UL1661 Riser Flame Test FACTORY TESTS: UL Verified to Category 6e.Premise horizontal cable, Gigabit Ethernet, 250 base TX

Cable Details

Number of Pairs

Jacket Thickness*


(in.) (in.) 4 0.230

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking shall include manufacturer's name, type,


Industrial Ethernet Unshielded Twisted Pairs, Category 6e


CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) - TYPE PBDP


REFERENCE: PROFIBUS TRADE ORGANIZATION TYPE A EN50170 PART 8-2, "CABLE TYPE A", NEC TYPE PLTC CONDUCTOR: Stranded copper; 22 AWG, twisted pairs. Normal maximum operating temperature 75 C. INSULATION: red/green polyolefin insulation. SHIELD: Foil and Braid with 22AWG drain wire. JACKET: PVC jacket, colored purple, non-plenum FACTORY TESTS:

Cable Details

Number of Pairs

Jacket Thickness*


(in.) (in.) 1 0.319

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Marking shall include manufacturer's name, type,


Profibus DP Network Cable

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16140-1 Wiring Devices

SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies wiring devices consisting of receptacles, plugs, switches and appurtenances. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000

volts maximum) NEMA WD-1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices NFPA 70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Wiring devices shall be UL approved for the current and voltage specified and shall comply with NEMA WD-1. Devices shall contain provisions for back wiring and side wiring with captively held binding screws. Devices shall be colored ivory.


2.02 RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS A. GENERAL: Receptacles shall be grounding type. All surface mounted receptacles shall be mounted in "FS" type copper free aluminum mounting boxes. B. 120V RECEPTACLES: 1. GENERAL: 120 volt AC general purpose receptacles shall be simplex or duplex, as indicated on the Drawings, rated 20 ampere, NEMA 5-20R and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-20P plug caps. Receptacles shall be Hubbell 5362, General Electric 4108-2 or equal. Where the manufacturer of cord connected equipment requires an isolated ground, a receptacle with isolated ground shall be provided. Isolated ground receptacles shall be Hubbell IG-5362 or equal. 2. OUTDOOR, PROCESS OR CORROSIVE (NEMA 4X) AREAS: Receptacle and plug caps shall be corrosion resistant, marine duty with yellow polycarbonate weatherproof lift covers. Manufacturer shall be Hubbell 53CM62/52CM21, General Electric, or equal. Receptacles that are intended to serve permanently or indefinitely connected equipment shall be provided with a hinged weatherproof cover with cord ports as manufactured by Taymac Corporation or equal. 3. UTILITY OR NON-CORROSIVE PROCESS (NEMA 12) AREAS: Receptacles shall be as specified in paragraph 16140-2.02 B.1. Receptacles shall be installed in "FS" type cast aluminum device boxes with weatherproof lift covers over each receptacle. 4. GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING: Ground fault interrupting (GFI) receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, specification grade and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-20P plug caps. GFI receptacles shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. GFI receptacles shall be UL listed and have provisions for testing and resetting. GFI receptacles shall be Hubbell GF-5362-I, or equal. Where GFI receptacles are located in areas designated NEMA 12 or NEMA 4X, they shall be provided with weatherproof lift covers, TayMac Corporation, Cat. No. 20510, or equal. 5. UPS POWER RECEPTACLES: UPS power receptacles shall be duplex 20 ampere, 120 VAC, isolated ground receptacles. Isolated ground receptacles shall be hospital grade and shall be of orange colored nylon construction. Where indicated on the Drawings, isolated ground receptacles shall be simplex, locking receptacles, NEMA L5-20R.


C. 250 VOLT AC RECEPTACLES: Where indicated, receptacles shall be duplex 15 amp, NEMA 6-15R, and shall accept NEMA 6-15P plug caps. Receptacles shall be Hubbell 5662, Arrow Hart 5662, or equal. Plug caps shall be Hubbell 5666-C, Arrow-Hart 6866, or equal. D. PLUG CAPS: Where indicated, male plug caps for 120 volt and 250 volt receptacles shall be of the cord grip armored type with heavy phenolic housing, of the same manufacture as the receptacle. Plug caps shall be rated 15 amps minimum or as indicated. One plug cap shall be provided for every four receptacles furnished, with a minimum of two plug caps being provided. Plug caps shall be delivered to the ENGINEER. E. PIN AND SLEEVE THREE PHASE RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS: Where indicated, receptacles shall be suitable for 480 volt, 3-phase, 3-wire, grounding type service, with ampere ratings equal to or greater than 125 percent of the full load current of the equipment served by the receptacle. Receptacles and plugs shall be designed so that the grounding pole is permanently connected to the housing. The grounding pole shall make contact before the line poles are engaged when the plug is connected to the receptacle housing. The plug sleeve shall also make contact with the receptacle housing before the line and load poles make contact. Receptacles shall be provided complete with cast back box, angle adapter, gaskets, and a gasketed screw-type, weathertight cap with chain fastener. Each receptacle shall be provided with one plug. Receptacles shall be Crouse-Hinds "Arktite," Appleton "Powertite," or equal. F. RECEPTACLES FOR HAZARDOUS (NEMA 7) AREAS: Receptacles for use in hazardous areas shall be rated in accordance with NEC for the area in which they are to be located and shall be factory sealed. Receptacles shall be designed so the plug must be inserted and turned before load is energized. Receptacles shall be provided with mounting box, sealing chamber, and compatible plug. Voltage and current ratings shall be as 120 VAC, 20 amp. Receptacles shall be Appleton "U-Line," Crouse-Hinds "Ark-Gard 2," or equal. G. TWIST-LOCK THREE PHASE RECEPTACLES: Receptacles shall be simplex, NEMA L16-20R, suitable for flush mounting in a two gang outlet box. Receptacles shall be twist-lock type and shall accept a twist-lock plug, NEMA L16-20P. Provide one plug for every two receptacles installed. Install plug on power cable for associated equipment and deliver remaining units to ENGINEER.


2.03 SWITCHES A. GENERAL PURPOSE (NEMA 1 AREAS): General purpose switches shall be quiet AC type, specification grade, and shall be provided in accordance with rated capacities as required. Switches shall match receptacles in color. Switches shall be rated 20 ampere, 120-277 volt AC or 30 ampere, 120-277 volt AC and shall be configured as single, three-way, or four-way as required per the application. Switches shall be manufactured by General Electric, Hubbell, or equal. B. SWITCHES FOR HAZARDOUS (NEMA 7) AREAS: Switches for control of lighting and small single-phase power loads in hazardous areas shall consist of a factory assembled and sealed combination general purpose type switch in an explosion-proof housing and rated for the UL rated or listed for the function indicated. The switch shall be rated in accordance with NEC for the area in which it is to be installed. The external operating mechanism shall consist of a wing-type handle having the "ON" and "OFF" positions visible from the front. Unless otherwise specified, switches shall be Crouse-Hinds EFSC2129, Appleton EFSC175-F1, or equal. C. SWITCHES FOR OUTDOOR AND CORROSIVE (NEMA 12 and NEMA 4X) AREAS: Switches shall be general purpose switches mounted in "FS" type copper-free aluminum devices boxes with a cast aluminum cover plate and wing type handle external operating mechanism. Switch plate/operating mechanism shall be Crouse-Hinds DS185 or equal. 2.04 DEVICE PLATES Device plates shall be provided for all switches and receptacles. Device plates, unless previously specified, shall be made of sheet steel, zinc electroplated with chrome finish as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Device plates in corrosive, process, or outdoor areas (NEMA 4X and NEMA 12) shall be specified in paragraphs 16140-2.02 and 2.03. Device plates for explosion-proof equipment shall be factory provided with the equipment. Device plates for architecturally finished spaces shall be type 302 stainless steel with natural brushed finish. Device plates shall be provided with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with 1/8-inch black characters on white background.


Nameplates for switches shall identify the power source panel, the circuit number, and the area served. Nameplates for receptacles shall identify circuit and also the voltage, if other than 120 volts, single phase. 2.05 PLUG STRIPS Plug strips shall be manufactured of sheet steel with the receptacles mounted on the front cover. The front cover shall be removable. Plug strips shall be Plugmold, or equal. Plug strips for office and laboratory areas shall have single 3 wire, 20 ampere grounding type outlet mounted along the strip supplied from a single circuit. Plug strips for workbenches in shop and laboratory areas shall have 3 wire, 20 ampere grounding type duplex receptacles mounted along the strip on the circuits specified. Sufficient space shall be provided behind the receptacles for ten No. 12 AWG conductors in accordance with the NEC space rules. 2.06 PRODUCT DATA In accordance with Section 01300, the CONTRACTOR shall provide catalog cuts for all materials provided under this section. PART 3--EXECUTION Boxes shall be independently supported by galvanized brackets, expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or machine or wood screws as appropriate. Wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete shall not be used as a base to secure boxes. Welding or brazing shall not be used for box attachment. Unless otherwise specified, receptacles and switches installed in sheet steel boxes shall be flush mounted. Flush mounted receptacles shall be located 18 inches above the floor unless otherwise specified. Receptacles installed in cast device boxes shall be located 48 inches above the floor. Switch boxes shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor. Wiring devices shall be tested for proper polarity, for correct power connections, and for properly installed ground connection. **END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16175-1 Miscellaneous Electrical Devices

SECTION 16175 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies miscellaneous electrical control and power devices, relays, magnetic contactors, disconnect switches, manual starters, and overcurrent protection. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts

maximum) NEMA ICS-1 General Standards For Industrial Controls and

Systems NEMA ICS-2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and

Assemblies NEMA KS 1 Enclosed Switches


1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with specification Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's catalog data for all material provided under this section

shall be assembled in a folder with each page clearly marked with the item and reference number to the specification.



PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL DEVICES A. PUSHBUTTONS: Pushbuttons shall be 30.5 mm, flush head, heavy-duty, oil-tight with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. The pushbutton operators shall be red for stop functions, green for start functions, yellow for reset functions, and black for all other functions. The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, pushbuttons shall be momentary contact type. Pushbuttons designated for emergency operation or shutdown of equipment shall be maintained contact pushbuttons with red mushroom head operators. Mushroom head operator shall have an integral keyed cylinder lock. Key shall be required to release the operator once depressed.


Contact blocks shall be NEMA ICS-2 designation A600 except when switching circuits monitored by programmable controllers or other solid state circuits, contact blocks shall be hermetically sealed, logic-reed type as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Square D, or equal. B. SELECTOR SWITCHES: Selector switches shall be 30.5 mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. Unless otherwise specified, selector switches shall have maintained position contacts. Switches shall be provided with contact blocks and number of positions as required to perform the specified operations. Contact blocks shall be rated as specified in paragraph 16175-2.01 A. The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the Drawings. C. INDICATING LIGHTS: AC indicating lights shall be the push-to-test transformer type with LED type lamps. They shall be 30.5 mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the Drawings. DC indicating lights shall be the full voltage type. DC lamps may be tested as a group using a common lamp test button. Indicating lamp colors shall be as scheduled below:

Color Function Example

Green Running, open valve Equipment operating, motor running, open valve

Red Stopped, closed valve, alarm

Equipment or motor stopped, closed valve

Amber Valve in transition or Failure

Valve in transition or Abnormal condition

White Normal condition, equipment ready

Equipment power or control power "ON"

D. CONTROL STATIONS: Unless otherwise specified, control stations located indoors shall have sealing ratings in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05. Control stations located in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for installation in Class I, Division 1 locations in accordance with the National Electrical Code. When indicating lights are specified or indicated, control station shall be sized to


accommodate the transformer type lights. Control stations shall be Allen Bradley 800H series, or equal. 2.02 CONTROL RELAYS A. LOAD-SWITCHING CONTROL RELAYS: Control relays used for switching loads (solenoids, actuators, contactors, motor starter coils, etc.) shall be hermetically sealed, plug-in tube base type with pin terminals. Contacts shall, as a minimum, be two Form C, DPDT with 5 amp ratings. Relay coil voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Load-switching control relays shall be Potter & Brumfield, Type KHS, or equal. B. LOGIC LEVEL SWITCHING CONTROL RELAYS: Control relays used for switching solid-state logic and signal circuits shall hermetically sealed, plug-in tube base type with pin terminals. Relays shall have a minimum of two Form C, DPDT, gold-flashed, fine silver contacts rated 3 amps resistive at 120V AC or 28V DC. Logic level switching control relays shall be Potter & Brumfield, Type KHS, or equal. C. TIMERS: 1. TIMING RELAYS: Timing relays shall be solid-state, pulse count type using a high frequency RC oscillator and integrated circuit counter for timing. Electrolytic capacitors shall not be used in the timing circuits. Time delays from 0.1 seconds to 48 hours shall be available with each timer model adjustable over a 20:1 range. On-delay, off-delay and single-shot timing models shall be available. Timer shall reset in 0.03 seconds or less. Timer accuracy shall be plus or minus 2.0 percent under normal conditions. The timing relay shall have two NEMA form-C timed contacts. Solid state timing relays shall be Agastat, STA series, or equal. 2. MOTOR DRIVEN TIMERS: Motor driven timers shall be driven by a synchronous motor which starts timing when initiated by an external signal. Time settings shall be made by turning a knob on the front of the dial. A neon pilot light visible from the front of the timer shall glow red when the timer motor is energized. Visual indication shall be provided by a cycle progress pointer which advances to zero from the setting back to zero as time progresses. There shall be two sets of "instantaneous" NEMA form-C contacts which actuate when the timing is initiated. There shall be one set of "delayed" NEMA form-C contacts which actuates when the unit has timed out. When the timing cycle is completed, the timer shall auto-matically reset unless otherwise specified.


The timer shall be mounted in a one-piece molded case that will be permanently mounted and wired. The timer shall be Eagle Cycle-flex reset timer, HP5 series; Automatic Timing Controls, Series 305D; or equal. 2.03 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS A. LIGHTING CONTACTOR: Lighting contactors shall be 100 percent rated for ballast and tungsten lighting, resistance and other nonmotor loads. Contactor shall be rated 600V, 60 Hz with the ampere rating and number of poles as shown on the Drawings, with a minimum of two poles shall be provided. Coils shall be rated for 120 volt AC operation unless otherwise noted. Contactor shall be designed in accordance with NEMA ICS 2-211B for industrial-duty applications. The following options shall be available and shall be provided when called out on the drawings:

1. Auxiliary contacts rated 5 amps at 600V AC. 2. Timer or time clock attachment.

Contactors shall be either electrically held as specified or indicated. Contactors shall be available in combination with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection mounted in the same enclosure. Contactors shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin 500L or 500LP, Square D Class 8903, or equal. B. MOTOR CONTACTORS: Motor contactors shall be designed for continuous operation of induction motors at 600 volts or less at 60 Hz and shall comply with NEMA ICS 2-210. Unless otherwise specified, minimum contactor size shall be NEMA Size 1. The contactor shall be supplied with a normally open auxiliary contact for use as a hold-in contact as a minimum. Additional contacts shall be provided for remote monitoring and for interlocks as specified or indicated. The coil voltage, frequency and number of poles shall be as specified or indicated.


2.04 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES Safety disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, safety type rated 600 volts AC unless otherwise specified. Fusible safety switches shall be provided with Class R fuses rated as indicated on the Drawings. Disconnect switch enclosures shall have sealing ratings in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.05. NEMA 4X rated enclosures shall be of stainless steel construction. The operating handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the "off" position. The operator shall be a positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Switches shall be horsepower rated for motors and shall comply with NEMA KS-1. Switches shall be provided with defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position. Switches shall have line terminal shields. Switches shall be Square D Class 3110, Cutler-Hammer Type H-600, or equal. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Enclosed circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded case type with the ampere rating as specified. Unless otherwise specified, circuit breaker interrupting rating shall be 10,000 amperes symmetrical for service at 240 volts and below and 22,000 amperes symmetrical for service above 240 volts. 2.06 ELAPSED TIME INDICATORS Elapsed time indicators shall be panel mounted, nonresettable, six digit, hour indicator, rated 120 volts AC, 60 Hz. 2.07 NAMEPLATES Nameplates for all control stations, relays, timers, motor contactors and disconnect switches shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000. 2.08 ALARM STROBE/HORN

A. OUTDOOR AND CORROSIVE PROCESS AREAS:

Alarm strobe/horn shall be a multi-tone and multi-stage type with an integral flashing strobe. Strobe/horn shall be approved for outdoor installation, shall be NEMA 4X, and shall be designed for 120 volt AC service. Strobe shall have a red lens and shall be Allen-Bradley Model 855XC-BNA10A4, to match Owner’s existing equipment.


B. HAZARDOUS AREAS:

Alarm strobe/horn shall be a multi-tone and multi-stage type with an integral flashing strobe and shall be designed for 120 volt AC service. Strobe shall have a red lens. Strobe/horn shall be approved for installation in Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location, and shall be Allen-Bradley Model 855XC-BNA10A4, to match Owner’s existing equipment. 2.09 ALARM BEACON


Alarm beacon shall be a 100-watt sealed beam lamp. Lamp shall rotate beneath a red dome. Housing shall be of die-cast aluminum construction. Beacon shall be designed for 120 volt AC service and shall be Federal Signal 371L or equal. Each alarm beacon shall be furnished with wall mounting bracket, Federal Signal LWMB2 or equal.

B. HAZARDOUS AREAS: Alarm beacon shall be an incandescent lamp. Lamp shall rotate beneath a red dome. Housing shall be of cast aluminum construction. Beacon shall be designed for 120 volt AC service and shall be Federal Signal 121X, or equal. Each alarm beacon shall be furnished with wall mounting bracket, Federal Signal WMXC, or equal. 2.10 ALARM HORN


Horn shall be surface mount, 120 volt AC, enclosed diaphragm, and shall be Federal Signal Model WB350, or equal.

B. HAZARDOUS AREAS: Horn shall be ¾-inch conduit mount, 120 volt AC, enclosed diaphragm, suitable for installation in Class 1, Division 1 or 2 hazardous locations, and shall be Federal Signal Model 31X, or equal. 2.11 POWER CENTER ASSEMBLY Power center assembly shall consist of a dry-type transformer and circuit breaker load center integrated as one UL approved assembly suitable for outdoor installation. The assembly shall include primary and secondary main circuit breakers. Dry-type transformer shall utilize a 180 degree Celsius insulation system with a 115 degree Celsius rise. Load center shall be provided with the single and multipole circuit breakers indicated on the Drawings. Power center assembly shall be rated as indicated on the Drawings and shall be as manufactured by General


Electric, Westinghouse, or equal. 2.12 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCHES Manual transfer switches shall be heavy duty, safety type, double-throw, fusible rated 600 volts AC. Switches shall be load make/break and continuous duty rated for the ampere value rating indicated on the Drawings. Switches shall be provided with Class R fuses rated as indicated on the Drawings. Switch enclosure rating shall be as specified in Section 16000 for the area in which the switch is installed. The operating handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the "off" position. The switch operator shall be positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Switches shall be provided with defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position. Switch short circuit rating shall be 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Switches shall be Square D Class 3140 or equal. 2.13 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Applicable operation and maintenance as specified in Section 01730. PART 3--EXECUTION Control stations, contactors and safety disconnect switches shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor to centerline. Miscellaneous electrical devices shall be acceptance tested in accordance with Section 16030. **END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16431-1 Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Report

SECTION 16431

SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION REPORT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. GENERAL: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR subcontract an independent full member NETA Engineering and Study Firm/Testing Firm to prepare:

1. Electrical equipment short circuit study for the new equipment being installed. 2. Arc flash study for the new equipment being installed. 3. Protective device coordination study report for new equipment being installed in the

facility electrical power system. The Testing Firm shall be as described in Section 16030 and shall also be responsible for

the electrical testing described therein. B. SCOPE: The Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Report shall include analysis including Utility Company equipment that affect the installed equipment’s short circuit ratings, protective device ratings and protective device settings.

Report shall also include analysis of the equipment’s short circuit ratings, protective device ratings and protective device settings affected by the installed equipment.

Report shall include the results of the arc flash hazard analysis study for energized electrical

equipment in accordance with the methods outlined in IEEE Standard 1584 and stated hereinafter. Work shall include the fabrication of signs with the arc flash hazard study results and the

installation of the signs on the equipment in accordance with NFPA 70E Table 3-3.9.3 that includes the personnel protective equipment (PPE) risk category, the energy available, and the clothing recommendation. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.



Reference Title

IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants

IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, 1999

1.03 SCHEDULE The report shall be completed, submitted to the Construction Manager for acceptance and reworked to include the Construction Manager comments and corrections, as required. The report shall be approved by the Construction Manager prior to purchase and fabrication of electrical equipment including switchgear.

A copy of the Construction Manager accepted report shall be sent by the CONTRACTOR to all affected manufacturers prior to fabrication. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The report specified in this Section shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 REPORT The product shall be a certified report summarizing the short circuit and coordination study and conclusions or recommendations which may affect the integrity of the electric power distribution system. As a minimum, the report shall include the following: 1. The equipment manufacturer's information used to prepare the study. 2. Power Utility Company system information applicable to the project.


3. Short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide a sketch of the bus and use both the project term and the bus-code-name to identify the bus, branches, sources, loads. Base the system on the Project One-Line diagram.

4. Coordination study time-current curves including the instrument transformer ratios,

model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker.

5. Comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting capacity of the

equipment protecting that bus.

6. Data used as input to the report that includes cable impedances, source impedances, equipment ratings for the equipment being purchased for the project, etc.

7. Assumptions made during the study. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Provide a short circuit and coordination study on the electrical power distribution system as specified and as described in Section 6.1 of NETA ATS. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242 and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010.

The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for both existing and new equipment. The coordination study shall use the data from the same manufacturer of protective relay devices as being provided by the switchgear manufacturer. 3.02 QUALIFICATIONS The short circuit and coordination report shall be performed by the Testing Firm as described in Section 16030. The studies shall be signed by the professional electrical engineer responsible for the studies and registered to practice engineering in the state in which the project is located. 3.03 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to obtain and verify all data needed to perform the study. As a minimum, the short circuit study shall include the following:


A. One-Line Diagram 1. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays,

direct-acting trips, fuses, etc. 2. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style

and catalog number for all protective devices. 3. Power, voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all

transformers. 4. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each

relay. 5. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient

reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators.

6. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous

motors, and induction motors. 7. Significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses,

reactors, etc. 8. Emergency as well as normal switching conditions, as applicable. 9. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips,

as applicable. B. Impedance Diagram 1. Available MVA, voltage, and impedance from the power utility company. 2. Local generated capacity impedance. 3. Bus impedance. 4. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. 5. Cable impedances. 6. Equipment impedances. 7. System voltages.


8. Grounding scheme for the project: resistance grounding, solid grounding, or no grounding.

C. Calculations 1. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the

greatest. 2. Study shall address bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-

ground short circuits of each case. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. 3.04 ARC FLASH ANALYSIS The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to obtain and verify all data needed to perform the study. The arc flash analysis study shall include the following IEEE Standard 1584 nine step analysis process: 1. Collect system and installation data.

2. Determine modes of operation. 3. Determine bolted fault current.

4. Determine arc fault current.

5. Determine protective device characteristic and arc fault duration.

6. Document system voltages and equipment class.

7. Select working distances.

8. Calculate incident energy.

9. Calculate the arc flash protection boundary.

3.05 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. Time-current for each protective relay or fuse showing graphically that the

settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards.


Each curve shall be identified, and the tap and time dial settings shall be specified.

2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for

maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the Construction Manager shall be notified as to the cause.

3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 3.06 IMPLEMENTING THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SETTINGS AND ARC FLASH SIGN INSTALLATION The Testing Firm shall implement the protective device coordination study settings on new and existing equipment as required in Section 16030, based on the Engineers accepted Protective Device Coordination Report specified herein and submit a final amended report of the Record As-Built electrical equipment protective device settings subsequent to start-up and testing. The Testing Firm shall work with the CONTRACTOR and the Study Firm for implementing the Arc Flash Hazard sign installation requirements for electrical equipment as specified in NEC Article 110.16 Flash Protection and NFPA 70E.

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16440-1 Instrument Transformers, Meters, Switches, and Accessories

SECTION 16440

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS, METERS, SWITCHES, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies accessories for power distribution equipment assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI C37.20 Switchgear Assemblies Including Metal-Enclosed Bus

ANSI C39.1 Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments

ANSI C57.13 Requirements for Instrument Transformers


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS A. GENERAL: Instrument transformers shall be molded dry-type in accordance with ANSI C57.13. Transformer volt-ampere rating shall be suitable for carrying the specified load without overheating or exceeding the permissible accuracy for the transformer. B. POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS: Potential transformers shall have an ANSI accuracy class of 0.3. They shall be equipped with current limiting fuses. C. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: Current transformers shall be 5 ampere secondary with the primary current ratings indicated on the Drawings or as required for the metered service. Transformer accuracy shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI C37.20. Transformer construction shall be suitable for indoor installation. Transformers shall conform to the following: 1. NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE: As required for the application. 2. BIL: Manufacturer’s standard as required for the application. 3. OPERATING FREQUENCY: 60 Hz 4. CONSTRUCTION: Window Window type transformers shall be installed on insulated bus or conductors only. Window size shall be as required to adequately enclose the specified conductor or conductors. 2.02 POWER METERING SYSTEM A. GENERAL: Power metering system shall consist of a digital microprocessor-based line metering system, consisting of a master module and a display module. Each power metering system shall be provided with a test switch, and current transformer. Fused potential transformers shall be provided as required.


B. INPUTS: Input ranges of the device shall accommodate external current transformers. Provide three external current transformers with nominal ratings as indicated on the Drawings or sized for the incoming service. Module shall be suitable for direct connection to 208Y/120 or 480Y/277 volt AC systems as required for the specific application. Provide one control power transformer in accordance with this specification as required. Displayed parameters shall be scaled to display actual values on the primary side of instrument transformers. C. MONITORING FUNCTIONS: The power metering system shall provide monitoring functions for the plant distribution system. Monitored functions shall be available on the display, and to the plant process control system. D. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: Unless otherwise specified, the power metering system shall match existing systems and shall be Allen-Bradley Powermonitor 3000 Model 1404-M405A-ENT with an Ethernet interface and shall be connected to the PLC Ethernet switch. 2.03 TEST BLOCK Test block assembly shall be designed to provide a disconnecting means for power metering systems interfaced with instrument transformers and direct line voltage. Block shall provide isolation from line voltages and provide a shunt for current transformer circuits. Test block assembly shall provide individual points for three phase voltage and current metering in an integrated assembly suitable for front panel mounting. Block shall be rated 30 amperes at 600 volts AC. Block shall have a cover designed such that all points are in the closed position before the cover can be sealed. Test block shall be G.E. Model Pk-2, or equal. 2.04 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Applicable operation and maintenance items as specified in Section

01730. 2. Manufacturer's product data indicating the general features and

dimensions of devices.


3. Burden, accuracy class and ratio data for instrument transformers. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION All accessories and devices shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD TESTS Instrument transformers and metering systems shall be tested in accordance with specification Section 16030.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 16450

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grounding Electrodes and Conductors.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductors.

C. Bonding.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Latest Edition of Referenced Standards.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 467- Grounding and Bonding Equipment

1.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Metal frame of the building.

B. Rod electrode.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.

S. S. No. 5496 16450-1 Grounding & Bonding

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Provide data sheets for all materials and components.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance of system to ground and resistance of each electrode.

D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.

1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.

1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Equipment, parts, components and materials shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL or other independent testing agency recognized by the authority having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Encore

2. Rome Corp.

3. Southwire Co.

4. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 16010.

B. Description:

1. Grounding Electrode Conductor:

a. Soft drawn stranded bare copper cable. b. ASTM B8. c. Size to meet requirements of NEC Table 250-66 except where a

larger size is shown on Drawings. d. 2/0 AWG minimum size allowed.

2. Equipment Grounding Electrode:


a. Insulated copper conductor with insulation identical to phase conductors.

b. Size to meet requirements of NEC Table 250-122 except where a larger size is shown on Drawings.

c. Green insulation below No. 4 AWG, green tape on both ends for #4 AWG and larger.

2.02 ROD ELECTRODE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Erco.

2. Nening.

3. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection.

4. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Description:

1. 3/4 IN x 10 FT, sectional ground rod unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Copperclad:

a. Heavy uniform electrolytic copper coating molecularly bonded to a rigid steel cone.

b. Corrosion resistant bond between copper and steel. 3. Hard drawn for scar-resistant surface.

4. UL listed.

2.03 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Electric-Blackburn.

2. Hearty Brothers Lightning Protection.

3. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

4. Tyco/Electronics.


B. Grounding Clamps:

a. High copper alloy content. b. Compression type.


c. UL 467 listed.

2.04 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cadweld.

2. Thermoweld.


B. Description:

1. Molecular Weld

a. Current capacity to match capacity of conductor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Remove paint, rust, or other non-conducting material from contact surfaces before making ground connections.

3. Provide schedule 40 PVC protective sleeves where ground conductor pass through floor slabs or above-grade building walls.

4. Provide mechanical or exothermic type connections as indicated in drawings.

B. Perimeter Ground Loop:

1. Install rods in firm soil outside excavated areas.

a. Install rod electrodes at approximate locations shown on Drawings.

b. Place rods a minimum of 10 FT from foundation. 2. Drive top of rod to 30-inches below finished grade unless otherwise

specified.

a. Use driving studs or other suitable method to prevent damage to threads of sectional rods.

3. Interconnect all rod electrodes with ground electrode conductor.

a. Provide excavation as required. b. Do not splice.


c. Allow sufficient slack to prevent breakage due to backfilling or ground movement.

4. Completely backfill around ground grid, thoroughly tamping to achieve good contact between backfill and ground system components.

a. Notify ENGINEER a minimum of 1-week prior to backfilling to permit inspect of system by ENGINEER.

5. Make below-grade building wall penetrations using embedded grounding plates only.

a. Stranded conductors are not allowed to pass through walls. 6. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at rod locations where indicated.

a. Install well pipe top flush with finished grade.

C. Raceway Grounding - Conduit:

1. Metallic conduit to be electrically continuous.

a. Make all metallic raceway fittings and ground clamps tight to ensure equipment grounding system will operate continuously at ground potential to provide low impedance current path for proper operation of overcurrent devices during possible ground fault conditions.

2. Provide grounding type insulating bushings:

a. For equipment not supplied with conduit hubs. b. On ends of ductbank constructed of steel conduits.

3. Bond all conduit to:

a. Equipment ground bus or grounding lug. 4. Use double locknuts at all panels.

5. Use grounding bushings on conduits 2 IN or larger.

6. Provide bonding jumpers in conduits installed in concentric knockouts.

7. Provide bonding jumpers same size as largest ground conductor run within conduit.

D. Raceway Grounding - Cable Tray:

1. Metallic cable tray to be electrically continuous.

2. Provide a bare No. 2 copper grounding conductor run within full length of cable tray system.

a. Install one ground lug per tray section and bond to ground conductor.

b. Bond tray grounding conductor to building grounding system.

E. Equipment Grounding:


1. Provide an insulated copper equipment grounding conductor in all feeder and motor circuit raceways, if not provided in cable.

a. Conductor is in addition to power conductors listed in cable tabulation.

b. Size grounding conductors not sized on Drawings per NEC 250-122.

c. Do not splice equipment grounding conductors. 2. Ground all equipment supplied from an MCC, switchgear or other

distribution equipment through the distribution equipment ground bus.

a. Provide an equipment grounding conductor connected to the ground bus and equipment ground lug.

3. Bond 480:120/208 VAC transformer secondary neutrals to the supplying distribution equipment ground bus and to the building grounding system.

4. Control devices (switches, indicating lights, meters, starters, relays, etc.) mounted in MCC’s, switchgear, control panels, or other metal enclosures are considered grounded if the enclosure ground lug or ground bus is properly grounded.

5. Bond lightning protection equipment to the building grounding system.

6. Connect switchgear ground buses to the building grounding system.

a. Provide two separate grounding conductors for bonding switchgear ground buses to building grounding system.

b. Bond ground bus to switchgear enclosure, service conductors, and instrument transformer secondary circuit grounds.

F. Structural Grounding:

1. Make reinforcing steel electrically continuous.

2. Bond concrete foundation reinforcing steel to building ground loop at all corners of the structure and at locations along the perimeter.

a. Maximum spacing between bonds not to exceed 50 FT. b. Use No. 2/0 AWG bare copper conductor unless shown otherwise. c. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage the structural

integrity of the foundation.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Interface with lightning protection system.

B. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.



C. Provide “ground megger” device and test resistance of installed grounding system using fall-of-potential method.

1. Test after backfilling and compaction.

2. Test with all connections to other ground systems disconnected (i.e., utility ground, grounded piping system, existing building system).

3. Conduct test in the presence of an OWNER’s representative.

4. Include test report with Operations and Maintenance manuals.

**END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16460-1 Dry Type Transformers (600 Volts and Less)

SECTION 16460 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS) PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies dry-type transformers rated 600 volts and less used for power distribution, lighting, and control purposes. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01 General Requirements for Dry-Type

Distribution and Power Transformers ANSI/UL 506 Specialty Transformers NEMA ST20 Dry-Type Transformers for General

Application


1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Dimensioned outline drawings. 2. Manufacturer's catalog data indicating equipment specifications and features. 3. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Transformers shall conform to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01 and ANSI/ UL 506. The voltage, frequency, number of phases and kVA rating shall be as specified. Transformers shall be Square D, General Electric, Cutler-Hammer, or equal. 2.02 INSULATION Transformers 15 kVA and above shall have a Class 220 insulation system in accordance with NEMA ST20. Transformers 2 kVA and less shall be designed not to exceed 80 degrees C temperature rise. Transformers 3 kVA and greater shall be designed not to exceed 115 degree C temperature rise. 2.03 COILS Transformer coils shall be copper or aluminum. Transformer coils 15 kVA and above shall be impregnated with varnish. Transformer coils 10 kVA and below shall be encapsulated.


2.04 WINDING CONFIGURATION Transformers shall have electrically isolated primary and secondary windings. Primary and secondary winding configurations shall be as specified. Provisions shall be made to permit separate grounding of the neutral conductor and the enclosure. Single-phase transformers shall be the four winding type. 2.05 TRANSFORMER TAPS Transformers 15 kVA and above shall be provided with two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above nominal voltage and four 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps below nominal voltage on the primary winding. Transformers 10 kVA and below shall be provided with two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above nominal voltage and two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps below nominal voltage on the primary winding. 2.06 TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS Terminal compartments shall be sized to permit termination of cables specified. Terminal connections shall be made in the bottom third of the enclosure. The terminals shall be copper and sized for the cable specified. 2.07 ENCLOSURES Transformers rated 15 kVA and smaller shall be provided with weatherproof, nonventilated enclosures. Indoor transformers rated greater than 15 kVA shall be provided with dripproof, ventilated enclosures. Outdoor transformers shall have weatherproof enclosures. 2.08 MOUNTING Transformers 15 kVA and below shall be suitable for wall mounting. Transformers 30 kVA and larger shall be floor mounting type. 2.09 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000. 2.10 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's verification that the unit has been built and tested in accordance with the specified ANSI standards.


2. Manufacturer's verification of the sound levels of each unit if different from the specified NEMA ST20 standards.

3. Applicable operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01730. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Transformer enclosures and neutrals shall be bonded together and grounded. Transformers shall be installed on vibration isolation pads. 3.02 TESTING Transformers shall be tested in accordance with Section 16030. **END OF SECTION**

S.S. No. 5496 16500-1 Lighting Fixtures

SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies lighting fixtures and their installation. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following document. The reference to the document shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Catalog information describing light fixture construction, materials, ratings and

dimensions. Catalog information shall be organized by fixture type. 2. Light fixture photometric data including table of utilization factors and polar

plots.


3. For interior areas, CONTRACTOR shall submit proposed layout in AutoCAD 2006 or later electronic format. Layout shall be scaled drawing including lighting fixtures and switch locations.



PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, lighting materials, including fixtures, accessories, and hardware, shall conform with the detailed requirements specified on the Drawings. Lighting fixtures shall be provided where specified on the Drawings. 2.02 BALLASTS A. FLUORESCENT MAGNETIC: Ballasts for fluorescent lamps shall be nonleaking, filled with thermosetting compound, rated for 120 volt service, unless otherwise specified. Two lamp ballasts shall be used where applicable. Ballasts for fixtures located in covered unheated areas and open areas shall be low temperature type. Ballasts shall be Class P, protected type, high power factor and shall carry the CBM and UL label. Ballasts shall be designed for case temperature lower than the nominal UL 90 degree C requirement. B. METAL HALIDE: Ballasts for metal halide lamps shall be autotransformer regulator high power factor type with a sound rating of "B" maximum. Starting current shall not exceed normal running current.


C. HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM: Ballasts for high pressure sodium lamps shall be autotransformer or isolation transformer high power factor type. Starting current shall not exceed normal running current. 2.03 LAMPS A. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: Lamps shall be General Electric, North American Philips (Norelco), Sylvania, Venture Lighting International, or equal. B. GENERAL: Lamps shall be as specified on the lighting fixture schedule. Where indicated on the fixture schedule, lamp codes are General Electric. Unless otherwise specified, fluorescent lamps shall be warm white. Unless otherwise specified, metal halide and high pressure sodium lamp envelopes shall be clear. Incandescent lamps shall be rated 130V AC. Unless otherwise specified, lamp shape shall be standard A or PS and envelope shall be frosted inside. C. SPARES: Spares shall be provided for lamps except medium base incandescent lamps less than 300 watts. Number of spares shall be equal to 5 percent of each rating type, with a minimum of one standard manufacturer's package. 2.04 EXTERIOR LIGHTING POLES A. GENERAL: Lighting poles shall be provided with pole cap and all necessary fixture mounting and pole anchor hardware. Lighting poles shall be as specified on the Drawings. 2.05 PHOTOELECTRIC CELL UNITS A. REMOTE MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC CELL UNITS: Remote mounted photoelectric cell units shall consist of a hermetically-sealed photoconductive cell with a gasketed aluminum cover suitable for outdoor installation. Photoelectric cell shall be suitable for installation in a surface mount "FD" type box or flush


mounted in a recessed device box. Photoelectric cell shall be suitable for operation at ambient temperatures ranging from -40 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit and shall be 1000 watts at 120 volt AC. B. FIXTURE MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC CELL UNITS: Fixture mounted photoelectric cell units shall be plug-in type suitable for outdoor installation. Photoelectric cell units shall be rated as required to switch the associated light fixture. 2.06 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY Sealed battery, inverter and automatic transfer switch shall be rated to start one or two lamps, as specified, immediately and maintain a lamp output of at least 600 lumens per lamp for 90 minutes following a power failure. The emergency power supply shall be installed factory installed in the fixture and shall be internally mounted inside the ballast compartment. External status pilot light and manual test button shall be provided. Acceptable manufacturers: Holophane, Lithonia, Bodine, Daybrite, Guth, Siltron, or equal. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Applicable operation and maintenance items as specified in Section 01730. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Fixture type and quantity shall be as depicted on the Drawings. Fixtures shall be located by the CONTRACTOR as defined on the Luminaire Schedule. Raceways and wire shall be provided from the fixtures, and switches to the lighting panel in accordance with the NEC. Raceways shall be provided in accordance with Section 16110. Wire shall be provided in accordance with Section 16120. Fixtures labeled to require conductors with a temperature rating exceeding 75 degrees C shall be spliced to circuit conductors in a separately mounted junction box. A fixture shall be connected to a junction box using flexible conduit with a temperature rating equal to that of the fixture. Labels and marks, except the UL label and manufacturer’s model tag, shall be removed from exposed parts of the fixtures. Fixtures shall be cleaned when the project is ready for acceptance. Test complete electrical system for grounds and short circuits before acceptance in


accordance with N.E.C. and utility company requirements. Panels shall be clearly identified and labeled. Provide typewritten directories in panels with clear plastic protection shields and mounted in card holders in panel. Where recessed fixtures are required, the fixture shall be provided with mounting hardware for the ceiling system specified. Catalog numbers given on the lighting fixture schedule shall not be used for selection of mounting hardware, but only as a reference to the type of fixture required. A concealed latch and hinge mechanism shall be provided to permit access to the lamps and ballasts and for removal and replacement of the diffuser without removing the fixture from ceiling panels. Fixtures recessed in concrete shall have protective coating of bituminous paint. Fixtures shall be aligned and directed to illuminate an area as specified. Fixtures shall be directly and rigidly mounted on their supporting structures. Conduit system shall not be used to support fixtures. Where brackets or supports for lighting fixtures are welded to steel members, the welded area shall be treated with rust-resistant primer and finish paint. Underground and outdoor wire splices shall be in accordance with Section 16120. Photoelectric cells shall be oriented toward the north where possible. Properly ground all electrical services, in accordance with N.E.C. 250 requirements. Minimum size ground wire shall be #12 AWG. **END OF SECTION**

SECTION 16742

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies premise cabling systems for data communication systems including horizontal cabling. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title IEEE 802.5/802.3 Institute of Electrical and Electronic ENGINEERs TIA/EIA 568A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling TIA/EIA 569 Commercial Building Standard for

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces TIA/EIA 606 The Administration Standard for the

Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

TIA/EIA TSB-67 Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

S.S. No. 5496 16742-1 Communications and Data Wiring Systems

B. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: The CONTRACTOR's installing technician shall be a BICSI Registered, or similarly qualified Cabling Installer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Manufacturer’s product data for all cabling systems, and connectorization systems.

2. Verification of compliance with the requirements of paragraph 16742-1.02 B. 3. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL CABLE SYSTEMS A. DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLE: Data communication cable shall be four (4) pair, 24 AWG, category 6 data grade, 100 ohm, solid copper core unshielded twisted pair, with a plenum rated jacket. Cable shall be capable of a minimum data speed of 250 Megabits per second in accordance with IEEE 802.5/802.3 standards.


2.02 WORK STATION COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET Work station communication outlets shall be of a modular design consisting of a 1-port or 2-port, single gang, high impact thermoplastic faceplate and data grade RJ45 jacks as shown on the drawings. RJ45 jack contacts shall be beryllium copper with minimum 50 micro-inch gold plating. Faceplates shall be provided with screw covers and machine printed labels. RJ45 jacks shall be color coded to indicate data or voice communications and shall accept a machine-printed termination position label. Communications outlets shall be as manufactured by Hubbell Premise Wiring, IFP Series Faceplates and HXJ Series jacks, or approved equal. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Cabling system test results.

2. As-constructed documentation of completed cabling system. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation of all data communication cabling system components cable and communication outlets. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all incidental materials including screws, tie wraps, anchors, ground clamps, nameplates, professional labeling equipment, labels and other ancillary equipment as may be required for a complete data and voice communication cabling system. 3.02 HORIZONTAL CABLE SYSTEMS A. GENERAL: Horizontal wiring shall be routed using the "home run" methodology with no intermediate transition points between the telephone/data equipment racks or Ethernet switches and the specified communication outlet. All cabling shall be free of bridges, splices, and taps from the homerun's origin at the telephone/data equipment rack or Ethernet switch to the termination at the specified data or voice communications outlet. Additionally, each horizontal wiring run shall be terminated as a "straight through" connection with no transposition of pairs. The number of horizontal cable runs and associated data outlets on the premises shall be determined from the Drawings. Horizontal station cable shall be provided from the telephone/data equipment rack or Ethernet switch to each of the data outlets indicated on the Drawings.



3.03 WORK STATION COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS A. FACEPLATE LABELING: Each faceplate shall have a unique machine-printed label consisting of the room number served by the communications outlet followed by a sequential number beginning with 1 and numerically progressing for each subsequent faceplate. For example, the faceplate labels for communications outlets in room 101 shall be “101-1, 101-2, etc.” B. OUTLET LABELING: Each outlet installed on a faceplate shall be provided with a machine-printed label. Each outlet shall be identified by type using a capital letter in accordance with the following: 1. Data outlet: A 2. Data outlet: B 3.04 TESTING All communications cable systems shall be tested in accordance with TIA/EIA TSB 67. Tests shall include a basic link test for each communications circuit. All testing shall be conducted with Level II field tester. The following tests shall be conducted: 1. Wire Map 2. Cable Length 3. Attenuation 4. Near-End Crosstalk A test report shall be generated in accordance with the requirements of TIA/EIA TSB 67 and shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph 16742-2.03. The test report shall indicate the measured result and the pass/fail determination of each test. 3.05 DOCUMENTATION As-built documentation shall be provided which details the final installed configuration of the data communication systems. Documentation shall include communication outlet location and labeling, cable labeling and routing, patch panel labeling, and communication rack layout.

**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 16920 600 VOLT MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies freestanding, factory assembled 600 volt motor control centers (MCC). B. EQUIPMENT LIST: MCCs specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Refer to the Drawings for additional motor control center requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial

Controls and Systems ANSI/NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers

and Assemblies JIC EMP 1 Electrical Standards for Mass

Production Equipment UL 845 Motor Control Centers

1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Elementary connection and interconnection diagrams in accordance with JIC

EMP 1 and/or NEMA ICS standards. 2. Time current curves for all protection devices.

S.S. No. 5496 16920-1 600 Volt Motor Control Centers

3. List of starters, variable frequency drives, and feeder tap compartments indicating the size and type of circuit protection.

4. Interrupting, withstand and continuous current rating of: a. Bus bars b. Feeder tap units c. Starter units d. Main incoming units 5. Dimensioned layout drawings and elevations. 6. Manufacturer's catalog data indicating equipment specifications and construction

features including all optional equipment and features proposed. 7. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all


8. Spare Parts List. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION The motor control center manufacturer shall provide complete "as-constructed" documentation for all motor control centers in a conformance with NEMA Standard ICS-2-322.08, Class IIS-B for special wiring drawings of internal and external items. Motor control center documentation shall include a comprehensive schedule of unit devices, layout drawings, and unit elementary diagrams. Unit elementary wiring diagrams shall indicate numbered terminal points within the unit, device designations, conductor insulation color code, and all interconnections to other units within the motor control center and to the first level of remote equipment, devices, and field instruments. Designation of terminals and electrical devices shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Interfaces to systems and equipment provided as work of other sections of this specification shall


be fully coordinated and indicated on the elementary diagrams. Motor control center documentation shall be prepared on a computer-aided drafting (CAD) system. All CAD drawing files shall be supplied in AutoCAD version 2006 file format and submitted to the ENGINEER on CD-ROM media. All CAD drawing files shall be updated to reflect the final as-constructed condition of the motor control centers. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Motor control centers shall comply with ANSI/NEMA ICS 2-322, AC General Purpose Motor Control Centers, and UL 845. Motor control centers and all internal components shall be suitable to serve the loads specified. Motor control centers shall have been tested in a high power laboratory to prove adequate mechanical and electrical capabilities. All major components shall have been individually design tested and guaranteed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer of the motor control center shall be the manufacturer of the major components contained therein, such as motor starters, control components, etc. The acceptable manufacturer of new motor control centers, as scheduled in the referenced specification section are as follows: 1. Allen-Bradley Bulletin 2100 Centerline DeviceNet MCC For existing motor control centers requiring modifications, the acceptable manufacturer shall be the manufacturer of the existing equipment. For instance, Square D is the manufacturer of the existing motor control center for the Secondary Effluent Mixer starters. The Square D Model 6 starters will likely not be provided with Allen-Bradley E-3 Plus Overloads, as requested. Unless Square D is willing to provide the starter with an Allen-Bradley E-3 Plus overload, the CONTRACTOR will likely need to purchase standard Square D Model 6 starters to match the existing motor control center equipment and then replace the standard overloads with Allen-Bradley E-3 Plus overloads. Substitutions to the above listed manufacturers may be offered by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. 2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT Motor control centers shall be rated 600 volts, 60 hertz, 3 phase, 3- or 4-wire as specified and shall be suitable for operation at the specified voltages and short circuit capacities. Motor control centers shall be U.L. listed as "Service Entrance Equipment" where specified on the Drawings.


2.03 STRUCTURE AND CONSTRUCTION A. STRUCTURE: Motor control centers shall be totally enclosed, deadfront, free-standing assemblies. Each section shall be 90 inches high by 20 inches wide by 20 inches deep unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. The individual unit compartments shall be a minimum of 6 inches high. There shall be 72 inches of vertical compartment mounting space arranged to accommodate any combination of control and/or feeder units in 6 inch increments. Unused individual unit compartments less than 6 inches high shall be incorporated into an adjacent unit. Compartments shall have pan-type doors with a minimum of two quarter-turn hold-down latches and neoprene gaskets. A full height vertical wireway, 20 square inch minimum, shall be provided for each vertical motor control center section. The wireway shall contain full height removable doors. Horizontal wireways shall be provided top and bottom, extending the length of motor control centers. Bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections extending the full length of the motor control center lineup. A removable lifting angle shall be mounted on top and shall extend the width of the motor control center lineup. B. CONSTRUCTION: Motor control centers located indoors shall have NEMA 12, enclosures. All full voltage starter units through NEMA size 5 and feeder tap units less than 225 amperes shall be of the drawout type. Drawout provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Drawout units shall have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment. Interior of all units shall be painted white for increased visibility. Units shall be equipped with side-mounted, pressure pull-apart type control terminal blocks suitable for use with ring-tongue lugs, rated 480 volts. Knockouts shall be provided for the addition of future terminal blocks. An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each starter unit. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the unit door to prevent access unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent inadvertent closing of the disconnect. A second interlock shall be provided to prevent removal or re-insertion of the unit while in the ON position. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in the OFF


position with from one to three padlocks with the door open or closed. In addition, means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially withdrawn position with the stabs free of the vertical bus. Each starter unit shall be provided with a form C auxiliary contact mechanically interlocked with the primary disconnect operating mechanism. 2.04 FINISH AND COLOR All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the motor control center shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the motor control center shall be the manufacturer's standard. 2.05 BUS A. GENERAL: Bus shall be tin-plated copper with bolted connections between vertical and horizontal bus bars. Access for tightening these connections shall be from the front, without the need for tools on the rear of the connection. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers shall be provided. Barriers shall be fabricated from high-strength, glass-filled polyester resin. Unless otherwise specified, the bus shall be braced to withstand a fault current of 65,000 amperes, RMS, symmetrical. Bus structure shall have provisions for accommodating future bus extensions. B. HORIZONTAL BUS: Unless otherwise specified, the main horizontal bus shall be rated a minimum 600 amperes continuous. C. VERTICAL BUS: Unless otherwise specified, the vertical bus shall be rated a minimum 300 amperes continuous. D. NEUTRAL BUS: Where specified, a neutral bus shall be provided. The neutral bus shall have the same rating as the main horizontal bus. E. GROUND BUS: A 1/4-inch by 2-inch ground bus shall be provided the full length of the motor control center. Ground bus shall be located at the bottom of the motor control center. Provide a lug to terminate a bare 4/0 AWG copper ground conductors at each end of the ground bus.


2.06 WIRING A. GENERAL: Motor control centers shall be provided with NEMA Class I, Type B-T wiring. All starter units shall have terminal blocks for control wiring. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power wiring for starters size 3 and smaller. Motor control centers shall be provided with all necessary interconnecting wiring and interlocking. Provide elementary and connection diagrams for each starter unit and an interconnection diagram for the entire motor control center. B. POWER WIRE: Power wire shall be copper 90 degrees C per 16120-3.07-CABLESPEC "Type SIS" insulated, sized to suit load; minimum power wire size shall be No. 12 AWG copper stranded. C. CONTROL WIRE: Control wire shall be No. 16 AWG stranded copper wire, rated 90 degrees C and UL listed CABLESPEC "Type SIS" for panel wiring. D. TERMINATIONS AND CABLE CONNECTIONS: 1. TERMINALS: Control wiring shall be lugged with ring-tongue or locking spade crimp type terminals made from electrolytic copper, tin-plated. 2. CABLE CONNECTORS: Cable connectors for use with stranded copper wire, sizes No. 8 AWG to 1000 KCM, shall be UL listed. Dished conical washers shall be used for each bolted connection. Connectors shall be reusable and shall be rated for use with copper conductors. Incoming cable shall terminate within the motor control center on a main lug or main breaker termination point as indicated on the Drawings. Main lug terminations shall have adequate dedicated space for the type and size of cables indicated on the Drawings. The lugs shall be compression type with anti-turn feature. E. CONDUCTOR MARKERS: Markers used for identification shall meet the requirements of Section 16000. 2.07 MAIN AND FEEDER BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION A. GENERAL: Main and feeder tap units shall consist of circuit breakers, as specified herein and as scheduled on the Drawings.


B. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Main and feeder circuit protective devices, as indicated on the Drawings, shall be molded case circuit breakers providing complete circuit overcurrent protection by having inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics, and where applicable, be current limiting. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of de-ionizing arc chutes. Circuit breaker interrupting capacities shall be as specified and provide the motor control center minimum integrated equipment withstand rating indicated on the Drawings. Breakers 600 ampere and below shall be thermal-magnetic trip with inverse time current characteristics. Breakers with frame size greater than 600 amperes shall be provided with solid-state trip unit complete with built-in current transformers and flux transfer shunt trip. Breakers shall utilize interchangeable rating plugs to establish the continuous trip rating of the circuit breaker as indicated on the Drawings. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. Circuit breaker trip units shall have the following time-current curve shaping adjustments: 1. Adjustable long time pick-up and delay. 2. Adjustable short time pick-up and delay with selective curve shaping. 3. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up. Each motor control center main breaker shall be provided with built-in ground fault protection with adjustable pick-up rating not exceeding 1200 amperes and ground fault time delay adjustable from 0.1 to 0.5 seconds. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing time delay functions, current functions including instantaneous trip, and ground fault current functions of the breaker by means of a 120 volt operated test kit. Provide one test kit capable of testing all breakers 600 ampere and above.


2.08 MOTOR STARTER UNITS A. GENERAL: Motor starter units shall be combination type with thermal magnetic circuit breaker, contactor, and E3-Plus solid-state overload protection. Specific features such as two speed, reversing, and reduced voltage starters shall be as specified on the Drawings. The starter units shall have a minimum combination UL listed short circuit interrupt rating of 65,000 amps RMS, symmetrical or higher as specified on the Drawings. B. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Variable frequency drive systems shall be pulse width modulated inverter technology type. The variable frequency drive systems shall be capable of converting 460 Volt, 60 hertz nominal input power to a suitable voltage and frequency to cause a standard squirrel-cage induction motor to run at a speed proportional to an external speed reference signal. Variable frequency drive systems units shall consist of the following: 1. Circuit breaker short circuit protection 2. Control circuit transformer 3. Incoming line reactors and filtering 4. Rectifier 5. Inverter 6. Door mounted fault/diagnostic annunciator and keypad controller 7. Control circuitry and accessories to provide the specified functions 8. DeviceNet Interface Module Variable frequency drive units shall be of the same type and incorporate the same features as specified in Specification 16925. The variable frequency drive systems unit shall be configured to accept hardwired control inputs, status outputs, and control signals over the DeviceNet Interface Module as indicated on the Control Diagrams. All system components, including control circuit transformer, circuit breaker, auxiliary contacts, operator control devices, overload relay, and ground fault protection shall be as specified in the applicable paragraphs of this specification section and in Specification 16925. The CONTRACTOR shall assign Unit Responsibility for the variable frequency drives in this section as specified in paragraph 13000-1.02.B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit letters of certification with the shop drawings from the VFD manufacturer, the motor manufacturer, and the driven equipment manufacturer stating that they have reviewed each application and that the combination of VFD, electric motor, and driven equipment will satisfy the application duties required, for the actual motor sizes required, regardless of the scheduled “nominal horsepower”. Variable frequency drive systems shall be Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 70.


C. THERMAL MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Motor starters shall be equipped with thermal magnetic circuit breakers as specified in section 2.07-B. Starter circuit breakers shall be sized by the motor control center manufacturer to serve the load indicated on the Drawings. D. CONTROL TRANSFORMERS: Each control transformer shall be rated 480/240-120V, single phase, 2 wire, 60 Hz. The transformer shall be sized for the load it feeds but shall not be less than the minimum ratings as follows:

NEMA starter size Minimum transformer

volt-ampere rating 1 100 2 150 3 200 4 300

Each control transformer shall be provided with time-delay, slow-blow secondary fuse rated to interrupt 10,000 amperes short circuit at 250 volts AC. Two primary fuses rated to interrupt 200,000 amperes at 600 volts shall be provided on all starters. Fuse holders for primary and secondary fuses shall be fuse clips with full barriers between fuses. E. CONTACTORS: Unless otherwise specified, contactors shall be full voltage, 3-pole, 600 volt AC, NEMA size 1 minimum. Contacts shall be double break, silver-cadmium oxide, and weld resistant. Contacts shall be isolated to prevent arcing. Coils and magnets shall be capable of being removed or replaced without special tools. Reversing, multispeed, and reduced voltage starters shall have additional contactors, overload relays, and auxiliary relays as required, and shall have mechanically interlocked contactor coils to prevent simultaneous engagement. F. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Contactors shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amperes at 120 volts AC. Each contactor shall be equipped with a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed electrically isolated auxiliary contacts. Contacts, in addition to the minimum requirements specified herein, shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.


Auxiliary contacts monitored by the plant automation control system shall be gold flashed logic level type. G. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Overload protection shall protect the feeder and branch circuit wiring and motor from excessive overcurrents. Motor overload protection shall be an E3-Plus solid state relay designed to protect the motor from overcurrent and phase loss. Relay trip class shall be Class 20 with an adjustable trip setting across a 3.2:1 range. Typical trip time for phase loss protection shall be less than 2 seconds. Relay shall have selectable manual/automatic reset modes. Relay shall be factory configured for manual reset. Overload relay shall have a visible trip indicator, one normally open contact for remote monitoring, and one normally closed electrically isolated control circuit trip contact. Overload relay shall be manually reset from a push-button located on the starter unit door. Solid state overload relays shall be Allen-Bradley, E3-Plus series or equal. H. TERMINAL BLOCKS: Terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type to allow disconnection of all wiring and removal of the starter unit without de-terminating field wiring. Terminals shall have screw connections rated 600 volts; 20 amperes for control wiring and suitable for use with ring tongue lugs, and 30 amperes (minimum) for power wiring (starters size 4 and larger shall terminate the power leads directly to the contactor). Terminal blocks shall be provided with integral marking strips and shall be permanently marked with the conductor number as specified on the Drawings. Internal wiring shall be connected on one side of the terminal block; outgoing conductors shall be connected to the other side. I. SPARE STARTER UNITS: Motor starter units identified as “Spare” on the Drawings shall be provided with the size and rating of circuit breaker and contactor as well as overload protection and control power transformer to form a complete functional unit. A green run and red stopped indicating lights shall also be provided on each spare starter unit. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS A. GENERAL: Control devices such as pushbuttons, selector switches, and indicating lights shall be mounted on the unit compartment door. Each starter shall be provided with a green run indicating light and a red stopped indicating light, at a minimum. Other control device configurations shall be as detailed on the drawings. The control devices shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 16175-2.01.


B. POWER METERING SYSTEM: Each motor control center shall be provided with a power metering system as specified in specification 16440. Power metering system shall consist of a digital microprocessor-based line metering system, current transformers, fused potential taps and instrument test switch. Power metering display module and instrument test switch shall be flush mounted in the compartment door and shall be positioned between 54 inches and 66 inches above finished floor. The power meter shall be Allen-Bradley Powermonitor 3000 Model number: 1404-M405A-ENT with an Ethernet interface, with no exceptions to match owners existing equipment, and shall be connected to the PLC Ethernet switch. C. NAMEPLATES: Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000. Nameplates shall be provided for all cubicles and compartments. A nameplate shall be provided identifying the motor control center. D. LOAD IDENTIFICATION: Each MCC unit shall be provided with an adhesive machine printed label on the inside of the associated compartment door, listing the following information: 1. Description of load served. 2. Load data including nameplate amperes, voltage, and power rating of load

served. Units serving motor loads shall also indicate motor nameplate data including service factor, design letter, kVA code letter, power factor, efficiency, etc.

3. Overload relay settings. 4. Final circuit breaker setting. Provide 10 percent spare labels, but not less than two for each load type served by the MCC. 2.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER ASSEMBLY AND UNIT CONFIGURATION Each motor control center shall be provided with the number and type of unit devices as indicated on the Drawings. Each motor control center unit device, including main overcurrent protection units, motor starters, feeder taps, and power metering systems, shall be configured as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Each unit device shall be provided with all ancillary components specified and as indicated on the Drawings to form a complete operational unit. Motor control center elevation drawings shall be submitted for approval prior to motor control center fabrication in accordance with paragraph 16920-1.03.


The CONTRACTOR shall arrange the specified unit devices within the motor control center structure in accordance with the requirements of this specification. The final motor control center arrangement shall address all requirements for future mounting space and unit device minimum space requirements as specified herein. 1. MOTOR STARTER MOUNTING SPACE: Motor starter device units consisting of unit assembly, unit support pan and unit door assembly shall meet or exceed the following minimum requirements for vertical mounting space. a. FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING:

1) Size 1 - 12 inches 2) Size 2 – 12 inches 3) Size 3 – 18 inches 4) Size 4 – 24 inches

b. FULL VOLTAGE REVERSING: 1) Size 1 - 24 inches c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: 1) 5 HP - 24 inches 2. MAIN DEVICE MOUNTING SPACE: Main device units shall be assembled in compliance with the manufacturer’s published practices. 3. FEEDER TAP MOUNTING SPACE: Feeder tap units shall be assembled in compliance with the manufacturer’s published practices. Tandem mount feeder tap units are not permitted. 4. POWER METERING MOUNTING SPACE: Compartments for power metering systems shall be a minimum 12 inch vertical mounting space. 5. FUTURE DEVICE MOUNTING SPACE: Future device mounting space shall be provided in each motor control center. For motor control centers 4 sections wide and larger, the aggregate vertical height of the future device mounting space shall be a minimum of 72 inches. Any contiguous device mounting space less than 12 inches shall be incorporated into an adjacent device compartment and shall not be included in the calculation of aggregate future device mounting space. 2.11 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's certification and calculations that the equipment complies



with the seismic requirements of paragraph 16000-1.05 D. 2. Applicable operation and maintenance information as specified in Section

01730. 3. Dimensions and weights. 4. Installation instructions. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL The motor control centers shall be erected in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and with the details specified herein. Field wiring shall meet the requirements of Section 16120. Cables larger than No. 6 AWG which hang from their vertical connections shall be supported within 2 feet of the connection. The overload protection system shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions based on the actual full load amperes of the motor connected to the starter. The circuit breakers shall be adjusted by the CONTRACTOR to the lowest setting not causing false tripping. Each motor control center feeder and starter unit shall be provided with a completed load identification label. Application data shall be machine printed on the label. 3.02 FIELD TESTS Motor control centers shall be acceptance tested in accordance with Section 16030. 3.03 TRAINING The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory-trained instructor for the purpose of training the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the Motor Control Centers. Training shall consist of two 8-hour sessions addressing the theory of operation, MCC communications systems, testing, troubleshooting and maintenance of the Motor Control Centers, in accordance with Section 01664. Each session shall cover the same material. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999. **END OF SECTION**